You are on page 1of 616

FrameWorks Plus

Reference Guide

Version 8.0.1 August 2007 DFWP3-PP-200001E

Copyright
Copyright 1991-2007, Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license
agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by
copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available
without proper authorization.
Code parameter description for the ASD9, BS5950, LRFD1, NF83, and Tower2 codes are pulled directly from the
GRSTRUDL Users Guide, Revision N, copyright 1978, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991 by Georgia Tech Research
Corporation, Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, Georgia 30332-0355. Used with permission.
Code parameter descriptions for the AISC-ASD, and AISC-LRFD codes are pull directly form the STADD-III
Reference Manual copyright 1995 by Research Engineers, Inc. 22700 Savi Ranch, Yorba Linda, California 92687-
4608. Used with permission.
Restricted Rights Legend
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies:
This was developed at private expense and is restricted computer software submitted with restricted rights in
accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at
52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations (FAR) and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are
reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense (DoD): This is
commercial computer software as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as
specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001
Warranties and Liabilities
All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract,
and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or
amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to
applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in
this document.
The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance
with the terms of this license.
No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by
Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and
symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, INtools,
ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark
of Bentley Systems, Inc. GTSTRUDL is a registered service mark of the Georgia Tech Research Corporation,
Atlanta, Georgia, U.S.A. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.
Table of Contents
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 3
Table of Contents
Preface.................................................................................................................................5
What's New in FrameWorks Plus.................................................................................6
FrameWorks Manager ....................................................................................................11
Create Project..............................................................................................................13
Create Model ..............................................................................................................16
Create Drawing File....................................................................................................21
Create User Section Table ..........................................................................................23
Copy Model ................................................................................................................25
Delete Model ..............................................................................................................27
Compress Frozen ........................................................................................................28
Command Prompt Commands....................................................................................29
Create Project Key-in........................................................................................................ 30
Create Model Key-in......................................................................................................... 30
Create Drawing File Key-in.............................................................................................. 32
Create User Section Library Key-in ................................................................................. 33
Create Envelope File Key-in............................................................................................. 34
Create SmartPlant Review File Key-in............................................................................. 34
Compress Models Key-in ................................................................................................. 35
SDNF Import Key-in ........................................................................................................ 35
Verify Model Key-in......................................................................................................... 37
Update Clash Envelope Builder Files Key-in................................................................... 38
Upgrade Project Key-in .................................................................................................... 38
File .....................................................................................................................................39
Open Model ................................................................................................................41
FrameWorks Plus Manager ........................................................................................43
Return to Pipe Support Modeler .................................................................................43
Attach Model ..............................................................................................................44
Detach Model..............................................................................................................46
Preference Editor ........................................................................................................47
Analytic Report Preferences ............................................................................................. 49
Code Parameters Preferences............................................................................................ 50
Center of Gravity Report Preferences............................................................................... 50
Design Parameters Preferences......................................................................................... 51
Elevation Grid Preferences ............................................................................................... 51
Material Report Preferences ............................................................................................. 52
Plan Grid Preferences ....................................................................................................... 52
Solid Material Report Preferences .................................................................................... 53
View Preferences .............................................................................................................. 54
Write Analysis Input Preferences ..................................................................................... 54
Section Library ...........................................................................................................55
Change Cell File .........................................................................................................56
Interactive Section Tables (IST).................................................................................57
Table of Contents
4 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File ..............................................................................58
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format .................................................................................. 59
Member Criteria.............................................................................................................. 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File.............................................................................104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File.............................................................. 107
Write CSD File .........................................................................................................108
Read CSD File ..........................................................................................................110
Analysis ....................................................................................................................112
Write GTSTRUDL Input ................................................................................................ 112
Read GTSTRUDL Results.............................................................................................. 119
Write STAAD Input........................................................................................................ 121
Read STAAD Results ..................................................................................................... 125
LARSA........................................................................................................................... 127
RAM............................................................................................................................... 127
SAP2000......................................................................................................................... 128
Import Analytical Deck ............................................................................................129
Import ModelDraft File ............................................................................................133
Interference Checking...............................................................................................135
PML Applications.....................................................................................................137
FPL Applications......................................................................................................139
Compress FrameWorks Plus Database.....................................................................140
Verify Model ............................................................................................................142
Save FWP Settings ...................................................................................................147
Exit............................................................................................................................148
Settings............................................................................................................................149
Bell............................................................................................................................150
Confirm Select Set ....................................................................................................150
Select Filter Settings.................................................................................................151
Member Attributes....................................................................................................154
Member Orientation..................................................................................................156
Defaults Linear Members .........................................................................................159
Defaults Linear Members - End Releases....................................................................... 164
Defaults Linear Members - Fireproofing........................................................................ 164
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups.................................................................... 167
Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes................................................................... 167
Defaults Solid Members ...........................................................................................170
AutoName.................................................................................................................172
Levels........................................................................................................................174
Member Symbology .................................................................................................177
Load Symbology.......................................................................................................178
Dynamics ..................................................................................................................181
AutoSnap ..................................................................................................................182
3rd Party Software ....................................................................................................183
Custom Code Parameters................................................................................................ 184
View.................................................................................................................................189
Table of Contents
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 5
Create View..............................................................................................................191
File (Create View Dialog Box) ....................................................................................... 196
Symbology for Linear Members..................................................................................... 197
Symbology for Solid Members....................................................................................... 205
Set View....................................................................................................................208
List View ..................................................................................................................209
Drop View ................................................................................................................210
Modify View.............................................................................................................211
Modify Symbology for Linear Members........................................................................ 214
Modify Symbology for Solid Members.......................................................................... 215
Create Named Groups Symbology...........................................................................216
Modify Named Groups Symbology..........................................................................219
Drop Named Groups Symbology .............................................................................222
Linear Member Overrides.........................................................................................223
Representation - Attributes ............................................................................................. 225
Annotation - Attributes ................................................................................................... 228
Solid Member Overrides...........................................................................................231
Annotation - Attributes ................................................................................................... 233
Override Annotation.................................................................................................235
Override Double Line Widget ..................................................................................236
Freeze View..............................................................................................................237
Update Frozen...........................................................................................................242
Regenerate ................................................................................................................244
Display Frozen..........................................................................................................246
Delete Model View...................................................................................................247
Delete Frozen View..................................................................................................248
Tools ................................................................................................................................249
Main..........................................................................................................................250
Views ........................................................................................................................251
Grids .........................................................................................................................252
Place Plan Grid ............................................................................................................... 253
Place Elevation Grid ....................................................................................................... 258
Copy Grid ....................................................................................................................... 261
Edit Grid Label ............................................................................................................... 262
Delete Grid Line ............................................................................................................. 263
Delete Grid...................................................................................................................... 263
Place Linear Members ..............................................................................................264
Member Connectivity ..................................................................................................... 265
Place Beam ..................................................................................................................... 267
Place Column.................................................................................................................. 268
Place Column by Two Points.......................................................................................... 269
Place Vertical Brace........................................................................................................ 269
Place Horizontal Brace ................................................................................................... 270
Place Framing Members ................................................................................................. 271
Default Member .............................................................................................................. 272
Edit Last Placed .............................................................................................................. 273
Place Arc......................................................................................................................... 274
Table of Contents
6 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place 3D Solids.........................................................................................................276
Place Slabs ...................................................................................................................... 277
Place Wall ....................................................................................................................... 280
Place Solid Element ........................................................................................................ 283
Place Holes ..................................................................................................................... 284
Solid Cutouts................................................................................................................... 286
Modify Thickness ........................................................................................................... 291
Modify Solid Geometry .................................................................................................. 292
Modify ......................................................................................................................293
Modify Section ............................................................................................................... 295
Modify Name.................................................................................................................. 297
Modify CP....................................................................................................................... 298
Modify Rotation.............................................................................................................. 299
Modify Reflect ................................................................................................................ 300
Modify Type ................................................................................................................... 301
Modify Orientation Vector ............................................................................................. 301
Modify Fireproofing ....................................................................................................... 303
Modify Material .............................................................................................................. 306
Modify Material Grade ................................................................................................... 306
Modify Class................................................................................................................... 308
Named Groups ................................................................................................................ 308
Modify Additional Attributes ......................................................................................... 311
Manipulate ................................................................................................................314
Copy Member ................................................................................................................. 317
Move Member................................................................................................................. 319
Extend Member............................................................................................................... 320
Modify Member End....................................................................................................... 321
Rotate Member ............................................................................................................... 322
Mirror Member ............................................................................................................... 324
Modify Work Point Offset .............................................................................................. 326
Modify Offset ................................................................................................................. 330
Match TOS/BOS............................................................................................................. 331
Join Members.................................................................................................................. 332
Split Member .................................................................................................................. 332
Modify Arc ..................................................................................................................... 334
Extend Member to Intersection....................................................................................... 335
Extend Members to Intersection ..................................................................................... 337
Delete Member ............................................................................................................... 338
Analytical..................................................................................................................339
Create Load Case ............................................................................................................ 340
Create Load Combination............................................................................................... 344
Place Load....................................................................................................................... 346
Edit Load......................................................................................................................... 350
Delete Load..................................................................................................................... 354
Label Load ...................................................................................................................... 355
Modify End Releases ...................................................................................................... 355
Label End Releases......................................................................................................... 356
Modify Supports ............................................................................................................. 357
Label Supports ................................................................................................................ 358
Create Intermediate Node ............................................................................................... 358
Table of Contents
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 7
Create Member Specification ......................................................................................... 360
Design Attributes......................................................................................................362
Code Parameters ............................................................................................................. 362
Design Parameters .......................................................................................................... 391
Member Constraints........................................................................................................ 393
Offshore ....................................................................................................................397
Create Rule Based Joint .................................................................................................. 397
Create Can....................................................................................................................... 401
Modify Can Connection List .......................................................................................... 406
Place Jacket..................................................................................................................... 407
Cutbacks ...................................................................................................................412
Member Priority.............................................................................................................. 413
Compute Cutbacks.......................................................................................................... 413
User Cutbacks ................................................................................................................. 416
Mitered Cutbacks............................................................................................................ 418
SmartCut ......................................................................................................................... 419
Uncut Member ................................................................................................................ 422
Utilities ............................................................................................................................423
Linear Material Reports............................................................................................424
Linear Report Header Format ......................................................................................... 429
Linear Report Data Format ............................................................................................. 431
Linear Reports Totals Format ......................................................................................... 442
3D Solids Material Reports ......................................................................................445
3D Solid Report Header Format ..................................................................................... 448
3D Solid Report Data Format ......................................................................................... 450
3D Solid Report Totals Format....................................................................................... 456
Analytic Reports .......................................................................................................458
Analytic Reports Header Format .................................................................................... 460
Loads Report Data Format.............................................................................................. 462
Releases Report Data Format.......................................................................................... 463
Supports Report Data Format ......................................................................................... 464
Center of Gravity Reports.........................................................................................466
Center of Gravity Report Header Format ....................................................................... 469
Center of Gravity Report Data Format ........................................................................... 470
Center of Gravity Report Totals Format ......................................................................... 475
Review Element........................................................................................................477
Linear Member's Review Element Parameters ............................................................... 477
Solid Member's Review Element Parameters ................................................................. 479
Locate Element By Attributes ..................................................................................481
Locate Element By Design/Code Parameters...........................................................484
Review Log File .......................................................................................................485
Review Section Library............................................................................................486
Create User Section ..................................................................................................488
Steel Detailing ..........................................................................................................492
Place Cross Section......................................................................................................... 493
Place Section Elevation................................................................................................... 494
Place Section Plan........................................................................................................... 495
Drawing Trim Line ......................................................................................................... 496
Table of Contents
8 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Graphic Symbology ........................................................................................................ 497
Create Mapping File .................................................................................................499
Reference PDS Model ..............................................................................................501
Review PDS Clash....................................................................................................503
Review PDS Attributes.............................................................................................505
Window to Named PDS Item...................................................................................506
Area Volume Graphics .............................................................................................508
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus.............................................................511
Environment Variables .............................................................................................512
User Preference Sets.................................................................................................516
FrameWorks Plus Settings........................................................................................518
Seed Files..................................................................................................................519
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus....................................................................521
Setup Information .....................................................................................................522
Intergraph SmartPlant License Manager......................................................................... 522
Creating or Inserting a FrameWorks Plus Project .......................................................... 522
Creating a Structural Discipline Design Area................................................................. 525
Creating a Model in PD_Shell ........................................................................................ 526
Creating a Model by ASCII File..................................................................................... 530
Shifting the FrameWorks Plus Global Origin to Match PDS Design Volume ............... 533
FrameWorks Plus Categories.......................................................................................... 533
FrameWorks Environment........................................................................................535
Modeling......................................................................................................................... 536
Drawing Environment..................................................................................................... 536
Propagation ..................................................................................................................... 537
Generate ASCII File ....................................................................................................... 538
Update/Regenerate Frozen View.................................................................................... 539
Batch Cutout (PD_Shell) ................................................................................................ 540
FrameWorks Plus and SmartPlant Review...............................................................545
FrameWorks Plus and PD_Clash..............................................................................547
Creating Envelope Files.................................................................................................. 547
FrameWorks Plus and Material Data Publisher........................................................549
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D...................551
Translator Setup........................................................................................................552
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus............................................................................553
Member Criteria.............................................................................................................. 555
Exporting Models from FrameWorks Plus ..................................................................... 556
Import Structure Command ......................................................................................557
Import Structure Model................................................................................................... 560
Appendix D: Troubleshooting FrameWorks Plus ......................................................561
Section Libraries.......................................................................................................561
Solids ........................................................................................................................562
Models ......................................................................................................................563
Table of Contents
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 9
Error Messages...............................................................................................................565
Glossary ..........................................................................................................................581
Index................................................................................................................................593
Table of Contents
4 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Preface
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 5
Preface
This document is the reference guide for FrameWorks

Plus. FrameWorks Plus


provides tools for improving the efficiency of a structural engineering project and is a
three dimensional product that runs in conjunction with the MicroStation Computer-
Aided Design (CAD) package.
The FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide is an overview of the available product
features and provides information on how these features operate. This document is
intended for designers, drafters, and engineers who have an effective working
knowledge of the standard MicroStation system and can produce complex drawings.
Experience with three-dimensional modeling is useful, but not necessary.
This reference guide provides general information on all commands, as well as
information on specific parameters that control the processing and results produced
by each command. For information on a particular parameter within an individual
command, refer to that command's description. This document is organized according
to the FrameWorks Plus main menu. The chapters correspond, from left to right, with
each of the main menu's pulldown menus. Likewise, the sections within each of the
chapters correspond, from top to bottom, with each of the commands on the different
menus.
If you are a new FrameWorks Plus user, we recommend that you first read and work
through the FrameWorks Plus Tutorial or the FrameWorks Plus Metric Tutorial. The
tutorial will introduce you to the interface and many of the main FrameWorks Plus
features.
Send documentation comments or suggestions to PPMdoc@intergraph.com.
Preface
6 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
What's New in FrameWorks Plus
This release of FrameWorks Plus contains the following new features.
Version 8.0.1
The Verify Model command can now be run from a command line. See
Verify Model Key-in, page 37 for more information. (P3 PB:73896)
You can now import a steel detailing neutral file from a command line
key-in. See SDNF Import Key-in, page 35 for more information. (P2
PB:84355)
Clarified the documentation to clearly state that FrameWorks Plus does
not write packets 30, 40, or 50 to a Steel Detailing Neutral File. (P1
PB:62350)
You can now use MicroStation circles when creating arbitrary sections
and arc members. (P3 PB:50761)
Version 8.0
You can now preview the rotate member and mirror member operations to
verify the manipulation is what you want. For more information, see
Mirror Member, page 324 and Rotate Member, page 322.
Documented the FrameWorks Plus to SmartPlant 3D data translation
process. For more information, see Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks
Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D, page 551.
You can now have the software take into consideration member
fireproofing thickness and piping insulation thickness when placing solid
cutouts. For more information, see Solid Cutouts, page 286.
New arguments have been added to the FPL function aecFPL_areaCutOut
to accommodate member fireproofing and piping insulation.
Version 7.3
You can now define the location of the named group file in the config.dat
file.
A new PDS integrated command displays clash volumes in the model. For
more information, see Area Volume Graphics.
The software can now automatically compress the model database when
exiting by setting a new environment variable. You can also compress all
the models in a project using a new command line command.
You can now search attached models, in addition to the local model, when
using the Locate Element By Attributes command.
Preface
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 7
The SmartCut command can now cutback linear members to
FrameWorks Plus solid members.
A new option controls which face does not move when using the Modify
Thickness command.
The Override Annotation command now has an option to limit the
movement of annotation to be along the member line.
You can now specify a section mapping file when writing a Steel
Detailing Neutral File.
The Copy Member command has a new option to copy the member name
to the new member.
A new option turns off or on the displaying of out-of-date frozen views in
red in the Update Frozen and Regenerate commands.
Version 7.2
Several new environment variables have been added to the config.dat file.
See Environment Variables for more information.
Modifying the delta top-of-steel of a member is now a point-and-click
operation with the new Match TOS/BOS, page 331 command.
FrameWorks Plus calculates the required delta top-of-steel for a member
based on where you want the new location to be.
The new Place Jacket, page 407 command creates an offshore jacket using
the parameters that you define. You control the section size, slope, number
of piles, and many other parameters.
You can move (override) a double line widget by selecting the linear
member in the model. The new command is called Override Double Line
Widget and is available in both the View menu and the View palette.
You can move (override) member annotation by selecting the member and
the annotation in the model. The new command is called Override
Annotation and is available in both the View menu and the View palette.
A frozen view that is out-of-date with its corresponding model view now
appears in red in the Update Frozen and Regenerate commands.
The ability to read a Steel Detailing Neutral File into a model updating
and adding members as needed. Requires a separate leased product called
SDNF Import.
The SmartCut command can now automatically select support members
based on member cutback priority and a scan tolerance. You also can use a
selection set to select target members now.
The Mirror Member command now supports mirroring slabs, walls, and
generic solid members.
Preface
8 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
The cutback commands have been moved to their own Cutbacks palette.
In addition, the Compute Cutbacks command can now cutback tapered
members and members with arbitrary sections.
The Create Can, Modify Can Connection List, and Create Rule Based
Joint commands are now on the new Offshore palette.
The Modify Thickness and Modify Solid Geometry commands have
been moved from the Modify palette to the Place 3D Solids palette.
Version 7.1
FrameWorks Plus can now place rule-based joints on members. You can
define the gap as being between the member center-lines or as being
between the member hulls.
FrameWorks Plus now has a Create Can command to place intermediate
and end cans on members with pipe sections.
FrameWorks Plus now automatically sets and drops model views as
needed when you use the Update Frozen and Regenerate commands.
We have added a new SmartCut command that creates multi-plane
cutbacks for linear members. The multi-plane cutbacks automatically
update when members are modified and can be applied to any section
shape including arbitrary sections.
You can now attach and detach multiple models at the same time when
using the Attach Model and Detach Model commands.
A new environment variable called FW_USER_ESL has been added to the
config.dat file. This environment variable defines the location of your user
section libraries and corresponding cell libraries.
New member attributes are available for both linear and solid members.
The attributes can be assigned at placement or changed after placement
using the new Modify Additional Attributes command.
The Locate Element By Attributes command can now search for
member using several different criteria, including the new member
attributes.
FrameWorks Plus now has a Create Can command to place intermediate
and end cans on members with pipe sections.
The format of the Steel Detailing Neutral File has been changed to include
more linear and arc member attributes, a new Packet 22 for holes, and
support of plates and holes with arcs on the periphery.
The South African and Euro section tables have been updated.
New FPL functions are available. Refer to the FrameWorks Plus
Programmer's Guide for more information on these new FPL functions.
Preface
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 9
FrameWorks Plus 7.1 was compiled using MicroStation/J. This may affect
any custom FPL programs that you have.
FrameWorks Plus help is now HTML based.
Version 7.0
You can now optionally copy code and design parameters when you copy
a member.
The Named Groups dialog box now has a Control By command to
specify the controlling named after the members have been assigned.
The Place Plan Grid, Place Elevation Grid, and Copy Grid commands
have a new option to honor the view drawing scale.
Several new FPL functions have been added to FrameWorks Plus. In
addition, the aecFPL_areaCutOut, aecFPL_queryArc, and
aecFPL_queryMember functions have been modified. If you use any of
these three functions in custom FPL applications, you will need to edit
your application to include the new arguments then recompile your
application.
When creating model views, you can now specify a drawing scale.
FrameWorks Plus will then use the drawing scale to correctly size text for
your drawings.
The Create Member Specification command lets you specify the type of
member (truss, framing, and so forth) and have that member specification
written to the analytical input deck.
You can add additional intermediate nodes to a member in FrameWorks
Plus and have those nodes written to the analytical input deck.
FrameWorks Plus can now save load cases and load combinations to an
ASCII file. You can then load the same load cases and load combinations
to every model in your project.
You can now define work point offsets by key-in or by a rule.
The ability to map section names between FrameWorks Plus and 3rd party
applications has been added to improve communications. By mapping the
slightly different names for the exact same section in a mapping file, you
can greatly reduce the number of "section not found" errors when working
with 3rd party applications.
The grade.dat file now tracks the units of individual grades. FrameWorks
Plus converts the grade properties when needed. This provides the
freedom to use metric grades in English unit models and English grade in
metric models.
You can now graphically define a load's location on a member.
A new Self-Weight load case type is available.
Preface
10 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
The Edit Load dialog box now displays the location of loads on a member
making it easier to select which load you want to edit.
The Locate Element By Attributes command can now filter members
based on creation/modification date and time.
Version 3.2.1
You can now define fractional values for material take-off report weight
classes. FrameWorks Plus now allows you to specify up to six decimal
places in the weight class definition.
A Compress Frozen view utility has been added to FrameWorks
Manager.
Improved FrameWorks Plus envelope builder including the addition of
FrameWorks Plus fireproofing be written to the envelope file.
A new OUTA section table.
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 11
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks

Manager is similar to MicroStation Manager but is used to create


FrameWorks Plus projects, models, drawing files, and section tables. You can also
use FrameWorks Manager to copy and delete FrameWorks Plus models. You need to
create at least one project and one model before you can begin using FrameWorks
Plus.
The FrameWorks Manager automatically upgrades a model from a previous version
of FrameWorks Plus to the current version when you try to open that model. If you
are running FrameWorks Plus in conjunction with PDS

, you should use the PDS


upgrade function to upgrade projects and models. See the PDS documentation for
more information.

Utilities - The Utilities menu provides options to create projects, models, drawing
files, and section tables. You can also copy and delete FrameWorks Plus models
using these commands.
Name - Displays the name of the selected file.
Directory - Displays the current directory.
Files - Displays all files in the active directory that satisfy the file type specified.
Directories - Displays the directories available. You can change directories by
double-clicking on the directory name.
List Files of Type - Displays the text string used as search criteria to limit the files
displayed in the list. The two main filters that FrameWorks Manager uses are *.mod
for model files and *.dgn for drawing files.
FrameWorks Manager
12 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Drives - Displays all the available drives (both local and mounted network drives).
Open - Opens the model (or drawing file) displayed in the Name box. You can also
open files by double-clicking on them in Files listing box.
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 13
Create Project
The FrameWorks Manager Utilities > Create > Project command creates
FrameWorks Plus projects. A FrameWorks Plus project consists of several folders
and files. To organize and manage these files, FrameWorks Plus uses a folder
structure to store the various file types. A project can contain one or several
individual models.
FrameWorks Plus creates a separate folder for each project you define. This project
folder can be created anywhere on your computer (do not create your project in the
FrameWorks Plus' delivery folder). Beneath this project folder are several subfolders,
each containing files of a certain type, but all belonging to the same project. These
subfolders are:
\data - The data folder contains the project's config.dat file. The config.dat file
contains the project's customized environment variable settings. The config.dat file is
copied automatically from ..\fwplus\data (the product folder) when the project is
created. For more information about the environment variables in the config.dat file,
see Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus, page 511.
\drw - The drawing folder contains 3D design files used in drawing composition.
Drawings can be composed in any 3D design file, including the FrameWorks Plus
model file itself. If a separate drawing file is used, it should be stored in this
subfolder.
\esl - If special nonstandard steel or concrete sections are used on a project, they can
be created and stored in a user section library. These user section libraries are stored
in this subfolder. If you are creating arbitrary sections, the cell library file (ist.cel) is
stored here also. The ist.cel file is copied from the ..\fwplus\esl folder to this project
folder when the project is created.
\frz - When saving frozen views to a separate design file, those design files are stored
in this subfolder. This folder is also used to store files generated for the SmartPlant


Review product and to store the interference envelope files generated for the project.
\int - This is the interface subfolder where files used for interfacing FrameWorks Plus
to other structural engineering products are stored. These interface files include input
files for analysis packages such as GTSTRUDL and STAAD and the Common
Structural Database (CSD) files. Additionally, FrameWorks Plus creates map files in
this folder that are used in the analysis interface process.
\mod - All structural model design and database files for the project are in this
subfolder.
\rpt - The report subfolder is used to store all reports created for models in the
project.
FrameWorks Manager
14 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Project - Specifies the name of the project being created. Project names are limited to
14 characters and should not contain embedded spaces or other special characters
such as, but not limited to, ^&#%$. However, you can use the underscore (_)
character in project names.
Directory - Displays the current folder.
Directories - Displays the available subfolders in the current folder. All available
drives (both local and mounted network) are displayed at the bottom of the list.
Create - Creates a project in the current folder using the specified project name.
Creating a Project
From the Frameworks Manager dialog box, select the Utilities > Create > Project
command to create a new project.
1. Type a project name in the Project field.
2. Specify the folder you want the project in.
Warning
Do not create your project in the FrameWorks Plus delivery folder
(c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus by default). If you ever need to remove and
re-install FrameWorks Plus, FrameWorks Plus' removal process
deletes the entire delivery folder, including any project's you have
created there.
3. Click Create to create the project.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Frozen, page 28
Copy Model, page 25
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 15
Create Drawing File, page 21
Create Model, page 16
Create Project, page 13
Create User Section Table, page 23
Delete Model, page 27
FrameWorks Manager, page 11
FrameWorks Manager
16 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Create Model
The FrameWorks Manager Utilities > Create > Model command creates a
FrameWorks Plus model in a project. A FrameWorks Plus model contains up to 22
separate files, including a 3D design file. All FrameWorks Plus commands and
functions allow you to refer to these model files collectively by using the model name
(or the root name of the files) without the file extensions.
FrameWorks Plus keeps the model database files in the model subfolder (\mod) under
the project folder. The files are:
.arc -- contains arc member data
.ccp -- contains the custom code parameters information
.cpr -- contains steel code parameter information
.dgn -- the MicroStation design file
.dpr -- contains steel design parameter information
.drw -- contains drawing data
.fdx -- contains load case table data (index file)
.frz -- contains frozen view data
.gbd -- contains general bulk data
.lcm -- contains load combination data
.ldc -- contains load case data
.lod -- contains load data
.mem -- contains member data
.mod -- contains model data
.ngv -- contains named group's view records
.ovr -- contains linear member override data
.ovs -- contains solid member override data
.slb -- contains slab data
.urd -- contains user data
.vdx -- contains load case table data (index file)
.vus -- contains view data
.wal -- contains solids data
You cannot edit any of these files directly. Editing any of these files manually will
corrupt the model. The only exception to this is the model's MicroStation design file.
If the design file should become corrupt in some way, you can get FrameWorks Plus
to regenerate the design file. Delete the corrupted design file, and then copy the
appropriate seed design file to the model folder. Edit the copied seed design file's
properties to remove read-only access. Rename the seed design file to the model
name. The next time you open FrameWorks Plus, the database files will automatically
repopulate the design file.
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 17

Current Project - Specifies the name of the active project. The model being created
will be in this project.
Model Name - Specifies the name for the model being created. Model names can be
up to 10 characters long and should not contain embedded spaces or other special
characters such as, but not limited to, ^&#%$. However, you can use the underscore
(_) character in model names. Model names must be unique for the project (two
models in the same project cannot have the same name).
Units - Specifies the working units to use for the model (unit for specifying linear
distance).
Force Units - Specifies the force units to use for the model (unit for specifying load
force).
Model ID - Displays the model ID. Each model in a project has a unique model ID
that FrameWorks Plus assigns and tracks. You can have up to 999 models in a
project.
Standard Section Table - Specifies the main standard section table for this model.
You cannot change the standard section table after the model is created. You can
choose from:
AISC -- American Institute of Steel Construction, 9th edition
AISC63 -- American Institute of Steel Construction, 7th edition
AISC8th -- American Institute of Steel Construction, 8th edition
FrameWorks Manager
18 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
AISC_LRFD_3_1 -- American Institute of Steel Construction, Load and
Resistance Factor Design, 3rd edition, 1st printing.
AUST -- Australian section tables.
AUST04 -- These sections are taken from the BHP Hot Rolled &
Structural Steel Products Catalog 2004 and the AISC Tables (Australian
Institute of Steel Construction).
AUST91 -- These sections are taken from BHP Hot Rolled & Structural
Steel Products Catalog 1991 and the AISC Tables (Australian Institute of
Steel Construction).
AUST94 -- These sections are taken from the BHP Hot Rolled &
Structural Steel Products Catalog 1994 and the AISC Tables (Australian
Institute of Steel Construction).
BCSA -- These sections are taken from:
BS4: Structural steel sections: Part 1:1980 Specification for hot rolled sections.
Including Amendments 1 (Sept 1981), 2(May 1982) and 3(Feb 1986)
Structural hollow sections: BS4848: Hot rolled structural steel sections Part 2:
1975 Hollow sections
Equal and unequal angles: BS4848: Hot rolled structural steel sections Part 4:
1972 Equal and unequal angles Including amendments 1(Feb 1974), 2(Oct 1982)
and 3(Feb 86)
BRAZIL -- Brazilian section tables
CHINA -- Chinese section tables
CISC_7_2 -- Canadian Institute of Steel Construction, Handbook of Steel
Construction, Seventh Edition - Second Revised Printing (July 2000)
CISC89 -- Canadian Institute of Steel Construction, 1989
CISC84 -- Canadian Institute of Steel Construction, 1984
EURO -- European section tables
INDIAN -- These sections are taken from the Indian steel sections
handbook published by the Bureau of Indian Standards. Handbook for
Structural Engineers - Indian Steel Sections - SP 6(1)
JAPAN -- Japanese section tables.
MAISC -- American Institute of Steel Construction, metric tables
OTUA -- These sections are taken from the 1989 Office Technique pour
l'utilisation de l'Acier document. Pipe section's dimensions and weights
are based on ANSI B 36.10-1979. The pipe section names in this table are
of the format: 16"X0.375.
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 19
OTUA2 -- These sections are taken from the 1989 Office Technique pour
l'utilisation de l'Acier document. Pipe section's dimensions and weights
are based on ANSI B 36.10-1979. The pipe section names in this table are
of the format: PIP16X0.375.
RUSSIAN -- Russian hot-rolled I, C, and L sections from: GOST 8239-89,
GOST 26020-83; GOST 8240-89; GOST 8509-93; and GOST 8510-86.
Some I-sections and channels from: GOST 19425-74, TU 14-2-205-76
and TU 14-2-204-76. Rectangular tube from GOST 25577-83. Pipes from
GOST 10704-91, GOST 20295-85, GOST 3262-75, GOST 550-75, GOST
8696-74, GOST 8732-74, GOST 8734-74, GOST 9940-81, and GOST
9941-81. Round steel bars from GOST 2590-88.
SAISC -- South African section tables
SAISC_Blue7th -- South African section tables
User Section Table - Specifies a user section table for this model. All user section
tables, if any, in the project's \esl folder display for selection. You can select another
user section table after the model is created if needed.
Third Party Software - Specifies which third party analysis/design software you
plan to use for the model. You can change the selection after the model is created if
needed.
Design Code - Specifies the design code you plan to use for the model. You can
change the selection after the model is created if needed.
Create - Creates the model using the defined parameters without exiting the dialog
box.
OK - Creates the model using the defined parameters then exits the dialog box.
Creating a Model
In the FrameWorks Manager dialog box, change directories to the project you want to
create the model in, and then select the Utilities > Create > Model command.
1. Type a model name, up to ten characters.
2. Specify the units for the length and force values.
Note
All models in the same project must use identical Master Units (all
feet, all millimeters, and so forth).
3. Select the name of the standard section table library from which you will select
sections for your model.
Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not convert section library units to match
model units. FrameWorks Plus assumes that model units and section
FrameWorks Manager
20 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
library units are compatible (both are imperial or both are metric). If
you attach a metric section library to model that uses imperial units,
FrameWorks Plus will read the library sections as inches, not
millimeters. Similarly, an imperial section library attached to a metric
model will be read as millimeters, not inches.
4. Select the analysis package and the design code you will be using with this model.
5. Click Create to create the defined model.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Frozen, page 28
Copy Model, page 25
Create Drawing File, page 21
Create Model, page 16
Create Project, page 13
Create User Section Table, page 23
Delete Model, page 27
FrameWorks Manager, page 11
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 21
Create Drawing File
The FrameWorks Manager Utilities > Create > Drawing command creates a
drawing file in the current project. The active FrameWorks Manager folder must be
either the project folder or the project's \drw subfolder before FrameWorks Plus will
allow you to create a drawing file. FrameWorks Plus drawings can be created in any
3D MicroStation file. However, for drawing management purposes, we recommend
that you create or compose your construction drawings in a separate design file
created specifically for the drawings of a particular project: the drawing file.
Drawing files are kept in the project's drawing (\drw) subfolder.

Current Project - Displays the name of the current project. The drawing file being
created belongs to this project.
Drawing Name - Specifies a name for the drawing file being created. Drawing file
names are limited to 20 characters and should not contain embedded spaces or other
special characters such as, but not limited to, ^&#%$. However, you can use the
underscore (_) character in drawing names.
Units - Specifies the working units for the drawing file. The drawing file should use
the same unit type (imperial or metric) as the models in the project.
Create - Creates a drawing file in the current project without exiting the dialog box.
OK - Creates a drawing file in the current project then exits the dialog box.
Creating a Drawing File
1. Select the Utilities > Create > Drawing command.
2. Type the name of the drawing file you want to create, and specify the units. The
master units specified here should be the same as those used for model databases
in this project.
3. Click Create to create the drawing file.
FrameWorks Manager
22 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Note
When you create a drawing file, your current folder must be a valid project
folder or a valid \drw subfolder.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Frozen, page 28
Copy Model, page 25
Create Drawing File, page 21
Create Model, page 16
Create Project, page 13
Create User Section Table, page 23
Delete Model, page 27
FrameWorks Manager, page 11
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 23
Create User Section Table
The FrameWorks Manager Utilities > Create > Section Table command creates user
section tables. If you plan to use nonstandard sections in the structural model, you
should create a user section library file to store these sections. If you plan to use only
standard sections from one of the delivered standard section libraries, you do not need
to create a user section library (although you can create a user section library at any
time if you should later change your mind).
User section library files are stored in the project's \esl subfolder, for example:
c:\struct\project\esl, by default. However, you can store the user section libraries
anywhere and use the FW_USER_ESL environment variable to define the location.
For more information, see Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus, page 511.
Note
The folder path and file name for the user section library is limited to 119
characters.

Current Project - Displays the name of the current project. The section table being
created will belong to this project.
Section Table Name - Specifies a name for the section table being created. Section
table names are limited to 15 characters.
Units - Specifies the working units for the section table. The section table should use
the same unit type (imperial or metric) as the models in the project.
Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not convert section library units to match model
units. FrameWorks Plus assumes that model units and section library units
are compatible (both are imperial or both are metric). If you attach a
metric section library to model that uses imperial units, FrameWorks Plus
reads the library sections as inches, not millimeters. Similarly, an imperial
section library attached to a metric model will be read as millimeters, not
inches.
Create - Creates a section table in the current project.
FrameWorks Manager
24 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
OK - Creates a section table in the current project, and then exits the dialog box.
Creating a User Section Table
1. Select the Utilities > Create > Section Table command from the menu bar.
2. Type a table name.
3. Select the units for the section library.
4. Click Create to create the section library.
Note
When you create a section table, your current folder must be a valid
project folder or a valid \esl subfolder.
FrameWorks Plus creates an empty section library in the project's \esl subfolder. This
library can be attached to a model database using the Section Library command. The
Create User Section command is used to create sections in this library. For more
information, see Section Library, page 55 and Create User Section, page 488.
Related Topics
Change Cell File, page 56
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Frozen, page 28
Copy Model, page 25
Create Drawing File, page 21
Create Model, page 16
Create Project, page 13
Create User Section Table, page 23
Create User Section, page 488
Delete Model, page 27
FrameWorks Manager, page 11
Interactive Section Tables (IST), page 57
Review Section Library, page 486
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Section Library, page 55
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 25
Copy Model
The FrameWorks Manager Utilities > Copy > Model command copies a model to
another model name in the same project or from one FrameWorks Plus project to
another project. You can use this command to create models from a seed model you
have created.
FrameWorks Plus uses the following rules when copying a model.
The From and To models cannot have the same name if you are copying
the model within the same FrameWorks Plus project.
If the To model exists, you must confirm that you want to overwrite the
existing model. When you overwrite the existing model, the existing
model's Model ID is used for the newly copied model's Model ID. You
cannot overwrite an existing model that is open in FrameWorks Plus or is
actively attached to an open model. If the To model name does not exist,
FrameWorks Plus copies the model and assigns a new unique Model ID. If
you use Model ID or Model Name to AutoName your FrameWorks Plus
members, FrameWorks Plus renames the members with the new Model ID
or Model Name.
You can copy models only within or to another FrameWorks Plus project's
\mod folder. You cannot copy a model to a "generic" folder.
If the model has a user section library attached, you need to copy the user
section library to the new project's \esl folder.
FrameWorks Plus removes all the From model's attached models and
frozen file associations from the To model.
If you copy a model to another project, FrameWorks Plus removes all
Named Group information from the To model's members. FrameWorks
Plus also removes any Named Group symbology definitions and removes
Named Groups from default member attributes.

From - Specifies the model you want to copy.
To - Specifies the new location and name for the From model.
FrameWorks Manager
26 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
OK - Copies the specified model.
Cancel - Exits the command without copying the model.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Frozen, page 28
Copy Model, page 25
Create Drawing File, page 21
Create Model, page 16
Create Project, page 13
Create User Section Table, page 23
Delete Model, page 27
FrameWorks Manager, page 11
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 27
Delete Model
The FrameWorks Manager Utilities > Delete > Model command deletes the specified
model from a project. You cannot delete a model that is open in FrameWorks Plus or
is attached to an open model.
Warning
You cannot recover a model that has been deleted.

Delete - Type in the path to and the name of the model to delete. Make sure you
include the .mod extension.
Browse - Activates a dialog box that you can use to specify the model to delete.
OK - Deletes the specified model.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without deleting the model.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Frozen, page 28
Copy Model, page 25
Create Drawing File, page 21
Create Model, page 16
Create Project, page 13
Create User Section Table, page 23
Delete Model, page 27
FrameWorks Manager, page 11
FrameWorks Manager
28 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Compress Frozen
The FrameWorks Manager Utilities > Compress Frozen command automatically
opens all MicroStation design files in the \frz subfolder, runs the MicroStation
Compress Design File command on the file, and then closes the design file.

Freeze Files - Lists all MicroStation design files in the project's \frz subfolder that
will be compressed. This list is display-only information.
Browse - Activates a dialog box that you can use to specify the frz subfolder to
compress.
OK - Compresses all design files displayed in the list.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without compressing the design files.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Frozen, page 28
Copy Model, page 25
Create Drawing File, page 21
Create Model, page 16
Create Project, page 13
Create User Section Table, page 23
Delete Frozen View, page 248
Delete Model, page 27
Display Frozen, page 246
FrameWorks Manager, page 11
Freeze View, page 237
Regenerate, page 244
Update Frozen, page 242
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 29
Command Prompt Commands
FrameWorks Plus supports several command prompt key-in commands for creating
projects, models, drawing files, section libraries, SmartPlant

Review files, and


envelope file generation.
These command prompt commands should be run in a Command Prompt window
(commonly referred to as a DOS prompt.)
Notes
You must set the FW_PRODUCT environment variable before you can
create models using the command line key-in. For more information, see
Environment Variables, page 512.
You must set the MS system environment variable to the path where you
install MicroStation before you can use command prompt commands on
the Windows 2000 operating system. For example,
MS=C:\Bentley\Program\MicroStation.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Models Key-in, page 35
Create Drawing File Key-in, page 32
Create Envelope File Key-in, page 34
Create Model Key-in, page 30
Create Project Key-in, page 30
Create SmartPlant Review File Key-in, page 34
Create User Section Library Key-in, page 33
SDNF Import Key-in, page 35
Update Clash Envelope Builder Files Key-in, page 38
Upgrade Project Key-in, page 38
Verify Model Key-in, page 37
FrameWorks Manager
30 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Create Project Key-in
1. Go to the directory under which you want to create the project (for example
c:\struct). The project can be created under the FrameWorks Plus product
directory (..\fwplus). However, we advise against this as the files may be deleted
if FrameWorks Plus is reinstalled later.
2. Type directory\fwplus\bin\creproj projname, where projname is the name of the
project to create (alphanumeric, up to 14 characters long, no embedded blanks)
and directory is the directory where FrameWorks Plus is located.
For example, if FrameWorks Plus is installed in the c:\win32app\ingr directory
and you want to create a project called project1, you would key in
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus\bin\creproj project1.
Create Model Key-in
Note
You must set the FW_PRODUCT environment variable before you can
create models using the command line key-in.
1. Change directories to the model subdirectory for the project (..\projname\mod).
2. Type directory\fwplus\bin\cremod where directory is the directory where
FrameWorks Plus resides on your hard drive. For example, if FrameWorks Plus is
installed on c:\win32app\ingr you would key-in
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus\bin\cremod.
3. Enter Structural Model Name:
Type the name for the model. The name can be any valid alphanumeric name, up
to 10 characters, but must be unique for this project.
4. Enter Units of Length (Master Units):
Specify length units to use for the model by keying in the appropriate unit code
(for example, F for feet).
Note
All models within a single project must use identical Master Units.
5. Enter Units of Force:
Specify the force units to use for the model by keying in the appropriate unit code
(for example, N for Newtons).
6. Enter Standard Engineering Section Library Name:
Key in the name of the standard section library for your model. The following
section libraries are available: aisc, aisc_lrfd_3_1, aisc8th, aisc63, aust, aust91,
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 31
aust94, bcsa, brazil, china, cisc, cisc89, cisc_7_2, euro, indian, japan, maisc, otua,
otua2, russian, saisc, and saisc_blue7th.
Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not convert section library units to match
model units. FrameWorks Plus assumes that model units and section
library units are compatible (both are imperial or both are metric). If
you attach a metric section library to model that uses imperial units,
FrameWorks Plus will read the library sections as inches, not
millimeters. Similarly, an imperial section library attached to a metric
model will be read as millimeters, not inches.
7. Enter User Section Library Name:
If a user standard section library is to be used, key in the name. If you are not
going to use a user standard section library, press RETURN.
8. Select a third party software:
Select which third party software to use as default.
9. Select a design code:
Select which design code to use as default.
You can also create model using a single command line statement. The syntax is:
cremod modelname mu force_units section_library user_section_library
3rd_party_software design_code
Where:
modelname is the name of the model you want to create.
mu is the master unit you want to use for the model. You must key in
either F for feet, I for inches, M for meters, or MM for millimeters.
force units is the unit of force for loads. You must key in either KIPS kilo
pound, LBS for pounds, kN for kiloNewtons, or N for Newtons.
section library is the standard section library. You must key in one of the
following: aisc, aisc_lrfd_3_1, aisc8th, aisc63, aust, aust91, aust94, bcsa,
brazil, china, cisc, cisc89, cisc_7_2, euro, indian, japan, maisc, otua,
otua2, russian, saisc, or saisc_blue7th
user section library is the name of the user section library. Key in none if
you do not want to assign a user section library at creation.
3rd party software is the name of the analysis and design software you
will be using on the model. You can change this after the model is created
if needed. Key in either STAAD or GTSTRUDL
design code is the design code you will be using. You can change this
after the model is created if needed.
FrameWorks Manager
32 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
For GTSTRUDL, the design codes are: ASD9, BS5950, LRFD1, NF83, or
TOWER2
For STAAD, the design codes are: AISC-ASD or AISC-LRFD
Create Drawing File Key-in
1. Change directories to the drawing subdirectory for the project you are working on
..\projname\drw).
2. Type directory\fwplus\bin\credraw where directory is the directory where
FrameWorks Plus resides on your system.
3. Enter Drawing Name:
Type the name of the drawing file. The name can be alphanumeric and up to 20
characters long, but should be unique for this project to avoid overwriting existing
drawings.
4. Enter Units of Length (Master Units):
Specify the units for the drawing by keying in the appropriate unit code. This
specifies the length Master Units in the drawing design file.
Note
The master units specified here should be the same as those used for
model databases in this project.
FrameWorks Plus creates an empty 3D design file from the drawing seed files. This
file is then ready for use with the Drawing Composition utility.
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 33
Create User Section Library Key-in
1. Change directories to the project's \esl subdirectory.
2. Type directory\fwplus\bin\creist where directory is the directory where
FrameWorks Plus is installed.
3. Enter Section Library Name:
Type a name for your user section library, up to 15 characters with no embedded
blanks or extension.
4. Enter Units of Length (for Section Properties)
Select the units to be used for specification of the section geometry. The units
chosen need not be the same as the model file Master Units.
Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not convert section library units to match
model units. FrameWorks Plus assumes that model units and section
library units are compatible (both are imperial or both are metric). If
you attach a metric section library to model that uses imperial units,
FrameWorks Plus will read the library sections as inches, not
millimeters. Similarly, an imperial section library attached to a metric
model will be read as millimeters, not inches.
FrameWorks Plus creates an empty section library in the project's \esl subdirectory.
This library can be attached to a model database using the Section Library command.
The Create User Section command is used to create sections in this library. For more
information, see Section Library, page 55 and Create User Section, page 488. You
can also use Interactive Section Tables (IST) to create sections and section libraries.
FrameWorks Manager
34 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Create Envelope File Key-in
You can create envelope files for interference checking using a command line key-in.
The command syntax is:
prod_dir\bin\fwenvel proj_dir\mod\modelfile.dgn
proj_dir\frz\envfile.env
where prod_dir is the directory where FrameWorks Plus is loaded. For example:
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus.
proj_dir is the directory that contains the FrameWorks Plus project. For example:
c:\struct\project.
If the envfile.env file exists, FrameWorks Plus overwrites the existing file with the
newly created file.
When creating envelope files, be careful not to set the stroking tolerance so low as to
cause circular holes and solids to have more than 95 vertices. PDS does not support
more than 95 vertices when creating envelopes.
Create SmartPlant Review File Key-in
You can create 3D isometric frozen views (capable of being read by SmartPlant
Review) using a command line key-in. If you have used Intergraph's PDS products,
this is similar to Batch Propagate. The command syntax is:
prod_dir\bin\fwprpgat proj_dir\mod\modelfile.dgn
proj_dir\frz\freezefile.prp -ALL -UG -LABEL
where prod_dir is the directory where FrameWorks Plus is loaded. For example:
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus.
proj_dir is the directory that contains the FrameWorks Plus project. For example:
c:\struct\project.
The -ALL switch causes attached reference files be included.
The -UG switch causes user graphics be included.
The -LABEL switch creates the .dri and .drv files.
Note
In order for this batch command to work correctly, the first 3D view you
create in your model needs to be a 3D Isometric view with Surface
representation. If no 3D isometric view exists in the model, the utility
creates a temporary view using the default isometric settings.
If the prp file that this command line key-in creates is deleted, the next time you run
this command line command you will receive an error in your system's temp folder
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 35
indicating that the frozen view record had to be deleted. Simply run this command
line again after receiving the error to re-create the prp file.
The new binary files can only be generated using PDS batch propagation.
Compress Models Key-in
You can compress all the model databases in a project by using a single command
line statement. This command line utility compresses all the files in the model
database. Use the File > Compress Database command if you want to compress only
certain files in the model database. The syntax for this utility is:
FWbatchCompress path_to_proj [log_file]
Where:
path_to_proj is the folder path to the FrameWorks Plus project. Examples
of the correct syntax include: c:\myproj\, c:\myproj\mod, and
c:\myproj\mod\.
log_file is the path to and the filename for the log file. If you do not
specify a log_file path and name, the software creates a log file called
batchCompress.log in the main project folder. Examples of the correct
syntax include: c:\temp\CompressLog.log.
Syntax Example:
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus\bin\FWbatchCompress c:\users\myproj\
c:\temp\FWbatchCompress.log
SDNF Import Key-in
The SDNF Import command line reads a formatted ASCII file to add and update
members in FrameWorks Plus. This command reads: Packet 00 - Title Packet, Packet
10 - Linear Member Packet, Packet 20 - Plate Element Packet, Packet 22 - Hole
Element Packet, and Packet 60 - Arc Member Packet. All other packets in the Steel
Detailing Neutral File (SDNF) are ignored.
This command uses a configuration file, called sdnfin.ini, to define settings and other
default information. For more information about the configuration file, see Steel
Detailing Neutral File Configuration File.
This command can only be run from a command line prompt, it cannot be run from
PD Shell. No PDS or FWP license seat is taken during processing.
FrameWorks Manager
36 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Caution
As with all operations that affect the model database, do not read a steel
detailing neutral file into your model until you have a current backup of
the model.
Notes
You must lease and install SDNF Import from Intergraph Process, Power
& Marine to activate this command.
Cutbacks are not read from the SDNF. You need to run a cutback
command in FrameWorks Plus to place cutbacks on members read in from
a SDNF.
The member Fabricator ID is not displayable inside FrameWorks Plus but
is stored in the model. The Fabricator ID will be written to any future
SDNFs that you create from the FrameWorks Plus model.
Plates and holes are placed using the defined vertices. The thickness, face,
and offset fields in the SDNF have no affect on plate or hole placement.
No names are applied to members read from a SDNF into a blank model.
Use Modify Name, page 297 to assign names to the new members.
When writing members with setback as percentage fireproofing to a Steel
Detailing Neutral File (SDNF), the software writes the equivalent setback
value to the SDNF instead of the percentage value. If the same member is
read back into the model from a SDNF, the software automatically
switches the fireproofing for the member from setback as percentage to
setback value. This can cause the member's fireproofing to appear to be
edited when for all practical purposes the member has not changed.
The command syntax to read a steel detailing neutral file is:
prod_dir\bin\SDNFImport.exe \\server\share\project\mod\model.dgn
c:\temp\sdnfin.ini
where:
prod_dir is where you installed FrameWorks Plus. For example:
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus
\\server\share\project\mod\model.dgn is the complete UNC path to project's mod
subfolder including the name of the model.dgn file. You can also enter a mounted
drive path, for example: e:\project\mod\model.dgn.
c:\temp\sdnfin.ini is the path to and file name of the SDNF configuration file. You
can also use a UNC path if needed.
Examples:
c:\ingr\fwplus\bin\SDNFImport.exe
\\pdsserver\FWPProjects\ProjXYZ\mod\PipeRack100.dgn
\\pdsserver\FWPProjects\sdnfin.ini
FrameWorks Manager
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 37
Verify Model Key-in
You can verify all the models, or an individual model, in a project using a command
line key-in. The command line verify model program verifies the validity of each
model before processing that model. Possible invalid models include models from
older software versions or corrupted models where a database file is missing. The
command line verify model will not process invalid models. Error messages are
written to the log file. The log file is written to the user TEMP environment variable
folder and is named FWBatchVerify.log. The default verify model dialog box options
are used. For more information about the default options, see Verify Model, page 142.
This command can only be run from a command line prompt, it cannot be run from
PD Shell. No PDS or FWP license seat is taken during processing.
The command syntax to check all the models in a project is:
prod_dir\bin\FWbatchVerify.exe \\server\share\project\mod
The command syntax to check an individual model in a project is:
prod_dir\bin\FWbatchVerify.exe \\server\share\project\mod\model.dgn
where:
prod_dir is where you installed FrameWorks Plus. For example:
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus
\\server\share\project\mod is the complete UNC path to project's mod subfolder. You
can also enter a mounted drive path, for example: e:\project\mod.
Examples:
c:\ingr\fwplus\bin\fwbatchVerify.exe
\\pdsserver\FWPProjects\ProjXYZ\mod
c:\ingr\fwplus\bin\fwbatchVerify.exe
\\pdsserver\FWPProjects\ProjXYZ\mod\PipeRack100.dgn
FrameWorks Manager
38 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Update Clash Envelope Builder Files Key-in
The PD_Clash Envelope Builder uses the same executables delivered with
FrameWorks Plus. If you install a newer version of FrameWorks Plus, more than
likely there have been fixes made to the envelope builder executables. You need to
update executables in the PD_Clash bin directory with the files delivered with
FrameWorks Plus. This will ensure that you get the same results when creating
envelope files from within FrameWorks Plus as from within PD_Shell. The command
syntax is:
prod_dir\bin\clashupd.bat path_to_clash_bin
where prod_dir is where you installed FrameWorks Plus and path_to_clash_bin is
where you installed PD_Clash.
For example
c:\ingr\fwplus\bin\clashupd.bat c:\ingr\clash\bin
Upgrade Project Key-in
You can upgrade a project from the previous version to the current version using a
command line key-in. The command syntax is:
prod_dir\bin\fwprjupdt.exe \\server\share\project\mod
\\server\share\update.log
where:
prod_dir is where you installed FrameWorks Plus. For example:
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus
\\server\share\project\mod is the complete UNC path to project's mod subfolder. You
can also enter a mounted drive path, for example: e:\project\mod.
\\server\share\update.log is the location and name of the upgrade log file. You can
also enter a drive path, for example: c:\temp\FWPupdate.log.
For example
c:\ingr\fwplus\bin\fwprjupdt.exe \\pdsserver\FWPProjects\ProjXYZ\mod
c:\temp\FWPupdate.log
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 39
File
The File commands provide access to other FrameWorks Plus models, the section
library files, and the analysis and design interfaces.

File Commands
Open Model, page 41
FrameWorks Plus Manager, page 43
Return to Pipe Support Modeler, page 43
Attach Model, page 44
Detach Model, page 46
Preference Editor, page 47
Section Library, page 55
Change Cell File, page 56
Interactive Section Tables (IST), page 57
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Write CSD File, page 108
Read CSD File, page 110
Write STAAD Input, page 121
File
40 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Import ModelDraft File, page 133
Interference Checking, page 135
PML Applications, page 137
FPL Applications, page 139
Compress FrameWorks Plus Database, page 140
Verify Model, page 142
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Exit, page 148
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 41
Open Model
The File > Open Model command lets you change from one FrameWorks Plus
model to another without exiting MicroStation or FrameWorks Plus. This allows you
to work on one project model and then quickly change to another model in the same
or different project.
Notes
This command does not convert model databases from previous versions
of FrameWorks Plus to the current database format. You must open the
model using FrameWorks Manager to convert the database format.
This command is not available if you activate FrameWorks Plus from
PD_Shell.

Files - Specifies the model to open. Either type a model name or select the model
name from the list box. The list box displays the files in the active directory that
match the List Files of Type setting. Single clicking on any file name selects that file.
Double-clicking selects and accepts the file for opening.
Directories - Identifies the directory where the models listed in the Files list box are
located. The default directory is the model directory for the current project. You can
change directories by double-clicking one of the listed directories and by using the
Drives pulldown.
List Files of Type - Limits the files displayed in the Files list box. The default filter is
*.mod, which lists all files with an extension of .mod.
Drives - Displays all available drives (both local and network) for your computer.
File
42 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
OK - Opens the selected model.
Cancel - Dismisses the dialog box without opening the selected model.
Related Topics
Attach Model, page 44
Compress FrameWorks Plus Database, page 140
Detach Model, page 46
Open Model, page 41
Verify Model, page 142
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 43
FrameWorks Plus Manager
The File > FrameWorks Manager command activates the main FrameWorks
Manager dialog box. Use this command to create new projects, models, drawing files,
or section libraries without having to exit FrameWorks Plus. FrameWorks Manager
converts model databases from previous versions of FrameWorks Plus to the current
database format. For more information, see FrameWorks Manager, page 11.
Note
This command is not available if you activate FrameWorks Plus from
PD_Shell.
Related Topics
FrameWorks Manager, page 11
FrameWorks Plus Manager, page 43
Return to Pipe Support Modeler
The File > Return to Pipe Support Modeler command activates the Pipe Support
Modeler program from within FrameWorks Plus. You must have started FrameWorks
Plus from within Pipe Support Modeler to use this command.
File
44 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Attach Model
The File > Attach Model command attaches, as read-only, model data from another
model in the current project. This command is an intelligent extension of
MicroStation's reference file capabilities. However, not only are the graphics from the
attached model partition visible, but also you can access the database information
from elements in the attached model.
When a model is attached, FrameWorks Plus attaches the selected model's design file
as a reference file and reads in the non-graphical database for the model. The attached
model's members are displayed in any active model views whose range includes the
attached members. You can then perform any read-only operation on the attached
model members as if they were in the active, or local, model. For example, members
from an attached model can be reviewed, included in material reports and drawing
(frozen) views, and even copied into the active model. Even loads from attached
models can be reviewed using the Edit Load command. However, FrameWorks Plus
prevents you from performing any operation that would modify the attached model,
such as a move, delete, and so forth.
You can attach any number of models to the current model and detach one or all of
these at any time using the Detach Model command.
FrameWorks Plus does not allow you to attach:
a model to itself.
a model from a different project.
a model from a previous FrameWorks Plus
version that has not been converted to the
current version's database format.
Note
You should only attach models that share the
same model units (for example, Master Units
= Feet), or undesirable results will occur.
The active model and the attached models
must have the same 3rd Party Software and
Design Code if you are planning to write
input decks.
Directory - Identifies the directory where the listed models are located.
Attach - Attaches the selected models. You can attach more than one model at a time
if needed.
Cancel - Dismisses the dialog box without attaching the selected models.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 45
Related Topics
Attach Model, page 44
Compress FrameWorks Plus Database, page 140
Detach Model, page 46
Open Model, page 41
Verify Model, page 142
File
46 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Detach Model
The File > Detach Model command drops an attached model partition. FrameWorks
Plus unloads the detached partition database information and removes all affected
members from the active model views. In addition, the reference file for the model
design file is detached.
The Detach Model dialog box lists the
names and model ID numbers of all attached
models that you can detach. To detach a
model partition, select the model from the
list, and then click Detach. You can then
select more than one model at a time to
detach.
If an attached model becomes unavailable,
the unavailable model appears in red with the
notation "File Not Found". FrameWorks does
not automatically detach the unavailable
model. If the missing model files become
available, FrameWorks Plus will automatically display that model the next time the
active model is opened.
Warning
Detaching a model that contains members to which you have applied
overrides can cause unpredictable results. We recommend that you either
not detach models that have members with overrides or that you remove
the overrides before detaching the model.
If you absolutely must detach a model with member overrides, attach the
models in the same order. For example, you have three models attached:
Model A, Model B, and Model C. You apply overrides to members in
Model B then detach all the models. You must attach Model A, and then
attach Model B.
Related Topics
Attach Model, page 44
Compress FrameWorks Plus Database, page 140
Detach Model, page 46
Open Model, page 41
Verify Model, page 142
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 47
Preference Editor
The Preference Editor command defines dialog box preferences in a central
location. Using this command, you can create your own preference files, or edit the
two delivered preference files to meet your company's needs.
The delivered preference files are ..\fwplus\data\fw.rsc, which is used for models
created using Imperial units and ..\fwplus\data\fwm.rsc, which is used for models
created using metric units.

File - Displays the name of the resource file you want to edit. You can select an
existing resource file by using the Select button. You can create a new resource file
by using the Create button.
Note
Resource file names are limited to 16 characters in length.
Name - Displays the name of the preference.
Type - Displays the type of preference. There are six preference types: View,
Material Report, Analytic Report, Plan Grid, Elevation Grid, and Material Report
(Solid).
New - Activates the Create Preference dialog box, which is used to create new
preferences in the active resource file.
File
48 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Edit - Depending on which type of preference you have selected in the list, the edit
button activates one of these ten dialog boxes:
View - Activates the View Preferences dialog box. For more information,
see View Preferences, page 54.
Material Report - Activates the Material Report Preferences dialog box.
For more information, see Material Report Preferences, page 52.
Analytic Report - Activates the Analytic Report Preferences dialog box.
For more information, see Analytic Report Preferences, page 49.
Plan Grid - Activates the Plan Grid Preferences dialog box. For more
information, see Plan Grid Preferences, page 52.
Elevation Grid - Activates the Elevation Grid Preferences dialog box. For
more information, see Elevation Grid Preferences, page 51.
Material Report (Solid) - Activates the Material Report Preferences dialog
box for solids. For more information, see Solid Material Report
Preferences, page 53.
Design Parameters - Activates the GTSTRUDL Design Preferences dialog
box. For more information, see Design Parameters Preferences, page 51.
Code Parameters - Activates the Code Parameters dialog box. For more
information, see Code Parameters Preferences, page 50.
Write Input Deck - Activates the Write Analysis Input dialog box. For
more information, see Write Analysis Input Preferences, page 54.
Material Report (COG) - Activates the Material Report Preferences dialog
box for center of gravity reports. For more information, see Material
Report Preferences, page 52.
Delete - Removes the selected (highlighted) preference from the active resource file.
Once you delete a preference, you cannot recover it.
Exit - Closes the FrameWorks Plus Preference Editor dialog box and exits the
command.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 49
Analytic Report Preferences
The Analytic Report Preferences dialog box defines and edits dialog box
preferences for the analytic reports dialog boxes.

General - Activates the general analytic report dialog box. Define the preferences
that you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For
more information on the dialog box fields, see Analytic Reports, page 458.
Header Format - Activates the analytic report header dialog box. Define the
preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Analytic Reports Header
Format, page 460.
Loads Data Format - Activates the analytical loads data format dialog box. Define
the preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking
Save As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Loads Report Data
Format, page 462.
Releases Data Format - Activates the analytical releases data format dialog box.
Define the preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by
clicking Save As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Releases Report
Data Format, page 463.
Supports Data Format - Activates the analytical supports data format dialog box.
Define the preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by
clicking Save As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Supports Report
Data Format, page 464.
File
50 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Code Parameters Preferences
The Code Parameters dialog box defines and edits dialog box preferences for the all
supported code parameters. Define the preferences you want, and click Save. You can
copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more information on the dialog box
fields, refer to the code for which you are defining preferences for more information.
Supported Codes
AISC-ASD (STAAD), page 363
AISC-LRFD (STAAD), page 367
ASD9 (GTSTRUDL), page 370
BS5950 (GTSTRUDL), page 374
NF83 (GTSTRUDL), page 383
Tower2 (GTSTRUDL), page 387
LRFD1 (GTSTRUDL), page 379
Center of Gravity Report Preferences
The Material Report Preferences dialog box defines and edits dialog box
preferences for the center of gravity reports dialog boxes.

General - Activates the general parameters dialog box. Define the preferences you
want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see Center of Gravity Reports, page 466.
Header Format - Activates the report header format dialog box. Define the
preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Center of Gravity Report
Header Format, page 469.
Data Format - Activates the report data format dialog box. Define the preferences
you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see Center of Gravity Report Data Format, page
470.
Totals Format - Activates the totals format dialog box. Define the preferences you
want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see Center of Gravity Report Totals Format,
page 475.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 51
Design Parameters Preferences
The Design Parameters dialog box defines and edits dialog box preferences for
GTSTRUDL Design Parameters. Define the preferences you want, and click Save.
You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more information on the dialog
box fields, see Design Parameters, page 391.
Elevation Grid Preferences
The Elevation Grid Preferences dialog box defines and edits dialog box preferences
for the plan grid dialog boxes.

Placement Parameters - Activates the main place elevation grid dialog box. Define
the preference you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking
Save As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Place Elevation Grid,
page 258.
Line Symbology - Activates the grid line symbology dialog box. Define the
preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Grid Line Symbology, page
257.
Label Symbology - Activates the grid label symbology dialog box. Define the
preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Grid Label Symbology, page
256.
File
52 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Material Report Preferences
The Material Report Preferences dialog box defines and edits dialog box
preferences for the linear member material reports dialog boxes.

General - Activates the general material report dialog box. Define the preferences
you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see Linear Material Reports, page 424.
Header Format - Activates the report header format dialog box. Define the
preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Linear Report Header Format,
page 429.
Data Format - Activates the report data format dialog box. Define the preferences
you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see Linear Report Data Format, page 431.
Totals Format - Activates the totals format dialog box. Define the preferences you
want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see Linear Reports Totals Format, page 442.
Plan Grid Preferences
The Plan Grid Preferences dialog box defines and edits dialog box preferences for
the plan grid dialog boxes.

Placement Parameters - Activates the main place plan grid dialog box. Define the
preference you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Place Plan Grid, page 253.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 53
Line Symbology - Activates the grid line symbology dialog box. Define the
preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Grid Line Symbology, page
257.
Label Symbology - Activates the grid label symbology dialog box. Define the
preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see Grid Label Symbology, page
256.
Solid Material Report Preferences
The Material Report Preferences dialog box defines and edits dialog box
preferences for the solid member material reports dialog boxes.

General - Activates the general material report dialog box. Define the preferences
you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see 3D Solids Material Reports, page 445.
Header Format - Activates the report header format dialog box. Define the
preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save
As. For more information on the dialog box fields, see 3D Solid Report Header
Format, page 448.
Data Format - Activates the report data format dialog box. Define the preferences
you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see 3D Solid Report Data Format, page 450.
Totals Format - Activates the totals format dialog box. Define the preferences you
want, and click Save. You can copy the preference by clicking Save As. For more
information on the dialog box fields, see 3D Solid Report Totals Format, page 456.
File
54 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
View Preferences
The View Preferences dialog box defines and edits dialog box preferences for the
FrameWorks Plus view creation and view modification dialog boxes.

View Parameters - Activates a dialog box similar to the Create View dialog box. Set
the preferences the way you want them, and then click Save. You can copy the
preference by clicking Save As. For more information about the fields on the dialog
box, see Create View, page 191.
View Symbology - Activates a secondary dialog box, from which you can choose the
member type for which you want to define symbology preference. Select the member
type, define the preferences you want, and click Save. You can copy the preference
by clicking Save As. For more information about the dialog boxes these buttons
activate, see Symbology for Linear Members, page 197 and Symbology for Solid
Members, page 205.
Write Analysis Input Preferences
The Write Analysis Input dialog box defines and edits dialog box preferences for the
Write STAAD Input and Write GTSTRUDL Input commands. See Write STAAD
Input, page 121 or Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112 (depending on which analysis
package you are using) for more information on the dialog box fields.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 55
Section Library
The File > Section Library command activates a dialog box that displays the
standard section library name and the attached user section library, if any. You can
also open or close a user section library using this command.
FrameWorks Plus uses either one or two
section libraries (which contain the geometric
and engineering properties of structural
sections). The standard section library is
required and is defined when the model is
created. This library contains all of the
standard structural steel sections for a
particular national design code, such as AISC. The other, optional section library is
called the user library and is used to store and retrieve user-defined sections.
Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not convert section library units to match model
units. FrameWorks Plus assumes that model units and section library units
are compatible (both are imperial or both are metric). If you attach a
metric section library to model that uses imperial units, FrameWorks Plus
will read the library sections as inches, not millimeters. Similarly, an
imperial section library attached to a metric model will be read as
millimeters, not inches.
The user section library is a project-specific file and is located in the project's \esl
folder. The environment variable FW_USER_ESL can be used to define a location
other than the project's \esl folder for you user section libraries, see Environment
Variables, page 512.
You can define your own user section library to create and retrieve nonstandard
sections in a project. For information on creating a user section library, see Create
User Section Table, page 23. The user section library should have a unique name to
avoid confusion or conflict with the standard section libraries.
If a user section library is currently open, clicking Detach will unload it. If no user
section library is active, you can load a library by clicking Attach, which activates
the Open Section Library dialog box.
Related Topics
Change Cell File, page 56
Create User Section Table, page 23
Create User Section, page 488
Interactive Section Tables (IST), page 57
Review Section Library, page 486
Save FWP Settings, page 147
File
56 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Change Cell File
The File > Change Cell File command specifies which cell library to use to store
arbitrary section's footprints. After you have selected a cell library, make sure you
save the FrameWorks Plus settings so that the next time you enter the model; the cell
library is automatically attached.

The cell library is a project-specific file and is located in the project's \esl subfolder.
The cell library should have a unique name to avoid confusion or conflict. An empty
cell library is delivered with FrameWorks Plus in the ..\fwplus\esl folder and is called
ist.cel. The delivered ist.cel file is copied to the project's \esl folder every time a
project is created.
Note
Do not use the ist.cel that is delivered in the ..\fwplus\esl folder to store
arbitrary sections. If you ever have to reload FrameWorks Plus, the ist.cel
file with all your arbitrary sections is overwritten. Always save your
arbitrary sections in the project's ist.cel file.
Related Topics
Change Cell File, page 56
Create User Section Table, page 23
Create User Section, page 488
Interactive Section Tables (IST), page 57
Review Section Library, page 486
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Section Library, page 55
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 57
Interactive Section Tables (IST)
The File > Interactive Section Tables (IST) command activates the Interactive
Section Tables (IST) program. IST provides commands for creating your own section
library tables and creating and editing sections in those libraries.
Refer to the Interactive Section Tables (IST) documentation for addition information
about IST and its commands.
Related Topics
Change Cell File, page 56
Create User Section Table, page 23
Create User Section, page 488
Interactive Section Tables (IST), page 57
Review Section Library, page 486
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Section Library, page 55
File
58 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File
The File > Steel Detailing Neutral File > Write command creates a formatted
ASCII file that can be sent to a fabrication company for steel fabrication.
FrameWorks Plus supports writing both version 2.0 and version 3.0 of the steel
detailing neutral file. FrameWorks Plus only writes packets: Packet 00 - Title Packet,
Packet 10 - Linear Member Packet, Packet 20 - Plate Element Packet, Packet 22 -
Hole Element Packet, and Packet 60 - Arc Member Packet. Packets 30 - Member
Loads, 40 - Connection Details, and 50 - Grids are not written to the Steel Detailing
Neutral File.

Criteria - The Criteria pulldown activates a dialog box used to define which
members to write to the steel detailing neutral file. For more information about this
dialog box, see Member Criteria, page 103.
Note
FrameWorks Plus only writes steel and aluminum members to the neutral
file.
Neutral File Name - Displays the name of the neutral file to write. Click the
corresponding Select button to define the folder and file name of the neutral file to
write.
Mapping File Name - Displays the section name mapping file to use when writing
the neutral file. Click the corresponding Select button to select the mapping file. For
more information about mapping files, see Create Mapping File, page 499.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 59
Engineering Firm Name - Specifies the engineering firm name to write to the title
packet.
Client Identification - Specifies the client identification to write to the title packet.
Structure Name - Specifies the name of the structure to write to the title packet.
Project ID - Specifies the project identification to write to the title packet.
Design Code - Specifies the design code used. This information is written to the title
packet.
Issue Code - Specifies the issue code to write to the title packet.
Revision Code - Specifies the revision code to write to the title packet.
OK - Writes the steel detailing neutral file using the parameters specified.
Cancel - Exits the command.
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format
The file is written sequentially with a maximum record length of 132 characters. All
records (except the fixed-format Packet identification records) are free formatted,
with fields delimited by blanks (white space). Coordinate values are in the global
coordinate (X, Y, Z) system.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not support some records in the linear member,
plate element, hole element, and arc member packets. However, the
records are included in the Steel Detailing Neutral File format because
manufacturing software may use them.
The following values are used to define format:
FP - Used to indicate a Floating Point value, for example, "12.15" or "1"
(decimal optional).
I - Used to indicate an Integer value, for example, "5" (range of values: +/-
2 billion).
File
60 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Cnn - Used to indicate a character value of nn characters maximum, for
example, C10 -- up to 10 characters including blanks. Character strings
must be enclosed in double quotes ("example string").
fixed - Used to indicate that a record must have exact content as shown in
the example.
Except for the fixed format records, the data may start in any column of the record.
Comment Cards
Comment cards can be inserted anywhere in the file, provided that the line begins
with the # character in the first field.
Format: #comment
Examples:
# This is a comment record
# Title Packet
# Linear Member Packet
Related Topics
Packet 00 - Title Packet Version 2.0, page 61
Packet 00 - Title Packet Version 3.0, page 74
Packet 10 - Linear Member Packet Version 2.0, page 62
Packet 10 - Linear Member Packet Version 3.0, page 75
Packet 20 - Plate Element Packet Version 2.0, page 65
Packet 20 - Plate Element Packet Version 3.0, page 82
Packet 22 - Hole Element Packet Version 3.0, page 88
Packet 30 - Member Loads Packet Version 2.0, page 66
Packet 30 - Member Loads Packet Version 3.0, page 92
Packet 40 - Connection Details Packet Version 2.0, page 68
Packet 40 - Connection Details Packet Version 3.0, page 94
Packet 50 - Grid Packet Version 2.0, page 68
Packet 50 - Grid Packet Version 3.0, page 95
Packet 60 - Arc Member Packet Version 3.0, page 96
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 61
Packet 00 - Title Packet Version 2.0
This packet must be the first in the file. Records 1-5, 7, and 8 provide general
information pulled from the Steel Detailing Neutral File dialog box. FrameWorks
Plus automatically writes records 6 and 9.
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header fixed Packet 00
2 Engineering Firm
Identification
C80 "Name of
Engineering
Firm"

3 Client
Identification
C80 "Name of Client"
4 Structure ID C80 "Name of
Structure"

5 Project ID C80 "Name of
Project"

6 Date C30 "11/19/96"
Time of File
Creation
C30 "13:12"
7 Revision Number I 2
Issue Code C64 "Issue Code"
8 Design Code C80 "AISC-ASD"
9 Number of
Loading Records
I 0 FrameWorks Plus
initializes this record to
0
10 'n' load record I 1 Where 'n' is from
Record 9
Loading type I 1 0 = load case, 1 = load
combination
Description C64 "Live and Wind
Loads"


Complete example for packet 00:
Packet 00
"Name of Engineering Firm"
"Name of Client"
"Name of Structure"
"Name of Project"
"11/19/96" "13:12"
2 "Issue Code"
File
62 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
"AISC-ASD"
0
Packet 10 - Linear Member Packet Version 2.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header Fixed Packet
10

2 linear units C24 "feet" Valid unit names are: "feet",
"meters", "inches", "millimeters"
number of
members
I 376

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 10
"feet" 376
For Records 3 on, the 6 records that follow represent each linear member: total of 6
times n records, where n is number of members from Record 2 above (376 in the
example).
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Member
ID
I 00100020 Format is XXXZZZZZ, where XXX is
the model ID number and ZZZZZ is the
member ID. The member ID is
formatted with leading zeros.
Cardinal
Point
I 8 Cardinal point from 1 to 10
Status I 0 FrameWorks Plus always sets this to 0
Class I 1 Member class from 0 to 9. 0=Primary,
1=Secondary, 2=Tertiary, 3=User1,
4=User2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Type C24 "beam" Member type "beam", "column",
"brace", "Hbrace", or "Vbrace"
Piece
Mark
C24 "" FrameWorks Plus member name
Revision
Number
I 1 Always set to 1 by FrameWorks Plus
Record 1 example: 00100020 8 0 1 "beam" "" 1

File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 63
Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Section Size C32 "W12X50" Section size assigned to the member
Grade C24 "A36" Material grade name assigned to the
member
Rotation FP 90.0 Rotation of section: 0, 90, 180, 270
Mirror X-
Axis
I 0 0 is no reflect
Mirror Y-
Axis
I 0 1 is reflect about Y-axis; 0 is no
reflect
Record 2 example: "W12X50" "A36" 90.0 0 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
3 Orientation Vector FP; FP; FP 0 0 1.0
Start Coordinates FP; FP; FP 10 0 72.75
End Coordinates FP; FP; FP 10 12.5 72.75
Start Cutbacks FP 0
End Cutbacks FP 0
Record 3 example: 0 0 1.0 10 0 72.75 10 12.5 72.75 0 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
4 X Cross-section
Offset
FP 0 Offset of the cross-section relative
to the x-axis of the section
Y Cross-section
Offset
FP -.25 Offset of the cross-section relative
to the y-axis of the section
Record 4 example: 0 -.25

Record Contains Format Example Notes
5 X Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
Y Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
Z Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
X Offset End FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
Y Offset End FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
File
64 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Z Offset End FP -1.0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
Record 5 example: 0 0 0 0 0 -1.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
6 End 1: X I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1: Y I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1: Z I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RX
I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RY
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RZ
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: X I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: Y I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: Z I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RX
I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RY
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RZ
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
Record 6 example: 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Complete example for packet 10:
Packet 10
"feet" 1
00100020 8 0 1 "beam" "" 1
"W12X50" "A36" 90.0 0 0
0 0 1.0 10 0 72.75 10 12.5 72.75 0 0
0 -.25
0 0 0 0 0 -1.0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 65
Packet 20 - Plate Element Packet Version 2.0
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header Fixed Packet 20
2 linear units C24 "feet"
thickness units C24 "feet"
number of plates I 121

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 20
"feet" "feet" 121
For Record 3 on: Each plate is represented by a variable number of records that
follow:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Plate
Number
(ID)
I 00200213 Format is XXXZZZZZ, where XXX is
the model ID number and ZZZZZ is the
member ID. The member ID is
formatted with leading zeros.
Connect
Point
I -1 Plate position relative to the plane
defined by plate coordinates. 0=By
center, 1=Positive face, -1=Negative
face
Status I 0 Always set to 0.
Class I 1 Member class from 0 to 9. 0=Primary,
1=Secondary, 2=Tertiary, 3=User1,
4=User2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Type C24 "slab"
Record 1 example: 00200213 -1 0 1 "slab"

Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Piece Mark C24 "" FrameWorks initializes this field to
an empty string
Grade C24 "A36" Material grade assigned to plate
Thickness FP 1.125 plate thickness
Number of
Vertices
I 16 Indicates number of vertices on a
plate's face.
Record 2 example: "" "A36" 1.125 16

File
66 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
The plate geometry is defined by n records, where n is the number of vertices from
Record 2. Each record contains the X, Y, and Z-coordinates of a vertex.
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Linear Edge Plates X Coordinate FP 0.000
Y Coordinate FP 0.000
Z Coordinate FP 0.000

Record example for linear edge plates. This example is of a square plate:
0.000 0.000 0.000
5.000 0.000 0.000
5.000 5.000 0.000
0.000 5.000 0.000
Packet 30 - Member Loads Packet Version 2.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header fixed Packet
30

2 Linear Units C24 "feet" "feet", "inches", "millimeters",
or "meters"
Force Units C24 "kips"
Number of Loaded
Members
I 140

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 30
"feet" "kips" 140
For Record 3 on, each member loading is represented by a variable number of records
that follow:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Member Number I 00100024
Number of Loads I 2 Loads on this member
Record 1 example: 00100024 2

The loads for each member are represented by '3*n' records that follow, where n is
the number of loadings from the record above. In this example, n is 2.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 67
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Loading Number I 1
Description C64 "Equipment Loads"
Record 1 example: 1 "Equipment Loads"

Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Axial Force FP -3.762 Start of member
Shear Y FP 14.8 Start of member
Shear Z FP 4.1 Start of member
Moment Y FP 0.03 Start of member
Moment Z FP -77.23 Start of member
Torsion FP 3.17 Start of member
Record 2 example: -3.762 14.8 4.1 0.03 -77.23 3.17

Record Contains Format Example Notes
3 Axial Force FP -3.762 End of member
Shear Y FP 11.3 End of member
Shear Z FP -8.334 End of member
Moment Y FP 5.4 End of member
Moment Z FP -14.7 End of member
Torsion FP 8.64 End of member
Record 3 example: -3.762 11.3 -8.334 5.4 -14.7 8.64

Note
Member ends are defined by the order of coordinates in Packet 10.
Complete example for packet 30:
Packet 30
"feet" "kips" 140
00100024 2
1 "Equipment Loads"
-3.762 14.8 4.1 0.03 -77.23 3.17
-3.762 11.3 -8.334 5.4 -14.7 8.64
File
68 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Packet 40 - Connection Details Packet Version 2.0
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header fixed Packet 40
2 Number of Connection Details I 628

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 40
628
For records 3 on, a record represents each connection detail as follows:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
3 Detail Number I 177
Member Number I 00100025
Member End I 1 1=Start; 2=End
Connection Detail C50 "End 1 detail information
Record 3 example: 177 00100025 1 "End 1 detail information"

Complete example for packet 40:
Packet 40
628
177 00100025 1 "End 1 detail information"
Packet 50 - Grid Packet Version 2.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header fixed Packet 50
2 Number of Grid Sets or Floor Levels I 6

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 50
6
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 69
For record 3 on, each grid set is represented by a variable number of records that
follow:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Grid Set Number I 1
Number of Grid Lines I 4
Grid Set Description C64 "TOS El 108'-0"
Record 1 example: 1 4 "TOS El 108'-0"

Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Grid Label C64 1
Start X Coordinate FP -1711.0
Start Y Coordinate FP -2480.0
Start Z Coordinate FP 108.0
End X Coordinate FP -1711.0
End Y Coordinate FP -2495.0
End Z Coordinate FP 108.0

Record 2 example:
1 -1711.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1711.0 -2495.0 108.0
2 -1702.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2495.0 108.0
A -1711.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2480.0 108.0
B -1711.0 -2495.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2495.0 108.0
Complete example for packet 50:
Packet 50
6
1 4 "TOS El 108'-0"
1 -1711.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1711.0 -2495.0 108.0
2 -1702.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2495.0 108.0
A -1711.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2480.0 108.0
B -1711.0 -2495.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2495.0 108.0
File
70 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Packet 60 - Arc Member Packet Version 2.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header Fixed Packet
60

2 linear units C24 "feet" Valid unit names are: "feet",
"meters", "inches", "millimeters"
number of arc
members
I 120

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 60
"feet" 120
For Records 3 on, the 7 records that follow represent each arc member: total of 7
times n records, where n is number of members from Record 2 above (120 in the
example).
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Member
ID
I 00100020 Format is XXXZZZZZ, where XXX
is the model ID number and ZZZZZ
is the member ID. The member ID is
formatted with leading zeros.
Cardinal
Point
I 8 Cardinal point from 1 to 10
Status I 0 Always set to 0.
Class I 1 Member class from 0 to 9.
0=Primary, 1=Secondary,
2=Tertiary, 3=User1, 4=User2, 5, 6,
7, 8, 9
Type C24 "beam(Arc)" Member type of "beam(Arc)",
"column(Arc)", or "brace(Arc)"
Piece
Mark
C24 "" FrameWorks Plus initializes this
field to an empty string
Revision
Number
I 1 Always set to 1 by FrameWorks Plus
Record 1 example: 00100020 8 0 1 "beam(Arc)" "" 1




File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 71
Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Section Size C24 "W12X50" Section size assigned to the member
Grade C24 "A36" Material grade name assigned to the
member
Rotation FP 90.0 Rotation of section: 0, 90, 180, 270
Mirror X-
Axis
I 0 0 is no reflect
Mirror Y-
Axis
I 0 1 is reflect about Y-axis; 0 is no
reflect
Record 2 example: "W12X50" "A36" 90.0 0 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
3 Center of
Arc
FP; FP;
FP
10.0 0 0 Is center of arc location in X, Y, Z
coordinates
Start
Angle
FP 180.0 Angle in degrees where the arc starts,
for example, with Arc plane
normal=0,0,1 and a start angle = 0, the
first point of the arc will appear on the
East axis (3 o'clock) on a watch. With a
start angle = 90, the first point of the arc
will be on the North axis (12 o'clock)
Sweep FP 45.0 Arc sweep in degrees, for example Base
on the value of Arc Plane Normal
(using a right-hand rule) the sweep
angle will proceed counter-clockwise if
this normal is 0,0,1. If the normal is
0,0,-1, the sweep angle will proceed
clockwise.
Arc Plane
Normal
Vector
FP; FP;
FP
0 0 1.0 Vector normal to the plane of the arc.
Uses a right-hand rule based on this
vector to determine which way to
sweep counter clockwise or clockwise.
Record 3 example: 10.0 0 0 180.0 45.0 0 0 1.0










File
72 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Record Contains Format Example Notes
4 Orientation Vector FP; FP; FP 0 0 1.0
Start Coordinates FP; FP; FP 10 0 72.75
End Coordinates FP; FP; FP 10 12.5 72.75
Start Cutbacks FP 0
End Cutbacks FP 0
Record 4 example: 0 0 1.0 10 0 72.75 10 12.5 72.75 0 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
5 X Cross-section
Offset
FP 0 Offset of the cross-section relative
to the x-axis of the section
Y Cross-section
Offset
FP -.25 Offset of the cross-section relative
to the y-axis of the section
Record 5 example: 0 -.25

Record Contains Format Example Notes
6 X Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
Y Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
Z Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
X Offset End FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
Y Offset End FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
Z Offset End FP -1.0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
Record 6 example: 0 0 0 0 0 -1.0













File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 73
Record Contains Format Example Notes
7 End 1: X I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1: Y I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1: Z I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RX
I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RY
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RZ
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: X I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: Y I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: Z I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RX
I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RY
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RZ
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
Record 7 example: 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Packet 60
"feet" 120
00100020 8 0 1 "beam(Arc)" "" 1
"W12X50" "A36" 90.0 0 0
10.0 0 0 180.0 45.0 0 0 1.0
0 0 1.0 10 0 72.75 10 12.5 72.75 0 0
0 -.25
0 0 0 0 0 -1.0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
File
74 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Packet 00 - Title Packet Version 3.0
This packet must be the first in the file. Records 1, 3 through 6, 8, and 9 provide
general information and are read from the Steel Detailing Neutral File dialog box.
FrameWorks Plus automatically writes Records 2, 7, and 10.
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header fixed Packet 00
2 SDNF Version
Number
C24 "SDNF Version
3.0"

3 Engineering Firm
Identification
C80 "Name of
Engineering
Firm"

4 Client
Identification
C80 "Name of Client"
5 Structure ID C80 "Name of
Structure"

6 Project ID C80 "Name of
Project"

7 Date C30 "2/27/02"
Time of File
Creation
C30 "13:12"
8 Revision Number I 2
Issue Code C64 "Issue Code"
9 Design Code C80 "AISC-ASD"
10 Number of
Loading Records
I 0 FrameWorks Plus
initializes this record to
0
11 on 'n' Load
Combination
Record
I 1 Where 'n' is from
Record 10
Loading Type I 1 0= load case, 1=load
combination
Description C64 "Live and Wind
Loads"


Complete example for packet 00:
Packet 00
"SDNF Version 3.0"
"Name of Engineering Firm"
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 75
"Name of Client"
"Name of Structure"
"Name of Project"
"2/27/02" "13:12"
2 "Issue Code"
"AISC-ASD"
0
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
Packet 10 - Linear Member Packet Version 3.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header Fixed Packet
10

2 linear units C24 "feet" Valid unit names are: "feet",
"meters", "inches", "millimeters"
number of
members
I 376

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 10
"feet" 376
File
76 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
For Records 3 on, the 10 records that follow represent each linear member: total of 10
times n records, where n is number of members from Record 2 above (376 in the
example).
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Member
ID
I 00100020 Format is XXXZZZZZ, where XXX is
the model ID number and ZZZZZ is the
member ID. The member ID is
formatted with leading zeros.
Cardinal
Point
I 8 Cardinal point from 1 to 10
Status I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Class I 1 Member class from 0 to 9. 0=Primary,
1=Secondary, 2=Tertiary, 3=User1,
4=User2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Type C24 "beam" Member type "beam", "column",
"brace", "Hbrace", or "Vbrace"
Piece
Mark
C24 "" FrameWorks Plus initializes this record
to a empty string
Revision
Number
I 0 Always set to 0 by FrameWorks Plus
Record 1 example: 00100020 8 0 1 "beam" "" 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Section Size C24 "W12X50" Section size assigned to the member
Grade C24 "A36" Material grade name assigned to the
member
Rotation FP 90.0 Rotation of section: 0, 90, 180, 270
Mirror X-
Axis
I 0 0 is no reflect
Mirror Y-
Axis
I 0 1 is reflect about Y-axis; 0 is no
reflect
Record 2 example: "W12X50" "A36" 90.0 0 0









File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 77
Record Contains Format Example Notes
3 Orientation
Vector
FP; FP;
FP
0 0 1.0
Start Coordinates FP; FP;
FP
10 0 72.7500 decimal precision to 4
places
End Coordinates FP; FP;
FP
10 12.5
72.7500
decimal precision to 4
places
Start Cutbacks FP 0
End Cutbacks FP 0
Record 3 example: 0 0 1.0 10 0 72.7500 10 12.5 72.7500 0 0



Record Contains Format Example Notes
4 X Cross-section
Offset
FP 0 Offset of the cross-section relative
to the x-axis of the section
Y Cross-section
Offset
FP -.25 Offset of the cross-section relative
to the y-axis of the section
Record 4 example: 0 -.25

Record Contains Format Example Notes
5 X Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at member start,
decimal precision to 4 places
Y Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at member start,
decimal precision to 4 places
Z Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at member start,
decimal precision to 4 places
X Offset
End
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at member end,
decimal precision to 4 places
Y Offset
End
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at member end,
decimal precision to 4 places
Z Offset
End
FP -1.0000 Rigid end offsets at member end,
decimal precision to 4 places
Record 5 example: 0 0 0 0 0 -1.0000







File
78 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Record Contains Format Example Notes
6 End 1: X I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1: Y I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1: Z I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RX
I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RY
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RZ
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: X I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: Y I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: Z I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RX
I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RY
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RZ
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
Record 6 example: 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Record Contains Format Example Notes
7 Fabricator ID I 0 FrameWorks initializes this field to
0
Prebuy Mark C24 "" FrameWorks initializes this field to
an empty string
Subtype I 3 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Creation Date C30 "11/18/01" Date member was created in
authoring package
Creation
Time
C30 "13:12" Time member was created in
authoring package
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 79
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Modification
Date
C30 "12/01/01" Date member was modified in
authoring package
Modification
Time
C30 "8:00" Time member was modified in
authoring package
Updated I 1 Indicates whether fabricator/detailer
has updated the member.
1=Member was updated 0=Member
has not been updated
Approval
Status
I 0 Not used by FrameWorks Plus
Record 7 example: 0 "" 3 "11/18/01" "13:12" "12/01/01" "8:00" 1 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
8 Connection at
End 1
I 12 Type of end connection at
member end 1. Code listed value
from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if not defined.
End 1
Connecting
Member 1
I 00100008 Member ID of supporting
member at end 1. 0 if no member.
End 1
Connecting
Member 2
I 00100013 Member ID of supporting
member at end 1. 0 if no member.
End 1
Connecting
Member 3
I 0 Member ID of supporting
member at end 1. 0 if no member.
Connection at
End 2
I 12 Type of end connection at
member end 2. Code listed value
from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if not defined.
End 2
Connecting
Member 1
I 00100235 Member ID of supporting
member at end 2. 0 if no member.
End 2
Connecting
Member 2
I 00100245 Member ID of supporting
member at end 2. 0 if no member.
End 2
Connecting
Member 3
I 0 Member ID of supporting
member at end 2. 0 if no member.
File
80 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Connection
Configuration
I 0 Not used by FrameWorks Plus
Assembly 1 I 1 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from
the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if no
Assembly.
Assembly 2 I 2 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from
the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if no
Assembly.
Assembly 3 I 3 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from
the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if no
Assembly.
Record 8 example: 12 00100008 00100013 0 12 00100235 00100245 0 0 1 2 3

Record Contains Format Example Notes
9 Material I 0 0-Steel, 1-Concrete, 2-Aluminum,
3-Plastic, 4-Timber, 5-Other
Coatings I 3 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Fireproofing
Thickness
FP 0.083333 Thickness of the fireproofing. Value
is always inches or millimeters
based on member units.
Fireproofing
Description
I 4 0-None; 1-Contour, fully encased;
2-Contour, top flange exposed; 3-
Block, fully encased; 4-Block, top
flange exposed
Fireproofing
Type
I 1 0-Shop Applied, 1-Field Applied
Fireproofing
Start
FP 1.125 Distance from the start of the
member to point where fireproofing
begins.
Fireproofing
End
FP 14.5 Distance from the start of the
member to point where fireproofing
ends.
Record 9 example: 0 3 0.083333 4 1 1.125 14.5

File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 81
Record Contains Format Example Notes
10 Fabricator
Note
I 1 Any special note from fabricator. Code
listed value from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 1
I 2 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 2
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 3
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 4
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 5
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Record 10 example: 1 2 0 0 0 0

Complete example for packet 10:
Packet 10
"feet" 1
00100020 8 0 1 "beam" "" 0
"W12X50" "A36" 90.0 0 0
0 0 1.0 10 0 72.7500 10 12.5 72.7500 0 0
0 -.25
0 0 0 0 0 -1.0000
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 "" 3 "11/18/01" "13:12" "12/01/01" "8:00" 1 0
12 00100008 00100013 0 12 00100235 00100245 0 0 1 2 3
0 3 0.083333 4 1 1.125000 14.500000
1 2 0 0 0 0
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
File
82 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Packet 20 - Plate Element Packet Version 3.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header Fixed Packet 20
2 linear units C24 "feet"
thickness units C24 "feet"
number of plates I 121

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 20
"feet" "feet" 121
For Record 3 on: Each plate is represented by a variable number of records that
follow:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Plate
Number
(ID)
I 00200213 Format is XXXZZZZZ, where XXX is
the model ID number and ZZZZZ is the
member ID. The member ID is
formatted with leading zeros.
Connect
Point
I -1 Plate position relative to the plane
defined by plate coordinates. 0=By
center, 1=Positive face, -1=Negative
face
Status I 1 Member Status. Code listed value from
the FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file.
Class I 1 Member class from 0 to 9. 0=Primary,
1=Secondary, 2=Tertiary, 3=User1,
4=User2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Type C24 "slab"
Revision
Number
I 0 Always set to 0 by FrameWorks Plus
Record 1 example: 00200213 -1 1 1 "slab" 0








File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 83
Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Piece Mark C24 "" FrameWorks initializes this field to an
empty string
Grade C24 "A36" Material grade assigned to plate
Thickness FP 1.125 plate thickness
Number of
Vertices
per Face
I 5 -1 if plate is circular. For linear and
complex plates, indicates number of
vertices on a plate's face with each
straight edge along the periphery
connected by two vertices and each arc
segment connected by three vertices.
Offset FP 0.0 Plate offset distance, similar to the
work point offset for linear members.
Expressed in feet or meters.
Plate
Periphery
I 0 0=Plate without any arcs in the
periphery;1=Plate with line segments
and arcs in the periphery;2=circular
plate
Record 2 example: "" "A36" 1.125 5 0.0 0

Depending on the Plate Periphery setting in Record 2, the records that define the
vertices locations have different formats.
For Linear Edge Plates (0 in Plate Periphery) and Complex Edge Plates (1 in Plate
Periphery), the plate geometry is defined by n records for the top face and n records
for the bottom face, where n is the number of vertices from Record 2. Each record
contains the X, Y, and Z coordinates of a vertex followed by a flag that indicates
whether the current vertex and the next vertex are joined by a line or by an arc.
For Circular Plates (2 in Plate Periphery), two records, one for the top face and one
for the bottom face, define the plate geometry. Each record contains the X, Y, and Z
coordinates of the center point followed by the radius.
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Linear Edge
Plates
X Coordinate FP 0.000
Y Coordinate FP 0.000
Z Coordinate FP 0.000
Connection
Flag
I 1 0=last vertex on face; 1=this
vertex and the next vertex are
joined by a line

File
84 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Record example for linear edge plates. This example is of a square plate:
0.000 0.000 0.000 1
5.000 0.000 0.000 1
5.000 5.000 0.000 1
0.000 5.000 0.000 1
0.000 0.000 0.000 0
0.000 0.000 1.000 1
5.000 0.000 1.000 1
5.000 5.000 1.000 1
0.000 5.000 1.000 1
0.000 0.000 1.000 0
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Complex
Edge
Plates
X
Coordinate
FP 20.0
Y
Coordinate
FP 10.0
Z
Coordinate
FP 15.0
Connection
Flag
I 1 0=last vertex on face; 1=this vertex
and the next vertex are joined by a
line; 2=this vertex and the next
vertex are connected by an arc

Record example for complex edge plates (for the plate shown):

20.0 10.0 15.0 1
40.0 10.0 15.0 2
45.0 5.0 15.0 2
40.0 0.0 15.0 1
20.0 0.0 15.0 2
15.0 5.0 15.0 2
20.0 10.0 15.0 0


File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 85
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Circular Plates X Coordinate FP 10.0
Y Coordinate FP 4.5
Z Coordinate FP 0.000
Radius FP 12.0

Record example for circular plates:
10.0 4.5 0.000 12.0
10.0 4.5 0.125 12.0
Record Contains Format Example Notes
4 Fabricator ID I 0 FrameWorks initializes this field to
0
Prebuy Mark C24 "" FrameWorks Plus initializes this
field to an empty string
Subtype I 3 More specific classification of
member. Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Creation Date C30 "11/18/01" Date member was created in
authoring package
Creation
Time
C30 "13:12" Time member was created in
authoring package
Modification
Date
C30 "12/01/01" Date member was modified in
authoring package
Modification
Time
C30 "8:00" Time member was modified in
authoring package
Updated I 1 Indicates whether fabricator/detailer
has updated the member.
1=Member was updated 0=Member
has not been updated
Approval
Status
I 0 Not used by FrameWorks Plus
Record 4 example: 0 "" 3 "11/18/01" "13:12" "12/01/01" "8:00" 1 0









File
86 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Record Contains Format Example Notes
5 Assembly
1
I 1 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file. 0 if
no Assembly.
Assembly
2
I 0 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file. 0 if
no Assembly.
Assembly
3
I 3 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file. 0 if
no Assembly.
Record 5 example: 1 0 3

Record Contains Format Example Notes
6 Material I 0 0-Steel, 1-Concrete, 2-
Aluminum, 3-Plastic, 4-Timber,
5-Other
Coatings I 3 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat
file
Fireproofing
Thickness
FP 0 Not used by FrameWorks Plus
Fireproofing
Description
I 0 Not used by FrameWorks Plus
Fireproofing
Type
I 0 0-Shop Applied, 1-Field Applied
Record 6 example: 0 3 0 0 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
7 Fabricator
Note
I 1 Any special note from fabricator. Code
listed value from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 1
I 2 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 2
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 3
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 87
Record Contains Format Example Notes
User
Attribute 4
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 5
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Record 7 example: 1 2 0 0 0 0

Complete example for Packet 20:
Packet 20
"feet" "feet" 121
00200213 -1 1 1 "slab" 0
"" "A36" 1.125 5 0.0 0
7.996596 -2.538919 0.083333 1
27.602567 -2.538919 0.083333 1
27.602567 17.083825 0.083333 1
7.996596 17.083825 0.083333 1
7.996596 -2.538919 0.083333 0
7.996596 -2.538919 0.000000 1
27.602567 -2.538919 0.000000 1
27.602567 17.083825 0.000000 1
7.996596 17.083825 0.000000 1
7.996596 -2.538919 0.000000 0
0 "" 3 "11/18/01" "13:12" "12/01/01" "8:00" 1 0
1 0 3
0 3 0 0 0
1 2 0 0 0 0
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
File
88 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Packet 22 - Hole Element Packet Version 3.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header Fixed Packet 22
2 linear units C24 "feet"
thickness units C24 "feet"
number of holes I 3

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 22
"feet" "feet" 3
For Record 3 on: Each hole is represented by a variable number of records that
follow:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Hole ID I 00200006 Format is XXXZZZZZ, where XXX is
the model ID number and ZZZZZ is the
hole ID. The hole ID is formatted with
leading zeros.
Parent
Plate ID
I 00200004 Format is XXXZZZZZ, where XXX is
the model ID number and ZZZZZ is the
member ID. The member ID is
formatted with leading zeros.
Record 1 example: 00200006 00200004

Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Hole
Periphery
I 0 0=Hole without any arcs in the
periphery;1=Hole with line segments
and arcs in the periphery;2=Circular
hole
Thickness FP 1.125 Hole thickness
Number of
Vertices
per Face
I 5 -1 if hole is circular. For linear and
complex holes, indicates number of
vertices on a hole's face with each
straight edge along the periphery
connected by two vertices and each arc
segment connected by three vertices.
Record 2 example: 0 1.125 5

File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 89
Depending on the Hole Periphery setting in Record 2, the records that define the
vertices locations have different formats.
For Linear Edge Holes (0 in Hole Periphery) and Complex Edge Holes (1 in Hole
Periphery), the hole geometry is defined by n records for the top face and n records
for the bottom face, where n is the number of vertices from Record 2. Each record
contains the X, Y, and Z coordinates of a vertex followed by a flag that indicates
whether the current vertex and the next vertex are joined by a line or by an arc.
For Circular Holes (2 in Hole Periphery), two records, one for the top face and one
for the bottom face, define the hole geometry. Each record contains the X, Y, and Z
coordinates of the center point followed by the radius.
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Linear Edge
Holes
X Coordinate FP 0.000
Y Coordinate FP 0.000
Z Coordinate FP 0.000
Connection
Flag
I 1 0=last vertex on face; 1=this
vertex and the next vertex are
joined by a line

Record example for linear edge holes. This example is of a square hole:
0.000 0.000 0.000 1
5.000 0.000 0.000 1
5.000 5.000 0.000 1
0.000 5.000 0.000 1
0.000 0.000 0.000 0
0.000 0.000 1.000 1
5.000 0.000 1.000 1
5.000 5.000 1.000 1
0.000 5.000 1.000 1
0.000 0.000 1.000 0
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Complex
Edge Holes
X
Coordinate
FP 20.0
Y
Coordinate
FP 10.0
Z
Coordinate
FP 15.0
File
90 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Connection
Flag
I 1 0=last vertex on face; 1=this vertex
and the next vertex are joined by a
line; 2=this vertex and the next
vertex are connected by an arc

Record example for complex edge holes (for the hole shown):

20.0 10.0 15.0 1
40.0 10.0 15.0 2
45.0 5.0 15.0 2
40.0 0.0 15.0 1
20.0 0.0 15.0 2
15.0 5.0 15.0 2
20.0 10.0 15.0 0
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Circular Holes X Coordinate FP 10.00
Y Coordinate FP 4.50
Z Coordinate FP 0.00
Radius FP 12.0

Record example for circular holes:
10.00 4.50 0.000 12.0
10.00 4.50 0.125 12.0
Record Contains Format Example Notes
4 Approval
Status
I 0 Initialized as 0 by FrameWorks Plus.
Design
Status
I 3 Design Status for the member.
Initialized as 0 by FrameWorks Plus
Fabricator
Note
I 0 Any special note from fabricator. Code
listed value from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file
Hole
Treatment
I 0 Initialized as 0 by FrameWorks Plus.
Record 4 example: 0 3 0 0

File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 91
Record Contains Format Example Notes
5 User Attribute
1
I 0 Not supported by FrameWorks
Plus
User Attribute
2
I 0 Not supported by FrameWorks
Plus
User Attribute
3
I 0 Not supported by FrameWorks
Plus
Record 5 example: 0 0 0

Complete example for packet 22:
Packet 22
"feet" "feet" 1
00100007 00100002
0 0.083333 5
11.987205 7.706570 0.083333 1
15.804257 7.706570 0.083333 1
15.804257 2.670645 0.083333 1
11.987205 2.670645 0.083333 1
11.987205 7.706570 0.083333 0
11.987205 7.706570 0.000000 1
15.804257 7.706570 0.000000 1
15.804257 2.670645 0.000000 1
11.987205 2.670645 0.000000 1
11.987205 7.706570 0.000000 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
File
92 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Packet 30 - Member Loads Packet Version 3.0
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header fixed Packet
30

2 Linear Units C24 "feet" "feet", "inches", "millimeters",
or "meters"
Force Units C24 "kips"
Number of Loaded
Members
I 140

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 30
"feet" "kips" 140
For Record 3 on, each member loading is represented by a variable number of records
that follow:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Member Number I 00100024
Number of Loads I 2 Loads on this member
Record 1 example: 00100024 2

The loads for each member are represented by '3*n' records that follow, where n is
the number of loadings from the record above. In this example, n is 2.
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Loading Number I 1
Description C64 "Equipment Loads"
Record 1 example: 1 "Equipment Loads"

Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Axial Force FP -3.762 Start of member
Shear Y FP 14.8 Start of member
Shear Z FP 4.1 Start of member
Moment Y FP 0.03 Start of member
Moment Z FP -77.23 Start of member
Torsion FP 3.17 Start of member
Record 2 example: -3.762 14.8 4.1 0.03 -77.23 3.17

File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 93
Record Contains Format Example Notes
3 Axial Force FP -3.762 End of member
Shear Y FP 11.3 End of member
Shear Z FP -8.334 End of member
Moment Y FP 5.4 End of member
Moment Z FP -14.7 End of member
Torsion FP 8.64 End of member
Record 3 example: -3.762 11.3 -8.334 5.4 -14.7 8.64

Note
Member ends are defined by the order of coordinates in Packet 10.
Complete example for packet 30:
Packet 30
"feet" "kips" 140
00100024 2
1 "Equipment Loads"
-3.762 14.8 4.1 0.03 -77.23 3.17
-3.762 11.3 -8.334 5.4 -14.7 8.64
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
File
94 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Packet 40 - Connection Details Packet Version 3.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header fixed Packet 40
2 Number of Connection Details I 628

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 40
628
For records 3 on, a record represents each connection detail as follows:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
3 Detail Number I 177
Member Number I 00100025
Member End I 1 1=Start; 2=End
Connection Detail C50 "End 1 detail information
Record 3 example: 177 00100025 1 "End 1 detail information"

Complete example for packet 40:
Packet 40
628
177 00100025 1 "End 1 detail information"
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 95
Packet 50 - Grid Packet Version 3.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header fixed Packet 50
2 Number of Grid Sets or Floor Levels I 6

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 50
6
For record 3 on, each grid set is represented by a variable number of records that
follow:
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Grid Set Number I 1
Number of Grid Lines I 4
Grid Set Description C64 "TOS El 108'-0"
Record 1 example: 1 4 "TOS El 108'-0"

Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Grid Label C64 1
Start X Coordinate FP -1711.0
Start Y Coordinate FP -2480.0
Start Z Coordinate FP 108.0
End X Coordinate FP -1711.0
End Y Coordinate FP -2495.0
End Z Coordinate FP 108.0

Record 2 example:
1 -1711.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1711.0 -2495.0 108.0
2 -1702.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2495.0 108.0
A -1711.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2480.0 108.0
B -1711.0 -2495.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2495.0 108.0
Complete example for packet 50:
Packet 50
6
1 4 "TOS El 108'-0"
File
96 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
1 -1711.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1711.0 -2495.0 108.0
2 -1702.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2495.0 108.0
A -1711.0 -2480.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2480.0 108.0
B -1711.0 -2495.0 108.0 -1702.0 -2495.0 108.0
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
Packet 60 - Arc Member Packet Version 3.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Packet Header Fixed Packet
60

2 linear units C24 "feet" Valid unit names are: "feet",
"meters", "inches", "millimeters"
number of arc
members
I 120

Combined Records 1 and 2 example:
Packet 60
"feet" 120
For Records 3 on, the 11 records that follow represent each arc member: total of 11
times n records, where n is number of members from Record 2 above (120 in the
example).
Record Contains Format Example Notes
1 Member
ID
I 00100020 Format is XXXZZZZZ, where XXX
is the model ID number and ZZZZZ
is the member ID. The member ID is
formatted with leading zeros.
Cardinal
Point
I 8 Cardinal point from 1 to 10
Status I 0 Member Status. Code listed value
from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 97
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Class I 1 Member class from 0 to 9.
0=Primary, 1=Secondary,
2=Tertiary, 3=User1, 4=User2, 5, 6,
7, 8, 9
Type C24 "beam(Arc)" Member type of "beam(Arc)",
"column(Arc)", or "brace(Arc)"
Piece
Mark
C24 "" FrameWorks Plus initializes this
field to an empty string
Revision
Number
I 0 Always set to 0 by FrameWorks Plus
Record 1 example: 00100020 8 0 1 "beam(Arc)" "" 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
2 Section Size C24 "W12X50" Section size assigned to the member
Grade C24 "A36" Material grade name assigned to the
member
Rotation FP 90.0 Rotation of section: 0, 90, 180, 270
Mirror X-
Axis
I 0 0 is no reflect
Mirror Y-
Axis
I 0 1 is reflect about Y-axis; 0 is no
reflect
Record 2 example: "W12X50" "A36" 90.0 0 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
3 Center of
Arc
FP; FP;
FP
10.0 0 0 Is center of arc location in X, Y, Z
coordinates
Start
Angle
FP 180.0 Angle in degrees where the arc starts,
for example, with Arc plane
normal=0,0,1 and a start angle = 0, the
first point of the arc will appear on the
East axis (3 o'clock) on a watch. With a
start angle = 90, the first point of the arc
will be on the North axis (12 o'clock)
Sweep FP 45.0 Arc sweep in degrees, for example Base
on the value of Arc Plane Normal
(using a right-hand rule) the sweep
angle will proceed counter-clockwise if
this normal is 0,0,1. If the normal is
0,0,-1, the sweep angle will proceed
clockwise.
File
98 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Arc Plane
Normal
Vector
FP; FP;
FP
0 0 1.0 Vector normal to the plane of the arc.
Uses a right-hand rule based on this
vector to determine which way to
sweep counter clockwise or clockwise.
Record 3 example: 10.0 0 0 180.0 45.0 0 0 1.0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
4 Orientation Vector FP; FP; FP 0 0 1.0
Start Coordinates FP; FP; FP 10 0 72.75
End Coordinates FP; FP; FP 10 12.5 72.75
Start Cutbacks FP 0
End Cutbacks FP 0
Record 4 example: 0 0 1.0 10 0 72.75 10 12.5 72.75 0 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
5 X Cross-section
Offset
FP 0 Offset of the cross-section relative
to the x-axis of the section
Y Cross-section
Offset
FP -.25 Offset of the cross-section relative
to the y-axis of the section
Record 5 example: 0 -.25

Record Contains Format Example Notes
6 X Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
Y Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
Z Offset
Start
FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the start of the
member
X Offset End FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
Y Offset End FP 0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
Z Offset End FP -1.0 Rigid end offsets at the end of the
member
Record 6 example: 0 0 0 0 0 -1.0




File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 99
Record Contains Format Example Notes
7 End 1: X I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1: Y I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1: Z I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RX
I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RY
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 1:
RZ
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: X I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: Y I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2: Z I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RX
I 0 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RY
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
End 2:
RZ
I 1 0=No release for that Degree of Freedom,
1=Release for that Degree of Freedom
Record 7 example: 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1

Record Contains Format Example Notes
8 Fabricator ID I 0 FrameWorks Plus initializes this
field to 0
Prebuy Mark C24 "" FrameWorks Plus initializes this
field as an empty string
Subtype I 3 More specific classification of
member. Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Creation Date C30 "11/18/01" Date member was created in
authoring package
Creation
Time
C30 "13:12" Time member was created in
authoring package
File
100 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Modification
Date
C30 "12/01/01" Date member was modified in
authoring package
Modification
Time
C30 "8:00" Time member was modified in
authoring package
Updated I 1 Indicates whether fabricator/detailer
has updated the member.
1=Member was updated 0=Member
has not been updated
Approval
Status
I 0 Not used by FrameWorks Plus
Record 8 example: 0 "" 3 "11/18/01" "13:12" "12/01/01" "8:00" 1 0

Record Contains Format Example Notes
9 Connection at
End 1
I 12 Type of end connection at
member end 1. Code listed value
from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if not defined.
End 1
Connecting
Member 1
I 00100008 Member ID of supporting
member at end 1. 0 if no member.
End 1
Connecting
Member 2
I 00100013 Member ID of supporting
member at end 1. 0 if no member.
End 1
Connecting
Member 3
I 0 Member ID of supporting
member at end 1. 0 if no member.
Connection at
End 2
I 12 Type of end connection at
member end 2. Code listed value
from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if not defined.
End 2
Connecting
Member 1
I 00100235 Member ID of supporting
member at end 2. 0 if no member.
End 2
Connecting
Member 2
I 00100245 Member ID of supporting
member at end 2. 0 if no member.
End 2
Connecting
Member 3
I 0 Member ID of supporting
member at end 2. 0 if no member.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 101
Record Contains Format Example Notes
Connection
Configuration
I 0 Not used by FrameWorks Plus.
Assembly 1 I 1 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from
the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if no
Assembly.
Assembly 2 I 2 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from
the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if no
Assembly.
Assembly 3 I 3 Associates other members to this
member. Code listed value from
the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file. 0 if no
Assembly.
Record 9 example: 12 00100008 00100013 0 12 00100235 00100245 0 0 1 2 3

Record Contains Format Example Notes
10 Material I 0 0-Steel, 1-Concrete, 2-Aluminum,
3-Plastic, 4-Timber, 5-Other
Coatings I 3 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Fireproofing
Thickness
FP 0.083333 Thickness of the fireproofing. Value
is always inches or millimeters
based on member units.
Fireproofing
Description
I 1 0-None; 1-Contour, fully encased;
2-Contour, top flange exposed; 3-
Block, fully encased; 4-Block, top
flange exposed
Fireproofing
Type
I 0 0-Shop Applied, 1-Field Applied
Fireproofing
Start
FP 1.125 Distance from the start of the
member to point where fireproofing
begins.
Fireproofing
End
FP 14.5 Distance from the start of the
member to point where fireproofing
ends.
Record 10 example: 0 3 0.083333 1 0 1.125 14.5

File
102 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Record Contains Format Example Notes
11 Fabricator
Note
I 1 Any special note from fabricator. Code
listed value from the FrameWorks Plus
attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 1
I 2 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 2
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 3
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 4
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
User
Attribute 5
I 0 Code listed value from the
FrameWorks Plus attributes.dat file
Record 11 example: 1 2 0 0 0 0

Packet 60
"feet" 120
00100020 8 0 1 "beam(Arc)" "" 0
"W12X50" "A36" 90.0 0 0
10.0 0 0 180.0 45.0 0 0 1.0
0 0 1.0 10 0 72.75 10 12.5 72.75 0 0
0 -.25
0 0 0 0 0 -1.0
0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 "" 3 "11/18/01" "13:12" "12/01/01" "8:00" 1 0
12 00100008 00100013 0 12 00100235 00100245 0 0 1 2 3
0 3 0.083333 1 0 1.125 14.5
1 2 0 0 0 0
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 103
Member Criteria
The Criteria > Member Criteria command is used to define which members you
want to write to the steel detailing neutral file. Because you define the criteria for
what members to write to the neutral file here, the settings in the Select Filter
Settings command are ignored.
Note
FrameWorks Plus writes only steel and aluminum members to the neutral
file.
Design Type - Toggle on the member design
types you want to write to the neutral file.
FrameWorks Plus only writes members with
a material type of steel and aluminum to the
neutral file.
Member Class - Toggle on the member
classes you want to write to the neutral file.
Attach Model - Defines whether to write
members from attached models to the neutral
file in addition to the members in the active
model.
Selection Criteria - Defines whether to write
members from a selection set or to write all
the members in the model to the neutral file.
All On - Toggles on all Design Type and
Member Class settings. The default is that
all settings are selected.
All Off - Toggles off all Design Type and Member Class settings.
OK - Saves any changes you have made and exits the dialog box.
Cancel - Ignores any changes you have made and exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
File
104 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File
The File > Steel Detailing Neutral File > Read command reads a formatted ASCII
file to add and update members in FrameWorks Plus. This command reads: Packet 00
- Title Packet, Packet 10 - Linear Member Packet, Packet 20 - Plate Element Packet,
Packet 22 - Hole Element Packet, and Packet 60 - Arc Member Packet. All other
packets in the Steel Detailing Neutral File (SDNF) are ignored. You also import a
steel detailing neutral file from a command line. For more information see SDNF
Import Key-in, page 35.
Caution
As with all operations that affect the model database, do not read a steel
detailing neutral file into your model until you have a current backup of
the model.
Notes
You must lease and install SDNF Import from Intergraph Process, Power
& Marine to activate this command.
Cutbacks are not read from the SDNF. You need to run a cutback
command in FrameWorks Plus to place cutbacks on members read in from
a SDNF.
The member Fabricator ID is not displayable inside FrameWorks Plus but
is stored in the model. The Fabricator ID will be written to any future
SDNFs that you create from the FrameWorks Plus model.
Plates and holes are placed using the defined vertices. The thickness, face,
and offset fields in the SDNF have no affect on plate or hole placement.
No names are applied to members read from a SDNF into a blank model.
Use Modify Name, page 297 to assign names to the new members.
When writing members with setback as percentage fireproofing to a Steel
Detailing Neutral File (SDNF), the software writes the equivalent setback
value to the SDNF instead of the percentage value. If the same member is
read back into the model from a SDNF, the software automatically
switches the fireproofing for the member from setback as percentage to
setback value. This can cause the member's fireproofing to appear to be
edited when for all practical purposes the member has not changed.
This command uses a configuration file, called sdnfin.ini, to define settings and other
default information. For more information about the configuration file, see Steel
Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 105

SDNF File - Specify the Steel Detailing Neutral File that you want to read into the
model. It is your responsibility to ensure that the neutral file that you are specifying
corresponds to the current model.
Map File - Specify the mapping file to use when reading the sections from the neutral
file. For more information, see Create Mapping File, page 499.
Add new linear members - Select to add linear members defined in the neutral file
that do not exist in the FrameWorks Plus model to the model.
Add new Solid members - Select to add solid members defined in the neutral file
that do not exist in the FrameWorks Plus model to the model.
Add new Hole members - Select to add holes defined in the neutral file that do not
exist in the FrameWorks Plus model to the model.
Edit existing Linear members - Select to update the attributes of linear members in
the FrameWorks Plus model with the corresponding linear member attributes defined
in the neutral file. Geometry changes defined in the neutral file for a member are not
applied to the member in the FrameWorks Plus model.
Edit existing Solid members - Select to update the attributes of solid members in the
FrameWorks Plus model with the corresponding solid member attributes defined in
the neutral file. Geometry changes defined in the neutral file for a member are not
applied to the member in the FrameWorks Plus model.
Edit existing Hole members - Select to update the attributes of hole in the
FrameWorks Plus model with the corresponding hole attributes defined in the neutral
File
106 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
file. Geometry changes defined in the neutral file for a hole are not applied to the hole
in the FrameWorks Plus model.
Delete existing Connection Parts - Select to delete existing connection parts in the
model when new connection parts exist in the SDNF file for a member.
Delete existing Connection Plates - Select to delete existing connection plates in the
model when new connection plates exist in the SDNF file for a member.
Totals - Displays the total number of members, solids, and holes that were added and
edited.
Preview - Processes the neutral file and creates a log file without actually adding or
editing the members in the model. The log file is written to the \int subfolder of the
project.
Highlight - Select which members to highlight in the model.
None - Do not highlight any members in the model.
To be modified - Highlight members in the model that will be modified.
The members have an attribute changed in the SDNF file compared to the
model.
To be deleted - Highlight connection parts and plates that will be deleted.
Not in SDNF File - Highlight members in the model that are not in the
SDNF file. The members may have been deleted by fabricator.
New in SDNF File - Highlight members in the SDNF file that are not in
the model.
Read - Scans the specified neutral file updating and adding members as needed. A
log file is written to the \int subfolder of the project.
Related Topics
Member Criteria, page 103
Read Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 104
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File, page 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Format, page 59
Write Steel Detailing Neutral File, page 58
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 107
Steel Detailing Neutral File Configuration File
When activating the File > Steel Detailing Neutral File > Read command or the
SDNF Import command line command, SDNF Import looks for the sdnfin.ini
configuration file in the folder defined by the FW_DATA variable in the config.dat
file for the project.
You can set the following parameters in the configuration file:
SDNFFile - Sets the full path to and filename of the Steel Detailing Neutral File that
you want to read in. This value appears in the SDNF File field of the dialog box.
SDNFUpdMembers - If set to 1, the software updates the attributes of linear
members in the FrameWorks Plus model with the corresponding linear member
attributes defined in the Steel Detailing Neutral File. If set to 0, members are not
updated. This value appears in the Edit existing members check box.
SDNFUpdSolids - If set to 1, the software updates the attributes of solid members in
the FrameWorks Plus model with the corresponding solid member attributes defined
in the Steel Detailing Neutral File. If set to 0, members are not updated. This value
appears in the Edit existing solid members check box.
SDNFAddMembers - If set to 1, the software adds linear members defined in the
Steel Detailing Neutral File that do not exist in the FrameWorks Plus model to the
model. If set to 0, members are not added to the model. This value appears in the Add
new linear members check box.
SDNFAddSolids - If set to 1, the software adds solid members or holes defined in the
Steel Detailing Neutral File that do not exist in the FrameWorks Plus model to the
model. If set to 0, solids are not added to the model. This value appears in the Add
new solid/hole members check box.
verbose - Set the amount of detail written to the log file.
Verbose=0x01; writes all interactive output is written to the log file.
Verbose=0x08; the configuration file is copied to the log file
Verbose=0x10; the Steel Detailing Neutral File is copied to the log file.
Verbose=0x20; reports each member that is read to the log file.
Verbose=0xFF; turns off all flags.
Related Topics
Packet 00 - Title Packet Version 3.0, page 74
Packet 10 - Linear Member Packet Version 3.0, page 75
Packet 20 - Plate Element Packet Version 3.0, page 82
Packet 22 - Hole Element Packet Version 3.0, page 88
Packet 30 - Member Loads Packet Version 3.0, page 92
Packet 40 - Connection Details Packet Version 3.0, page 94
Packet 50 - Grid Packet Version 3.0, page 95
Packet 60 - Arc Member Packet Version 3.0, page 96
File
108 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Write CSD File
The File > CSD > Write command writes a structural model created in FrameWorks
Plus to a Common Structural Database (CSD) file. The CSD file is a binary file that
contains geometric and property data for the structure's physical members. The CSD
file is used to translate a single model or an entire structural project from one product
to another. You can also use the CSD to transfer members between FrameWorks Plus
models in the same or different projects.
The CSD file format is used by several of Intergraph Corporation's structural
products, including Structural Modeling System (SMS) and MicasPlus ModelDraft.
In addition, certain other third party and in-house developed software packages can
create CSD files.
If different model partitions are attached to the model, these members can be
optionally written to the CSD file along with members in the local model.
Note
Arc and solid members are not supported by the CSD and are therefore not
written to the CSD file.

CSD File Name - Specifies the name of the file to create. The default is
modname.blu, where modname is the name of your active model. The file is created
in the project's interface folder (\int). The .blu extension is the file naming convention
used by the Intergraph products.
Model Origin - You can redefine the model's origin for members written to the CSD
file, if necessary. Three options are available: Coincident, By Point, and By Key-in.
If Coincident, the CSD file members will have identical coordinates to the current
model. Using By Point or By Key-in allows you to translate or shift the model such
that the (0,0,0) origin of the CSD file will lie at a specified point in the local model.
If the By Point option is selected, FrameWorks Plus will prompt Enter Model
Origin. Enter a data point in any view at the location you want to be the model
origin. The specified point is reflected in the X, Y, and Z fields.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 109
The By Key-in option allows you to type the X, Y, and Z values manually.
X: Y: Z: - These key-in fields specify (or modify) the origin to be used for the
members in the CSD file. If Model Origin is set to Coincident, these fields are
disabled.
Write Attached Model Data - If there are any attached model partitions, you can
also write the member data from the attached partitions to the CSD file by setting this
toggle on. This item is disabled if there are no attached partitions.
OK - Writes the CSD file as defined to the project's \int directory. An alert box
displays the number of members written to the CSD file.
Cancel - Dismisses the dialog box without writing the CSD file.
Related Topics
Read CSD File, page 110
Write CSD File, page 108
File
110 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Read CSD File
The File > CSD > Read command imports, or reads in, the model in a Common
Structural Database (CSD) file into the active model. The CSD file format is used by
several of Intergraph Corporation's structural products, including Structural Modeling
System (SMS) and MicasPlus ModelDraft. In addition, certain other third-party
software packages can read CSD files.
If you are reading a CSD file created from a FrameWorks Plus or MicasPlus
ModelDraft model that used a User Section Library, be sure to attach that User
Section Library before reading in the CSD file.

CSD File - Specifies the name of the CSD file to import. It can be entered by keying
in the CSD file name or by selecting it from the Files list box.
Directory - Identifies the folder where the CSD files, listed in the Files list box, are
located. The default folder is the project's interface folder. You can change folders by
selecting another folder in the Directories list box.
Files - Displays all files found in the specified folder that match the type criteria.
Clicking on any file name places it in the CSD File field. Double-clicking selects and
accepts the file name and begins the read CSD process.
Directories - Displays all parent folders and subfolders, as well as disk drives that are
accessible from the current folder. Double-clicking on one of the listed folders (or
drives) makes it the active folder.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 111
List Files of Type - Limits the number of files displayed in the Files list box. The
default type is *.blu, which lists all files with an extension of .blu.
Model Origin - Redefines the model origin in the CSD file to be read. This feature
can be used to align models that were created with different coordinate systems.
Three options are available: By Key-in, By Point, and Coincident.
If Coincident, no adjustment is made to the data in the CSD file, and the
(0,0,0) origin point of the imported model is placed at the origin of the
active model.
The By Key-in and By Point options allow you to specify a specific point
in the active design file to which the imported model is translated. If By
Point, you are prompted for a data point to specify the origin. The By Key-
in option simply allows you to type the X, Y, and Z values for the origin
(in Master Units).
OK - FrameWorks Plus reads in all members contained in the selected CSD file and
creates the members in the local model database using the geometry and member
properties defined in the CSD. If the imported members fall within the range of any
active model view(s), they are displayed as they are read in. When the operation is
completed, FrameWorks Plus displays the number of members read in.
Cancel - Exits the command without reading the CSD file.
Related Topics
Read CSD File, page 110
Write CSD File, page 108
File
112 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Analysis
The File > Analysis command is the interface to take the active FrameWorks Plus
model into a third-party analysis and design software package. The software package
you are using is defined when you create the model, but can be changed using the 3rd
Party Software command. Only that software's write and read commands display
under the File > Analysis menu.
Write GTSTRUDL Input
The File > Analysis > Write GTSTRUDL Input command activates the Create
GTSTRUDL Input dialog box.
FrameWorks Plus provides a two-way interface to the GTSTRUDL structural
analysis and design product. FrameWorks Plus uses the member property and
geometric data in the model database to create the ASCII input file for the
GTSTRUDL program. You can edit the input file using a standard text editor if
needed.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not write arc or solid members out to the
GTSTRUDL input deck. Tapered members are conservatively written as
prismatic with the smallest A
x
.
In creating the input file, FrameWorks Plus must first "split" the physical members in
the model into the analytical members used by the finite-element analysis program.
Many options are available for creating certain types of data in the GTSTRUDL input
file. These are controlled using the various items on the GTSTRUDL interface dialog
boxes, as described below. You can create the input file for the whole FrameWorks
Plus model, a selected portion of the model, or for an entire project (by attaching
other model partitions).
Note
All attached models must have GTSTRUDL as their 3rd Party Software
and use the same GTSTRUDL Design Code; otherwise FrameWorks Plus
will not let you write the input deck.
Caution
To ensure that beta angles are correctly represented in the analysis input
deck, do not use the Modify Reflect command to rotate members. Instead
you should use the Modify Orientation Vector command to properly
orient a member. The beta angle calculation for single angles is based on
the arbitrary X and Y-axes and not the principal axes of the cross section.
GTSTRUDL use the principal axes in beta angle specification. The
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 113
FrameWorks Plus calculated beta angle would not agree if you use the
Modify Reflect command.
At your option, you can also create a check plot of the analytical element and joint
(node) ID numbers. This check plot consists of line and text graphics, created on the
levels that you specify. These graphics are also graphic grouped together for easier
manipulation, deletion, and so forth.

Model Type - Defines the structure type to be analyzed as Space Frame.
Length Units - You can create the input geometry information using any of the
following length units: Feet, Inches, Meters, Centimeters, and Millimeters. The
selected length units can be different from the model length units.
Force Units - Supported Force Units include: Pounds, Kips, Newtons, and
KiloNewtons (KN). The selected force units can be different from the model force
units.
Coordinate System - GTSTRUDL users traditionally refer to the Y-axis as vertical,
whereas MicroStation, FrameWorks Plus, and most other 3D CAD products use the
Z-axis as the vertical. Due to the definition of the member orientation Beta Angle in
GTSTRUDL, the use of the Z-axis as vertical results in non-zero beta angles for
many of the horizontal beam and brace members. Although mathematically correct,
this can be a source of confusion when the input and/or output data is analyzed.
Therefore, FrameWorks Plus allows you to transform the Z-axis vertical geometry
into the GTSTRUDL convention (Y-axis vertical) so that the beta angles appear as
File
114 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
expected by setting this option to Y-vertical. If this is set to Z-vertical, no
transformation of the geometry takes place.
Model Origin - You can shift the model to a specified origin point by setting the
Model Origin option button to By Point or By Key-in. The By Point option prompts
for a data point in the design file to become the (0,0,0) origin point for the input
geometry. The By Key-in option allows you to type the needed X, Y, and Z values in
the key-in fields below (in Master Units). If set to Coincident, no translation of the
geometry is performed.
Use Mapping File - If on, FrameWorks Plus uses a predefined ASCII file that you
specify to swap FrameWorks Plus section names in the input file with section names
used by GTSTRUDL. By using a mapping file, you greatly reduce the possibility of
getting "section not found" errors when opening the input file in GTSTRUDL. The
mapping file is created using Create Mapping File, page 499.
Note
You are responsible for verifying and maintaining the GTSTRUDL
section names in the mapping file.
Include - If set to All Members, FrameWorks Plus includes all members in the active
model in the input deck, as well as members from any attached model partitions if the
Include Attached Models toggle is on. If set to Selection Set, only members in the
active selection set are included.
Use Selection Filter - The criteria defined in the Selection Filter dialog box are used
to filter out specific elements if this toggle is on. This filter applies to both All
Members and Selection Set groups. For more information, see Select Filter Settings,
page 151.
Include Attached Models - If on, FrameWorks Plus includes members from any
attached model partitions in the input file.
Define Groups - If on, FrameWorks Plus writes group information to the input deck.
You can write groups based on member types, FrameWorks Plus Named Groups, or
both. For more information, see Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117.
Analytical Group for each Named Group - If on, FrameWorks Plus writes an
analytical group in the input deck for every FrameWorks Plus Named Group in the
model. The Define Groups option must be on before you can select this option.
File Name - Type the name of the input file to create. By default, the model name
(with no extension) is used. Any valid file name is acceptable. FrameWorks Plus
creates the input file in the interface folder (\int) for the current project.
Title - The job title is used by GTSTRUDL as an identifier for the problem to be run
and appears on all printed output information.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 115
Group Physical Members - If on, FrameWorks Plus creates define group records in
the input that instruct the GTSTRUDL program to treat the grouped analytical
elements as a physical member. That is, all grouped elements are assigned a single
section size during the Member Selection (design) procedure. Member groups are
formed for all analytical elements derived from a single physical member in the
model.
FrameWorks Plus gives a unique physical member name (xxxyyyyy) to each member
when it is created. (Where xxx is the model ID and the yyyyy is the member ID.)
Physical member IDs in FrameWorks Plus never change. This means that the
GTSTRUDL group name does not change from one run to another even if model was
modified between runs.
Write Analytical Information - If on, FrameWorks Plus writes the loads, design
parameters, member releases, and member supports defined in the model to the input
file.
Non-AISC Sections - Specifies how you want non-AISC sections written to the
GTSTRUDL input deck.
Export by Property - Writes the non-AISC section to the input deck as a
prismatic member. All properties of the prismatic member are also written
to the input deck.
Export by Name - Writes the non-AISC section name to the input deck as
well as the section table name. The section's properties are not written to
the input deck.
Echo Input Data - This toggle allows you to create the GTSTRUDL LISTON
command.
Print Joint Coordinates - If on, FrameWorks Plus generates the print joint
coordinates statement in the input file.
Print Member Information - If on, FrameWorks Plus creates the print member
incidences and the print member properties records.
Create Check Plot - This toggle enables or disables the creation of check plot
graphics denoting the analytical element and node ID numbers. You can define the
level and symbology of the check plot graphics using the Symbology pulldown menu
at the top of the dialog box.
Note
Check plot graphics are always created as a graphic group. In general, you
should create a check plot each time you write a new GTSTRUDL input
file, as the node and element IDs are regenerated with every write
operation.
File
116 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
You can delete check plots from previous runs using the MicroStation delete
command.
OK - FrameWorks Plus processes the data for the selected group of members and
creates the input file for GTSTRUDL in the project's interface folder.
Additionally, FrameWorks Plus creates a binary map file that is used by FrameWorks
Plus when the results of the GTSTRUDL design process are read back into the model.
This file is also created in the interface folder, using the same name as the input file
with a .map extension.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 117
Add Groups to Input Deck
The Add Groups to Input Deck dialog box defines which members you want to
write as a group to the input deck. You can activate this dialog box by selecting
Define Groups on the main dialog box, and then clicking Select.
Members you define in the Contents area of the main dialog box (using the Include,
Use Selection Filter, and Include Attached Models options) are available for
writing out to a group. Using the Add Groups to Input Deck dialog box, you filter
all the available members by member type and/or Named Group membership to
define the group or groups for the input deck.

Member Type - Set On to filter available members for the group by member type. If
Off, available members are not filtered by member type. If On, you must select one
or more member types to filter by.
Beams - Filters available members by the beam member type. This option is only
available if you set Member Type to On.
Horizontal Braces - Filters available members by the horizontal brace member type.
This option is only available if you set Member Type to On.
Columns - Filters available members by the column member type. This option is only
available if you set Member Type to On.
Vertical Braces - Filters available members by the vertical brace member type. This
option is only available if you set Member Type to On.
File
118 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Named Groups - Set On to filter available members for the group by membership in
FrameWorks Plus Named Groups. If Off, available members are not filtered by
Named Groups. If On, you must select one or more Named Groups to filter by.
Group Name - Specifies the group name to write to the input deck. The group name
is limited to eight characters because of analysis package limitations.
Apply - Saves the group you defined.
OK - Saves the group you defined and exits the dialog box. All groups that you
define are lost when you exit FrameWorks Plus.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without saving any groups you may have created.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 119
Read GTSTRUDL Results
The File > Analysis > Read GTSTRUDL Results command reads in the results of
the member selection (design) process and automatically updates the model database.
For this procedure to work correctly, follow these steps:
1. Build the structural model using FrameWorks Plus' modeling commands.
2. Apply analytical attributes such as load cases, loads, design parameters, releases,
and support reactions using the various FrameWorks Plus commands.
3. Create a GTSTRUDL input file using the Write GTSTRUDL Input command.
Refine your analytical model, if required, using a standard text editor.
4. Run the GTSTRUDL program from the interface directory (\int) of the project
(the directory in which the GTSTRUDL input and map file were created).
GTSTRUDL creates a .dbx file by the same name as the input file. Verify that this
file, called the analysis results file, is in the interface directory.
Note
You cannot make geometry changes while in GTSTRUDL if you want
to update your FrameWorks Plus model with the resulting section
sizes.
5. Run the Read GTSTRUDL Results command to update the model with any
modified section sizes.
Errors encountered when reading the map file are reported in an .err file in the
project's \int directory.
Use Mapping File
After selecting the map file, you are asked if you want to use a mapping file to swap
GTSTRUDL section names in the map file with section names used by FrameWorks
Plus. By using a mapping file, you greatly reduce the possibility of getting "section
not found" errors. The mapping file is created using Create Mapping File, page 499.
Note
You are responsible for verifying and maintaining the GTSTRUDL
section names in the mapping file.
The section sizes from the results files are compared to the current member sizes in
the model database. All members that have changed sizes as a result of the design
process are then modified in the model database. The members highlight in all model
views. When the process is completed, an informational Alert Box displays with a
message indicating how many members were updated from the design results.
File
120 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Files - Specifies the map file name associated with the GTSTRUDL input and results
files. Either type the file name or select the file from the list box. The list box displays
the files in the active directory that match the List Files of Type setting. Single
clicking on any file name selects that file. Double-clicking selects and accepts the file
for opening.
Directories - Identifies the directory where the models listed in the Files list box are
located. The default directory is the project's interface directory. You can change
directories by double-clicking one of the listed directories and by using the Drives
pulldown.
List Files of Type - Limits the files displayed in the Files list box. The default filter is
*.map, which lists all files with an extension of .map.
Drives - Displays all available drives (both local and network) for your computer.
OK - Reads the selected map file. FrameWorks Plus first verifies that a valid analysis
results file related to the selected map file exists and that the map and results files
correspond with the active FrameWorks Plus model. Errors encountered when
reading the map file are reported in an .err file in the project's \int directory.
Cancel - Dismisses the dialog box without reading the selected file.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 121
Write STAAD Input
The File > Analysis > Write STAAD Input command activates the Create STAAD
Input dialog box.
FrameWorks Plus includes a two-way interface to the STAAD structural analysis and
design product. FrameWorks Plus uses the member property and geometric data in
the model database to create the ASCII input file for the STAAD program. You can
edit the input file using a standard text editor.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not write arc or solid members out to the STAAD
input deck.
In creating the input file, FrameWorks Plus must first "split" the physical members in
the model into the analytical members used by the finite-element analysis program.
Many options are available for creating certain types of data in the STAAD input file.
You can create the input file for the whole FrameWorks Plus model, a selected
portion of the model, or for an entire project by attaching other model partitions.
Note
All attached models must have STAAD as their 3rd Party Software and
use the same STAAD Design Code; otherwise FrameWorks Plus will not
let you write the input deck.
Caution
To ensure that beta angles are correctly represented in the analysis input
deck, do not use Modify Reflect to rotate members. Instead you should
use Modify Orientation Vector to properly orient a member. The beta
angle calculation for single angles is based on the arbitrary X and Y-axes
and not the principal axes of the cross section. STAAD use the principal
axes in beta angle specification. The FrameWorks Plus calculated beta
angle would not agree if you use the Modify Reflect command.
At your option, you can also create a check plot of the analytical element and joint
(node) ID numbers. This check plot consists of line and text graphics created on the
levels that you specify. These graphics are also graphic grouped together for easier
manipulation, deletion, and so forth.
File
122 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Problem Type - Defines the structure type to be analyzed as Space Frame.
Length Units - You can create the input geometry information using any of the
following length units: Feet, Inches, Meters, Centimeters, and Millimeters. The
selected length units can be different from the model length units.
Force Units - Supported Force Units include: Pounds, Kips, Newtons, and
KiloNewtons (KN).
Coordinate System - STAAD users traditionally refer to the Y-axis as vertical,
whereas MicroStation, FrameWorks Plus, and most other 3D CAD products use the
Z-axis as the vertical. Due to the definition of the member orientation Beta Angle in
STAAD, the use of the Z-axis as vertical results in non-zero beta angles for many of
the horizontal beam and brace members. Although mathematically correct, this
anomaly can be a source of confusion when the input and/or output data is examined.
Therefore, FrameWorks Plus allows you to transform the Z-axis vertical geometry
into the STAAD convention (Y-axis vertical) so that the beta angles appear as
expected by setting this option button to Y-vertical. If this is set to Z-vertical, no
transformation of the geometry takes place.
Model Origin - You can shift the model to a specified origin point by setting the
Model Origin option button to By Point or By Key-in. The By Point option prompts
you for a data point in the design file to become the (0,0,0) origin point for the input
geometry. The By Key-in option allows you to type the needed X, Y, and Z values in
the key-in fields (in Master Units). For example, if the structure is located at 100,
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 123
100, 100 and you want the input deck to be generated at 0, 0, 0, then you need to type
X=-100, Y=-100, Z=-100. You are entering the delta between the origins.
If set to Coincident, no translation of the geometry is performed.
Use Mapping File - If on, FrameWorks Plus uses a predefined ASCII file that you
specify to swap FrameWorks Plus section names in the input file with section names
used by STAAD. By using a mapping file, you greatly reduce the possibility of
getting "section not found" errors when opening the input file in STAAD. The
mapping file is created using Create Mapping File, page 499.
Note
You are responsible for verifying and maintaining the STAAD section
names in the mapping file.
Include - If set to All Members, FrameWorks Plus includes all members in the active
model in the STAAD input deck, as well as members from any attached model
partitions if the Include Attached Models toggle is on. If set to Selection Set, only
members in the active selection set are included.
Use Selection Filter - The criteria defined in the Selection Filter dialog box are used
to filter out specific elements if this toggle is on. This filter applies to both All
Members and Selection Set groups. For more information, Select Filter Settings, page
151.
Include Attached Models - If on, FrameWorks Plus includes members from any
attached model partitions in the STAAD input file.
File Name - Type the name of the input file being created. By default, the model
name (with a .std extension) is used. Any valid file name is acceptable. The file is
created in the project's interface directory (\int).
Title - The job title is used by STAAD as an identifier for the problem to be run and
appears on all printed output information.
Group Physical Members - If on, FrameWorks Plus creates group member records
in the input file that instruct the STAAD program to treat the grouped analytical
elements as a "physical member". That is, all grouped elements are assigned a single
section size during the member selection (design) procedure. Member groups are
formed for all analytical elements derived from a single physical member in the
model.
Write Analytical Information - If on, FrameWorks Plus writes any loads, member
releases, and member supports defined in the model to the ASCII input file.
Width - Specifies either 72-column or 118-column width for the STAAD ASCII
input file.
File
124 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Echo Input Data - This toggle creates the STAAD command record SET ECHO ON
or SET ECHO OFF.
Print Joint Coordinates - If on, FrameWorks Plus generates the print joint
coordinates record in the input file.
Print Member Information - If on, FrameWorks Plus creates the print member
information and the print member properties records.
Create Check Plot - This toggle enables or disables the creation of check plot
graphics that denote the analytical element and node ID numbers. You can define the
level and symbology for the check plot graphics using the Symbology pulldown menu
at the top of the dialog box.
Note
Check plot graphics are always created as a graphic group. In general, you
should create a check plot each time you write a new STAAD input file, as
the node and element IDs are regenerated with every write operation.
OK - FrameWorks Plus processes the data for the selected group of members and
creates the input file for STAAD in the project's interface directory. Additionally,
FrameWorks Plus creates a binary map file that is used by FrameWorks Plus when
the results of the STAAD design process are read back into the model. This file is
created in the interface directory using the same name as the input file with a .map
extension.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Write STAAD Input, page 121
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 125
Read STAAD Results
The File > Analysis > Read STAAD Results command reads in the results of a
STAAD member selection (design) process and automatically updates the model
database. For this procedure to work correctly, follow these steps:
1. Build the structural model using FrameWorks Plus' modeling commands.
2. Apply the analytical attributes such as load cases, load combinations, loads,
design and code parameters, releases, and support reactions using the various
FrameWorks Plus commands.
3. Create a STAAD input file for the entire model or a selected portion of the model
using the Create STAAD Input command. Using a standard text editor, specify
additional analytical processing options if required.
4. Run the STAAD program from the interface folder (\int) of the project (the folder
in which the STAAD input and map file were created). STAAD creates a .dbs file
by the same name as the input file. Verify that this file, called the analysis results
file, is in the interface folder.
Note
You cannot make geometry changes while in STAAD if you want to
update your FrameWorks Plus model with the resulting section sizes.
5. Run the Read STAAD Results command to update the model with any modified
section sizes.
Errors encountered when reading the map file are reported in an .err file in the
project's \int folder.
Use Mapping File
After selecting the map file, you are asked if you want to use a mapping file to swap
STAAD section names in the map file with section names used by FrameWorks Plus.
By using a mapping file, you greatly reduce the possibility of getting "section not
found" errors. The mapping file is created using Create Mapping File, page 499.
Note
You are responsible for verifying and maintaining the STAAD section
names in the mapping file.
The section sizes from the results files are compared to the current member sizes in
the model database. All members that have changed sizes as a result of the design
process are then modified in the model database. The members highlight in all model
views. When the process is completed, an informational Alert Box displays with a
message indicating how many members were updated from the design results.
File
126 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Files - Specifies the map file name associated with the STAAD input and results files.
Either type the file name or select the file from the list box. The list box displays the
files in the active folder that match the List Files of Type setting. Single clicking on
any file name selects that file. Double-clicking selects and accepts the file for
opening.
Directories - Identifies the folder where the models listed in the Files list box are
located. The default folder is the project's interface folder. You can change folders by
double-clicking on one of the listed folders and by using the Drives pulldown.
List Files of Type - Limits the files displayed in the Files list box. The default filter is
*.map, which lists all files with an extension of .map.
Drives - Displays all available drives (both local and network) for your computer.
OK - Reads in the selected STAAD file. FrameWorks Plus first verifies that a valid
analysis results file related to the selected map file exists, and that the map and results
files correspond with the active FrameWorks Plus model.
Errors encountered when reading the map file are reported in an .err file in the
project's \int folder.
Cancel - Exits the command.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Write STAAD Input, page 121
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 127
LARSA
The File > Analysis > Read/Write LARSA commands activate the interface to
LARSA. This interface is supplied by LARSA, Inc. and is not supported by
Intergraph. Contact LARSA at:
Telephone: 1-800-LARSA-01 or 1-212-736-4326
FAX: 1-631-206-3610
Web: http://www.LarsaUSA.com
Email: info@LarsaUSA.com
Address:
LARSA, Inc.
Melville Corporate Center
105 Maxess Road; Suite S-124
Melville, New York 11747 USA
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Analysis, page 112
LARSA, page 127
RAM
The File > Analysis > Read/Write RAM commands activates theinterface to RAM.
This interface is supplied by Ram International and is notsupported by Intergraph.
Contact Ram International at:
Telephone: 1-800-726-7789 or 1-760-431-3610
FAX: 1-760-431-5214
Web: http://www.ramint.com
Email: sales@ramint.com
Address:
Ram International
2744 Loker Avenue West
Carlsbad, CA 92008 USA
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Analysis, page 112
RAM, page 127
File
128 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
SAP2000
The File > Analysis > Activate SAP2000 Interface command activates the interface
to Computers and Structures' SAP2000 application. This interface is supplied by
Computers and Structures and is not supported by Intergraph. Contact Computers and
Structures at:
Telephone: 1-510-845-2177
FAX: 1-510-845-4096
Web: http://www.csiberkeley.com
Email: info@csiberkeley.com
Address:
Computers and Structures, Inc.
1995 University Avenue, Suite 540
Berkeley, CA 94704 USA
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Analysis, page 112
SAP2000, page 128
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 129
Import Analytical Deck
The File > Import Analytical Deck command reads in models from the native
STAAD and GTSTRUDL format ASCII decks into the FrameWorks Plus model. All
members from the ASCII deck are read into the active model if they cause
overlapping members in the model or not. We recommend you use the File > Verify
Model command after importing an analytical deck. For more information, see Verify
Model, page 142.
Notes
The GTSTRUDL and STAAD ASCII decks must be the simplified input
file format. Refer to the GTSTRUDL or STAAD documentation for
information on how to create a simplified input file.
Joint Coordinates from STAAD Pro must be written using the individual
lines format. You can set this in STAAD Pro using the File > Configure
command, and then select the Input File Format tab.
FrameWorks Plus does not read arc members from GSTRUDL's input file.
The Regional Settings of the computer running FrameWorks Plus must be
the same as the Regional Settings of the computer that created the STAAD
file.
The following analytical deck commands are recognized:
GTSTRUDL STAAD
units UNITS {unit length} UNIT
nodes JOINT COORDINATES (No
generation supported)
JOINT COORDINATES
(No generation supported)
members MEMBER INCIDENCES (No
generation supported) DEFINE
GROUP
MEMBER INCIDENCES
(No generation supported)
member properties MEMBER PROPERTIES
TABLE
MEMBER PROPERTIES
TABLE
member end
releases
MEMBER RELEASES FORCE
and MOMENT
MEMBER RELEASES and
MEMBER TRUSS
member
orientation
statements
CONSTANTS BETA CONSTANTS BETA
materials MATERIAL {STEEL /
CONCRETE / ALUMINUM}
CONSTANT {STEEL /
CONCRETE /
ALUMINUM

File
130 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Note
FrameWorks Plus only supports the commands listed above. If unexpected
results occur, verify that the analytical file you are reading in only
contains the above commands.

Material grades are assigned based on material type with FrameWorks Plus assigning
steel members a grade of A36 and concrete members a grade of Fc_3. Analytical
member end releases are imported for the corresponding physical member. In general,
commands that reference entities must be after the entities have been declared in the
deck.
Analytical packages model member lines at the member's cross-section's centroid
(which corresponds to cardinal point 5 in FrameWorks Plus). When the members are
read into the FrameWorks Plus model, the members are assigned the default cardinal
point for the member type (defined
using Settings> Defaults> Linear
commands). For example, the default
cardinal point for beams is 8. All
beams read in from the input deck
will have a cardinal point of 8, not 5.
Vertical Axis - Specifies how the
vertical axis is defined in the ASCII
deck.
Models written from FrameWorks
Plus as Y vertical or modeled in
STAAD or GTSTRUDL using
defaults should be read as Z vertical.
Models written from FrameWorks
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 131
Plus with Z-axis vertical (no coordinate transformation) or modeled with Z vertical in
STAAD or GTSTRUDL should be read as is.
Import Horizontal As - Specifies if you want all horizontal members in the ASCII
deck to be imported as only beams, or imported as both beams and braces.
Beams -- All horizontal members are read as beams, regardless of their
orientation.
Beams and Braces -- FrameWorks Plus decides whether a horizontal
member is a beam or brace by reading the member orientation. If the
horizontal member lies along the X or Y-axis, the member is read as a
beam. If the horizontal member is not orthogonal to the X or Y-axis, it is
read as a brace.
The following example shows the two different settings. The left grouping was read
in as beams only. The right grouping was read in as beams and braces.

Default Section - Specifies a default section. Only the sections available in the active
FrameWorks Plus section library can be imported. Any deck members with sections
not found in the current section library are assigned this default section. The log file
contains a list of members to assign the default properties. For information on setting
the active section library, Section Library, page 55.
Origin X - Defines the X-axis coordinate of the new model origin.
Origin Y - Defines the Y-axis coordinate of the new model origin.
Origin Z - Defines the Z-axis coordinate of the new model origin.
Use Mapping File - If on, FrameWorks Plus uses a predefined ASCII file that you
specify to swap section names in the input file with section names used by
FrameWorks Plus. By using a mapping file, you greatly reduce the possibility of
File
132 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
getting "section not found" errors when opening the input file. The mapping file is
created using Create Mapping File, page 499.
Note
You are responsible for verifying and maintaining the section names in the
mapping file.
Logfile Name - Specifies the name and directory for the log file. The log file contains
important information about the import deck process, such as which member were
assigned default section properties and other information.
OK - Imports the deck using the parameters you have defined.
Cancel - Exits the command without importing the analytical deck.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Review Log File, page 485
Verify Model, page 142
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Write STAAD Input, page 121
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 133
Import ModelDraft File
The File > Import ModelDraft File command imports a MicasPlus ModelDraft
design file into FrameWorks Plus. This command only reads the design file; no other
ModelDraft project file is needed. We do recommend that you compress the
ModelDraft model before importing it. The elements in the ModelDraft design file
are read into the FrameWorks Plus model and converted to FrameWorks Plus
elements, with the exception of multi-section ModelDraft members, which are
converted to multiple FrameWorks Plus members with each having a corresponding
section size from the original member.
The following ModelDraft member attributes are dropped when the member is read
into FrameWorks Plus: fireproofing, status, assembly numbers, stiffener plate
linkages, PSD information, node information, the ModelDraft element ID, can data,
and buoyancy information.
ModelDraft members with multi-plane cutbacks (MPC), and members with tubular
cutbacks, are read into FrameWorks Plus with no cutbacks defined. Pipe sections with
planar cutbacks are read with cutbacks as defined in ModelDraft.
ModelDraft beams with cardinal points 11 through 15 are read into FrameWorks Plus
with a cardinal point of 8. ModelDraft columns with cardinal points 11 through 15 are
read into FrameWorks Plus with a cardinal point of 5. ModelDraft members with
cross-section rotations are read in with a rotation of 0. If a ModelDraft member
section is not in the active FrameWorks Plus section library, then FrameWorks Plus
defaults those members to W8X31.
ModelDraft members with a material assignment of "other" are read into
FrameWorks Plus with a material class of "other", even if the ModelDraft "other"
material is set to plastic.
FrameWorks Plus does not support material grade names that contain spaces. Be sure
to rename your material grades in ModelDraft to remove the space before importing
the model into FrameWorks Plus.
Before Using this Command
ModelDraft design file must be accessible by either mounting the CLIX workstation
through the network or by copying the design file to the local computer.
File
134 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Files (Name) - Specifies the name of the MicasPlus ModelDraft design file to import.
You can type the model name or select the model from the Files list.
Files (Listing) - Displays all files in the current directory that match the defined List
Files of Type.
Directories - Displays the current directory. You can change directories by double-
clicking in the Directories list box.
Directories (Listing) - Displays all available subdirectories and drives. Double-click
a drive or directory to change to that drive or directory.
List Files of Type - Specifies the filter to use on the files in the current directory.
Only files matching this filter display in the Files list. The default filter is *.dgn. To
display all files in the directory, use *.* as the filter.
OK - Imports the specified MicasPlus ModelDraft design file.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 135
Interference Checking
The File > Interference Checking command creates an interference envelope file.
This envelope file can be used with Intergraph's interference checking software. The
envelope file defines the volume of the graphic elements for clash checking. The
envelope file is saved to the current project's \frz directory and is named
modelname.env.
You can also create envelope files using a command line key-in. For more
information, see Command Prompt Commands, page 29.
Note
You must use the command-line key-in command to create envelope files
if you want to include attached model partitions in the envelope file. This
command only writes members from the active model to the envelope file.
See the PDS Interference Checker/Manager (PD_Clash) User's Guide for more
information on the interference checker program.
Notes
Planar cutbacks are not written to the envelope file.
SmartCuts are written to the envelope file.
Things to know about Solids and Holes
All solids are written to the envelope file.
Solids that are right-projected shapes are written as solid components. A
right-projected shape is a shape projected at a right angle (a cube is an
example of a right-projected shape). Fully contained elements inside a
solid component will cause a clash.
All slabs and walls without holes are right projected and are, therefore, written as
solid components.
Solids that are not right-projected shapes are written as "skinned"
components (a pyramid is an example of a solid that is not right-
projected). Fully contained elements inside a skinned component do not
cause a clash. Elements that break the skin will cause a clash.
All slabs and walls with holes are written as skinned even though they are right-
projected.
File
136 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Envelope File Name - Specifies the file name and directory for the envelope file. The
default name is the current model name with an .env extension. The file is placed in
the project's \frz subdirectory by default.
Select - Activates the Select Envelope File dialog box, which lets you select an
envelope file that was previously created that you want to replace.
Selection Criteria - Select which members are written to the envelope file. You can
specify that all members in the model are written to the envelope file or only those
members in the current selection set.
OK - Creates the envelope file and writes it to the specified directory.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Models Key-in, page 35
Create Drawing File Key-in, page 32
Create Envelope File Key-in, page 34
Create Model Key-in, page 30
Create Project Key-in, page 30
Create SmartPlant Review File Key-in, page 34
Create User Section Library Key-in, page 33
Interference Checking, page 135
SDNF Import Key-in, page 35
Update Clash Envelope Builder Files Key-in, page 38
Upgrade Project Key-in, page 38
Verify Model Key-in, page 37
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 137
PML Applications
The File > PML Applications command is used to select and run a Parametric
Modeling Language (PML) program. PMLs were originally written for Intergraph's
MicasPlus ModelDraft software.
Note
The prompt for a PML tutorial field does not display until after you have
entered a value in that field. To work around this limitation, select a field,
and then press ENTER. Read the prompt. Then type an appropriate value,
and press enter again.
The size of the PML file that can be read in and run is limited by your computer's
resources (physical memory and available memory). If you are having problems
running a large PML file, try the following:
Close all other applications on your computer to free memory.
Split the PML file into smaller PML files.
Add memory to your computer or use another computer with more
resources.
For more information on how to write PMLs, see PML Introduction in the
FrameWorks Plus Programmer's Reference Guide.

Files (Name) - Specifies the name of the PML file to run. You can type the PML file
name or select it from the Files list.
File
138 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Files (Listing) - Displays all files in the current directory that match the defined List
Files of Type.
Directories - Displays the name of the current directory.
Directories (Listing) - Displays all available subdirectories and drives. Double-click
a drive or directory to change to that drive or directory.
List Files of Type - Specifies the filter to use on the files in the current directory.
Only files matching this filter display in the Files list. The default filter is *.pml. To
display all files in the directory, use *.* as the filter.
OK - Runs the selected PML file.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
PML Applications, page 137
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 139
FPL Applications
The File > FPL Applications command is used to select and run a FrameWorks
Parametric Language (FPL) program. There are several FPLs delivered with
FrameWorks Plus. For more information on how to write FPLs, see FPL Introduction
in the FrameWorks Plus Programmer's Reference Guide.

Files (Name) - Specifies the name of the FPL program to run. You can type the FPL
file name or select it from the Files list.
Files (Listing) - Displays all files in the current directory that match the defined List
Files of Type.
Directories - Displays the name of the current directory.
Directories (Listing) - Displays all available subdirectories and drives. Double-click
a drive or directory to change to that drive or directory.
List Files of Type - Specifies the filter to use on the files in the current directory.
Only files matching this filter display in the Files list. The default filter is *.ma. To
display all files in the directory, use *.* as the filter.
OK - Runs the selected FPL file.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
FPL Applications, page 139
File
140 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Compress FrameWorks Plus Database
The File > Compress FW Database command removes deleted items from the
FrameWorks Plus database. The database files are copied to a \backup directory
(under the project's \mod directory) and renamed to include an "o" prefix before the
database is compressed. The MicroStation design file is also compressed.
FrameWorks Plus is automatically shutdown to compress the database files. After
compression is complete, you have the option to exit FrameWorks Plus entirely or
restart FrameWorks Plus.
Note
Large models (greater than 2,500 linear members) can take a few minutes
to compress.

Model - Displays the directory path to the model database being compressed.
Arc Members - Turn on to remove deleted arc member database entries.
Linear Members - Turn on to remove deleted beam, column, and brace database
entries.
Solid Members - Turn on to remove deleted slab, wall, and generic solid database
entries.
Code Parameters - Turn on to remove deleted code parameter database entries.
Design Parameters - Turn on to remove deleted design parameter database entries.
Model Views - Turn on to remove deleted model view database entries.
Frozen Views - Turn on to remove deleted frozen view database entries.
Linear Overrides - Turn on to remove deleted linear override database settings.
Solid Overrides - Turn on to remove deleted solid override database settings.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 141
Named Groups Symbology - Turn on to remove deleted named grouped symbology
settings.
All - Turns on all database entries for compression.
OK - Compresses the FrameWorks Plus database.
Cancel - Exits the command without compressing the database.
Related Topics
Attach Model, page 44
Compress FrameWorks Plus Database, page 140
Detach Model, page 46
Open Model, page 41
Verify Model, page 142
File
142 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Verify Model
The File > Verify Model command scans your model checking for zero length
members, overlapping members, and members with invalid sections. These invalid
member definitions can cause problems when writing your model out to an analysis
input deck file. In addition, FrameWorks Plus also optionally scans the model for
members that intersect solid members and gives you an option to create cutouts in the
solid member where the other member intersects. You can also run the verify model
process from a command line. For more information, see Verify Model Key-in, page
37.
Note
For larger models (greater than 1,500 linear members), the overlapping
members check can take several minutes to process.

Zero Length Members - Checks for FrameWorks Plus members with no length (the
member's start point and end point are the same point or almost the same point).
Action Option (Zero Length Members) - Defines the action to perform when zero
length members are found.
Delete Members -- Deletes the zero length members from the model.
Change Level -- Moves the zero length member to another level.
No Action - Report in Logfile -- Writes the member ID to the logfile
without changing the member.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 143
Tolerance - Defines at what point a member is considered a zero length member.
Any member shorter than the specified tolerance is considered a zero length member.
The Tolerance is specified in model units.
Level (Zero Length Members) - Specifies the level for zero length members. When
Action Option is set to Change Level, zero length members are moved to this level.
Overlapped Members - Checks for FrameWorks Plus members that overlap. For
linear and arc members, the check is for two or more members that occupy (or
overlap) the same co-linear space. This command does not find two linear members
that cross (clash) but are not co-linear.
For solid members, the check is for two or more solid members that occupy exactly
the same space. This command does not find two solid members that overlap but do
not have the exact same perimeter.
This command does not find linear members and solid members that overlap.
Action Option (Overlapped Members) - Defines the action to perform when
overlapped members are found.
Delete Members -- Deletes overlapping members using placement order
to decide which one to delete. The last member placed is deleted. The first
member to occupy the space remains in the model (it is not deleted).
Change Level -- Moves the overlapping members to another level.
No Action - Report in Logfile -- Writes overlapping member IDs to the
logfile without changing any members.
Set Tolerance to one UOR - Specifies that the tolerance should be set to one UOR.
Level (Overlapped Members) - Specifies the level for overlapping members. When
Action Option is set to Change Level, overlapping members are moved to this level.
Invalid Section Members - Checks for FrameWorks Plus members that have invalid
sections specified for them.
Action Options (Invalid Section Members) - Defines the action to perform when
members with invalid sections are found.
Delete Members -- Deletes the member with the invalid section from the
model.
Default Member -- Changes the member's section to the Default Section
defined below.
Change Level -- Moves the member with the invalid section to another
level.
No Action - Report in Logfile -- Writes the invalid section member's ID
to the logfile without changing the member.
File
144 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Default Section - Specifies the section to use when a member with an invalid section
is found. This option is only active when Action Option is set to Default Member.
Level (Invalid Section Members) - Specifies the level for members with invalid
sections. When Action Option is set to Change Level, members with invalid sections
are moved to this level.
Members Intersecting Solids - Checks for members that intersect solid members.
Action Options (Members Intersecting Solids) - Defines the action to perform
when members intersect solids.
Place Holes & Report -- Places a hole in the solid for the intersecting
member to pass through. The shape of the intersecting member is used as a
pattern for the solid's hole. The size of the hole will be the exact size of the
intersecting object unless you specify a Clearance value.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not include the thickness of PDS equipment
insulation (if any) when calculating the cutout size.
Place Holes, Sleeves, & Report -- Places a hole in the solid for the
intersecting member to pass through. If the intersecting member is round,
a pipe sleeve is also placed.
Note
FrameWorks Plus places a pipe sleeve only if the intersecting member
is perpendicular to the slab or solid. Members that intersect at an angle
will not have pipe sleeves placed.
No Action - Report in Logfile -- Writes the number of members that
intersect solids to the logfile.
Note
FrameWorks Plus redraws the solid each time a cutout is placed. If you
have a solid with several intersecting items, you can increase command
performance by dropping all of your FrameWorks Plus views using Drop
View, page 210.
Sleeve Type - Specifies the member type you want to use for the sleeve. FrameWorks
Plus uses the default section of the selected member type for the pipe sleeve section.
We recommend you place sleeves using cardinal point 1. This option is only available
if the Place Sleeve option is selected.
FrameWorks Plus Linear Members - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should only
place cutouts for FrameWorks Plus linear members that intersect a solid.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 145
Note
The section shape of the linear member must intersect both faces of the
solid for FrameWorks Plus to place a cutout. In addition, FrameWorks
Plus does not place cutouts for intersecting elements that would cause a
curvilinear cutout (such as an arc member).
MicroStation Solids, Surfaces, and Cones - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should
only place cutouts for MicroStation solid elements that intersect a solid.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not create cutouts for wedge, sphere, or torus
MicroStation shapes.
FrameWorks Plus Solid Members - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should only
place cutouts for FrameWorks Plus solids members that intersect a solid.
Overwrite Existing Cutout - Toggle on to override existing cutouts.
Include Member Fireproofing - Toggle on to include the thickness of member
fireproofing when calculating the cutout size.
Include Piping Insulation Thickness - Toggle on to include the thickness of piping
insulation when calculating the cutout size. The piping insulation does not need to be
graphically displayed in order to be used in the calculation.
Clearance - Specifies the distance between the inside of the cutout and the outside of
the item being cut around. This distance is added evenly to all sides of the item. If
you are placing a sleeve, the distance between the inside of the sleeve and the outside
of the pipe is the Clearance value.
Be careful when defining the Clearance value when cutouts will be created around
closed shapes such as I-section or channels. The Clearance is added evenly to all
sides of the shape. If you define a Clearance that is greater than half the distance
between sides of a closed shape, FrameWorks Plus will not place the cutout. For
example, the distance between an I-section's flanges is 8.5 inches. If you define a
Clearance greater than 4.25 inches, the cutout will not be placed.
Increment - Specifies the value by which to increment the cutout diameter around a
circular penetration (such as a pipe). For example, if you set the Increment to 2"
(inches), the cutout diameter is always divisible by 2 (2", 4", 6", 8", ... 22", 24", 26",
and so forth). Similarly, if you set the Increment to 3", the cutout diameter is always
divisible by 3 (3", 6", 9", 12", and so forth). Setting the Increment value to 0 causes
the cutout diameter to be the outside diameter of the penetrating object plus the
Clearance value, if any.
You can use the Increment Factor setting to control the rounding up or rounding
down of the cutout diameter to the next allowed size.
File
146 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Increment Factor - Specifies if the cutout is rounded up or rounded down to the next
Increment size. For example, you place a 10.5-inch pipe with 3-inch clearance and a
2-inch Increment. You can use this Increment Factor to control whether a cutout with
a 16" diameter or a cutout with an 18" diameter is placed.
If the Increment Factor is set to 0, the cutout is always rounded up to the next
increment divisible size. If the Increment Factor is set to 1, the cutout is always
rounded down to the next increment divisible size. Typically, you want to set the
Increment value to 0.5.
If the Increment Factor is between 0.01 and 0.99, FrameWorks Plus calculates
whether to round up or down based on the following algorithm.
1. Compute the cutout diameter by adding the outside diameter of the pipe with two
times the Clearance value. For example, if the pipe diameter is 10.875" and the
Clearance is set to 3", the cutout diameter would be 16.875" (10.875 + 2 x 3 =
16.875).
2. FrameWorks Plus reads the remainder (non-integer) part of the cutout diameter.
In this case, 0.875 inches.
3. Multiply the Increment and the Increment Factor then compare the results to the
remainder read in step 2. If the remainder is less than the calculation, round down.
If the remainder is greater than the calculation, round up. For this example, say
the Increment is set to 2". The following table shows the results of different
Increment Factors.

Remainder from
step 2
Increment X
Increment Factor
Resulting Action
0.875 2 x 0 = 0 0.875 greater than 0 so round cutout
diameter up to 18 inches
0.875 2 x 0.25 = 0.5 0.875 greater than 0.5 so round cutout
diameter up to 18 inches
0.875 2 x 0.5 = 1 0.875 less than 1 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches
0.875 2 x 0.75 = 1.5 0.875 less than 1.5 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches
0.875 2 x 1 = 2 0.875 less than 2 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches

Logfile - Specifies the folder and file name for the verify model log file.
OK - Starts the verify model process and writes the process information to the log
file. The log file automatically displays when the verify model process is complete.
Cancel - Exits the command without running the verify model process.
File
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 147
Related Topics
Attach Model, page 44
Compress FrameWorks Plus Database, page 140
Delete Member, page 338
Detach Model, page 46
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Member, page 320
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Modify Section, page 295
Modify Solid Geometry, page 292
Modify Thickness, page 291
Move Member, page 319
Open Model, page 41
Place Holes, page 284
Review Log File, page 485
Solid Cutouts, page 286
Verify Model, page 142
Save FWP Settings
The File > Save FW Settings command stores the current values of the FrameWorks
Plus operating parameters, including active view information, default member
parameters, and so forth in the FrameWorks Plus model database. It is similar to the
MicroStation Save Settings command. FrameWorks Plus restores all operation
parameters to their last saved values when it is restarted.
Note
When working with large models, we do not recommend saving settings
when you have a 3D Model View set. The calculations necessary to
automatically set that 3D view when you open the model can take several
minutes. Be sure to use the Drop View command to deactivate any 3D
Model View before Saving FW Settings.
File
148 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Exit
The File > Exit command exits FrameWorks Plus without exiting MicroStation. If
you want to save all current FrameWorks Plus operating parameters, use the Save
FWP Settings command before selecting Exit. You do not have to exit FrameWorks
Plus before exiting MicroStation; FrameWorks Plus automatically exits when
MicroStation exits.
Dismissing the FrameWorks Plus command window does not exit FrameWorks Plus.
You can re-activate the FrameWorks Plus command window by keying in
frameworks in the MicroStation command window.
Related Topics
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 149
Settings
FrameWorks Plus uses a large set of operating parameters which are loaded at start-
up from the FrameWorks Plus model database. You can modify these parameters
with the commands described in this section. To save or store these values back to the
model database, use Save FWP Settings, page 147.

Settings Commands
Bell, page 150
Confirm Select Set, page 150
Select Filter Settings, page 151
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Orientation, page 156
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
AutoName, page 172
Levels, page 174
Member Symbology, page 177
Load Symbology, page 178
Dynamics, page 181
AutoSnap, page 182
3rd Party Software, page 183
Settings
150 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Bell
The Settings > Bell command turns on or off the audible bell when FrameWorks Plus
issues a warning or error message. FrameWorks Plus uses one bell sound when a
warning condition occurs and two sounds when an error message is displayed. There
is no bell for information messages.
An Alert Box is a dialog box used by both FrameWorks Plus and MicroStation to
alert you of an error condition, to warn of possible problems or a dangerous situation,
or to supply information about a completed process.
Confirm Select Set
The Settings > Confirm Select Set command turns on or off operator confirmation
before a selection set is processed. If on, when a command using a selection set is
activated, FrameWorks Plus displays an Alert Box showing the number of elements
in the selection set.

This safety feature prevents inadvertent operations on selection sets that may have
been left over from a previous operation. If this parameter is off, no Alert Box
appears, and the command processes the elements without notification.
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 151
Select Filter Settings
The Settings > Select Filter > Settings command defines filtering criteria. You can
use these criteria to define a specific group of elements for processing by any
FrameWorks Plus selection set operation.
For example, by using this filter, it is possible to change the section sizes of all beams
of class 0 (primary members) and name B18. To accomplish this, you would first
build a selection set including all members in the model (by fence select method, or
using the MicroStation Select All command under the Edit pulldown menu). Then,
define three filter criteria:
Member Type = Beam
Class = 0
Name = B18
With the Selection Filter activated, you would then select the Modify Section
command. FrameWorks Plus would examine the selection set, discard all members
not matching all three active filter criteria, and then process the remaining elements.

Filter On - Turns the filter on or off. If on, the indicator box on the Settings
pulldown menu is marked as on. If off, all further settings are ignored.
Settings
152 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Clear - Clears all current filter criteria by turning each attribute off.
Type - On - Turns on the member type filter criterion. When on, members in a
selection set are compared to this criterion.
Type - Comparator - Specifies the mode of comparison for the member type
criterion. Valid comparator values are = (equal) and != (not equal).
Type (value) - Specifies one of the seven FrameWorks Plus member types; Beam,
Column, Vertical Brace, Horizontal Brace, Slab, Wall, or Solid; to use in the
comparison.
Name - On - Turns on the member name filter criterion. When on, members in a
selection set are compared to this criterion.
Name - Comparator - Specifies the mode of comparison for the member name
criterion. Valid comparator values are = (equal) and != (not equal).
Name (value) - Specifies the name to which the members are compared. You may
also use the * wildcard in the name criterion (for example, B1*).
Section - On - Turns on the section size filter criterion. When on, members in a
selection set are compared to this criterion.
Section - Comparator - Specifies the mode of comparison for the section size
criterion. Valid comparator values are = (equal) and != (not equal).
Section (value) - Specifies the section to which the members are compared. You can
also use the * wildcard in the section criterion (for example, W12*).
Class - On - Turns on the member class filter criterion. When on, members in a
selection set are compared to this criterion.
Class - Comparator - Specifies the mode of comparison for the member class
criterion. Valid comparator values are = (equal), != (not equal), < (less than), <= (less
than or equal), > (greater than), and >= (greater than or equal).
Class (value) - Specifies the numeric member class, which ranges from 0 to 9.
Named Groups - On - Turns on the named groups filter criterion. When on,
members in a named group are compared to this criterion.
Named Groups - Comparator - Specifies the mode of comparison for the named
group. Valid comparator values are = (member of), != (not member of).
Select - Defines which named group to use for the selection filter.
Apply - Activates the filter criteria as currently defined and leaves the dialog box
active.
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 153
OK - Activates the filter criteria as currently defined and dismisses the dialog box.
Cancel - Ignores changes to the filter definition and dismisses the dialog box.
Settings
154 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Member Attributes
The Settings > Member > Attributes command displays and modifies the active
placement member-attributes. The dialog box displays the current placement
attributes for the active member type. For example, when the Place Beam command
is selected, the active beam placement attributes are displayed in this dialog box.
These attributes are a part of the FrameWorks Plus operating parameters, which can
be stored in the model database with the Save FWP Settings command. These
attributes are identical to those established using the Defaults Linear Members
command. However, the Member Attributes dialog box is a convenient way to
interactively modify the placement attributes while placing members.

Type - Displays the current active member type. This field, and the other parameters,
changes when a placement command for a different member type is chosen.
Start Section - Displays the current section size for the active placement member
type's End 1 (the first member end placed). You can change the active section size by
keying in a section name. The * wildcard character is accepted (for example, HP13*),
which returns the first matching section in the active section library. If a section name
is not found in the library, FrameWorks Plus assigns a section name of null (blank).
Members placed with a null section name are undefined members and are placed
without a section designation.
Select - Activates the Select Section dialog box, which allows you to review and
select Start Sections from the on-line standard or user section libraries.
End Section - Toggle on to create a tapered member. Type a section size to use at the
member type's End 2. This section must be of the same type (channel, angle, or
double angle, for example) as the Start Section.
Note
You cannot use arbitrary sections to create tapered members.
Select - Activates the Select Section dialog box, which allows you to review and
select End Sections from the on-line standard or user section libraries.
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 155
Name - Specifies the mode for assigning member names: Specify or Auto. When set
to Specify, names are manually assigned using the string in the Name key-in field.
The Name key-in field accepts any alphanumeric string, up to 24 characters long.
When set to Auto, names are assigned automatically according to the parameters
defined using the AutoName command. For more information, see AutoName, page
172.
More Attributes - Displays the More Linear Attributes dialog box. For more
information, see Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes, page 167.
Related Topics
AutoName, page 172
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes, page 167
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Orientation, page 156
Modify Additional Attributes, page 311
Modify Name, page 297
Settings
156 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Member Orientation
The Settings > Member > Orientation command displays and modifies the active-
placement member-orientation. The dialog box displays the current placement
orientation parameters for the active member type. For example, when the Place
Beam command is selected, the active beam orientation parameters are displayed.
You can orient structural members in a number of ways. The member orientation
parameters, CP (Cardinal Point), Rotation Angle, Reflect, and OV (Orientation
Vector) define the exact orientation for each member. These parameters, and their
geometric interpretation, are explained in detail in the Defaults Linear Members
command description.
The member orientation parameters are a part of the FrameWorks Plus operating
parameters that can be stored in the model database with the Save FWP Settings
command. These attributes are identical to those established using the Defaults
Linear Members command. They appear on this dialog box as a convenient way to
interactively modify the placement orientation while placing members.

CP - The Cardinal Point (CP) option defines the relative position of the structural
section on the member placement line (centerline). Ten positions are available.

Available Cardinal Points
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 157
Note
The CP option displays the CP position as if you were looking from
member end 1 towards member end 2. If your FrameWorks Plus view is
set such that you're looking from end 2 towards end 1, the actual member
CP appears backwards from what was selected.
Rotation - Defines the angle (in degrees) by which the section is rotated about the
member centerline. The Orientation Vector (OV) defines the nominal (zero degree)
position. Using the option list, you can select one of the four orthogonal positions (0,
90, 180, or 270 degrees), or you can enter a value in the key-in field.

Rotation Angle relative to Orientation Vector
Reflect - Reflects or mirrors a section about the section's local Y-axis (vertical axis).
This parameter affects both symmetric and asymmetric sections.

Reflect On & Off for Channel Section
OV - The OV (Orientation Vector) defines the nominal direction of the section's local
Y-axis (vertical axis). This axis typically coincides with the weak axis of a section,
(for example, along the web of an I-section). The OV must not be parallel to the linear
member centerline axis or tangent to the arc at end 1. You can rotate the section from
the OV position with the Rotation parameter.
The OV is defined as:
one of the three global orthogonal axes (X-, Y- or Z-axis), or
defined arbitrarily by specifying two points defining the vector (using the
By 2 Points option), or
by keying in the components of the vector triad in the X, Y, and Z fields
(using the By Key-in option).
Settings
158 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

How FrameWorks Plus Orients Linear Member Cross-Sections

How FrameWorks Plus Orients Arc Member Cross-Sections
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes, page 167
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
Member Attributes, page 154
Modify Additional Attributes, page 311
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 159
Defaults Linear Members
The Settings > Defaults > Linear commands are a part of the FrameWorks Plus
operating parameters. FrameWorks Plus maintains a set of default linear member
parameters used in the placement of members. The Save FWP Settings command
stores these parameters in the model database. You can modify the parameters with
this command or by using the Member Attributes or Member Orientation
commands. This command activates a single dialog box that provides access to all
member types' placement parameters.
There are two basic member parameter categories: attributes and orientation. The
attributes relate to general properties and non-graphical information about the
member such as name, section size, class, and material. The orientation parameters
define the exact geometric placement of the structural section upon the member
centerline (placement line). These parameters include orientation vector (OV),
cardinal point (CP), rotation angle, and reflection.
The Type pulldown menu allows you to change the member type for which you are
defining the default parameters. When you have modified the default parameters for a
particular member type, click OK or Apply to make these new parameters active.
Click Cancel to exit the command and dismiss the dialog box.

Start Section - Displays the current section size for the active member type's End 1
(the first member end placed). Change the active section size by keying in the section
name you want. The * wildcard character is accepted (HP13*), which displays the
first section matching in the section library. If you entry an invalid section name (one
not found in the library), FrameWorks Plus assigns a null (blank) section name.
Settings
160 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Members placed with a null section name are undefined members, and are placed
without a section designation.
Select - Activates the Select Section dialog box, which is used to review and select a
Start Section from the on-line standard or user section libraries.
End Section - Toggle on to create a tapered member. Type a section size to use at the
member type's End 2. This section must be of the same type (channel, angle, or
double angle, for example) as the Start Section.
Note
You cannot use arbitrary sections to create tapered members.
Select - Activates the Select Section dialog box, which is used to review and select
an End Section from the on-line standard or user section libraries.
Class - Member class is an integer value, ranging from 0 to 9, used for grouping
members for reports, analysis interface, and other operations. For example, you could
assign primary or load-bearing members a class of 0, while secondary or intermediate
framing members could be assigned class 1.
Name - Specifies the mode with which member names are assigned: Specify or Auto.
When set to Specify, names are manually assigned using the string in the Name key-
in field. The key-in field accepts any alphanumeric string, up to 24 characters in
length.
When set to Auto, names are assigned automatically according to the parameters
defined using the AutoName command.
Grade - Displays the active grade name. This grade name is assigned to the member.
Select - Activates the Material Grade selection box, used to select an active grade.
The grades listed for selection are read directly from the grade.dat file. For more
information on the grade.dat file, see Modify Material Grade, page 306.

Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 161
Material - Defines the member's material type. Available material types are: Steel,
Concrete, Aluminum, Plastic, Timber, or a user definable "other".
Priority End 1 - Defines the cutback priority for the start end of the member.
Priorities range from 0 to 15, where 0 is the highest priority and 15 is the lowest
priority. For a given member intersection, any member is cut back to another member
with a higher priority. Therefore, a beam with an end priority of 8 is cut back to a
column that has an end priority of 3. For more information on editing a member
priority after the member has been placed, see Member Priority, page 413.
Priority End 2 - Defines the cutback priority for the second end of the member.
Member End Releases - Specifies default end releases for the member. For more
information, see Defaults Linear Members - End Releases, page 164.
Fireproofing - Specifies default fireproofing for the member type. For more
information, see Defaults Linear Members - Fireproofing, page 164.
Named Groups - Specifies default named groups for the member type. For more
information, see Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups, page 167.
More Attributes - Specifies default attributes for the member type. For more
information, see Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes, page 167.
CP - Defines the relative position of the structural section on the member placement
line. Ten cardinal points are available.

Available Cardinal Points
Note
The CP option displays the CP position as if you were looking from
member end 1 towards member end 2. If your FrameWorks Plus view is
set such that you're looking from end 2 towards end 1, the actual member
CP appears backwards from what was selected.
Settings
162 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Rotation - Defines the angle (in degrees) by which the section is rotated about the
member centerline. The Orientation Vector (OV) defines the nominal (zero degree)
position. Select one of the four orthogonal positions (0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees), or
type a value in the key-in field.

Rotation Angle relative to Orientation Vector
Reflect - Reflects or mirrors a section about the section's local Y-axis (vertical axis).
This parameter affects both symmetric and asymmetric sections.

Reflect On & Off for Channel Section
OV - Defines the nominal direction of the section's local Y-axis (vertical axis). This
axis typically coincides with the weak axis of a section (for example, along the web
of a I-section). The OV must not be parallel to the linear member centerline or tangent
to the arc member at end 1. You can rotate the section from the OV position with the
rotation angle parameter.
You can define the OV as:
one of the three global orthogonal axes (X, Y, or Z), or
a vector by defining 2 arbitrarily placed points (using the By 2 Points
option), or
by keying in the components of the vector triad in the X, Y, and Z fields
(by Key-in option).
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 163

How FrameWorks Plus Orients Linear Member Cross-Sections

How FrameWorks Plus Orients Arc Member Cross-Sections
Related Topics
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - End Releases, page 164
Defaults Linear Members - Fireproofing, page 164
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups, page 167
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Label End Releases, page 356
Modify End Releases, page 355
Settings
164 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Fireproofing, page 303
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Named Groups, page 308
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Defaults Linear Members - End Releases
The End Releases button activates the Default End Releases
dialog box, used to define the default end release directions
for the active member type. Select the directions you want to
release by default for both ends. For information on editing
releases once the member is placed and labeling member
releases, see Modify End Releases, page 355 and Label End
Releases, page 356.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - End Releases, page 164
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
Label End Releases, page 356
Modify End Releases, page 355
Defaults Linear Members - Fireproofing
The Fireproofing button on the default linear member dialog box is used to define
the default fireproofing on members at placement.
Note
You can only assign fireproofing to beams, columns, vertical braces, and
horizontal braces. FrameWorks Plus will not assign fireproofing to solid
members (slabs, walls, or solids) or to linear members with an arbitrary
section.
FrameWorks Plus displays fireproofing
graphically only in 3D views with the
Surface representation active.
However, the software does display
fireproofing annotation (labels) in any
plan, elevation, or 3D view.
Fireproofing - Specifies the fireproofing
type assign to the member.
None - no fireproofing is applied to the
member. If the member has fireproofing,
using None deletes the member's
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 165
fireproofing.
Contour, fully encased - fireproofing follows the outside shape of the
cross-section totally encasing all sides.
Contour, top flange exposed - fireproofing follows the outside shape of
the cross-section except the top of the member is not fireproofed.
Block, fully encased - uniform block of fireproofing material around the
member totally encasing all sides.
Block, top flange exposed - uniform block of fireproofing material
around the member except the top of the member is not fireproofed.
Label - Specifies whether the member's fireproofing label should be based on the
fireproofing type or be user-specified.
Define - Activates a dialog box used to define both User Defined and Based on
Type fireproofing labels. If the Label parameter is set to Based on Type, the contour
and block lines on this dialog box are used. If Label is set to User Defined, the user-
defined line is used. All fireproofing labels are limited to 11 characters.

Thickness - Specifies the thickness of the fireproofing. Enter the thickness in
MU:SU:PU.
Applied in - Specifies whether the fireproofing is applied to the member at the shop
or in the field during construction. You can specify different fireproofing labels for
shop applied and field applied.
Fireproofing Length - Specifies the linear area of the fireproofing along the
member.
Full member length - specifies that FrameWorks Plus should apply
fireproofing along the entire member length regardless of any member
cutbacks. You would usually use this setting for columns.
Settings
166 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Use cutback distances - specifies that the software should apply
fireproofing only between the member cutbacks (no fireproofing on the
part of the member that was cutback). You would usually use this setting
for beams and braces. This option is only available for cutbacks created
using the Compute Cutback, User Cutback, or Mitered Cutback
commands. Fireproofing will display for the full member length for
members with SmartCuts applied.

By setback (value) - specifies that fireproofing be set back from the
member end a specified distance. The distance is specified in the Setback
Value End 1 and Setback Value End 2 fields.
By setback (percent) - specifies that fireproofing be set back from the
member end a specified percentage of the member length. The percentage
is specified in the Setback as Percent of Length field.
Setback Value End 1 - Specifies the fireproofing setback for the start of the member.
The setback distance is defined in Master Units. A positive setback value moves the
fireproofing farther from the member end.
Setback Value End 2 - Specifies the fireproofing setback for the end of the member.
The setback distance is defined in Master Units. A positive setback value moves the
fireproofing farther from the member end.
Setback as Percent of Length - Specifies the percentage of the member length that
the fireproofing should be set back. For example, for a 30-foot long member, a 10%
value would cause the fireproofing to be 3 feet from the end of the member. A 5%
value would cause the fireproofing to be 18 inches from the member end.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - Fireproofing, page 164
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 167
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
Modify Fireproofing, page 303
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups
The Named Groups button activates the Default Named Groups dialog box, which
is used to define the default named group to which the member is assigned at
placement. For more information about the Default Named Groups dialog box and
named groups in general, see Named Groups, page 308.
Related Topics
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups, page 167
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Named Groups, page 308
Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes
The More Attributes button activates the More Linear Attributes dialog box,
which is used to define default values for the member. You can customize the
selectable values for attributes by editing the attributes.dat file, which is delivered in
the ..\FWPlus\Data folder. Each value can be 32 characters in length. In addition, you
can use the FW_DATA environment variable to specify the location of the
attributes.dat file that you want to use. For more information on environment
variable, see Environment Variables, page 512.
Caution
If you plan to write a Steel Detailing Neutral File (SDNF) from a project,
you must take administrative action to safe guard the attributes.dat file
from unauthorized editing. FrameWorks Plus writes the code listed value
(1, 2, 3, and so forth) of the attribute value to the SDNF, not the text
string. For example, if you assign a coating of Painted to a member,
FrameWorks Plus writes the code-listed value of 4, not Painted, to the
SDNF. Because the code listed values are written to the SDNF, you must
send the attributes.dat file with the SDNF so that the receiving party can
correctly interpret the SDNF. After the SDNF has been written, you
cannot edit existing values in the attributes.dat file. For example, you
cannot change the number 4 code list entry for Coatings to be None
because the SDNF was written with number 4 being Painted. Changing 4
to None would cause a miscommunication between you and the party you
Settings
168 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
sent the SDNF to. The only edits to the attributes.dat file that would be
okay would be to add values to a list. For example, you could add several
more available coating to your list as long as you did not change existing
coating entries.

Member Subtype - Specifies the member subtype.
Design Status - Specifies the design status of the member.
Coatings - Specifies any coating applied to the member.
End1 Connections - Specifies the end 1 connection. Not available for solid members.
End2 Connections - Specifies the end 2 connection. Not available for solid members.
Fabricator Name - Specifies the fabricator name.
Fabricator Note - Specifies a fabricator note.
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 169
Flooded - Specifies the percentage that the member is flooded. Type a value from 0
to 100. A value of 0 means the member is not flooded, while a value of 100 means the
member is totally flooded.
Assembly 1 to 3 - Specifies any assemblies that the member belongs to.
User Attributes 1 to 5 - User defined attributes that you can use.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes, page 167
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
Member Attributes, page 154
Modify Additional Attributes, page 311
Settings
170 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Defaults Solid Members
The Settings > Defaults > 3D Solids commands are a part of the FrameWorks Plus
operating parameters. FrameWorks Plus maintains a set of default solid member
parameters used in the placement of those members. These parameters are stored in
the model database with the Save FWP Settings command and can be modified with
this command. The attributes defined using this command relate to general properties
and nongraphical information about the solid.
The Type pulldown menu allows you to
change the solid member type. When you have
modified the default parameters for a particular
member type, click OK or Apply to make
these new parameters active. Click Cancel to
exit the command and dismiss the dialog box.
Name - Specifies the mode with which
member names are assigned: Specify or Auto.
When set to Specify, names are manually
assigned using the string in the Name key-in
field. The key-in field accepts any
alphanumeric string, up to 24 characters in
length. When set to Auto, names are assigned automatically according to the
parameters defined using AutoName, page 172.
Class - Member class is an integer value, ranging from 0 to 9, which can be used for
grouping of members for reports and other operations.
Material - Defines the default material type for the solid member. Available material
types are: Steel, Concrete, Aluminum, Plastic, Timber, and a user definable "other".
Select - Activates the Material Grade selection box, used to select an active grade.
The grades listed for selection are read directly from the grade.dat file. For more
information on the grade.dat file, see Modify Material Grade, page 306.

Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 171
Grade - Displays the active grade name. This grade is assigned to the solid member.
Named Groups - Activates the Default Named Groups dialog box, which is used to
define the default named group to which the member is assigned at placement. For
more information about the Default Named Groups dialog box and named groups in
general, see Named Groups, page 308.
More Attributes - Activates the More Solid Attributes dialog box, which is used to
define default values for the solid. You can customize the selectable values for
attributes by editing the attributes.dat file, which is delivered in the ..\FWPlus\Data
folder. For more information, see Modify Additional Attributes, page 311.
Caution
If you plan to write a Steel Detailing Neutral File (SDNF) from a project,
you must take administrative action to safe guard the attributes.dat file
from unauthorized editing. FrameWorks Plus writes the code listed value
(1, 2, 3, and so forth) of the attribute value to the SDNF, not the text
string. For example, if you assign a coating of Painted to a member,
FrameWorks Plus writes the code listed value of 4, not Painted, to the
SDNF. Because the code listed values are written to the SDNF, you must
send the attributes.dat file with the SDNF so that the receiving party can
correctly interpret the SDNF. After the SDNF has been written, you
cannot edit existing values in the attributes.dat file. For example, you
cannot change the number 4 code list entry for Coatings to be None
because the SDNF was written with number 4 being Painted. Changing 4
to None would cause a miscommunication between you and the party you
sent the SDNF to. The only edits to the attributes.dat file that would be
okay would be to add values to a list. For example, you could add several
more available coating to your list as long as you did not change existing
coating entries.
Apply - Saves the settings without exiting the dialog box.
OK - Saves the settings and exits the dialog box.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without saving any changes.
Related Topics
AutoName, page 172
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups, page 167
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Modify Name, page 297
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Named Groups, page 308
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Settings
172 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
AutoName
The Settings > AutoName command is used to review and define the automatic
member naming parameters. Like all other operating parameters, these values are
stored in the FrameWorks Plus model database using the Save FWP Settings
command.
FrameWorks Plus is flexible when assigning names to members. Names can be
specified during member placement by simply keying in the name, or you can have
FrameWorks Plus automatically assign a name to each member as it is placed. The
parameters defined using this command determine how the automatic names are
created. For more information on assigning member names, see Member Attributes,
page 154.
You can change the active member type using the Type pulldown menu at the top of
the dialog box.

Auto Increment - When on, FrameWorks Plus generates a unique name (using the
defined settings) for each member as they are placed. The name's Index portion is
automatically incremented after each member is placed.
Order - Specifies the order of the name components. If Suffix is active, it must be the
last component in the name. You cannot define the same order number to two
different components.
Label - Specifies a user-defined label for the member name. The Label can contain
both letters and numbers up to nine characters long.
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 173
Index - The index is a numerical parameter used in the formation of the name. The
Index is automatically incremented by one if the Auto Increment parameter is on.
You must type a value between 1 and 65,000.
Member ID - Adds the FrameWorks Plus member ID to the member name.
FrameWorks Plus maintains three different member ID lists: one list for slabs, walls,
and solids; one list for arc members; and one list for beams, columns, and braces. The
member ID is unique to each list. However, members in different lists can have the
same member ID number.
Model ID - Adds the model's ID number to the member name. The model ID is
unique to each model in a project and is displayed in the ( ).
Model Name - Adds the model name to the member name. The model name is
unique to each model in a project and is displayed in the ( ).
Suffix - Specifies a name suffix. The suffix can contain both letters and numbers up
to nine characters long.
Delimiter - Specifies the character to use to separate the different name components.
The delimiter can be any ASCII character including a space. The default is an
underscore ( _ ).
Preview - Displays the member name as currently defined. The name is formed by
combining the prefix, index, member ID, model ID, model name, suffix, and
delimiter in the specified order to form a single character string. The maximum length
is 24 characters.
Apply - Saves the name settings for the active member type.
Cancel - Exits the command.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes, page 167
Defaults Linear Members, page 159
Defaults Solid Members, page 170
Member Attributes, page 154
Modify Additional Attributes, page 311
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Settings
174 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Levels
The Settings > Levels command defines the MicroStation levels to use for the
different FrameWorks Plus graphics.
FrameWorks Plus stores only minimal graphics in the model design file to maintain
small file sizes and optimal performance. The permanent graphics created by
FrameWorks Plus and stored in the model design file fall into three categories: grid
lines and labels, frozen (drawing) view graphics, and member lines. Apart from user-
created graphics placed with standard MicroStation drafting commands, all the
graphics in your design file fall into these three categories.
FrameWorks Plus provides a default level scheme when the model is created. Using
this command, you can review and modify the levels for the grid lines and labels, and
define the range of levels to be used for frozen view graphics. You can use any levels
you want. However, because FrameWorks Plus uses these level assignments to
maintain proper displays in the model view, you should set these values before the
model is built. The levels should not be changed after modeling has begun. Save
the level assignments with the Save FWP Settings command. Levels are defined for
the member lines using Member Symbology, page 177.
Freeze Range Levels
The freeze range defines the level range used for storage of the frozen view
permanent graphics when model views are frozen to the model file. To avoid
overlapping displays in the drawings, FrameWorks Plus attempts to assign a unique
level from the specified range to each frozen view. The range should span at least as
many levels as the number of frozen views you expect to create. For example, if you
plan on creating 10 drawing views for your model, a frozen view range from 50 to 60
is appropriate. This level range should not include any levels specified for grid lines
and labels, or any level assigned to the member line graphics.
Grid Levels
The levels for each type of grid and label should be unique. FrameWorks Plus does
not display certain types of grid elements in certain views, depending on both type
and orientation. This prevents overlapping displays of unrelated grids and labels. Four
orientations of grid sets are supported. The levels are assigned independently for each
orientation.
Note
The symbology parameters (color, style, weight, font) for grid lines and
labels are defined using the Symbology pulldown menu on the Place Plan
Grid or Place Elevation Grid dialog boxes. The levels are specified using
this command because they must be uniformly assigned for all grids in the
model.
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 175

Start - Defines the first level used for frozen view graphics. Levels are assigned
sequentially as views are frozen, beginning with this level.
End - Defines the end level, which is the highest-level number to be used for frozen
view graphics. This level must be greater than the
Start level.
Plan - Horizontal - Horizontal plan grid levels are
the levels assigned to the lines, labels, and bubbles
of grid sets placed in horizontal (standard top
orientation) plan model views.
Plan - Sloping - Sloping plan grid levels are the
levels assigned to the lines, labels, and bubbles of
grid sets placed in plan model views which are not
horizontal, for instance, sloping roof framing
plans.
Elevation - North/South - North/South elevation
grids are grid sets placed in elevation model views
that are oriented with a viewing direction that is
nominally north or south.
Elevation - East/West - East/West Elevation grids
are grid sets placed in elevation model views that
are oriented with a viewing direction that is
nominally east or west.
Lines - Displays the level to use for grid lines.
Labels - Displays the level to use for grid labels (text). This level should be different
from the grid line level.
Bubbles - Displays the level to use for the grid line bubbles that encircle grid line
labels. This level should be different from the grid line level, but can share the same
level as the grid labels.
Apply - Saves the level settings.
OK - Saves the level settings and exits the dialog box.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without saving changes.
Related Topics
Compress Frozen, page 28
Delete Frozen View, page 248
Display Frozen, page 246
Settings
176 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Freeze View, page 237
Member Symbology, page 177
Place Elevation Grid, page 258
Place Plan Grid, page 253
Regenerate, page 244
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Update Frozen, page 242
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 177
Member Symbology
The Settings > Symbology > Members command defines member line symbology
and levels. You can define separate symbology parameters for each member type.
Using the Type pulldown menu changes the active member type. These parameters
are stored in the model database using the Save FWP Settings command.
As described in the Levels command, FrameWorks Plus uses a user-specified level
scheme to enable and disable the display of the permanent graphics in certain view
types. Therefore, it is important you change level and symbology assignments
before any modeling takes place. For more information, see Levels, page 174.
For easier-to-see model view displays, we recommend that you use a light line weight
and the same color assigned to the display-only components (assigned with the Create
View and Modify View commands). The member line is not displayed in the frozen
views and is primarily used for member selection.
Levels for member lines must be different than grid lines and labels levels and the
frozen view level range. This avoids possible display problems involving model and
frozen views.
Level - Specifies the member line's level.
Color - Specifies the member line's color. Either
type a color number or choose a color from the
palette.
Style - Specifies the member line's line style. Either
type a line style number or choose a line style from
the pull-down.
Weight - Specifies the member line's line weight. Either type a line weight number or
choose a line weight from the pull-down.
Apply - Saves the settings for the active member type.
Cancel - Exits the command.
Related Topics
Levels, page 174
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Settings
178 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Load Symbology
The Settings > Symbology > Loads command defines the symbology for the
concentrated and distributed load and load label graphics. You can define separate
symbology parameters for concentrated and distributed load types. These parameters
are stored in the model database using the Save FWP Settings command.

Concentrated - Specifies for which load type you are defining symbology. Click the
button to toggle between concentrated and distributed load parameters.
Scaling Attributes
Distributed - The height of distributed load graphics is controlled by the
scaling attributes. Between the Minimum Force (F1) and the Maximum
Force (F2), the graphic height is linearly scaled between the Minimum
Length (L1) and the Maximum Length (L2). The Moment Vector Length
to the Force Vector Length ratio causes the height of a distributed moment
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 179
graphic to be a fraction (or multiple) of a distributed force graphic of the
same numerical value. The arrowhead size is one-third the minimum
graphic height.
Concentrated - The length of concentrated load vectors is controlled by
scaling attributes. Between the Minimum Force (F1) and the Maximum
Force (F2), vector length is linearly scaled between the Minimum Length
(L1) and the Maximum Length (L2). The Moment-Vector-Length to
Force-Vector-Length ratio causes the concentrated moment vector length
to be a fraction or multiple of a concentrated force vector of the same
numerical value. The arrowhead length is one-third of the minimum
length.
L1 - Type the minimum height of a load graphic in master units. Any real number
greater than or equal to zero is valid.
L2 - Type the maximum height of a load graphic in master units. Any real number
greater than the L1 value is valid.
F1 - Type the force at which scaling of the load graphic starts. Any positive real
number, including zero, is valid.
F2 - Type the force at which scaling of the load graphic ends. Any positive real
number greater than the F1 value is valid.
Moment Vector Length - Force Vector Length - Type the ratio of the height of a
moment graphic with respect to the height of a force graphic with the same numerical
value. Any real number greater than zero is valid.
Color - Type a color number to use for the load label. You can also select the color
by selecting the Color option. This option displays a palette of available colors for the
computer.
Use Load Case Color - Toggle on to use the same color for the load label that was
used for the load graphic. This is the color assigned when the load case was created.
For more information, see Create Load Case, page 340.
Weight - Type a line weight for the load label. The higher the number, the thicker the
line. Valid weight numbers are 0 to 15. You can also select the line weight by
selecting the Weight pulldown.
Use Load Case Weight - Toggle on to use the same line weight for the load label
that was used for the load graphic. This is the weight assigned when the load case was
created. For more information, see Create Load Case, page 340.
Font - Specifies the font to use for the load labels. The default font is 50.
Load Case - Toggle on to label the load with its load case name.
Direction - Toggle on to label the load with its direction.
Settings
180 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Load Type - Toggle on to label the load with its load type.
Magnitude - Toggle on to label the load with its magnitude.
Text Height - Specifies the load label's text height.
Text Width - Specifies the load label's text width.
Text Position - Specifies the location of the load label's center with respect to the
center of the load graphic. The location is measured along the load graphic. The
position can be defined in master units or as a percentage of load graphic length,
depending on the Position as a percent of Length setting below.
Text Location - Specifies the load label's location with respect to the load. Options
are Above or Below.
Position as a percent of Length - When on, the text position distance is calculated as
a percentage of the total length of the load.
OK - Saves the specified settings for both load types.
Cancel - Exits the command without saving changes.
Related Topics
Create Load Case, page 340
Create Load Combination, page 344
Delete Load, page 354
Edit Load, page 350
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341
Label Load, page 355
Load Symbology, page 178
Place Load, page 346
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 181
Dynamics
The Settings > Dynamics command defines in which views members display
dynamically, providing feedback on the size and orientation of the member section as
it is being placed. This lets you make corrections to the member properties before the
member is actually placed.
FrameWorks Plus performs the dynamic display in each active model view whose
range includes the member being placed. When several model views are active, this
can cause slower software performance. However, by using this command, the
member dynamics can be selectively turned on or off.
The dynamics parameters are stored in the model
database using the Save FWP Settings command.
Views Active - Displays a toggle for each of the
eight possible views. Turning any of these off
disables the dynamics feature for that specific
view.
Note
Dynamic display only operates in views defined as FrameWorks Plus
model views.
OK - Saves the settings, and exits the dialog box.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without saving changes.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Place Beam, page 267
Place Column by Two Points, page 269
Place Column, page 268
Place Framing Members, page 271
Place Horizontal Brace, page 270
Place Vertical Brace, page 269
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Settings
182 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
AutoSnap
The Settings > AutoSnap command defines
in which views the AutoSnap feature works.
When members are placed in a plan or
elevation model view containing a grid,
AutoSnap snaps the cursor to grid
intersections (when the cursor is moved
within a specified distance of the
intersection). AutoSnap is active only during
member placement, when FrameWorks Plus
is prompting for a member location point.
AutoSnap aids in the accurate placement of
members along defined column grid lines.
Members can be placed with an offset from a
snap point using standard MicroStation
precision key-ins.
Note
The AutoSnap feature is only available in
FrameWorks Plus model views that contain a
grid set.
Views Active - Setting a toggle off disables the
AutoSnap feature in that view.
Tolerance - Defines the maximum distance the
cursor can be from a specific grid intersection
before it snaps to the intersection. Type the
distance in MU:SU:PU.
Snap Cursor Type - Defines which special snap
cursor to display when an intersection snap occurs. Two types of cursor can be
displayed: an "X" or a "+".
Snap Cursor Size - Defines the approximate size of the AutoSnap cursor, relative to
the standard MicroStation cursor size. For example, a value of 2.0 results in an
AutoSnap cursor of approximately twice the MicroStation cursor size.
OK - Saves the dialog settings and exits the command.
Cancel - Exits the command without saving any changes.
Related Topics
Place Plan Grid, page 253
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 183
3rd Party Software
The Settings > 3rd Party Software command specifies which analysis and design
software you plan to use. By specifying the analysis and design software, you lock
out commands that relate to other software packages. This prevents you from
accidentally assigning design or code parameters from the wrong analysis package to
an element or from writing the wrong analytical deck.
Warning
Changing the third-party software (or the design code) after placing
members causes the new code's default parameters to overwrite the
previous parameters. You will lose any custom settings you may have
defined on a member.

Software - Specifies the third-party analysis and design software you plan to use with
this model. You can choose GTSTRUDL, LARSA, RAM, SAP2000, or STAAD.
Note
Intergraph supports the GTSTRUDL and STAAD interfaces. Intergraph
does not support the LARSA, RAM, or SAP2000 interfaces. Contact
LARSA, RAM, or SAP2000 if you have problems with those interfaces.
Design Code - Specifies the design code you plan to use for this model. Only the
design codes valid for the selected software display.
If you are using GTSTRUDL or STAAD and choose custom, FrameWorks Plus
prompts you to select the file that defines the custom code parameters. For more
information, see Custom Code Parameters, page 184.
Apply - Sets the selected software and design code as active.
Warning
Changing the third-party software (or the design code) after placing
members causes the new code's default parameters to overwrite the
previous parameters. You will lose any custom settings you may have
defined on a member.
Cancel - Exits the command without changing the software or design code.
Settings
184 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
LARSA, page 127
Member Constraints, page 393
RAM, page 127
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Read STAAD Results, page 125
SAP2000, page 128
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Write STAAD Input, page 121
Custom Code Parameters
If you want to use a GTSTRUDL or STAAD design code that FrameWorks Plus does
not support, you can create your own design code parameters dialog box to assign
code parameters to members. You may also want to use a custom code parameters
dialog box for codes we do support if you want different default settings or you want
to remove some parameters you never use.
FrameWorks Plus creates the dialog box by reading a specially formatted ASCII file
that you create. The ASCII file is read when you select Custom code parameters in
the Third Party Software command. The Custom Code Parameters dialog box
replaces the standard dialog boxes delivered with FrameWorks Plus when you select
the Code Parameters command.
ASCII File Format
You can use any standard ASCII editor (such as Notepad) to create the ASCII file
that FrameWorks Plus reads to create the dialog box. The ASCII file can be called
whatever you want but must have a .dcp file name extension. There are several
keywords that FrameWorks Plus looks for to interpret the ASCII file. The keywords
are:
CODE --- Specifies the name of your code. The name displays in the
dialog box title and is written to the input deck. The CODE keyword must
be on the first line of the ASCII file.
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 185
NAME --- Specifies the name of a code parameter.
OPTION --- Specifies the options you want available on a pulldown
menu for a code parameter.
KEYIN --- Specifies that you want a key-in field to display. You can
format the key-in field using:
%s for plain text (a character string).
%d for an integer number.
%f for floating point (decimal) numeric data. The accuracy or
precision of the key-in can be controlled by inserting a precision
qualifier in this format. For example, %0.3f accepts character
representation of the real number with accuracy to three places to the
right of the decimal point, for example: 65.123. Similarly, a format
specifier of %0.1f results in 65.1.
Note
Keywords must be in UPPERCASE. Keywords that are initial capitalized
(Keyword) or all lowercase (keyword) will not be recognized by
FrameWorks Plus as a keyword.
Sample ASCII File
Here is a sample ASCII file with line-by-line explanations.
CODE Foods
NAME Salad
OPTION Yes
OPTION No
NAME Pizza
OPTION # Pieces
OPTION Small
OPTION Medium
OPTION Large
KEYIN %d 1
NAME Topping 1
KEYIN %s
NAME Topping 2
KEYIN %s
NAME Drink
OPTION Water
OPTION Tea
OPTION Specify Soft Drink
OPTION Specify Beer
KEYIN %s 3,4
NAME Ice Cream
Settings
186 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
OPTION Vanilla
OPTION Chocolate
OPTION Strawberry
OPTION Specify
KEYIN %s 4
The first line defines the code name as Food.
Notice the blank line between the CODE keyword and the first code parameter Salad.
A blank line must separate each code parameter and the CODE keyword. Salad will
have a pulldown menu with two options, Yes and No. The first OPTION after the
NAME line will be the default. In this case, Yes will be the default for Salad.
The next code parameter is Pizza. Pizza has four options on its pulldown menu with
the first option, # Pieces activating a key-in field. Notice the 1 at the end of the
KEYIN keyword. That 1 tells FrameWorks Plus to activate the key-in field when the
first option on the pulldown menu is selected. The %d tells FrameWorks Plus to write
the keyed in value to the input file as an integer number. For example, if 3.1 were
keyed in, FrameWorks Plus would only write 3 to the input deck.
The next code parameter is Topping 1. This code parameter does not have an option
pulldown menu, only a key-in field that is active all the time. The %s tells
FrameWorks Plus to write the keyed value to the input deck as a character string.
The next code parameter, Topping 2, works the same way as Topping 1.
The next code parameter is Drink. This code parameter has four options on a
pulldown menu with the third and fourth options activating the key-in field.
The last code parameter is Ice Cream. This code parameter has four options with the
fourth option activating the key-in field.

Dialog box created from sample ASCII file
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Settings
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 187
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Write STAAD Input, page 121
Settings
188 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 189
View
The View commands create FrameWorks Plus Model and Frozen Views. (Frozen
views are also sometimes called drawing views because they are used to compose the
construction drawings.)
There are commands to create, delete, update, and modify these special views. All
view commands are on the FrameWorks Plus View pulldown menu. The seven most
frequently used view commands are also located on the Views palette.

Model Views
Model Views are used for member placement. Model Views display the structural
elements according to the display parameters you define. The display settings and
styles are defined when the Model View is created but can be modified at any time on
a view or member basis. It is important to note that Model View graphics are display-
only graphics. That is, FrameWorks Plus is controlling the display of the members.
The graphical data of a Model View is not placed permanently in the design file. In
addition, FrameWorks Plus also maintains the active depth and display depth for
Model Views.
You control the type, size, and position of member annotation. You can specify
annotation and certain representation sizes in MicroStation master units or as the
actual size you would like them to be plotted. If you choose the actual paper size
method, you need to set the drawing scale for the view so FrameWorks Plus can
calculate the correct size.
View
190 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Frozen Views
Frozen Views are created directly from the Model Views whenever you need to plot a
view or create a drawing. A Frozen View is essentially a permanent copy of the
display-only graphics from a selected Model View. The permanent graphical data is
written to the model design file, on a predetermined level, or to another specified
design file. A MicroStation Saved View is also created with each Frozen View. This
Frozen View information is stored in the model database and is used later when you
compose a drawing with the Drawing Composition utilities.
Revision Tracking
FrameWorks Plus also has a built-in revision tracking feature which lets you
automatically update a Frozen View to reflect changes made to the model. The
Update Frozen command makes any necessary changes to the Frozen View graphics
to bring the graphics up-to-date with the current model.
View Commands
Create View, page 191
Set View, page 208
List View, page 209
Drop View, page 210
Modify View, page 211
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Linear Member Overrides, page 223
Solid Member Overrides, page 231
Override Annotation, page 235
Override Double Line Widget, page 236
Freeze View, page 237
Update Frozen, page 242
Regenerate, page 244
Display Frozen, page 246
Delete Model View, page 247
Delete Frozen View, page 248
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 191
Create View
The View > Create command creates and sets a new model view in the model
database using the view type, location, and symbology parameters that you specify.
To create a frozen view (also called a drawing view), use the Freeze View command
(see Freeze View, page 237).
Note
If you have not already done so, read the brief descriptions of the model
view and frozen view types. See View, page 189.
You can modify or delete model views at any time during the design process. To
modify the general view settings or the symbology for every member of an existing
model view, use the Modify View command (see Modify View, page 211). To modify
individual member symbology in a model view, use the Linear Member Overrides
(see Linear Member Overrides, page 223) or Solid Member Overrides (see Solid
Member Overrides, page 231) command. To deactivate a view, use the Drop View
command (see Drop View, page 210). The Set View command (see Set View, page
208) reactivates an existing view that you deactivated.

File - Specifies a default preference file. For more information, see File (Create View
Dialog Box), page 196.
View
192 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Symbology - Activates two dialog boxes for defining view symbology for linear and
solid members in the view being created. For more information, see Symbology for
Linear Members, page 197 and Symbology for Solid Members, page 205.
View Name - Contains the name, up to 40 characters long, by which the Model View
is referred. FrameWorks Plus automatically generates a default name using the type,
orientation, and active depth for the view being created.
Description - Type some descriptive text for the Model View you are creating. This
field is optional, but the view description displays in the other View related dialog
boxes such as Set View, List View, Update View, and Regenerate View. This is
helpful when you have numerous views created in the model. The description can be
up to 132 characters long.
View Type - Defines the view being created as one of the three Model View types:
Plan, Elevation, or 3D.
Plan - A plan view is used to lay out vertical structural columns and
framing members in a 2D plan view. Plan views are often created for each
floor of a structure, both for layout purposes and for creation of the
framing plan drawings. However, plan views do not have to be horizontal.
For example, a plan view can be created in a non-horizontal orientation to
create a framing plan for a sloping roof. Plan views have an active depth
and a display depth range which control member placement and display in
the view.
Elevation - An elevation view is used to create an elevation or section
view of a model. This is typically a view created by "passing a vertical
plane" through the 3D model at a defined point. Often, elevation views are
created along an existing column grid line. Elevation views can also be
defined at an arbitrary point and orientation, providing a generic section
cut capability. Elevation views can also be used for placement of vertical
bracing in a structure. Like plan views, elevation views use an active depth
and display depth for placement and display purposes.
3D - A 3D view is the most generic of the three view types and can be
defined in any orientation, such as isometric, but can also be defined in an
orthogonal orientation (top, south, and so forth). Members can be placed
in a 3D view, but unlike plan and elevation views, there is no active depth
or working plane associated with the view definition. Like the other views,
you can define specific member display symbology for the 3D Model
Views. The surface representation is frequently used in 3D views.
View Orientation (Plan Views) - Defines the view orientation as: Standard Top or
By View.
The Standard Top view is a typical plan view looking down on a
horizontal plane.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 193
The By View option defines nonhorizontal views (such as sloping roof
plans) by selecting an existing MicroStation view. You are prompted to
select a MicroStation view when this option is set, after which you place a
data point in the view you are using to define the orientation. FrameWorks
Plus uses the orientation of the selected view for the Model View being
created.
Tip
If you want to create a view (of any type) and plan to use the By View
option to define the orientation, set up a MicroStation view with that
orientation before selecting the Create View command.
View Orientation (Elevation Views) - Defines the elevation view orientation as
North, South, East, West, By View, or By Grid Line. The first four are the
traditional orthogonal elevation views looking from the specified direction.
The By View option defines nonorthogonal views by selecting an existing
MicroStation view. FrameWorks Plus uses the orientation of the selected
view for the Model View being created.
The By Grid Line option creates a section along a grid line in a plan view.
When this option is selected, you are asked to select the grid line. Next,
place a data point to specify the elevation view's viewing direction. The
view is displayed looking from the selected grid line towards the given
point.
View Orientation (3-D Views) - Defines the 3D view orientation as: Standard ISO,
Dimetric, or By View. The isometric type is self-explanatory, and the dimetric view
is a slightly rotated frontal view. The By View option defines an arbitrary orientation
by selecting an existing MicroStation view. You are prompted to select a
MicroStation view after which you should place a data point in the view you are
using to define the orientation. FrameWorks Plus uses the selected view's orientation
for the Model View being created.
Note
It is unnecessary to define the active depth point and display depth
parameters for 3D views, as they are not planar views. Thus, these options
are disabled when defining a 3D view.
Define Top of Steel by (Plan Views only) - Defines the way you specify the active
depth point for the view. This controls the elevation at which beams and braces are
placed by default. In a plan view, this is often referred to as the Top of Steel (TOS)
for the floor plan.
If set to Key-in, define the Z or elevation value in the Z: key-in field.
If set to Point, you are prompted to Specify point for view active depth.
Place a data point, in any view, to define the active depth for the plan
view.
View
194 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Define Active Plane by (Elevation Views only) - Defines the way you specify the
view's active depth point. The active depth defines the plane on which members are
placed in the elevation view.
If set to Key-in, define the point using the X:, Y:, and Z: key-in fields.
If set to Point, you are prompted to specify a point for the view's active
depth. Place a data point, in any view, to define the active depth for the
elevation view.
X:, Y:, Z: - Defines the view's active depth point.
In a plan view, using Standard Top orientation, only the Z: value is significant. These
fields are used when the Define Top of Steel option is set to Key-in.
In elevation views, typically only one of these values is significant, depending on the
orientation selected. For example, when defining a North elevation, only the Y:
coordinate is needed to define the active plane. The non-significant fields' values are
ignored.
Display Depth - For Plan Views -- Defines the display depth (the model's vertical
range that displays in the plan view). This is used to include or exclude members that
lie above or below the view's active depth. The distance above the active depth is set
using the (+) field, and the distance below with the (-) field.
For Elevation Views -- Controls the model range that displays in the view. This
distance is measured normal to the view plane. The Display Depth can be used to
include or exclude members that lie "in front of" or "behind" the view active depth.
The distance in front of the active depth is set using the (+) field, and the distance
behind with the (-) field.
Fitted View Border Widths - Defines the border clearance used when the Fit View
command is used. FrameWorks Plus determines the range of all structural elements
within the range of the view (including any grid lines placed in the view), and adds
the specified border widths to establish a new view range.
View North - Specifies which direction is north for the view being created. By
specifying the correct direction for north, FrameWorks Plus rotates member
annotation so when the view is placed in a drawing and rotated, all annotation reads
left to right, or bottom to top.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 195

As seen in the Model View.

As seen in the Frozen View after rotation.
Drawing Scale - Specifies whether or not you are defining a drawing scale for this
view. You can select one of the standard scales or define your own scale.
If you choose to define a drawing scale for the view, the text and some representation
sizes you enter in the View Symbology dialog boxes are the actual size you want
them to be in the drawing when plotted. For example, you activate this option and
select 1/4" : 1' as the scale. In the View Symbology dialog boxes you enter 0.25 (1/4
of an inch) as the text size you want in the drawing. When you create the view,
FrameWorks Plus calculates that the text needs to be placed in the Model View using
a text size of 1 foot. Later, you modify the view's drawing scale to 1/2" : 1', because
you still want your text to be 1/4" high in the drawing, FrameWorks Plus recalculates
and resets the text size in the Model View to be 6 inches.
If you choose not to define a drawing scale for the view, the text and some
representation sizes you enter in the View Symbology dialog boxes are the size you
want to place in model (as specified in master units). You need to calculate the
correct size so that after the view is scaled, your text is the correct height in the
drawing.
View
196 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Related Topics
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Create View, page 191
Delete Model View, page 247
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Drop View, page 210
File (Create View Dialog Box), page 196
Freeze View, page 237
Linear Member Overrides, page 223
List View, page 209
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Modify View, page 211
Set View, page 208
Solid Member Overrides, page 231
Symbology for Linear Members, page 197
Symbology for Solid Members, page 205
File (Create View Dialog Box)
The File pulldown on the Create View dialog box reviews, loads, or saves predefined
view symbology settings from the FrameWorks Plus resource file. For more
information, see Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus, page 511.
Default From View - Defaults the settings in the
Create View dialog box to the settings of an existing
active view.
Load - Activates the Load Preference dialog box.
Select the predefined preference file you want to use,
and click OK. Turn on Review Preferences to review
the preference file settings without making them
active.
Save - Saves the current preference file.
Save As - Saves the current preference file under a
new name.
Related Topics
Create View, page 191
File (Create View Dialog Box), page 196
Symbology for Linear Members, page 197
Symbology for Solid Members, page 205
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 197
Symbology for Linear Members
The Symbology > Linear pulldown on the Create View dialog box activates a dialog
box that defines the view symbology for all beams, columns, and braces in the view
being created. You can change the symbology for all members in the view later using
the Modify View command (see Modify View, page 211). You can also modify
symbology on an individual linear member basis using the Linear Member
Overrides command (see Linear Member Overrides, page 223).
The dialog box is divided into three areas: Graphics, Attributes, and Preview. The
Graphics area defines which representation styles and annotation you want to use.
The Attributes area defines the graphic symbology for active Graphics settings. The
Preview area displays the results of your settings.
When the symbology parameters have been defined as required, click OK to accept
the parameters and return to the Create View dialog box. You can also save the
settings and keep this dialog box active by clicking Apply. Click Cancel to ignore the
changes made and exit the dialog box.

Graphics - Defines what representation style and annotation you want to use for the
active linear member type.
When set to Representation, the different member display styles can be selected.
When set to Annotation, the different annotation that can be set for the member is
shown.
Display in View - Specifies if the selected representation or annotation is used for the
active member. Turn on to use that representation style or annotation setting.
View
198 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Representation - Linear Members
Single Line - Turns on or off the display of the member single line (a simple line
displayed along the centerline, or structural member's placement line). This display
setting can be used for all view types.
Double Line - Displays a detailed symbol that indicates the structural section's exact
placement orientation. It shows the direction and correct hidden-line representation of
all section types. When the double lines are on, they are inserted within and "break"
the single line representation. Members placed without section designation, or
undefined members, do not display double lines even if this setting is on. This display
setting is normally used only for plan and elevation views and can be used to view
member cutbacks.
Surface - Displays each structural element as an extrusion of the section along the
member's length. This display, when used with the MicroStation rendering
commands, produces realistic visual representations of your model. The surface
display setting is typically used for 3D views, but can also be used in plan and
elevation views. You must use Surface display to view fireproofing graphics in 3D
views. This representation can be used to view member cutbacks.
Sparse - Displays the single member line and the cross-section graphic only. This
display is similar to Intergraph's MicasPlus structural products.
Foot Print - Displays members that intersect with plan or elevation views as a
section, or foot print. The section shown is a true cross-section of the member, cut at
the orientation and position of the view active depth. Undefined members, without a
section designation, do not display a section foot print.
Representation Attributes - Linear Members
Color - Type the color number (0-254) for the active representation. You can also use
the Color pulldown to select the color.
Weight - Type the line weight, or thickness, (0-15) for the active representation. You
can also select the weight from the list.
Style - Type the line style (0-7) for the active representation. You can also select the
line style from the list.
Freeze Level - Specifies the level on which the graphics are placed when the view is
frozen. The Levels option in the Freeze View command must be set to Freeze Levels
for this setting to be used.
End 1 Setback - Defines the distance that the start end of the member single line is
set back, or shortened. A positive setback value shortens the start end of the member
by the specified distance. If cutbacks have been applied to the member, the single line
length represents the member's cutback length. This setback is added to the cutback
length.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 199
If the Setback as % Len option is selected, the setback distance is defined as a
percentage of the member length.
If the Setback as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the setback distance is defined in model master units.
If the Setback as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, then the setback distance is defined as the actual distance you want the
setback to appear as in the drawing. This value is inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models.
End 2 Setback - Defines the distance that the end of the member single line is set
back, or shortened. A positive setback value shortens the end of the member by the
specified distance. If cutbacks have been applied to the member, the single line length
represents the member's cutback length. This setback is added to the cutback length.
If the Setback as % Len option is selected, the setback distance is defined as a
percentage of the member length.
If the Setback as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the setback distance is defined in model master units.
If the Setback as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, then the setback distance is defined as the actual distance you want the
setback to appear as in the drawing. This value is inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models.
Setback as % Length - Computes the setback distance as a percentage of the
member's total length. For example, if this toggle is on and the setback parameter is
set to 10, the single line for a beam totaling 20 feet in length would be set back 2 feet.
DblLine Length - Defines the length of the double-line display. To view cutbacks,
this field must be set to 100 and the DblLine as % Length option must be selected.
You can also use the Surface representation to view cutbacks.
If the DblLine as % Len option is selected, the double-line length is defined as a
percentage of the member length.
If the DblLine as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the double-line length is defined in model master units.
If the DblLine as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, then the double-line length is defined as the actual length you want the
double-line display to appear as in the drawing. This value is inches for imperial
models and millimeters for metric models.
DblLine as % Length - Computes the double line length as a percentage of the
member's total length. For example, if this toggle is on, and the double line length
View
200 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
parameter is set to 10, the length of the double line component for a beam 20 feet
long would be 2 feet.
To view cutbacks, this toggle must be on and the DblLine Length field must have a
value of 100.
DblLine Position - Specifies the double-line symbol center's location. The location is
measured along the member line from member end 1 (the first end placed) towards
end 2.
If the Position as % Len option is selected, the double-line position is defined as a
percentage of the member length.
If the Position as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the double-line position is defined in model master units from the start
of the member.
If the Position as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, then the double-line position is defined as the actual distance from the start
of the member that you want the double-line display to appear in the drawing. This
value is inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models.
Position as % Length - Computes the double line component's location point as a
percentage of the total member length. For example, if this toggle is on, and the
double line position parameter is set to 25, the center of the double line display is at a
point 5 feet from end 1 of a beam totaling 20 feet in length.
Section Scale - Constructs the double line component from the geometry in the on-
line section library for the specified section size. By default, when Section Scale =
1.0, the section is drawn at true scale, or to the exact dimensions found in the section
library. By using this parameter, you can scale the double line component up or down
as needed for graphical clarity.
Thickness Exaggeration - Scales up (or down) the component thickness of a
structural section (such as web, flange thickness) for display on the double-line
component. Unlike the Section Scale, which scales the section in its entirety, the
thickness exaggeration factor expands the double-line representation's components
which are typically the most difficult to see on the drawings, such as the web hidden
lines on an I-section.
Angle Tolerance - Defines the criteria, measured in degrees, which determine how a
member is displayed either as a Member in View Plane or a Member Intersecting
View Plane. If the angle between the member line and an imaginary vector normal to
the view plane exceeds the specified Angle Tolerance, the member is considered to be
in the view plane, or parallel to the view. If the angle between the member line and
the view plane normal vector is less than the Angle Tolerance, the member is
considered to intersect the view plane, or to be perpendicular.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 201
Section Scale - Scales the foot print up or down as needed for graphical clarity. The
section Foot Print and surface representation are constructed from the geometry in the
on-line section library for the specified section size. By default, when Section Scale =
1.0, the foot print is drawn at true scale, or to the exact dimensions found in the
section library.
Fireproofing Color - Specifies the fireproofing's color. You can key in the color
number you want to use or select the color from the color palette. This field only
displays when the View Type is 3D.
Fireproofing Weight - Specifies the fireproofing's line weight. The higher the
number, the thicker the lines that represent the fireproofing. You can key in the line
weight (0-15) or use the option pulldown to select the line weight. This field only
displays when the View Type is 3D.
Fireproofing Style - Specifies the fireproofing's line style. You can key in the line
style number (0-7) or use the option pulldown to select the line style. This field only
displays when the View Type is 3D.
Fireproofing Freeze Level - Specifies the level the fireproofing graphics should be
placed on when the view is frozen. Valid levels are 1 to 63. This field only displays
when the View Type is 3D.
Annotation - Linear Members
Name - Annotates the name assigned to each member when it was placed. For more
information on naming members, see AutoName, page 172.
Section Size - Annotates the section size assigned to each member. Section sizes are
not annotated for undefined members, even if this setting is on.
Note
Section Size attributes (color, location, text size, and so forth) and
Fireproofing attributes cannot be set independently except for displaying
in the view or not. Changing Section Size attributes will change the
Fireproofing attributes.
Delta Top of Steel - Labels the distance (if any) that a member is placed above or
below the nominal TOS (active depth) for a plan view. This label is not displayed if
the member is positioned at the active depth (zero delta TOS). Used only for beams
and horizontal braces in plan views.
Fireproofing - Displays the fireproofing label, which is appended to the member
section size annotation. This label is displayed only when fireproofing has been
assigned.
View
202 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Note
Fireproofing attributes (color, location, text size, and so forth) and Section
Size attributes cannot be set independently except for displaying in the
view or not. Changing Fireproofing attributes will change the Section Size
attributes.
Name (Normal) - Annotates the names of members that intersect, or are normal to a
plan or elevation view.
Section Size (Normal) - Annotates the section size assigned to members that
intersect a plan or elevation view. Undefined members will not display a section size.
Annotation Attributes - Linear Members
Color - Type the color number (0-254) for the active annotation. You can also use the
Color pulldown to select the color.
Freeze Level - Specifies the level on which the annotation text is to be placed when
the view is frozen. The Levels option in the Freeze View command must be set to
Freeze Levels for this freeze level setting to be used.
Weight - Type the line weight, or thickness, (0-15) for the active annotation. You can
also select the line weight from the option list.
Font - Type the appropriate font number for the annotation text's font or text style.
Use Uniform Text Size - Specifies that all linear member annotation text in the view
should be displayed using the same text height and width.
Uniform Height - Specifies the height for all the text in the view. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, the height is defined in inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models. You are defining the actual height of the text, as it will
appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the height is defined in master units.
Uniform Width - Specifies the width for all the text in the view. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, the width is defined in inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models. You are defining the actual width of the text, as it will
appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the height is defined in master units.
Text Height - Defines the height of each character for the text element used to label
the member name. If the Drawing Scale option is selected, the height is defined in
inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models. You are defining the
actual height of the text, as it will appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the height is defined in master units.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 203
Text Width - Defines the width of each character for the text element used to label
the member name. If the Drawing Scale option is selected, the width is defined in
inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models. You are defining the
actual width of the text, as it will appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the width is defined in master units.
Text Position - Specifies the location of the annotation's center measured along the
member line from end 1 of the member (the first end placed) towards end 2.
If the Position as % Len option is selected, the annotation is placed at the percentage
of the member's length that you specify.
If the Position as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, the position is defined in master units.
If the Position as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, the position is defined in inches for imperial models and millimeters for
metric models.
Position as % Length - Computes the annotation position distance as a percentage of
the total member length. For example, if this toggle is on, and the text position
parameter is set to 25, the center of the name label is positioned 5 feet from end 1 of a
member that is 20 feet in length.
Offset - Defines distance from the member line at which the annotation is placed. The
Offset Direction defines whether the annotation is placed above or below the member
line.
If the As % of Height option is selected, the distance is defined as a percentage of the
text height.
If the As % of Height option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, the Offset is defined in master units.
If the As % of Height option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is selected,
the offset is defined in inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models.
Offset X - Defines distance along the X-axis from the member line at which the
annotation is placed.
If the As % of Height option is selected, the distance is defined as a percentage of the
text height.
If the As % of Height option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, the Offset is defined in master units.
If the As % of Height option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is selected,
the offset is defined in inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models.
View
204 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Offset Y - Defines distance along the Y-axis from the member line at which the
annotation is placed.
If the As % of Height option is selected, the distance is defined as a percentage of the
text height.
If the As % of Height option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, the Offset is defined in master units.
If the As % of Height option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is selected,
the offset is defined in inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models.
As % of Height - Computes the annotation offset distance as a percentage of the text
height.
Offset Direction - Specifies if the annotation offset is applied above the member line
or below the member line.
Angle - Specifies an angle at which to display the annotation. The angle is measured
between the bottom of the annotation text and the member line. The left edge of the
annotation is the rotation axis.
Text Location - Defines the location of the annotation relative to the section footprint
graphics. The label can be placed in one of five possible positions: center, top right,
top left, bottom left, or bottom right. Select the location from the list.
Delta TOS Format - Select the format that you want to use for the delta top-of-steel
distance annotation.
Number of Digits - Enter the number of decimal places to use in displaying the delta-
TOS distance. This option is available only in metric models.
Abbreviate Section - Displays the section size names in abbreviated form. For
example, section W21X122 is labeled as W21. This feature can be used to annotate
drawings with only the nominal section size.
Number of Characters - Specifies the number of characters that you want to appear
when you abbreviate a section name. If you enter 0, the section name is abbreviated at
the first nominal dimension. For example, WWF2000X732 is abbreviated as
WWF2000.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 205
Symbology for Solid Members
The Symbology > 3D Solids pulldown on the Create View dialog box activates a
dialog box that defines the view symbology for slabs, walls, and solids in the view
being created. You can change this symbology for every solid in the view later using
the Modify View command (see Modify View, page 211). You can also modify
symbology on an individual solid member basis using the Solid Member Overrides
command (see Solid Member Overrides, page 231).
The dialog box for this command is divided into three areas: Graphics, Attributes,
and Preview. The Graphics area defines which representation styles and annotation
you want to use. The Attributes area defines the graphic symbology for active
Graphics settings. The Preview area displays the results of your settings.
When the symbology parameters have been defined as required, click OK to accept
the parameters and return to the Create View dialog box. You can also save the
settings and keep this dialog box active by clicking Apply. Click Cancel to ignore the
changes made and exit the dialog box.

Graphics - Defines what representation style and annotation you want to use for the
active solid member type.
When set to Representation, the different styles on how the actual solid member is
shown can be selected.
When set to Annotation, the different annotation that can be set for the solid member
is shown.
View
206 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Display in View - Specifies if the selected representation or annotation is used for the
active member. Toggle on to use that representation style or annotation setting.
Representation - Solid Members
Wireframe - Displays the solid member using lines that define the solid's boundary.
Representation Attributes - Solid Members
Color - Type the color number (0-254) for the active representation. You can also use
the Color pulldown to select the color.
Weight - Type the line weight, or thickness, (0-15) for the active representation. You
can also select the line weight from the option list.
Style - Type the line style (0-7) for the active representation. You can also select the
line style from the option list.
Freeze Level - Specifies the level on which the representation graphics are placed
when the view is frozen. The Levels option in the Freeze View command must be set
to Freeze Levels for this freeze level setting to be used.
Annotation - Solid Members
Name - Displays the name assigned to each solid when it was placed.
Volume - Displays the solid member's net volume (the solid's total volume minus the
volume of the holes in that solid).
Delta Top of Steel - Labels the distance (if any) that a solid is placed above or below
the nominal TOS (active depth) for a plan view. This label is not displayed if the solid
is positioned at the active depth (zero delta TOS).
Annotation Attributes - Solid Members
Color - Type the color number (0-254) for the active representation. You can also use
the Color pulldown to select the color.
Weight - Type the line weight, or thickness, (0-15) for the active representation. You
can also select the line weight from the option list.
Font - Type the font, or text style, for the annotation text.
Freeze Level - Specifies the level on which the annotation text is placed when the
view is frozen. The Levels option in the Freeze View command must be set to Freeze
Levels for this freeze level setting to be used.
Use Uniform Text Size - Specifies that all solid annotation text in the view should be
displayed using the same text height and width.
Uniform Height - Specifies the height for all the text in the view. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, the height is defined in inches for imperial models and
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 207
millimeters for metric models. You are defining the actual height of the text, as it will
appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the height is defined in master units.
Uniform Width - Specifies the width for all the text in the view. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, the width is defined in inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models. You are defining the actual width of the text, as it will
appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the width is defined in master units.
Text Height - Defines the height of each character for the text element used to label
the member name. If the Drawing Scale option is selected, the height is defined in
inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models. You are defining the
actual height of the text, as it will appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the height is defined in master units.
Text Width - Defines the width of each character for the text element used to label
the member name. If the Drawing Scale option is selected, the width is defined in
inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models. You are defining the
actual width of the text as, it will appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the width is defined in master units.
Text Position X - Specifies the location name label along the X-axis. The location is
measured along the X-axis from the centroid of the solid member. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, this position is defined in inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models. If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, this
position is defined in master units.
Text Position Y - Specifies the location name label along the Y-axis. The location is
measured along the Y-axis from the centroid of the solid member. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, this position is defined in inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models. If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, this
position is defined in master units.
Text Position Z - Specifies the location name label along the Z-axis. The location is
measured along the Z-axis from the centroid of the solid member. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, this position is defined in inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models. If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, this
position is defined in master units.
Angle - Specifies an angle at which to display the annotation. The angle is measured
between the bottom of the annotation text and the centroid of the solid. The left edge
of the annotation is the rotation axis.
View
208 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Set View
The View > Set command activates an existing FrameWorks Plus model view
in a selected MicroStation view. You must create a view using the View > Create
command before you can set a view, otherwise an error message: No Model Views
Defined appears.
If a number precedes a model view name, then that view is currently active (set) in
the specified MicroStation view. The view description, which you defined for the
view when you created it, displays in the View Description field at the bottom of the
Set View dialog box.
If the MicroStation view you
select already has an active model
view, then FrameWorks Plus
drops the existing model view
before setting the new view.
FrameWorks Plus also modifies
the view window title to the name
of the selected model view. The
presence of a FrameWorks Plus
view name in a view window
border indicates that the view is
an active FrameWorks Plus model
view.
Use Refresh to update the list of
views in the Set View dialog box
without having to close and
reopen the dialog box.
Related Topics
Delete Model View, page 247
Drop View, page 210
List View, page 209
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 209
List View
The View > List command displays the names and descriptions of all model views
defined in the model. You can save the list to an ASCII file by selecting File > Save
As from the List Views dialog box.

Related Topics
Delete Model View, page 247
Drop View, page 210
Set View, page 208
View
210 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Drop View
The View > Drop command deactivates, or drops, an active FrameWorks Plus
model view. This action is the opposite of setting a view with the Set View
command. This command does not delete the model view from the FrameWorks Plus
database.
When a model view is selected, FrameWorks Plus deactivates the view and returns it
to a standard MicroStation view.
Related Topics
Delete Model View, page 247
Set View, page 208
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 211
Modify View
The View > Modify command modifies an existing model view. Select the
command, and then place a data point in the model view that you want to modify.
This command modifies the symbology for all members in the view. Use the Linear
Member Overrides or the Solid Member Overrides command to modify the
symbology of individual members.
When all the parameters on the Modify View and symbology dialog boxes have been
edited, click Apply or OK to accept the new values. The OK button deactivates the
Modify View dialog box before editing the view. Apply edits the view and leaves the
dialog box active so that additional views can then be edited. Click Cancel to ignore
your changes and exit the command.

File - Specifies a default preference file. For more information, see File (Create View
Dialog Box), page 196.
Symbology - Activates one of two dialog boxes for modifying view symbology. For
more information, see Modify Symbology for Linear Members, page 214 and Modify
Symbology for Solid Members, page 215.
View Name - Contains the name of the Model View. You can edit this name by
selecting the field and keying in a new name. The name can be up to 40 characters
long.
View
212 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Description - This key-in field is optional and can be used to further describe the
Model View. The description can be up to 132 characters long.
View Type - Defines the view type. This setting cannot be edited.
Define Active Plane by - Defines the way in which you edit the view's active depth
point. The active depth defines the plane on which members are placed in the view.
If set to Key-in, define the point using the X:, Y:, and Z: key-in fields.
If set to Point, you are prompted to specify a point for the view's active depth. Place a
data point, in any view, to define the view's active depth.
X:, Y:, Z: - These key-in fields define the view's active depth point. In elevation
views, typically only one of these values is significant, depending on the orientation
selected. For example, when defining a North elevation, only the Y: coordinate is
needed to define the active plane. The values of the non-significant fields are ignored.
Display Depth - Controls the range of the model displayed in the view. This distance
is measured normal to the view plane. This can be used to include or exclude
members, which lie "in front of" or "behind" the active depth of the view. The
distance in front of the active depth is set using the (+) parameter, and the distance
behind with the (-) field.
Fitted View Border Widths - Defines the border clearance used when the Fit View
command is used. FrameWorks Plus determines the range of all structural elements
within the view to be fit (including any grid lines placed in the view) and adds the
specified border widths to establish a new view range.
View North - Specifies which direction is north for the view being modified. By
specifying the correct direction for north, FrameWorks Plus will rotate member
annotation so when the view is placed in a drawing and rotated, all annotation will
read left to right, or bottom to top.

As seen in the Model View.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 213

As seen in the Frozen View after rotation.
Drawing Scale - Specifies whether or not you are defining a drawing scale for this
view. You can select one of the standard scales or define your own scale.
If you choose to define a drawing scale for the view, the text and some representation
sizes you enter in the View Symbology dialog boxes are the actual size you want
them to be in the drawing when plotted. For example, you activate this option and
select 1/4" : 1' as the scale. In the View Symbology dialog boxes you enter 0.25 (1/4
of an inch) as the text size you want in the drawing. When you create the view,
FrameWorks Plus calculates that the text needs to be placed in the Model View using
a text size of 1 foot. Later, you modify the view's drawing scale to 1/2" : 1', because
you still want your text to be 1/4" high in the drawing, FrameWorks Plus recalculates
and resets the text size in the Model View to be 6 inches.
If you choose not to define a drawing scale for the view, the text and some
representation sizes you enter in the View Symbology dialog boxes are the size you
want to place in model (as specified in master units). You need to calculate the
correct size so that after the view is scaled, your text is the correct height in the
drawing.
Related Topics
Modify Symbology for Linear Members, page 214
Modify Symbology for Solid Members, page 215
Modify View, page 211
View
214 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Symbology for Linear Members
The Symbology > Linear pulldown on the Modify View dialog box is used to
modify beam, column, and brace view symbology. This symbology was originally
defined when the view was created (see Create View, page 191). The view's current
symbology displays in the dialog box.
The dialog box has three areas: Graphics, Attributes, and Preview. The Graphics
area defines which representation styles and annotation you want to use. The
Attributes area defines the graphic symbology for active Graphics settings. The
Preview area displays how your settings will appear.
When the symbology parameters have been defined as required, click OK to accept
the parameters and return to the Modify View dialog box. You can also save the
settings and keep this dialog box active by clicking Apply. Click Cancel to ignore the
changes made and exit the dialog box.

Graphics - Defines what representation style and annotation you want to use for the
active linear member type.
When set to Representation, you can select which style to use to display the
member.
When set to Annotation, the different member annotation that can be set is shown.
Display in View - Specifies if the selected representation or annotation is used for the
active member. Toggle on to use that representation style or annotation setting.
For an explanation of the remaining controls on this dialog box, see Symbology for
Linear Members, page 197.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 215
Modify Symbology for Solid Members
The Symbology > 3D Solids pulldown on the Modify View dialog box is used to
modify slab, walls, and solid view symbology. This symbology was originally
defined when the view was created (see Create View, page 191).
This command's dialog box has three areas: Graphics, Attributes, and Preview. The
Graphics area defines which representation styles and annotation you want to use.
The Attributes area defines the graphic symbology for active Graphics settings. The
Preview area displays how your settings will appear.
When the symbology parameters have been defined as required, click OK to accept
the parameters and return back to the Modify View dialog box. You can also save the
settings and keep this dialog box active by clicking Apply. Click Cancel to ignore the
changes made and exit the dialog box.

Graphics - Defines what representation style and annotation you want to use for the
active solid member type.
When set to Representation, the different styles on how the actual solid member is
shown can be selected.
When set to Annotation, the different annotation that can be set for the solid member
is shown.
Display in View - Specifies if the selected representation or annotation is used for the
active member. Toggle on to use that representation style or annotation setting.
For more information about the controls on this dialog box, see Symbology for Solid
Members, page 205.
View
216 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Create Named Groups Symbology
The View > Named Groups > Create command defines view symbology for named
group members that override the regular view symbology. By using named group
symbology, you can turn off and on symbology for groups providing a powerful
method for controlling what members are added to frozen views.
When displaying members, FrameWorks Plus uses any defined Member Override
symbology first. If the member does not have a Member Override defined,
FrameWorks Plus looks for a Named Group symbology. If the member does not have
a Named Group symbology defined, FrameWorks Plus uses the default symbology
defined for the view.
If a member belongs to more than one named group, FrameWorks Plus uses the
symbology for the controlling named group. You specify which named group is the
controlling named group when you assign the second named group to the member.

Beams - Activates the View Symbology - Beams dialog box. You can use this dialog
box to change the symbology for all beams in the view that belong to the selected
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 217
named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Beams dialog box,
see Symbology for Linear Members, page 197.
Columns - Activates the View Symbology - Columns dialog box. You can use this
dialog box to change the symbology for all columns in the view that belong to the
selected named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Columns
dialog box, see Symbology for Linear Members, page 197.
H. Braces - Activates the View Symbology - Horizontal Braces dialog box. You can
use this dialog box to change the symbology for all horizontal braces in the view that
belong to the selected named group. For more information about the View
Symbology - Horizontal Braces dialog box, see Symbology for Linear Members, page
197.
V. Braces - Activates the View Symbology - Vertical Braces dialog box. You can use
this dialog box to change the symbology for all vertical braces in the view that belong
to the selected named group. For more information about the View Symbology -
Vertical Braces dialog box, see Symbology for Linear Members, page 197.
Apply to all linear members - Activates the All button that accesses the View
Symbology dialog box. You can use this dialog box to change the symbology for all
linear members (beams, columns, vertical braces, and horizontal braces) in the view
that belong to the selected named group. This is useful when you want to turn off the
symbology for all members in a named group.
Slabs - Activates the View Symbology - Slabs dialog box. You can use this dialog
box to change the symbology for all slabs in the view that belong to the selected
named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Slabs dialog box,
see Symbology for Solid Members, page 205.
Walls - Activates the View Symbology - Walls dialog box. You can use this dialog
box to change the symbology for all walls in the view that belong to the selected
named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Walls dialog box,
see Symbology for Solid Members, page 205.
Solids - Activates the View Symbology - Solids dialog box. You can use this dialog
box to change the symbology for all solids in the view that belong to the selected
named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Solids dialog box,
see Symbology for Solid Members, page 205.
Apply to all solid members - Activates the All button that accesses the View
Symbology dialog box. You can use this dialog box to change the symbology for all
solid members (slabs, walls, and solids) in the view that belong to the selected named
group. This is useful when you want to turn off the symbology for all members in a
named group.
View
218 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
List all Named Groups - Toggle on to display all available named groups in the
project. If you leave this option off, the list displays only those named groups in the
view that have not had symbology defined for them.
Sorted by - Controls how named groups are displayed in the list. Select Index to
display the named groups in the order that they were created. Select Alphabet to
display the named groups in alphabetical order.
Show - Highlights all members in the view that belong to the selected named group.
Apply - Applies the named group symbology settings to the members.
OK - Applies the named group symbology settings to the members and exits the
dialog box.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without changing any named group symbology.
Related Topics
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups, page 167
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Named Groups, page 308
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 219
Modify Named Groups Symbology
The View > Named Groups > Modify command modifies view symbology for
named group members that override the regular view symbology.
When displaying members, FrameWorks Plus uses any defined Member Override
symbology first. If the member does not have a Member Override defined,
FrameWorks Plus looks for a Named Group symbology. If the member does not have
a Named Group symbology defined, FrameWorks Plus uses the default symbology
defined for the view.
If a member belongs to more than one named group, FrameWorks Plus uses the
symbology for the controlling named group. You specify which named group is the
controlling named group when you assign the second named group to the members.

Beams - Activates the View Symbology - Beams dialog box. You can use this dialog
box to change the symbology for all beams in the view that belong to the selected
named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Beams dialog box,
see Symbology for Linear Members, page 197.
View
220 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Columns - Activates the View Symbology - Columns dialog box. You can use this
dialog box to change the symbology for all columns in the view that belong to the
selected named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Columns
dialog box, see Symbology for Linear Members, page 197.
H. Braces - Activates the View Symbology - Horizontal Braces dialog box. You can
use this dialog box to change the symbology for all horizontal braces in the view that
belong to the selected named group. For more information about the View
Symbology - Horizontal Braces dialog box, see Symbology for Linear Members, page
197.
V. Braces - Activates the View Symbology - Vertical Braces dialog box. You can use
this dialog box to change the symbology for all vertical braces in the view that belong
to the selected named group. For more information about the View Symbology -
Vertical Braces dialog box, see Symbology for Linear Members, page 197.
Apply to all linear members - Activates the All button that accesses the View
Symbology dialog box. You can use this dialog box to change the symbology for all
linear members (beams, columns, vertical braces, and horizontal braces) in the view
that belong to the selected named group. This is useful when you want to turn off the
symbology for all members in a named group.
Slabs - Activates the View Symbology - Slabs dialog box. You can use this dialog
box to change the symbology for all slabs in the view that belong to the selected
named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Slabs dialog box,
see Symbology for Solid Members, page 205.
Walls - Activates the View Symbology - Walls dialog box. You can use this dialog
box to change the symbology for all walls in the view that belong to the selected
named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Walls dialog box,
see Symbology for Solid Members, page 205.
Solids - Activates the View Symbology - Solids dialog box. You can use this dialog
box to change the symbology for all solids in the view that belong to the selected
named group. For more information about the View Symbology - Solids dialog box,
see Symbology for Solid Members, page 205.
Apply to all solid members - Activates the All button that accesses the View
Symbology dialog box. You can use this dialog box to change the symbology for all
solid members (slabs, walls, and solids) in the view that belong to the selected named
group. This is useful when you want to turn off the symbology for all members in a
named group.
List all Named Groups - Toggle on to display all available named groups in the
project. If you leave this option off, the list displays only those named groups in the
view that have had symbology defined for them.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 221
Sorted by - Controls how named groups are displayed in the list. Select Index to
display the named groups in the order that they were created. Select Alphabet to
display the named groups in alphabetical order.
Show - Highlights all members in the view that belong to the selected named group.
Apply - Applies the named group symbology settings to the members.
OK - Applies the named group symbology settings to the members and exits the
dialog box.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without changing any named group symbology.
Related Topics
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups, page 167
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Named Groups, page 308
View
222 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Drop Named Groups Symbology
The View > Named Groups > Drop command deletes named group symbology from
the view. The member symbology will revert back to the default view symbology
once the named group symbology is dropped. The dialog box only displays those
named groups with symbology defined in the selected view.

Sorted by - Controls how named groups are displayed in the list. Select Index to
display the named groups in the order that they were created. Select Alphabet to
display the named groups in alphabetical order.
Related Topics
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups, page 167
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Named Groups, page 308
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 223
Linear Member Overrides
The View > Override > Linear command changes the view symbology for a single
linear member or a small group of selected linear members. If you need to move only
a single piece of annotation, consider using the Override Annotation command
instead. For more information, see Override Annotation, page 235. If you need to
move only a single double line widget, consider using the Override Double Line
Widget command instead. For more information, see Override Double Line Widget,
page 236.

Overrides used to move vertical brace annotation.
When displaying members, FrameWorks Plus uses any defined Member Override
symbology first. If the member does not have a Member Override defined,
FrameWorks Plus looks for a Named Group symbology. If the member does not have
a Named Group symbology defined, FrameWorks Plus uses the default symbology
defined for the view.
Note
Overrides are tracked on an individual member basis. For example, if you
copy a member that has overrides defined for it, the member created by
the copy will not have the override information. To modify symbology on
all members in a view, use the Modify View command.
Warning
Detaching a model that contains members to which you have applied
overrides can cause unpredictable results. We recommend that you either
not detach models that have members with overrides or that you remove
the overrides before detaching the model. If you absolutely must detach a
model with member overrides, attach the models in the same order. For
example, you have three models attached: Model A, Model B, and Model
C. You apply overrides to members in Model B then detach all the
models. You must attach Model A then attach Model B.
The dialog box has three areas: Graphics, Attributes, and Preview. The Graphics area
defines which representation styles and annotation you want to use. The Attributes
View
224 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
area defines the graphic symbology for active Graphics settings. The Preview area
displays how your settings will appear.

Graphics - Defines what representation style and annotation you want to use for the
active linear member type.
When set to Representation, the different styles on how the actual member is shown
can be selected.
When set to Annotation, the different annotation that can be set for the member is
shown.
Display in View - Specifies if the selected representation or annotation is used for the
active member. Toggle on to use that representation style or annotation setting.
Edit All Similar - Toggle on to edit similar members, such as all the beams, to have
the same settings as the currently highlighted member. This option is only available
when more than one element is selected for member overrides.
Use Defaults - Toggle on to remove any symbology overrides on the member and use
the default symbology values for the view.
Designate for Frozen view update - If the view that contains the member whose
symbology you are overriding has been frozen, select this option if you want to
designate that member as "needing to be updated" the next time the frozen view is
updated using the Update Frozen command. If you do not select this option, the new
member symbology will only appear if the frozen view is regenerated.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 225
Match Symbology - Defaults all representation and annotation settings in the dialog
box to match a selected member. The member you select must be of the same
member type (beam, column, vertical brace, or horizontal brace) and must be in the
same view as the member for which you are currently overriding symbology.
Apply - Saves the override symbology for the selected member and prompts you to
select another member you want to change symbology on.
OK - Saves the override symbology for the selected member and dismisses the dialog
box.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Next - Moves to the next member in the selection set. Next does not save changes. Be
sure to select Apply if you have changed a member's symbology before selecting
Next.
Representation - Attributes
Color - Type the color number (0-254) for the active representation. You can also use
the Color pulldown to select the color.
Weight - Type the line weight, or thickness, (0-15) for the active representation. You
can also select the line weight from the option list.
Style - Type the line style (0-7) for the active representation. You can also select the
line style from the list.
Freeze Level - Specifies the level on which the representation graphics are placed
when the view is frozen. The Levels option in the Freeze View command must be set
to Freeze Levels for this setting to be used.
Setback End 1 - Defines the distance that the start end of the member single line is
set back, or shortened. A positive setback value shortens the start end of the member
by the specified distance. If cutbacks have been applied to the member, the single line
length represents the member's cutback length. This setback is added to the cutback
length.
If the Setback as % Len option is selected, the setback distance is defined as a
percentage of the member length.
If the Setback as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the setback distance is defined in model master units.
If the Setback as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, then the setback distance is defined as the actual distance you want the
setback to appear as in the drawing. This value is inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models.
View
226 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Setback End 2 - Defines the distance that the end of the member single line is set
back, or shortened. A positive setback value shortens the end of the member by the
specified distance. If cutbacks have been applied to the member, the single line length
represents the member's cutback length. This setback is added to the cutback length.
If the Setback as % Len option is selected, the setback distance is defined as a
percentage of the member length.
If the Setback as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the setback distance is defined in model master units.
If the Setback as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, then the setback distance is defined as the actual distance you want the
setback to appear as in the drawing. This value is inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models.
Setback as % Length - Computes the setback distance as a percentage of the
member's total length. For example, if this toggle is on and the setback parameter is
set to 10, the single line for a beam totaling 20 feet in length would be set back 2 feet.
DblLine Length - Defines the length of the double-line display. To view cutbacks,
this field must be set to 100 and the DblLine as % Length option must be selected.
You can also use the Surface representation to view cutbacks.
If the DblLine as % Len option is selected, the double-line length is defined as a
percentage of the member length.
If the DblLine as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the double-line length is defined in model master units.
If the DblLine as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, then the double-line length is defined as the actual length you want the
double-line display to appear as in the drawing. This value is inches for imperial
models and millimeters for metric models.
DblLine as % Length - Computes the double line length as a percentage of the
member's total length. For example, if this toggle is on, and the double line length
parameter is set to 10, the length of the double line component for a beam 20 feet
long would be 2 feet.
To view cutbacks, this toggle must be on and the DblLine Length field must have a
value of 100.
Define DblLine Position by - Defines if you want to define the double-line position
by pointing to the location or by keying in the location along the member.
DblLine Position - Specifies the double-line symbol center's location. The location is
measured along the member line from member end 1 (the first end placed) towards
end 2.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 227
If the Position as % Len option is selected, the double-line position is defined as a
percentage of the member length.
If the Position as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the double-line position is defined in model master units from the start
of the member.
If the Position as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, then the double-line position is defined as the actual distance from the start
of the member that you want the double-line display to appear in the drawing. This
value is inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models.
Position as % Length - Computes the double line component's location point as a
percentage of the total member length. For example, if this toggle is on, and the
double line position parameter is set to 25, the center of the double line display is at a
point 5 feet from end 1 of a beam totaling 20 feet in length.
Section Scale - Constructs the double line component from the geometry in the on-
line section library for the specified section size. By default, when Section Scale =
1.0, the section is drawn at true scale, or to the exact dimensions found in the section
library. By using this parameter, you can scale the double line component up or down
as needed for graphical clarity.
Thickness Exaggeration - Scales up (or down) the component thickness of a
structural section (such as web, flange thickness) for display on the double-line
component. Unlike the Section Scale, which scales the section in its entirety, the
thickness exaggeration factor expands the double-line representation's components
which are typically the most difficult to see on the drawings, such as the web hidden
lines on an I-section.
Angle Tolerance - Defines the criteria, measured in degrees, which determine how a
member is displayed either as a Member in View Plane or a Member Intersecting
View Plane. If the angle between the member line and an imaginary vector normal to
the view plane exceeds the specified Angle Tolerance, the member is considered to be
in the view plane, or parallel to the view. If the angle between the member line and
the view plane normal vector is less than the Angle Tolerance, the member is
considered to intersect the view plane, or to be perpendicular.
Section Scale - Scales the foot print up or down as needed for graphical clarity. The
section Foot Print and surface representation are constructed from the geometry in the
on-line section library for the specified section size. By default, when Section Scale =
1.0, the foot print is drawn at true scale, or to the exact dimensions found in the
section library.
Fireproofing Color - Specifies the fireproofing's color. You can key in the color
number you want to use or select the color from the color palette. This field only
displays when the View Type is 3D.
View
228 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Fireproofing Weight - Specifies the fireproofing's line weight. The higher the
number, the thicker the lines representing the fireproofing. You can key in the line
weight (0-15) or use the option pulldown to select the line weight. This field only
displays when the View Type is 3D.
Fireproofing Style - Specifies the fireproofing's line style. You can key in the line
style number (0-7) or use the option pulldown to select the line style. This field only
displays when the View Type is 3D.
Fireproofing Freeze Level - Specifies the level the fireproofing graphics should be
placed on when the view is frozen. Valid levels are 1 to 63. This field only displays
when the View Type is 3D.
Annotation - Attributes
Color - Type the color number (0-254) for the active annotation. You can also use the
Color pulldown to select the color.
Weight - Type the line weight, or thickness, (0-15) for the active annotation. You can
also select the line weight from the option list.
Font - Type the appropriate font number for the annotation text's font or text style.
Freeze Level - Specifies the level on which the annotation text is to be placed when
the view is frozen. The Levels option in the Freeze View command must be set to
Freeze Levels for this freeze level setting to be used.
Text Height - Defines the height of each character for the text element used to label
the member name. If the Drawing Scale option is selected, the height is defined in
inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models. You are defining the
actual height of the text as it will appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the height is defined in master units.
Text Width - Defines the width of each character for the text element used to label
the member name. If the Drawing Scale option is selected, the width is defined in
inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models. You are defining the
actual width of the text as it will appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the width is defined in master units.
Define Text Position By - Defines if you want to define the text position by pointing
to the location, by keying in the location along the member, or by moving the text
along the member.
Text Position - Specifies the location of the annotation's center measured along the
member line from end 1 of the member (the first end placed) towards end 2.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 229
If the Position as % Len option is selected, the annotation is placed at the percentage
of the member's length that you specify.
If the Position as % Len option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, the position is defined in master units.
If the Position as % Len option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is
selected, the position is defined in inches for imperial models and millimeters for
metric models.
Position as % Length - Computes the annotation position distance as a percentage of
the total member length. For example, if this toggle is on, and the text position
parameter is set to 25, the center of the name label is positioned 5 feet from end 1 of a
member that is 20 feet in length.
Text Location - Defines the location of the member name text label, relative to other
label(s) annotated for the member line. Four possibilities are available: directly above
or below the member line, or stacked above or below any other label which is directly
above or below the member line. You can effectively control the label stacking with
this parameter.
For footprints, defines the location of the member name label is defined relative to the
section footprint graphics. The label can be placed by one of five possible positions:
center, top right, top left, bottom left, or bottom right. Select the desired location
using the option list provided.
Offset - Defines distance from the member line at which the annotation is placed. The
Offset Direction defines whether the annotation is placed above or below the member
line.
If the As % of Height option is selected, the distance is defined as a percentage of the
text height.
If the As % of Height option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the Offset is defined in master units.
If the As % of Height option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is selected,
the offset is defined in inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models.
Offset X - Defines distance along the X-axis from the member line at which the
annotation is placed.
If the As % of Height option is selected, the distance is defined as a percentage of the
text height.
If the As % of Height option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the Offset is defined in master units.
View
230 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
If the As % of Height option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is selected,
the offset is defined in inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models.
Offset Y - Defines distance along the Y-axis from the member line at which the
annotation is placed.
If the As % of Height option is selected, the distance is defined as a percentage of the
text height.
If the As % of Height option is not selected and the Drawing Scale option is not
selected, then the Offset is defined in master units.
If the As % of Height option is not selected but the Drawing Scale option is selected,
the offset is defined in inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models.
As % of Height - Computes the annotation-offset distance as a percentage of the text
height.
Offset Direction - Specifies if the annotation offset is applied above the member line
or below the member line.
Angle - Specifies an angle at which to display the annotation. The angle is measured
between the bottom of the annotation text and the member line. The left edge of the
annotation is the rotation axis.
Delta TOS Format - Select the format you want to use for the delta top-of-steel
distance annotation.
Abbreviate Section - Displays the section size names in abbreviated form. For
example, section W21X122 is labeled as W21. This feature can be used to annotate
drawings with only the nominal section size.
Number of Characters - Specifies the number of characters you want to appear
when you abbreviate a section name.
Label - When the user option is specified for the FP Designator, this key-in field can
be used to specify a user-definable FP label. This label is appended to the section
size, and can contain up to 12 characters.
Related Topics
Linear Member Overrides, page 223
Modify Symbology for Linear Members, page 214
Modify Symbology for Solid Members, page 215
Modify View, page 211
Override Annotation, page 235
Override Double Line Widget, page 236
Solid Member Overrides, page 231
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 231
Solid Member Overrides
The View > Override > 3D Solid command changes the view symbology for a single
solid member or a small group of selected solid members. This command is useful for
moving member annotation that is overlapping. If you need to move only a single
piece of annotation, consider using the Override Annotation command instead. For
more information, see Override Annotation.
When displaying members, FrameWorks Plus uses any defined Member Override
symbology first. If the member does not have a Member Override defined,
FrameWorks Plus looks for a Named Group symbology. If the member does not have
a Named Group symbology defined, FrameWorks Plus uses the default symbology
defined for the view.
Note
Overrides are tracked on an individual member basis. For example, if you
copy a member that has overrides defined for it, the member created by
the copy will not have the override information. To modify symbology on
all members in a view, use the Modify View command.
Warning
Detaching a model that contains members to which you have applied
overrides can cause unpredictable results. We recommend that you either
not detach models that have members with overrides or that you remove
the overrides before detaching the model. If you absolutely must detach a
model with member overrides, attach the models in the same order. For
example, you have three models attached: Model A, Model B, and Model
C. You apply overrides to members in Model B then detach all the
models. You must attach Model A then attach Model B.
This command's dialog box has three areas: Graphics, Attributes, and Preview. The
Graphics area defines which representation styles and annotation you want to use.
The Attributes area defines the graphic symbology for active Graphics settings. The
Preview area displays how your settings will appear.
View
232 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Graphics - Defines what representation style and annotation you want to use for the
active solid member type.
When set to Representation, the different styles on how the actual solid member is
shown can be selected.
When set to Annotation, the different annotation that can be set for the solid member
is shown.
Display in View - Specifies if the selected representation or annotation is used for the
active member. Toggle on to use that representation style or annotation setting.
Use Defaults - Toggle on to remove any symbology overrides on the member and use
the default symbology values for the view.
Designate for Frozen view update - Select this option if the solid whose symbology
you are overriding has been frozen and you want the symbology updated the next
time the frozen view is updated using the Update Frozen command. If you do not
select this option, the new member symbology will only appear if the frozen view is
regenerated.
Match Symbology - Defaults all representation and annotation settings in the dialog
box to match a selected solid. The solid that you select must be of the same member
type (slab, wall, or solid) and must be in the same view as the solid for which you are
currently overriding symbology.
Apply - Saves the override symbology for the selected member and prompts you to
select another member you want to change symbology on.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 233
OK - Saves the override symbology for the selected member and dismisses the dialog
box.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Next - Moves to the next member in the selection set. Next does not save changes. Be
sure to click Apply if you have changed a member's symbology before clicking Next.
Annotation - Attributes
Color - Type the color number (0-254) for the active representation. You can also use
the Color pulldown to select the color.
Weight - Type the line weight, or thickness, (0-15) for the active representation. You
can also select the line weight from the option list.
Font - Type the font, or text style, for the annotation text.
Freeze Level - Specifies the level on which the annotation text is placed when the
view is frozen. The Levels option in the Freeze View command must be set to Freeze
Levels for this freeze level setting to be used.
Text Height - Defines the height of each character for the text element used to label
the member name. If the Drawing Scale option is selected, the height is defined in
inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models. You are defining the
actual height of the text as it will appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the height is defined in master units.
Text Width - Defines the width of each character for the text element used to label
the member name. If the Drawing Scale option is selected, the width is defined in
inches for imperial models and millimeters for metric models. You are defining the
actual width of the text as it will appear in the drawing.
If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, the width is defined in master units.
Define Text Position By - Defines if you want to define the text position by pointing
to the location, by keying in the location, or by moving the text along the member.
Text Position X - Specifies the location name label along the X-axis. The location is
measured along the X-axis from the centroid of the solid member. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, this position is defined in inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models. If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, this
position is defined in master units.
Text Position Y - Specifies the location name label along the Y-axis. The location is
measured along the Y-axis from the centroid of the solid member. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, this position is defined in inches for imperial models and
View
234 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
millimeters for metric models. If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, this
position is defined in master units.
Text Position Z - Specifies the location name label along the Z-axis. The location is
measured along the Z-axis from the centroid of the solid member. If the Drawing
Scale option is selected, this position is defined in inches for imperial models and
millimeters for metric models. If the Drawing Scale option is not selected, this
position is defined in master units.
Angle - Specifies an angle at which to display the annotation. The angle is measured
between the bottom of the annotation text and the centroid of the solid. The left edge
of the annotation is the rotation axis.
Related Topics
Linear Member Overrides, page 223
Modify Symbology for Linear Members, page 214
Modify Symbology for Solid Members, page 215
Modify View, page 211
Override Annotation, page 235
Override Double Line Widget, page 236
Solid Member Overrides, page 231
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 235
Override Annotation
The View > Override Annotation command changes the
location of annotation for a single member without having to go
through the main override dialog box. You can move both linear
and solid member annotation with this command. The software
automatically updates the member override dialog box with the
new annotation location. As with all member overrides, you can restore the default
symbology to the member by using the Use Defaults option on the member override
dialog box.
When displaying members, FrameWorks Plus uses any defined Member Override
symbology first. If the member does not have a Member Override defined,
FrameWorks Plus looks for a Named Group symbology. If the member does not have
a Named Group symbology defined, FrameWorks Plus uses the default symbology
defined for the view.
Note
Overrides are tracked on an individual member basis. For example, if you
copy a member that has overrides defined for it, the member created by
the copy will not have the override information. To modify symbology on
all members in a view, use the Modify View command.
Warning
Detaching a model that contains members to which you have applied
overrides can cause unpredictable results. We recommend that you either
not detach models that have members with overrides or that you remove
the overrides before detaching the model. If you absolutely must detach a
model with member overrides, attach the models in the same order. For
example, you have three models attached: Model A, Model B, and Model
C. You apply overrides to members in Model B, and then detach all the
models. You must attach Model A then attach Model B.
Annotation - Select which piece of to move.
Display along member - Select to limit the movement
of the annotation to along the member line. Clear this
option to position the annotation anywhere.
Related Topics
Linear Member Overrides, page 223
Override Annotation, page 235
Override Double Line Widget, page 236
Solid Member Overrides, page 231
View
236 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Override Double Line Widget
The View > Override Double Line Widget command changes the location of
the double line widget for a single linear member without having to go through the
main override dialog box. The software automatically updates the member override
dialog box with the new widget location. As with all member overrides, you can
restore the default symbology to the member by using the Use Defaults option on the
member override dialog box.
When displaying members, FrameWorks Plus uses any defined Member Override
symbology first. If the member does not have a Member Override defined,
FrameWorks Plus looks for a Named Group symbology. If the member does not have
a Named Group symbology defined, FrameWorks Plus uses the default symbology
defined for the view.
Note
Overrides are tracked on an individual member basis. For example, if you
copy a member that has overrides defined for it, the member created by
the copy will not have the override information. To modify symbology on
all members in a view, use the Modify View command.
Warning
Detaching a model that contains members to which you have applied
overrides can cause unpredictable results. We recommend that you either
not detach models that have members with overrides or that you remove
the overrides before detaching the model. If you absolutely must detach a
model with member overrides, attach the models in the same order. For
example, you have three models attached: Model A, Model B, and Model
C. You apply overrides to members in Model B, and then detach all the
models. You must attach Model A then attach Model B.
Related Topics
Linear Member Overrides, page 223
Override Annotation, page 235
Override Double Line Widget, page 236
Solid Member Overrides, page 231
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 237
Freeze View
The View > Freeze command creates permanent graphics from the display-
only model view graphics. The permanent graphics, called frozen views, are used to
create construction drawings. The Freeze View command can also create a
propagated file that can be read by Intergraph's SmartPlant Review package, or
attached to PDS as a reference file.
Note
If you have not already done so, please read the brief descriptions of the
model and frozen view types. See View, page 189.
Before you can freeze a view, the particular model view you want to freeze must be
active. The frozen view graphics are created exactly as currently displayed in the
model view and include view settings, view style, and attached model partitions.
The current model view's view range is stored with the frozen view. This view range
becomes the default drawing view display area when the frozen view is attached.

View Name - Defines the name of the frozen view. This name is normally left the
same as the name of the corresponding model view, but can be changed if needed by
keying in a new name.
Description - Defines a frozen view description. The description defaults to the
description specified for the model view.
Freeze File - Specifies the model file to which the frozen view is saved. This allows
you to save the frozen view to another design file instead of saving the file to the
active model file. The Freeze File name should not contain embedded spaces or other
View
238 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
special characters such as, but not limited to, ^&#%$. However, you can use the
underscore (_) character.
Select button - Displays a listing of freeze files from which you can select which file
to save to.
Freeze to Model File - Toggle on to save the frozen view to the active model file.
Toggle off to save the frozen view to the freeze file specified in the Freeze File field.
Graphic Group Members - When on, the graphical components defining each
structural member (single line, label text, double line) are grouped together as a
graphic group. Using this option makes manipulation, deletion, or other graphical
operations easier when working on the drawing graphics.
Generate Propagated Model - Toggle on to create a propagated file that can be read
by SmartPlant Review or attached as a PDS propagated model. Only isometric views
with surface representations can be used to write the propagated file. No other view
representations (Single, Double Line, and so forth) are written to the file. The name
for the propagated file is specified in the Freeze File field. Using this option, the
following files are written to the project's \frz folder: the propagated file, a .drv file
that contains member data, and a .dri file.
You can also create propagated files (frozen 3D isometric views with surface
representation) using a command line key-in. For more information, see Command
Prompt Commands.
Notes
You cannot use the Update Frozen or Regenerate commands on a
propagated model to update it. You must re-create the propagated model
using the method used to create it. For example, if the propagated model
was created using the PDS batch propagated command, then you should
use the PDS batch propagated command to update the model. Similarly, if
you used this command or the command prompt utility, then use this
command or the command prompt utility to update the propagated model.
If you are freezing to the active model, the Freeze to Model File option is
selected, the .dri and .drv files are not created.
FrameWorks Plus only writes members in the active model to the
propagated file. Members in attached models are not written to the
propagated file unless you use the command-line key-in command.
The binary files containing the additional attribute and named group data
are only generated if you use the PDS batch propagation command.
Add User Graphics - Toggle on to copy all generic MicroStation graphics that are in
the active model and displayed in the FrameWorks Plus view to the frozen view. If
this toggle is off, only graphics placed using FrameWorks Plus are saved to the frozen
view.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 239
You can control which user graphics are frozen by turning on or off the levels the
user graphics are on. For example, if you have loads and labels on different levels,
this gives you the ability to freeze loads but not the labels for member releases and
supports.
Process End Treatments - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should cope, notch, and
trim steel members based on adjacent supporting steel members when freezing them.
FrameWorks Plus processes end treatments for plan and elevation views only. 3D
views are not processed.
FrameWorks Plus does not process member ends that have a cutback defined. Only
members with no cutbacks are processed. FrameWorks Plus will not override defined
cutbacks with end treatments if either member end has a cutback.
Members that you want to process end treatments for must have either the Surface
representation on or have the Double-Line representation on and set to 100% of the
member length. FrameWorks Plus will not process end treatments for members that
do not have one of these two symbology settings set. The graphics in the frozen view
file will be Double-Line graphics regardless of the active symbology setting.
Note
End Treatments are not Multi-Plane Cutbacks for members. The coping
and notching are displayed only in the frozen views used to create
drawings.
For plan views, FrameWorks Plus will:
Notch beam flanges connected to narrower column (as shown at A).
Cope a beam's top and bottom flanges when attached to same size girder
(as shown at B).
Cope a beam's top flange when attached to girder (as shown at C).

View
240 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
For elevation views, FrameWorks Plus will:
Notch beam flanges connected to narrower column (as shown at A).
Cope a beam's top and bottom flanges when attached to same size girder
(as shown at B).
Cope a beam's top flange to a girder (as shown at C).

Include Attached FWP Models - Specifies that members in attached FrameWorks
Plus models should be included in the frozen view. This option is available only if
you have an attached model. This option is not available if the Generate Propagated
Model option is selected.
Levels - Specifies how the level on which the frozen view graphics are placed is
selected. If set to Automatic, FrameWorks Plus chooses a unique level that has not
previously been used for a frozen view. This level is selected from the freeze level
range defined with the Settings > Levels command. If set to Manual, you specify a
level to use for the frozen view graphics. If set to Freeze Levels, then the freeze
levels defined in the view symbology settings (for the view being frozen) are used.
These symbology settings are defined when the view is created.
Note
If you plan to freeze views to the model file, we recommend that you use
the Automatic mode and let FrameWorks Plus determine the freeze levels.
This helps avoid overlapping frozen view displays and model view
displays.
Freeze Level - When the Levels option is set to Manual, this key-in field is used to
specify the level on which the frozen view graphics are placed. Valid level numbers
are 1 to 63.
Related Topics
Attach Model, page 44
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Frozen, page 28
Compress Models Key-in, page 35
Create Drawing File Key-in, page 32
Create Envelope File Key-in, page 34
Create Model Key-in, page 30
Create Project Key-in, page 30
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 241
Create SmartPlant Review File Key-in, page 34
Create User Section Library Key-in, page 33
Delete Frozen View, page 248
Detach Model, page 46
Display Frozen, page 246
Freeze View, page 237
Regenerate, page 244
SDNF Import Key-in, page 35
Update Clash Envelope Builder Files Key-in, page 38
Update Frozen, page 242
Upgrade Project Key-in, page 38
Verify Model Key-in, page 37
View
242 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Update Frozen
The View > Update Frozen command automatically updates the permanent, frozen
view graphics to reflect any structural model changes. The Update Frozen command
compares the status of the member graphics in the frozen view to the current model
status and changes the frozen view accordingly. Because the update process uses the
displayed model view information, FrameWorks Plus automatically sets the model
view that corresponds to the frozen view to update if that view is not active. After
updating the view, FrameWorks Plus automatically drops the view.
When you select a view from the list, the selected view's description displays in the
information field at the bottom of the dialog box.
FrameWorks Plus modifies, adds, or deletes graphics in the frozen view to bring the
frozen view up-to-date with the model. An alert box lists the type and number of
changes made. If no changes were needed (the frozen view was already up-to-date),
the alert box indicates that the view was up-to-date.

Frozen Views - Displays the name of the frozen view.
Freeze File - Displays the name of the design file that contains the frozen view.
Saved View - Displays the saved view name.
Last Update - Displays the date and time that the view was last updated.
Last Regenerated - Displays the date and time that the view was last regenerated
using the Regenerate command.
Update User Graphics - If selected, generic MicroStation graphics in the active
model and in the model view are also updated to the frozen view. Generic
MicroStation elements that you have added directly to the frozen file (not the model
file) using MicroStation are not affected by this command.
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 243
Highlight views needing update - If selected, FrameWorks Plus checks the status of
all frozen views. Frozen views that are up-to-date with the corresponding model view
appear in black. Frozen views that need to be updated appear in red.
Related Topics
Compress Frozen, page 28
Delete Frozen View, page 248
Display Frozen, page 246
Freeze View, page 237
Regenerate, page 244
Update Frozen, page 242
View
244 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Regenerate
The View > Regenerate command recreates all frozen view graphics from the current
model using the current model view's display style and settings. All existing graphics
in the selected frozen view are deleted and replaced with the new graphics. This
operation is similar to deleting a frozen view with the Delete Frozen View command
and then refreezing the same model view. Normally, to bring a frozen view up-to-date
with changes in the model, the Update Frozen command is used. However, if major
changes have been made to the model, the model view's display settings, or the
member symbology was changed, then this command must be used.
When you select a view from the list, the selected view's description displays in the
information field at the bottom of the dialog box.
Because the regenerate process uses the displayed model view information,
FrameWorks Plus automatically sets the model view that corresponds to the frozen
view to be regenerated. After regenerating the frozen view, FrameWorks Plus
automatically drops the model view.

Frozen Views - Displays the name of the frozen view.
Freeze File - Displays the name of the design file that contains the frozen view.
Saved View - Displays the saved view name.
Last Update - Displays the date and time that the view was last updated using the
Update Frozen command.
Last Regenerated - Displays the date and time the view was last updated using this
command.
Regenerate User Graphics - If on, generic MicroStation elements in the active
model and in the model view are also regenerated along with the FrameWorks Plus
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 245
members. Generic MicroStation elements that you have added directly to the frozen
file (not the model file) using MicroStation are not affected by this option.
Regenerate Attached Models - If on, members in all attached models are also
regenerated in the frozen view. If off, only members in the active model are
regenerated. This option is always off by default.
Caution
Even if the frozen view you want to regenerate was created with the
Include Attached Models option on, you still must set this option on to
include members in attached models in the regenerated frozen view.
Highlight views needing regenerate - If on, FrameWorks Plus checks the status of
all frozen views. Frozen views that are up-to-date with the corresponding model view
appear in black. Frozen views that need to be regenerated appear in red.
Related Topics
Compress Frozen, page 28
Delete Frozen View, page 248
Display Frozen, page 246
Freeze View, page 237
Regenerate, page 244
Update Frozen, page 242
View
246 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Display Frozen
The View > Display Frozen command temporarily displays frozen views that were
saved to another file in the active model for review. This command is useful for
reviewing frozen views that have had end treatments processed. FrameWorks Plus
automatically resets the model view when you exit this command.
The selected view name (or the view's description if one exists) displays in the
information field at the bottom of the dialog box.
Note
Frozen views saved to the active model file cannot be displayed using this
command. Use the MicroStation Saved Views command to display frozen
views saved to the active model.

Related Topics
Compress Frozen, page 28
Delete Frozen View, page 248
Display Frozen, page 246
Freeze View, page 237
Regenerate, page 244
Update Frozen, page 242
View
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 247
Delete Model View
The View > Delete > Model View command removes a model view from the
FrameWorks Plus database. When deleted, a view cannot be set, frozen, or otherwise
used. To deactivate a view but keep the view for later use, use the Drop View
command.
Caution
When you delete a model view, FrameWorks Plus automatically deletes
any frozen views created from that model view. The deleted frozen views
are also removed from any drawings you have created.

Choose the model view that you want to delete. The name (or the view's description if
one exists) displays in the information field at the bottom of the dialog box. Click
Delete to delete the selected view.
Related Topics
Create View, page 191
Drop View, page 210
File (Create View Dialog Box), page 196
Symbology for Linear Members, page 197
Symbology for Solid Members, page 205
View
248 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Delete Frozen View
The View > Delete > Frozen View command deletes the permanent frozen view
graphics from the design file. This command also removes the frozen view record
from the FrameWorks Plus database. When a frozen view is deleted, it is no longer
available for use with the drawing composition utilities. In addition, the frozen view
is deleted from any drawings previously composed that used the deleted frozen view.
This command does not delete the model view that the frozen view was created from.

Select the frozen view that you want to delete from the list. The name (or the view's
description if one exists) displays in the message area at the bottom of the dialog box.
Click Delete to delete the selected view.
FrameWorks Plus deletes all permanent graphics that were created when the view
was frozen. If the Delete User Graphics toggle is off, only FrameWorks Plus-
generated data is deleted. Any user-created graphics (dimensions, notes, and so forth)
are preserved. FrameWorks Plus also deletes the MicroStation Saved View which
was created with the frozen view.
Related Topics
Compress Frozen, page 28
Delete Frozen View, page 248
Display Frozen, page 246
Freeze View, page 237
Regenerate, page 244
Update Frozen, page 242
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 249
Tools
The Tools commands are used to perform the majority of the graphical placement and
manipulation functions of FrameWorks Plus. These commands display tool boxes
from which a variety of tools can be chosen to activate commands. The Main tool
box contains all the commands available through the Tools menu.

Topics
Main, page 250
Views, page 251
Grids, page 252
Place Linear Members, page 264
Place 3D Solids, page 276
Modify, page 293
Manipulate, page 314
Analytical, page 339
Design Attributes, page 362
Offshore, page 397
Cutbacks, page 412
Tools
250 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Main
The Main (FWP) tool box contains all the commands available through the Tools
pulldown menu only in icon form.
Topics

Element Selection builds or selects a group of members for an operation. See
the MicroStation Reference Guide for more information.

Grid commands create and manipulate sets of grid lines. For more
information, see Grids, page 252.

Place Linear Members commands place beams, columns, vertical braces,
horizontal braces, framing members, and arc members in a model. For more
information, see Place Linear Members, page 264.

Place 3D Solids commands place slabs, walls, and 3D solid elements in the
model. For more information, see Place 3D Solids, page 276.

View commands create and manipulate FrameWorks Plus model and frozen
views. For more information, see View, page 189.

Place Fence commands are the MicroStation Place Fence Block and Place
Fence Shape commands. See the MicroStation Reference Guide for more
information.

Modify commands change member attributes including section sizes, cardinal
points, orientation vector, and other attributes. For more information, see
Modify, page 293.

Manipulate commands copy, move, and delete members in the model. For
more information, see Manipulate, page 314.

Analytical commands place, edit, label, and delete loads and edit and label
member releases and supports. For more information, see Analytical, page 339.

Design Attributes commands design code and design parameters and member
constraints for GTSTRUDL users. For more information, see Design
Attributes, page 362.

Offshore commands place offshore rule-based joints and cans. For more
information, see Offshore, page 397.

Cutback commands place mitered, planar, user, and SmartCut cutbacks on
members. For more information, see Cutbacks, page 412.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 251
Views
The View tool box contains the seven most frequently used view commands. All
View commands are available on the View pulldown menu. For more information,
see View, page 189.

Topics

Create View creates a new Model View in which to place members in the
model. For more information, see Create View, page 191.

Set View activates a FrameWorks Plus model view in a selected MicroStation
view. For more information, see Set View, page 208.

Drop View deactivates an active FrameWorks Plus model view. For more
information, see Drop View, page 210.

Fit View adjusts the display range of a selected FrameWorks Plus model view
so that all FrameWorks Plus members within the defined view depth will fit in
the view window. If you have a PDS design file attached, FrameWorks Plus
adjusts the display range to include all elements in the attached reference file.
If you have a generic MicroStation design file attached, FrameWorks Plus
adjusts the range to include only FrameWorks Plus members.

Freeze View converts an active FrameWorks Plus Model View into a Frozen
View thus creating permanent graphics from the display-only model view
graphics. For more information, see Freeze View, page 237.

Modify View modifies an active model view. For more information, see
Modify View, page 211.

Delete Model View removes a model view from the FrameWorks Plus
database. For more information, see Delete Model View, page 247.

Override Annotation graphically moves member annotation without having to
activate the member override dialog box. For more information, see Override
Annotation, page 235.

Override Double Line Widget graphically moves a double line widget
without having to activate the member override dialog box. For more
information, see Override Double Line Widget, page 236.

Tools
252 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Grids
The Grid commands create and manipulate sets of grid lines, or
column grid lines. A grid set is a group, or matrix, of related grid
lines that are associated with a specific plan or elevation model
view. You can copy a grid set to another view or delete the grid
as a whole.
Grid lines serve two primary purposes. First, is to serve as geometric construction
aids during the modeling or layout process (grid lines are required if you are going to
use the AutoSnap feature). Second, is to provide a graphical reference on the
construction drawings.
You can create two types of grid sets with FrameWorks Plus: plan grids and elevation
grids. Plan grids are grid lines placed in and associated with a FrameWorks Plus plan
view. Elevation grids are grid lines associated with a FrameWorks Plus elevation
grid.
Topics

Place Plan Grid creates a grid line set in a plan model view. For more
information, see Place Plan Grid, page 253.

Place Elevation Grid creates a grid line set in an elevation model view. For
more information, see Place Elevation Grid, page 258.

Copy Grid copies a grid set from one model view to another. For more
information, see Copy Grid, page 261.

Edit Grid Label modifies the text label assigned to a grid line. For more
information, see Edit Grid Label, page 262.

Delete Grid Line deletes a single grid line and its labels. For more
information, see Delete Grid Line, page 263.

Delete Grid deletes entire grids and their labels. For more information, see
Delete Grid, page 263.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 253
Place Plan Grid
The Place Plan Grid command creates a grid line set in a FrameWorks Plus
plan model view. Labels and bubbles can be optionally placed along with the grid set.
The grid can be placed in any active (Set) plan view, at any position, and at any
orientation (plan angle).

FrameWorks Plus creates a basic set of orthogonal grids. If a more elaborate grid
layout is required, you can create it by using any MicroStation command (move,
copy, rotate, mirror, extend, and so forth) on one or more FrameWorks Plus grid lines
within the grid set.
To create a plan grid set, you must define the grid geometry (number of horizontal
and vertical lines and their spacing). The grid geometry is defined in the dialog box's
Lines area by specifying the Number of Lines and Spacing values for each set of
equally spaced lines.
For example, you might have a grid
with 2 horizontal lines spaced at 20
feet and another 3 horizontal lines
spaced at 10 feet. This is represented
by two number/spacing pairs: 2 @ 20
and 3 @ 10. You would define this
geometry by specifying 2 for Number
of Lines and 20 for Spacing; and then
TAB back to the Number of Lines
field and enter 3, at a Spacing of 10.
Axis - Specifies the grid line's axis, or
direction. You must define at least the
Number of Lines and Spacing values
for both the horizontal and vertical
axes. The Axis parameter setting
affects several of the other dialog box
Tools
254 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
options described below. You should verify, and change if needed, the settings of
these parameters for both the horizontal and vertical axes.
Number of Lines - Specifies the number of lines when defining a number/spacing
pair for the current line axis.
Spacing - Specifies the grid line spacing when defining a number/spacing pair.
Clear - Resets or clears the current grid axis's number/spacing information.
Extension (Left/Right) - Defines the distance, in Master Units, that the horizontal
grid lines extend beyond the left-most and right-most vertical grid lines.
Extension (Top/Bottom) - Defines the distance, in Master Units, that the vertical
grid lines extend beyond the upper-most and lower-most horizontal grid lines.
Grid Labels - Defines if grid labels and bubbles are placed at one end, two ends, or
neither end of the grid lines. This value is defined independently for the horizontal
and vertical lines.
Bubble Radius - Specifies the radius of the grid label bubble. If the Honor view scale
for grid graphics option is selected, type the radius of the bubble, as you want it in the
drawing. However, if the Honor view scale for grid graphics option is not selected,
type the radius of the bubble in Master Units.
Initial Label - Specifies the current axis line's starting, or initial, grid label. This label
can be any alphanumeric string, up to five characters long. Valid examples are: "A",
"12C1", "F10", and "7". The initial label is assigned to the lower-most (for horizontal
lines) or left-most (for vertical lines) grid line. Labels for subsequent lines placed are
determined by incrementing this label. This procedure depends on the label's last
character type (alphabetic or numeric), and the setting of the Reverse Increment
toggle described below.
Reverse Increment - Decrements the current axis's grid labels. For example, if the
Initial Label is A8, subsequent labels would be A7, A6, and so forth. If this option is
off, labels are incremented in the normal, increasing manner.
Define Origin by - Specifies how the grid origin is defined. The grid origin is the
intersection point of the lower-most and left-most grid lines.
If set to Key-in, you specify the origin's coordinates in the X:, Y:, and Z: fields.
If set to Point, you are prompted to enter the grid origin. Place a data point, in any
view, at the grid-origin location you want.
Note
The grid origin's Z value is normally insignificant, as the grid is always
placed at the plan view's active depth.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 255
Plan Angle - Specifies that the grid bubble radius and grid text labels should honor
the Drawing Scale defined for the view.
Honor view scale for grid graphics - Specifies whether or not you want the grid
bubble radius and text size to honor the drawing scale of the view in which you place
the grid.
If you choose to honor the view scale, the grid label text size and the bubble radius
size are the actual size you want them to be in the drawing when plotted.
If you choose not to honor the view scale, the grid label text size and the bubble
radius size are the size you want to place in model (as specified in master units). You
need to calculate the correct size so that after the view is scaled, your grid labels are
the correct height in the drawing.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not update the grid label and bubble sizes if you
modify the view drawing scale after placing the grid. You will have to
delete and replace the grid or use MicroStation commands to rescale the
grid labels and bubbles.
Defining Grid Symbology
The grid lines and labels' graphical symbology are defined using the Symbology
pulldown menu at the top of the dialog box. This menu provides access to two
second-level dialog boxes: one for Line Symbology and another for Label
Symbology. (Grid levels are defined by using the Levels command.)
Defining Grids
1. Click Place Plan Grid on the Grids tool box.
2. Type the number of lines for the first set of horizontal grid lines in the Number of
Lines field. Press the TAB key to move the cursor to the Spacing field.
3. Type the spacing (in Master Units) for the first set of horizontal grid lines. Press
the TAB key to register this value and to move back to the Number of Lines field.
The dialog box displays the cumulative number/spacing pairs for the horizontal
lines defined thus far (for example, 2 @ 20:0:0).
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each number/spacing pair of equally spaced horizontal
lines. If at any time you need to start over or correct a mistake, choose the Clear
button. When all horizontal lines have been defined, toggle the Axis option to
Vertical and continue to step 5.
5. Type the number of lines for the first set of vertical grid lines in the Number of
Lines field. Press the TAB key to move the cursor to the Spacing field.
6. Type the spacing for the first set of vertical grid lines, in Master Units. Press the
TAB key to register this value, and move back to the Number of Lines field. The
dialog box displays the cumulative number/spacing pairs for the vertical lines
defined thus far.
Tools
256 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each number/spacing pair of equally spaced vertical
lines. If at any time you need to start over or correct a mistake, choose Clear.
When all vertical lines have been defined, continue with step 8.
8. Define other grid placement parameters for both horizontal and vertical lines
using the appropriate fields. When the parameters have been fully defined, choose
Apply or OK to accept the values and to place the grid. Choose Cancel to abort
the command.
9. The prompt Select Target View for Grid displays. Place a data point in the
active model view for which you are defining the grid. This view must be a plan
model view. FrameWorks Plus creates and displays the grid in the selected view
and adjusts the range of the plan view such that all members and the grid are
displayed. If you selected Apply, you can redefine some or all of the parameters
and create a grid in another plan view.
Related Topics
AutoSnap, page 182
Copy Grid, page 261
Create View, page 191
Delete Grid Line, page 263
Delete Grid, page 263
Edit Grid Label, page 262
File (Create View Dialog Box), page 196
Grid Label Symbology, page 256
Grid Line Symbology, page 257
Grids, page 252
Place Elevation Grid, page 258
Place Plan Grid, page 253
Symbology for Linear Members, page 197
Symbology for Solid Members, page 205
Grid Label Symbology
The Symbology > Labels command on the Place Plan Grid or Place Elevation
Grid dialog box defines the grid text label's graphic display symbology.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 257
Color - Type a color number (0-254) to use for the grid labels. You can also choose
the color from the color pulldown.
Weight - Type the line weight (0-15) to use for the grid labels. You can also choose
the line weight by using the weight pulldown list.
Font - Type the font to use for the grid label's text.
Text Height - Type the label's text height. If the Honor view scale for grid graphics
option is selected, type height of the text, as you want it in the drawing. However, if
the Honor view scale for grid graphics option is not selected, type the height of the
text in Master Units.
Text Width - Type the label's text width. If the Honor view scale for grid graphics
option is selected, type width of the text as, you want it in the drawing. However, if
the Honor view scale for grid graphics option is not selected, type the width of the
text in Master Units.
Grid Line Symbology
The Symbology > Lines command on the Place Plan Grid or Place Elevation Grid
dialog box defines the grid lines' graphic display symbology.

Color - Type a color number (0-254) to use for the grid lines. You can also choose
the color from the color pulldown.
Style - Type the line style (0-7) to use for the grid lines. You can also choose the line
style by using the style pulldown list.
Weight - Type the line weight (0-15) to use for the grid lines. You can also choose
the line weight by using the weight pulldown list.
Tools
258 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place Elevation Grid
The Place Elevation Grid command creates a set of grid lines and labels in an
elevation model view. The grid can be placed in any active elevation model view. An
elevation view is created using the By Grid Line option for defining the view
orientation when using the Create View command.
Before using this command, be sure to activate the elevation view in which the grid is
to be placed.

Unlike plan grids, you do not have to define the grid geometry when an elevation grid
is created. FrameWorks Plus uses the geometric information from existing plan grids
and from the plan model views (floor levels) to determine the number and position of
the elevation grid lines. You only need to define the parameters that specify the grid
symbology, the end extensions, and the labeling parameters.

Axis - Specifies the line axis or direction for which parameters are being defined. The
setting of the Axis option affects the Extension fields as well as all the options in the
Labels section of the dialog box.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 259
Horizontal Line Options - The horizontal grid line represents the structure's floor
levels. One horizontal grid line is created for each unique elevation (plan model view)
in the model database unless specified otherwise in the Elevation Range. When Axis
is set to Horizontal, the following items display:
Extension (Left)/(Right) - Defines the distance, in Master Units, that the horizontal
grid lines are extended beyond the left-most and right-most vertical grid lines.
Grid Labels - Defines whether labels, which annotate the floor elevation and/or
name, are placed at one end, both ends, or neither end of the horizontal grid lines.
Floor Label - Specifies the floor label location relative to the horizontal grid lines.
This parameter can also disable the label display entirely. The plan Model View name
is used to create the label name at each floor level.
Elevation Label - Specifies the elevation label location relative to the horizontal grid
lines. This parameter can also disable the label display entirely. The elevation label is
formed by appending the actual elevation value to the Elevation Prefix defined below.
Elevation Prefix - Specifies the character string (up to 12 characters maximum) that
is added to the front of the elevation value to form the Elevation Label. For example,
if the prefix is FFL, the Elevation Label for a grid line at elevation 15 feet is
displayed as FFL 15'-0".
Vertical Grid Options - The elevation grid's vertical grid lines represent the grid line
locations from the plan grid that intersects the plane of the elevation view. These
positions are determined from the intersections along the selected plan grid line. The
labels on these grid lines (if any) are determined from the labels of the intersecting
plan grid lines. When Axis is set to Vertical, these items display:
Extension (Top)/(Bottom) - Defines the distance, in Master Units, that the vertical
grid lines are extended beyond the upper-most and lower-most horizontal grid lines.
Grid Labels - Defines whether grid labels and bubbles are placed at the top end,
bottom end, both ends, or neither end of the vertical grid lines.
Bubble Radius - Specifies the radius of the grid label bubble. If the Honor view scale
for grid graphics option is selected, type the radius of the bubble, as you want it in the
drawing. However, if the Honor view scale for grid graphics option is not selected,
type the radius of the bubble in Master Units.
Elevation Range - The Elevation Range section of the dialog box defines the floor
level range to display for the elevation grid.
Minimum - Specifies the lowest floor height for the horizontal grid lines. Any floors
(plan views) in the model with elevations less than this value are ignored.
Maximum - Specifies the highest floor height for the horizontal grid lines. Any floors
in the model with elevations greater than this value are ignored.
Tools
260 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Full Range of Floors - If on, the Minimum and Maximum values are ignored, and
the entire floor level range is used. In addition, a zero elevation grid line, representing
a floor level at TOS = 0, is generated.
Honor view scale for grid graphics - Specifies whether or not you want the grid
bubble radius and text size to honor the drawing scale of the view in which you place
the grid.
If you choose to honor the view scale, the grid label text size and the bubble radius
size are the actual size you want them to be in the drawing when plotted.
If you choose not to honor the view scale, the grid label text size and the bubble
radius size are the size you want to place in model (as specified in master units). You
need to calculate the correct size so that after the view is scaled, your grid labels are
the correct height in the drawing.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not update the grid label and bubble sizes if you
modify the view drawing scale after placing the grid. You will have to
delete and replace the grid or use MicroStation commands to rescale the
grid labels and bubbles.
The grid lines and labels' graphical symbology is defined using the Symbology
pulldown menu at the top of the dialog box. This menu provides access to two
second-level dialog boxes: one for Line Symbology and another for Label
Symbology. (Grid levels are defined by using the Levels command.)
Related Topics
AutoSnap, page 182
Copy Grid, page 261
Create View, page 191
Delete Grid Line, page 263
Delete Grid, page 263
Edit Grid Label, page 262
File (Create View Dialog Box), page 196
Grid Label Symbology, page 256
Grid Line Symbology, page 257
Grids, page 252
Place Elevation Grid, page 258
Place Plan Grid, page 253
Symbology for Linear Members, page 197
Symbology for Solid Members, page 205
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 261
Copy Grid
The Copy Grid command copies a grid set from one model view to another. A
grid set is all associated grid lines, labels, and bubbles placed in a plan or elevation
view.
Grids can only be copied between model views that are both active and parallel to
each other. Thus, plan grids can only be copied to other plan views, and elevation
view grids can only be copied to other parallel elevation views.

Copy Labels - Defines if the labels and bubbles are copied with the grid or not.
Honor view scale for grid graphics - Specifies whether or not you want the grid
bubble radius and text size to honor the drawing scale of the view to which you copy
the grid.
If you choose to honor the view scale, the grid label text size and the bubble radius
size are recalculated automatically when the grid is copied to the new view which has
a drawing scale defined.
Related Topics
Copy Grid, page 261
Delete Grid Line, page 263
Delete Grid, page 263
Edit Grid Label, page 262
Grid Label Symbology, page 256
Grid Line Symbology, page 257
Grids, page 252
Place Elevation Grid, page 258
Place Plan Grid, page 253
Tools
262 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Edit Grid Label
The Edit Grid Label command modifies a grid line's text label. This command
can edit the labels on plan grid lines and on the vertical grid lines of elevation grids.
This command cannot modify the floor labels placed on horizontal grid lines in
elevation grid sets. Use MicroStation's Edit Text command to modify those floor
labels.

You can modify a single grid-line label or the labels of all similar grid lines. A similar
grid line is any other grid line in the model that has an identical label. Similar grid
lines are created:
when a grid set is copied,
during elevation grid creation, because the vertical grid lines labels
correspond to grid lines in the plan grid sets, and
when you edit a grid line label to one that matches an existing grid label.

New Label - Type a new grid-line label. Any alphanumeric string up to 5 characters
is valid.
Edit All Similar - Changes the label of all grid lines in the model that share the
originally selected grid-line's label. (For example, you select a grid line with a label
of "A". All other grid lines in the model with the label of "A" are also changed.) If
off, FrameWorks Plus modifies only the selected grid-line's labels.
Related Topics
Copy Grid, page 261
Delete Grid Line, page 263
Delete Grid, page 263
Edit Grid Label, page 262
Grid Label Symbology, page 256
Grid Line Symbology, page 257
Grids, page 252
Place Elevation Grid, page 258
Place Plan Grid, page 253
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 263
Delete Grid Line
The Delete Grid Line command deletes a single grid line and its labels. Use the
Delete Grid command to delete an entire grid set.
Related Topics
Copy Grid, page 261
Delete Grid Line, page 263
Delete Grid, page 263
Edit Grid Label, page 262
Grid Label Symbology, page 256
Grid Line Symbology, page 257
Grids, page 252
Place Elevation Grid, page 258
Place Plan Grid, page 253
Delete Grid
The Delete Grid command deletes an entire grid set and its associated labels.
Use the Delete Grid Line command to delete a single grid line.
Related Topics
Copy Grid, page 261
Delete Grid Line, page 263
Delete Grid, page 263
Edit Grid Label, page 262
Grid Label Symbology, page 256
Grid Line Symbology, page 257
Grids, page 252
Place Elevation Grid, page 258
Place Plan Grid, page 253
Tools
264 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place Linear Members
The Place Member commands place the four general linear
member types in a structural model: beams, columns, vertical
braces, and horizontal braces. Although there are no built-in
differences in properties between the various types (the types
could be used interchangeably), there are minor differences in
the placement options and procedures for each type.
Beams are typically used to model primary (load-bearing)
horizontal members, or girders. Columns are normally vertical support members.
Vertical bracing is used for defining truss members or "X" bracing. Horizontal braces
typically represent secondary members in a framing plan, which frame into the
primary girders (beams).
The above examples are only general guidelines for using the various member types.
You can use each type as you please to achieve the model and drawing results you
want. It is possible to model an entire structure using only beam type members.
However, we do not recommend this, as the member types are useful discriminators
for forming manipulation groups (selection sets) and for specifying different member
type display symbologies.
Members are usually placed in active FrameWorks Plus model views. You can also
place members in any MicroStation view. However, placement in model views is
usually the most effective as FrameWorks Plus provides visual feedback (member
dynamics) as you place the members. In addition, the AutoSnap feature for rapid,
precise placement operates in active plan and elevation views that contain
FrameWorks Plus grid sets.
When you place members in active plan or elevation views, FrameWorks Plus uses a
two-dimensional or drafting-style user-interface to simplify the layout and modeling
process. When plan or elevation views are created, an active depth point is specified
which, along with the view orientation, fully defines the view's working plane. All
members placed in one of these model views are, by default, placed on the working
plane. This working plane definition allows you to work as if you were in a two-
dimensional design file. That is, you can place members without regard to the usual
three-dimensional drafting operations and parameters: active depth, bore locate,
display depth, and so forth. FrameWorks Plus effectively controls the member display
and placement operations while working in an active plan or elevation model view.
Members are placed using active placement parameters. FrameWorks Plus uses a set
of active parameters for each member type, which can be defined or modified using
the Member Attributes and Member Orientation commands. We recommend that
you activate these dialog boxes for interactive access during member placement.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 265
In addition, some placement commands use pop-down menus to specify geometric
parameters. When using the placement commands, you should activate the
MicroStation Tool Settings dialog box.
Topics

Place Beam places beam-type members between two points. For more
information, see Place Beam, page 267.

Place Column places column-type members by defining the top and bottom
column elevations. For more information, see Place Column, page 268.

Place Column by Two Points places column-type members using two points
that you define. For more information, see Place Column by Two Points, page
269.

Place Vertical Brace places vertical brace members between two points. For
more information, see Place Vertical Brace, page 269.

Place Horizontal Brace places horizontal brace members between two points.
For more information, see Place Horizontal Brace, page 270.

Place Framing Members places multiple members of identical type and
properties between two selected support members. For more information, see
Place Framing Members, page 271.

Default Member sets placement parameters to be the same as an existing
identified member in the model. For more information, see Default Member,
page 272.

Edit Last Placed modifies the placement parameters of the last member that
was place. For more information, see Edit Last Placed, page 273.

Place Arc places arc shaped members. For more information, see Place Arc,
page 274.

Member Connectivity
Member connectivity is determined by the member's end point coordinates regardless
of how the member is placed (AutoSnap, snap, xy=, dl=). To ensure connectivity of 2
or more members, a point belonging to one member must belong to the other
members (to 1 UOR of accuracy). FrameWorks Plus has two concepts called cross-
sectional offsets and working point offsets (implied analytical offsets). If either of
these offsets is applied to a member, member connectivity is not as straightforward.
Offsets force the member to display in the position where they would be placed when
constructed while preserving the connection point at the original location. Using this
method, FrameWorks Plus writes clean analytical model without creating additional
nodes and small member stubs. A quick method to check connectivity is to perform a
global associative move on the members in question. The members temporarily
display in the moved position preserving the connectivity of members. Be sure to
reject the move to restore the members to their original location.
Tools
266 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Delta TOS is a cross sectional offset applied in the global Z direction. You can use
the Modify Member End and Working Point Offset commands to apply end offsets to
a member. You can also use the Move Member and Modify Offset commands to
move a member parallel to itself. While the four commands look like they do the
exact same thing, they are performing completely different functions.
The Modify Member End and Move Member commands perform a physical move on
the member (displaying the member at the new location and generating nodes at that
location when written to an analytical package). However, the Working Point Offset
and Modify Offset commands perform an analytical implied offset. Members with
implied offsets do not lose their connectivity with supporting members. These
members are displayed in the moved physical location but are written to the analysis
files in their original unmoved location (therefore not generating additional nodes or
small stub members which typically become the source of structural instability in
analysis).
FrameWorks Plus displays member offsets from the active plane the same way
regardless of whether they were the result of a physical move or a Delta TOS being
applied. The only way to review offsets is to use the Review Element command. The
analytical coordinates of the member ends is the sum of the physical coordinates
defined in the (parenthesis) and the offset values defined in the [brackets].
Delta Top-of-Steel Example
Place a set of beams at elevation 15 feet with a Delta TOS of -3 inches. Use the Place
Framing Members to place some framing members with the same Delta TOS of -3
inches using the beams as the support girders. The framing members display in the
view with a correct offset of 6 inches. If you use Modify Offset and change the Delta
TOS of the framing members to 0:0:0, the member is now physically located at 14
feet 9 inches (using the Review Element command) but is written to the analysis deck
at 15 feet. Therefore the framing members do not share common nodes with the
supporting beams.
Furthermore, if you place vertical braces using a snap the beam's midpoint (that has a
Delta TOS applied), the vertical braces will have a Z coordinate of 14 feet 9 inches
and will be written to the analysis as such. They do not share a common node with the
beams.
Warning
Do not place members with Delta TOS off of members with a Delta TOS
defined. Always place members with a Delta TOS from the view elevation
(grid lines).
Warning
If you use MicroStation locate or snap to identify the start and end points
of a member, FrameWorks Plus reads the physical coordinates of those
points and applies the specified Delta TOS to that coordinate.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 267
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Place Beam, page 267
Place Column by Two Points, page 269
Place Column, page 268
Place Framing Members, page 271
Place Horizontal Brace, page 270
Place Vertical Brace, page 269
Place Beam
The Place Beam command places beam-type members between two points
you define. Because you can modify the member's
placement parameters at any time before the
member is actually placed, you may want to have the
Member Attributes and Member Orientation commands
(found on the Settings menu) active while using this command.

Delta TOS - Defines the vertical distance (in Master Units) that the beam is offset
from the nominal placement position. For example, when placing a beam in a plan
view, a Delta-Top-Of-Steel (TOS) value of -1:0:0 places the beam 1 foot below the
active floor elevation.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Place Framing Members, page 271
Place Horizontal Brace, page 270
Place Vertical Brace, page 269
Tools
268 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place Column
The Place Column command places columns in the model.
Columns are placed with a vertical orientation using the top and
bottom elevation values and a single placement point you define.
To place columns by defining the column's two end points, see Place
Column by Two Points, page 269.
You can also place a group of identical columns simultaneously using a
fence operation. This feature is useful when a floor plan contains many
columns of identical size, orientation, and length (top and bottom elevations). The by
fence mode is activated if a MicroStation fence is active when the Place Column
command is selected. The fence must be placed in an active FrameWorks Plus plan
model view containing a plan grid.
Because you can modify the member's placement parameters at any time before the
member is actually placed, you may want to have the Member Attributes and
Member Orientation commands (found on the Settings menu) active while using
this command.

Top - Defines the column's top elevation in Master Units. This value defines the
column's top Z-axis coordinate.
Bottom - Defines the column's bottom elevation in Master Units. This value defines
the column's bottom Z-axis coordinate.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Place Beam, page 267
Place Column by Two Points, page 269
Place Column, page 268
Place Framing Members, page 271
Place Horizontal Brace, page 270
Place Vertical Brace, page 269
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 269
Place Column by Two Points
The Place Column by Two Points command places columns
using two end points you define. To place columns by defining a
bottom and top elevation, see Place Column, page 268.
Because you can modify the member's placement parameters at any time
before the member is actually placed, you may want to have the Member
Attributes and Member Orientation commands active while using this
command.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Place Vertical Brace
The Place Vertical Brace command places vertical
brace members between two points. Vertical braces are
usually placed in elevation model views, but can be
placed in any other view as well.
Because you can modify the member's placement parameters at
any time before the member is actually placed, you may want to
have the Member Attributes and Member Orientation commands (located on the
Settings menu) active while using this command.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Tools
270 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place Horizontal Brace
The Place Horizontal Brace command places horizontal brace members
between two points. Horizontal braces are typically
placed in a plan model view (in a horizontal plane),
but can also be placed in other views. Horizontal braces can
be defined as sloping or non-horizontal members.
This command places horizontal braces, one-by-one, between
two specified points. To place multiple braces between
support members (girders), use the Place Framing Members
command (see Place Framing Members, page 271).
Because you can modify the member's placement parameters at any time before the
member is actually placed, you may want to have the Member Attributes and
Member Orientation commands (found on the Settings menu) active while using
this command.

Delta TOS - Defines the vertical distance (in Master Units) that the brace is offset
from the nominal placement position. For example, when placing a horizontal brace
in a plan view, a Delta Top-Of-Steel (TOS) value of -1:0:0 places the brace 1 foot
below the active floor elevation.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 271
Place Framing Members
The Place Framing Members command provides a quick and convenient
method for placing multiple identical-member types between two selected
support members. A typical command use is secondary beam or brace placement
between primary supporting girders. The framing members are placed at points
equally spaced along the selected support girders. The support girders do not have to
be parallel but must be the same type (both arc members or both linear members).
You cannot place framing members between an arc member and a linear member.
Note
If you are planning to use two arcs as the support girders, the arcs must be
placed in the same direction (clockwise or counter-clockwise) for this
command to work correctly.

This command places framing members for any of the four defined types. The active
type, defined by the last selected placement command, is used as the framing member
type. The active type is always indicated at the top of the Member Attributes dialog
box.
Because you can modify the member's placement parameters at any time before the
member is actually placed, you may want to have the Member Attributes and Member
Orientation commands active while using this command.
Note
If, after using this command, any graphics remain on the screen that
should not exist, simply refresh the view using MicroStation's view update
command.
Before Using this Command
Before selecting the Place Framing Members command, set the active member type
by selecting the placement command for that type. For example, to place beams as
framing members, first select the Place Beam command, and then select this
command.
Tools
272 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Number of Members - Defines the number of framing members to place between
the selected support members.
Accept - Accepts the member's final placement parameters.
Note
You must click Accept to actually place the framing members in the
model.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Default Member
The Default Member command sets the member placement parameters to the
exact same parameters as an existing member you identify.
The selected member's placement parameters display in the Member Attributes and
Member Orientation dialog box. The parameters can still be edited if needed.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not read the delta TOS value from the existing
member. Instead, FrameWorks Plus always resets the delta TOS value to
zero for the new member.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 273
Edit Last Placed
The Edit Last Placed command corrects incorrect placement parameters
immediately after the member is placed.
All the member placement commands allow you to modify the placement parameters
as the members are placed. The visual feedback provided by the member dynamics
and tentative display makes it easy to avoid erroneous member placement. However,
if members are inadvertently placed with improper parameters, use this command to
correct them. (To modify the member end locations, use the Manipulate commands.)
This command modifies individual members that were placed in single placement
mode or modifies groups of members placed with the columns by fence and place
framing members operations. In addition, the Edit Last Placed command can be used
to modify the parameters of a member created using the Copy Member command,
provided that a single member (not a selection set) was copied.
The member's placement parameters are displayed in the Member Attributes and
Member Orientation dialog boxes for editing.
Note
FrameWorks Plus stores information about members that have been
recently placed, or copied, in an internal edit list. To use this command,
you must make modifications to members immediately after they have
been placed (or copied). If there are no valid members present in the edit
list, an Alert Box displays the warning message No members in Edit
List. You can, however, use the Modify commands at any time to change
member properties.
Related Topics
Default Member, page 272
Delete Member, page 338
Edit Last Placed, page 273
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Member Attributes, page 154
Member Connectivity, page 265
Member Orientation, page 156
Place Beam, page 267
Place Column by Two Points, page 269
Place Column, page 268
Place Framing Members, page 271
Place Horizontal Brace, page 270
Place Vertical Brace, page 269
Tools
274 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place Arc
The Place Arc command creates FrameWorks Plus arc members from
existing MicroStation arc elements. Arcs can be created for the four basic
member types: beams, columns, vertical braces, and horizontal braces. The active
member type's attributes, orientation, and symbology are used for the arc member.

Things to know when using arcs in your model:
You cannot place loads on arc members.
You cannot modify arc members using the Modify Member End or
Modify Work Point Offset commands.
The Associativity option (on the Move Member, Extend Member, and
Modify Member End commands) ignores arc members during model
manipulations.
You cannot write arc members out to the STAAD or GTSTRUDL input
decks. You can use a series of linear members to approximate an arc when
arc analysis is required.
FrameWorks Plus does not allow orientation vectors that are tangent to the
arc member at end 1.
You cannot assign end releases and supports to arc members.
The Import Analytical Deck command does not read arc members.
You cannot place ellipses or B-spline arcs. Only circular arcs are
supported.
MicroStation does not correctly render tapered arc members (start section
and end section are different sizes). MicroStation will use only the start
section size to render the entire tapered arc member.
Only orthogonal user cutbacks can be assigned to arc members. The
Compute Cutbacks command ignores arc members and any members
that frame into arc members.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 275
Fireproofing can be assigned to arc members.
Before Using This Command
You must place a MicroStation arc or circle element at the location you want the
FrameWorks Plus arc member. Only circular arcs are supported. You cannot use
ellipses or B-spline arc type elements.

Arc Type - Specifies the FrameWorks Plus member type to assign to the arc member
being placed. The member type is used to assign member attributes, orientation, and
symbology.
Delete Graphics - Deletes the generic MicroStation arc used in the arc member's
creation after placement is complete.
Related Topics
Modify Arc, page 334
Place Arc, page 274
Tools
276 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place 3D Solids
The Place 3D Solids commands place 3D solid elements in a structural model. You
can place walls, slabs, general solid elements, and holes in solid elements using these
commands.

Topics

Place Slabs places solid slab elements in the model. For more information, see
Place Slabs, page 277.

Place Wall places walls in the model. For more information, see Place Wall,
page 280.

Place Solid Element places 3D solid elements in the model. For more
information, see Place Solid Element, page 283.

Place Hole places holes in 3D solid elements. For more information, see Place
Holes, page 284.

Solid Cutouts places holes in 3D solid elements where another element
intersects the solid. For more information, see Solid Cutouts, page 286.

Modify Thickness changes the thickness of a slab, wall, or generic solid that is
already placed in the model. For more information, see Modify Thickness, page
291.

Modify Solid Geometry changes the geometry of a slab or solid that is already
in the model. For more information, see Modify Solid Geometry, page 292.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 277
Place Slabs
The Place Slabs command places slabs in the model. Slabs can be defined
with up to 95 corners (vertices).

The slab's default name, class, material, and material grade are defined in the
Defaults Solid Members command (see Defaults Solid Members, page 170).
The slab's permanent line graphic symbology; color, level, line style, and line weight;
is defined in the Member Symbology command (see Member Symbology, page 177).
The graphic symbology for how the slab displays in the view, and therefore in the
drawing, is defined when you create the view.

Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not recognize MicroStation holes in solids. You
should always use the FrameWorks Plus Place Holes command (see Place
Holes, page 284) to place holes in solid elements.
Tools
278 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Length - If on, the value specified in the key-in field is used for the slab's length
(length in the X direction). If off, you specify the slab's length interactively during
placement.
Width - If on, the value specified in the key-in field is used for the slab's width
(length in the Y direction). If off, you specify the slab's width interactively during
placement.
Thickness - If on, the value specified in the key-in field is used for the slab's
thickness (length in the Z direction). If off, you specify the slab's thickness
interactively during placement.
Place By - Specifies how the slab is defined in the model. Slabs can be placed by
Block, Rotated Block, Orthogonal Shape, Shape, or Identify Element.
If set to Block, the slab is defined by specifying the two opposite block
corners.
If set to Rotated Block, the slab is defined by specifying the two opposite
block corners. A third point specifies the block's rotation.
If set to Orthogonal Shape, the slab is defined by specifying a shape whose
segments are either perpendicular or parallel to other segments in the
shape.
If set to Shape, the slab is defined by a polygonal shape defined by
specifying the vertices.
If set to Identify Element, the slab is created from an existing shape in the
design file. All of the elements that comprise the selected shape must be
co-planar.
Note
FrameWorks Plus supports creating slab from MicroStation 2D and 3D
elements. However, only the MicroStation 3D element block (also called
slab) is supported for 3D elements.
Isometric Block - If you are placing slabs in an isometric view, toggle on this setting
to place the slab isometrically instead of flat to the view. This toggle has no effect
when placing slabs in plan or elevation views.
Block Justification - Used when the Place By option is set to Block, this setting
specifies if the first data point placed defines the slab's Center or one of the slab's
Corners.
Face - Specifies how the slab is placed in the model. You can override this setting
during placement by clicking the mouse's reset button.
If set to Centroid, the slab is placed with respect to its centroidal axis.
If set to Top Face, the slab is placed with respect to its top face.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 279
If set to Bottom Face, the slab is placed with respect to its bottom face.

Delta TOS - Defines the vertical distance (in master units) that the slab is offset from
the normal placement position. For example, when placing a slab in a plan view, a
Delta TOS value of 1:0:0 would place the slab 1 master unit (foot, for example) above
the active floor elevation.
Close Element - Click this button to close a shape or an orthogonal-shape slab.
Related Topics
Delete Member, page 338
Modify Solid Geometry, page 292
Modify Thickness, page 291
Place Slabs, page 277
Place Solid Element, page 283
Place Wall, page 280
Tools
280 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place Wall
The Place Wall command places a wall in the model. Because FrameWorks
Plus places walls perpendicular to the view's plane where the wall's corners
(vertices) are defined, walls can only be placed in plan views. Wall's can have a
maximum of 50 corners.

The wall's default name, class, material, and material grade are defined in the
Defaults Solid Members command (see Defaults Solid Members, page 170).
The graphic symbology; color, level, line style, and line weight; for the wall's
permanent graphic lines is defined in the Member Symbology command. The
graphic symbology for how the wall displays in the view, and therefore in the
drawing, is defined when you create the view.
Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not recognize MicroStation holes in solids. You
should always use the FrameWorks Plus Place Hole command (see Place
Holes, page 284) to place holes in solid elements.

Length - If on, the value specified in the key-in field is used for the wall's length. If
off, you specify the wall's length interactively during placement.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 281
Thickness - Specifies the wall's thickness (distance from the near face to the far face)
in master units.
Height - Specifies the wall's height in master units.
Place By - Specifies how the wall is placed. Walls can be placed by Orthogonal
Shape, Shape, or Identify Element.
If set to Orthogonal Shape, the wall is defined by specifying a shape whose
segments are either perpendicular or parallel to other wall segments.
If set to Shape, the wall is defined by specifying wall vertices. Wall segments do not
have to be perpendicular or parallel to other wall segments.

If set to Identify Element, the wall is created from an existing shape in the design
file.
Note
FrameWorks Plus supports creating walls from MicroStation shapes, lines,
and linestrings elements only.
Face - Specifies how the wall is placed in the model relative to the specified vertex
points. If set to Center, the wall is placed with respect to its centroidal axis.
If set to Left, the wall is placed with respect to its left side (when seen standing at the
wall's start location and looking down the length of the wall).
If set to Right, the wall is placed with respect to its right side (when seen standing at
the wall's start location and looking down the length of the wall).
Tools
282 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Delta TOS - Defines the vertical distance (in master units) that the bottom of the wall
is offset from the normal placement position. For example, when placing a wall in a
plan view, a delta TOS value of 1:0:0 would place the bottom of the wall 1 master
unit (foot, for example) above the active floor elevation.
Related Topics
Delete Member, page 338
Modify Solid Geometry, page 292
Modify Thickness, page 291
Place Slabs, page 277
Place Solid Element, page 283
Place Wall, page 280
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 283
Place Solid Element
The Place Solid Element command creates a FrameWorks Plus solid element
from a MicroStation solid element or from two MicroStation 2D elements. If
you use two 2D MicroStation elements, make sure that the two elements have the
same number of vertices. In addition, make sure you digitize the elements in the same
direction (clockwise or counter-clockwise).
Note
Only the MicroStation 3D element block (also called slab) is supported for
3D elements.

The solid element's default name, class, material, and material grade are defined in
the Defaults Solid Members command, see Defaults Solid Members, page 170.
The graphic symbology; color, level, line style, and line weight; for the solid's
permanent graphic lines is defined in the Member Symbology command, see
Member Symbology, page 177. The graphic symbology for how the solid displays in
the view, and therefore in the drawing, is defined when you create the view.
Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not recognize MicroStation holes in solids. You
should always use the FrameWorks Plus Place Holes command (see Place
Holes, page 284) to place holes in solid elements.
Related Topics
Delete Member, page 338
Modify Solid Geometry, page 292
Modify Thickness, page 291
Place Slabs, page 277
Place Solid Element, page 283
Place Wall, page 280
Tools
284 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Place Holes
The Place Hole command places a hole in a slab, wall, or 3D solid element.
The graphic symbology; color, level, line style, and line weight; for the hole's
permanent graphic lines is defined by the parent element graphic symbology. The
graphic symbology for how a solid with a hole displays in a FrameWorks Plus view,
and therefore in the drawing, is defined when you create the FrameWorks Plus view.
Guidelines for Placing Holes
As with MicroStation projected solids, you cannot place holes through the
rule lines sides of a solid. For slabs, you cannot place holes through the
slab's side (the vertical sides). For walls, you cannot place holes through
the wall's top or bottom (the horizontal sides).
Holes cannot overlap each other.
When creating holes using two MicroStation elements, both elements must
intersect the parent solid.
Holes cannot be placed as cavities. The hole must intersect at least one of
the solid's surfaces.
You cannot create FrameWorks Plus holes using MicroStation circle
elements and this command's Place By Identify Element option. You must
use this command's Place By Circular option to place circular holes in
FrameWorks Plus solids.

Caution
FrameWorks Plus does not recognize MicroStation holes in solids. You
should always use this command to place holes in solid elements.

Length - If on, the value specified in the key-in field is used for the hole's length.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 285
Width - If on, the value specified in the key-in
field is used for the hole's width.
Delete MSTN Primitives - If on, FrameWorks
Plus automatically deletes the generic
MicroStation graphics after creating the hole.
This option is active only when Place By is set to
Identify Element.
Place By - Specifies how the hole is defined in the model. Holes can be placed by
Block, Rotated Block, Orthogonal Shape, Shape, Identify Element, or Circular.
If set to Block, the hole is defined by specifying the two opposite corners
of a block shaped hole. Holes placed using this option go all the way
through the solid.
If set to Rotated Block, the hole is defined by three points. The first two
points specify the hole's length and rotation. The third point specifies the
hole's width. Holes placed using this option go all the way through the
solid.
If set to Orthogonal Shape, the hole is defined by specifying a shape
whose segments are either perpendicular or parallel to other segments in
the shape. Holes placed using this option go all the way through the solid.
If set to Shape, the hole is defined by specifying vertices of a polygonal
shape. Holes placed using this option go all the way through the solid.
If set to Identify Element, the hole is created from an existing
MicroStation element. The MicroStation element can be a single 3D
element or two 2D elements. Use this option if you want to create an
indentation or similar type hole that you do not want to go completely
through the solid.
Note
You cannot use MicroStation circles with this option. If you want
circular holes, either: 1) use the Place By Circular option, or 2) place
two MicroStation arc's to form a circle, and then create a complex
shape from the two arcs.
If set to Circular, FrameWorks Plus prompts you for the hole's radius,
direction, and location. After FrameWorks Plus places the two "circles"
using the information you provided, the Place Hole command resets to the
Identify Element option. Select the parent solid, and then the two "circles"
that were placed.
Note
You cannot create FrameWorks Plus circular holes using generic
MicroStation circles. The two circles that FrameWorks Plus creates
Tools
286 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
when using this option are actually four arcs made into two complex
shapes.
Block Justification - Used when the Place By option is set to Block, this setting
specifies if the first data point placed defines the Center of the hole, or one of the
Corners of the hole.
Close Element - Click this button to close a shape or an orthogonal shape hole.
Related Topics
Delete Member, page 338
Modify Solid Geometry, page 292
Modify Thickness, page 291
Place Holes, page 284
Place Slabs, page 277
Place Solid Element, page 283
Place Wall, page 280
Solid Cutouts, page 286
Verify Model, page 142
Solid Cutouts
The Solid Cutouts command automatically places cutouts in solid members
where they intersect with other members. The intersecting member can be a
FrameWorks Plus linear member, a FrameWorks Plus solid member, or
generic MicroStation elements (including MicroStation solids but not wedges,
spheres, or torus) in the active model, attached FrameWorks Plus model, or attached
MicroStation reference file.
Note
Cutouts are not available for walls.
You can also place cutouts using the Verify Model command or from a batch
command in the PD_Shell environment.
The graphic symbology; color, level, line style, and line weight; for the solid cutout's
permanent graphic lines is defined by the parent element graphic symbology. The
graphic symbology for how a solid with a cutout displays in a FrameWorks Plus
view, and therefore in the drawing, is defined when you create the FrameWorks Plus
view.
Note
FrameWorks Plus redraws the solid each time a cutout is placed. If you
have a solid with several intersecting items, you can increase command
performance by dropping all of your FrameWorks Plus views using Drop
View, page 210.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 287

Guidelines for Solid Cutouts
FrameWorks Plus does not include the thickness of PDS equipment
insulation (if any) when calculating the cutout size.
The element that intersects the solids must go all the way through the solid
for a cutout to be created. Elements that do not go all the way through the
solid will not create a cutout.
Cutouts that are invalid holes are not placed. For an explanation of what is
an invalid hole, see Place Holes, page 284.
If you manually move or copy a cutout (hole) using the Move Member or
Copy Member commands, you will break the link between the cutout and
the object that created the cutout. After the link is broken, the cutout (hole)
will not be updated the next time you run cutouts (using either Verify
Model or this command).
FrameWorks Plus does not place cutouts for
intersecting elements that would cause a
curvilinear cutout (such as a pipe bend or an
arc member).
Clearance - Specifies the distance between the
inside of the cutout and the outside of the item
being cut around. This distance is added evenly
to all sides of the item. If you are placing a
sleeve, the distance between the inside of the
sleeve and the outside of the pipe is the
Clearance value.
Be careful when defining the Clearance value
when cutouts will be created around closed
Tools
288 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
shapes such as I-section or channels. The Clearance is added evenly to all sides of the
shape. If you define a Clearance that is greater than half the distance between sides of
a closed shape, FrameWorks Plus will not place the cutout. For example, the distance
between an I-section's flanges is 8.5 inches. If you define a Clearance greater than
4.25 inches, the cutout will not be placed.
Increment - Specifies the value by which to increment the cutout diameter around a
circular penetration (such as a pipe). For example, if you set the Increment to 2"
(inches), the cutout diameter is always divisible by 2 (2", 4", 6", 8", ... 22", 24", 26",
and so forth). Similarly, if you set the Increment to 3", the cutout diameter is always
divisible by 3 (3", 6", 9", 12", and so forth). Setting the Increment value to 0 causes
the cutout diameter to be the outside diameter of the penetrating object plus the
Clearance value, if any.
You can use the Increment Factor setting to control the rounding up or rounding
down of the cutout diameter to the next allowed size.
Increment Factor - Specifies if the cutout is rounded up or rounded down to the next
Increment size. For example, you place a 10.875-inch pipe with 3-inch clearance and
a 2-inch Increment. You can use this Increment Factor to control whether a cutout
with a 16" diameter or a cutout with an 18" diameter is placed.
If the Increment Factor is set to 0, the cutout is always rounded up to the next
increment divisible size. If the Increment Factor is set to 1, the cutout is always
rounded down to the next increment divisible size. Typically, you want to set the
Increment Factor to 0.5.
If the Increment Factor is between 0.01 and 0.99, FrameWorks Plus calculates
whether to round up or down based on the following algorithm.
1. Compute the cutout diameter by adding the outside diameter of the pipe with two
times the Clearance value. For example, if the pipe diameter is 10.875" and the
Clearance is set to 3", the cutout diameter would be 16.875" (10.875 + 2 x 3 =
16.875).
2. FrameWorks Plus reads the remainder (non-integer) part of the cutout diameter.
In this case, 0.875 inches.
3. Multiply the Increment and the Increment Factor then compare the results to the
remainder read in step 2. If the remainder is less than the calculation, round down.
If the remainder is greater than the calculation, round up. For this example, say
the Increment is set to 2". The following table shows the results of different
Increment Factors.
Remainder from
step 2
Increment X
Increment Factor
Resulting Action
0.875 2 x 0 = 0 0.875 greater than 0 so round cutout
diameter up to 18 inches
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 289
Remainder from
step 2
Increment X
Increment Factor
Resulting Action
0.875 2 x 0.25 = 0.5 0.875 greater than0.5 so round cutout
diameter up to 18 inches
0.875 2 x 0.5 = 1 0.875 less than 1 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches
0.875 2 x 0.75 = 1.5 0.875 less than 1.5 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches
0.875 2 x 1 = 2 0.875 less than 2 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches

Cutout Type - Specify whether to process cutouts manually or by group.
Manual --- Prompts you to select both the solid member and the
intersecting item before placing the cutout. Please note that when placing a
manual cutout, FrameWorks Plus will automatically recalculate all the
other cutouts on the solid member to see if any need to be moved or
deleted.
Group --- Prompts you to select only the solid member. FrameWorks Plus
automatically searches for and places cutouts around all intersecting items.
You can select which intersecting items (linear members, solid members,
MicroStation solids, or a combination of all three) will create a cutout.
Include Member Fireproofing - Toggle on to include the thickness of member
fireproofing when calculating the cutout size.
Include Piping Insulation Thickness - Toggle on to include the thickness of piping
insulation when calculating the cutout size. The piping insulation does not need to be
graphically displayed in order to be used in the calculation.
Override Original Settings - Toggle on to override the clearance value of an
existing cutout with a new clearance value.
Place Sleeve - Toggle on to place a pipe sleeve member around any intersecting item
with a round shape. Sleeves are placed as 360-degree arc members using the selected
member type.
Note
FrameWorks Plus will place a pipe sleeve only if the intersecting member
is perpendicular to the slab or solid. Members that intersect at an angle
will not have pipe sleeves placed.
Pipe Sleeve Type - Specifies the member type you want to use for the sleeve.
FrameWorks Plus uses the default section of the selected member type for the pipe
sleeve section. We recommend you use cardinal point 1 for the sleeve. This option is
only available if the Place Sleeve option is selected.
Tools
290 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
FrameWorks Plus Linear Members - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should only
place cutouts for FrameWorks Plus linear members that intersect a solid. This option
is only available when Cutout Type is set to Group.
Note
The linear member's section surface must intersect both faces of the solid
for FrameWorks Plus to place a cutout.
MSTN Solids, Surfaces, and Cones - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should only
place cutouts for MicroStation solid elements that intersect a solid. This option is only
available when Cutout Type is set to Group.
Note
FrameWorks Plus will not create cutouts for wedge, sphere, or torus
MicroStation shapes.
FrameWorks Plus Solid Members - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should only
place cutouts for FrameWorks Plus solids members that intersect a solid. This option
is only available when Cutout Type is set to Group.
Related Topics
Delete Member, page 338
Modify Solid Geometry, page 292
Modify Thickness, page 291
Place Holes, page 284
Place Slabs, page 277
Place Solid Element, page 283
Place Wall, page 280
Solid Cutouts, page 286
Verify Model, page 142
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 291
Modify Thickness
The Modify Thickness command changes the thickness of a slab or solid or
the width of a wall. You can also optionally change the depth of any holes in
the solid using this command.

Thickness - Specifies a new thickness.
Modify Holes - Toggle on to change the depth of the solid's holes along with the
solid's depth. If this toggle is off, only the solid's depth is changed.
Face - Select which face of the solid does not move during the thickness
modification. Select Bottom Face to keep the slab's bottom face in the same location
and adjust the top face. Select Top Face to keep the slab's top face in the same
location and adjust the bottom face. Select Centroid to keep the centroid of the slab
in the same location and adjust the top and bottom faces.
Related Topics
Delete Member, page 338
Modify Solid Geometry, page 292
Modify Thickness, page 291
Place Holes, page 284
Place Slabs, page 277
Place Solid Element, page 283
Place Wall, page 280
Solid Cutouts, page 286
Verify Model, page 142
Tools
292 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Solid Geometry
The Modify Solid Geometry command changes the geometry (shape) of a
slab or solid without changing the element's name or member ID. You cannot
change a wall's geometry.
Existing slab holes that are completely inside the new geometry will remain in the
slab. Slab holes that are outside the new geometry or clip the edge of the new
geometry are deleted from the slab. Existing solid holes are always deleted.
Before Using This Command.
If you are modifying a slab's geometry, you must have a 2D MicroStation
element that represent the new geometry placed before selecting this
command.
If you are modifying a solid's geometry, you must have two 2D
MicroStation elements or a single 3D MicroStation element that represents
the new geometry placed before selecting this command. MicroStation
surfaces of revolution are not supported.
Related Topics
Delete Member, page 338
Modify Solid Geometry, page 292
Modify Thickness, page 291
Place Holes, page 284
Place Slabs, page 277
Place Solid Element, page 283
Place Wall, page 280
Solid Cutouts, page 286
Verify Model, page 142
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 293
Modify
The Modify commands change a selected member's, or group of
members', attributes. Each modification command operates in an
identical manner. In general, you can use these commands to
modify any member in the active FrameWorks Plus model. You
cannot modify members from attached model partitions (those
members are read-only).
The FrameWorks Plus modification commands, like
MicroStation modification commands, have two operating
modes: single and selection set. If no selection set is active when
the command is activated, the command prompts for a member
to be modified (single mode). If a selection set containing valid
FrameWorks Plus members is active when you select the command, the selected
members are modified as a group.
If a selection set is present when you select a modification command, all the members
in the selection set that meet the Selection Set Filter criteria highlight (if Select
Filter Settings is on) and an Alert Box displays requesting you to confirm the group
(if the Confirm Selection Set command is on). If you click OK in the Alert Box,
FrameWorks Plus modifies each member in the selection set to the new specified
value. If you click Cancel, the modify command reverts to single member mode and
prompts for a member to be modified.
Note
A member is not included in a selection set if only part of the member is
visible in the view. For example, if in a plan view a column intersects the
view but extends above or below the view's display depth, then that
column is not included in a selection set.
All of the modification commands use a pop-down menu for specification of the new
attribute values. Therefore, before using any of the modify commands, you should
activate the MicroStation Tool Settings dialog box.
Topics

Modify Section changes or removes the section size of an existing member.
For more information, see Modify Section, page 295.

Modify Name changes the name of existing members in the model. For more
information, see Modify Name, page 297.

Modify CP changes the cardinal point (CP) of a member. For more
information, see Modify CP, page 298.
Tools
294 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Modify Rotation changes the rotation angle of the section relative to the
member orientation vector. For more information, see Modify Rotation, page
299.

Modify Reflect turns on or off the section reflect attribute of a member. For
more information, see Modify Reflect, page 300.

Modify Type changes the type designation of a member. For more
information, see Modify Type, page 301.

Modify Orientation Vector changes the defined direction of the strong axis or
local y-axis of the section. For more information, see Modify Orientation
Vector, page 301.

Modify Fireproofing assigns or changes the fire-retardant insulation value
assigned to a member. For more information, see Modify Fireproofing, page
303.

Modify Material changes the type of material assigned to each member. For
more information, see Modify Material, page 306.

Modify Material Grade changes the material grade assigned to each member.
For more information, see Modify Material Grade, page 306.

Modify Class changes the class value of a member. For more information, see
Modify Class, page 308.

Named Groups creates and assigns named groups to members. For more
information, see Named Groups, page 308.

Modify Additional Attributes defines, modifies, and removes attributes from
selected members. For more information, see Modify Additional Attributes,
page 311.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 295
Modify Section
The Modify Section command changes or removes an existing member's
section size. The new section size can be keyed in or selected from either the
standard section library or the user section library (if defined). Members can be
changed to an undefined status (no section designation) by using a null (blank)
section size.
To create a tapered member, key in different section sizes in the Start Section and
End Section fields. Otherwise, make sure that the same new section-size is entered in
both fields.


Start Section - Specifies the section size for the member's start end (End 1). You can
key in the exact designation (for example W16X67) or use a wild-card (W14*). When
a key-in is entered, FrameWorks Plus checks for the specified section name in the
active section library (standard and user). If found, the full name is displayed in the
field. If a nonexistent section name is keyed in, the section field is blank. When a
wild-card is used, FrameWorks Plus returns the first section in the library that
matches the name criterion.
Select - Activates the Select Section dialog box, which is used to browse the standard
and user section libraries and to select a Start Section from the library.
End Section - Specifies the section size for the member's end end (End 2).
Note
You cannot use arbitrary sections to create a tapered member.
Select - Activates the Select Section dialog box, which is used to browse the standard
and user section libraries and to select an end section from the library.
Tools
296 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Tapered Pipe Members
For more accurate volume calculations, FrameWorks Plus places tapered pipe
members using the section thickness stored in the section library for the actual wall
thickness. For example, you place a cone shaped member using two pipe sections that
have a section thickness of 200mm. FrameWorks Plus places the cone using 200mm
for the wall thickness of the cone. The width of the section footprint is geometrically
calculated using the wall thickness and the slope angle. This method most accurately
represents how the real-life cone is manufactured, and thus, provides the most
accurate volume calculation.

Important
FrameWorks Plus only calculates correct volumes for tapered pipe
sections with cardinal point 5. The FrameWorks Plus volume calculation
for tapered pipe-section members with cardinal points other than 5 are not
correct.
Related Topics
Modify Section, page 295
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 297
Modify Name
The Modify Name command changes an existing member's name. Any
alphanumeric name, up to 24 characters long, can be specified. Names with
embedded blanks are acceptable, as are null names.


Auto/Specify - Specifies if the member name is generated automatically or manually.
If set to Auto, FrameWorks Plus uses the setting specified in the AutoName
command (see AutoName, page 172) to create the member name. If set to Specify, the
member name in the Name field is used.
Name - Specifies the member's new name.
Related Topics
AutoName, page 172
Modify Name, page 297
Tools
298 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify CP
The Modify CP command modifies a member's cardinal point. The cardinal
point specifies the point at which the structural section shape is connected to
the member line.


Available Cardinal Points

CP - Defines one of the ten possible cardinal points as the cardinal point to use.
Note
The CP option displays the CP position as if you were looking from
member end 1 towards member end 2. If your FrameWorks Plus view is
set such that you're looking from end 2 towards end 1, the actual member
CP may appear backwards from what was selected.
Related Topics
Modify CP, page 298
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 299
Modify Rotation
The Modify Rotation command changes the section's rotation angle relative
to the orientation vector (OV). The effects of the rotation angle are discussed
in the Defaults Linear Members command.


Rotation Angle - Specifies the rotation angle (in degrees).
Related Topics
Modify Rotation, page 299
Tools
300 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Reflect
The Modify Reflect command turns on or off the member's section reflect
attribute. The reflect parameter reflects, or mirrors, the structural section about
the section's local y-axis.
Caution
To ensure that beta angles are correctly represented in the analysis input
deck, do not use the Modify Reflect command to rotate members. Instead
you should use the Modify Orientation Vector command (see Modify
Orientation Vector, page 301) to properly orient a member. The beta angle
calculation for single angles is based on the arbitrary X and Y-axes and
not the principal axes of the cross section. GTSTRUDL and STAAD use
the principal axes in beta angle specification. The FrameWorks Plus
calculated beta angle would not agree if you use the Modify Reflect
command.

The reflect parameter affects both unsymmetrical and symmetric structural sections.
This is described in detail in the Defaults Linear Members command, see Defaults
Linear Members, page 159.

Reflect - Defines the reflect setting.
Related Topics
Modify Orientation Vector, page 301
Modify Reflect, page 300
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 301
Modify Type
The Modify Type command changes the member's type designation. Member
types include: beam, column, vertical brace, and horizontal brace. When
members are modified, they are redisplayed using the new type's display parameters.
The permanent member line graphics are also modified to match the specified
symbology for the new type.

Type - Defines the new member type.
Related Topics
Modify Type, page 301
Modify Orientation Vector
The Modify Orientation Vector command defines the strong axis direction,
the local y-axis, of the structural section. This command is used to define a
new orientation vector for an existing member. The geometric effect of the
orientation vector on the section orientation is shown in the following figure.

Changing a member's orientation vector also changes the orientation of all loads on
that member placed in the local frame.
Note
You cannot specify an orientation vector that is parallel to a linear member
or tangent to an arc member at end 1. This results in an invalid member
definition. Redefine the orientation vector to any nonparallel or
nontangent direction.

X, Y, Z - Specifies the member's new orientation vector. The vector coordinates must
be specified in global coordinates.
Tools
302 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

How FrameWorks Plus Orients Linear Member Cross-Sections

How FrameWorks Plus Orients Arc Member Cross-Sections
Related Topics
Modify Orientation Vector, page 301
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 303
Modify Fireproofing
The Modify Fireproofing command assigns, changes, or deletes fireproofing
on a linear member. FrameWorks Plus optionally labels members that have
been assigned fireproofing. This is controlled using the Modify Symbology for Linear
Members command. Assigned fireproofing can optionally be reported in the material
take-offs reports.
Notes
You can only assign fireproofing to beams, columns, vertical braces, and
horizontal braces. FrameWorks Plus will not assign fireproofing to solid
member (slabs, walls, or solids) or to linear members with arbitrary
sections.
FrameWorks Plus only displays fireproofing graphically in 3D views with
the Surface representation active. However, the software display
fireproofing annotation (labels) in any plan, elevation, or 3D view.

Fireproofing - Specifies the fireproofing type assign to the member.
None - no fireproofing is applied to the member. If the member has fireproofing,
using None deletes the member's fireproofing.
Contour, fully encased - fireproofing follows the cross-section's outside
shape totally encasing all sides.
Contour, top flange exposed - fireproofing follows the cross-section's
outside shape except the member's top is not fireproofed.
Block, fully encased - uniform block of fireproofing material around the
member totally encasing all sides.
Block, top flange exposed - uniform block of fireproofing material
around the member except the member's top is not fireproofed.
Label - Specifies whether the member's fireproofing label should be based on the
fireproofing type or be user specified.
Tools
304 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Define - Activates a dialog box that is used to define both User Defined and Based
on Type fireproofing labels.
Thickness - Specifies the fireproofing's thickness. Enter the thickness in MU:SU:PU.
Applied in - Specifies whether the fireproofing is to be applied to the member at the
shop or in the field during construction. You can specify different fireproofing labels
for shop applied and field applied.
Fireproofing Length - Specifies the linear area of the fireproofing along the
member.
Full member length -- specifies that fireproofing should be applied along
the entire member length regardless of any member cutbacks. You would
normally want to use this setting for columns.
Use cutback distances -- specifies that fireproofing should only be
applied along the member between the cutbacks (no fireproofing on the
part of the member that was cut back). You would normally want to use
this setting for beams and braces. This option is only available for
cutbacks created using the Compute Cutback, User Cutback, or
Mitered Cutback commands. Fireproofing will display for the full
member length for members with SmartCuts applied.

By setback (value) -- specifies that fireproofing is set back from the
member's end a specified distance. The distance is specified in the
Setback Value End 1 and Setback Value End 2 fields.
By setback (percent) -- specifies that fireproofing is set back from the
member's end a specified percentage of the member length. The
percentage is specified in the Setback as Percent of Length field.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 305
Setback Value End 1 - Specifies the fireproofing setback for the start of the member.
The setback distance is defined in Master Units. A positive setback value moves the
fireproofing farther from the member end.
Setback Value End 2 - Specifies the fireproofing setback for the end of the member.
The setback distance is defined in Master Units. A positive setback value moves the
fireproofing farther from the member end.
Setback as Percent of Length - Specifies the percentage of the member that the
fireproofing should be setback. For example, for a 30-foot long member, a 10% value
would cause the fireproofing to be 3 feet from the end of the member. A 5% value
would cause the fireproofing to be 18 inches from the member end.
Note
When writing members with setback as percentage fireproofing to a Steel
Detailing Neutral File (SDNF), the software writes the equivalent setback
value to the SDNF instead of the percentage value. If the same member is
read back into the model from a SDNF, the software automatically
switches the fireproofing for the member from setback as percentage to
setback value. This can cause the member's fireproofing to appear to be
edited when for all practical purposes the member has not changed.
Fireproofing Labels - This dialog box defines the different fireproofing labels you
can use. If the Label parameter is set to Based on Type, the contour and block lines
on this dialog box are used. If Label is set to User Defined, the user-defined line is
used. All fireproofing labels are limited to 11 characters.

Related Topics
Defaults Linear Members - Fireproofing, page 164
Modify Fireproofing, page 303
Tools
306 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Material
The Modify Material command modifies the material type assigned to a
member. You can assign a member your choice of steel, concrete, aluminum,
plastic, timber, or a user definable "other" material type. Material types can be
assigned to any linear member regardless of section type. For example, you can
define a concrete linear member that has a user-defined section, a user-created
arbitrary section, or a standard section from a steel section library.
You can define the name for the "other" material type by setting the environment
variable FW_OTHER_MATERIAL in the config.dat file. The material name can be 16
characters long including embedded spaces. If you do not set this environment
variable, the "other" material type name defaults to Other.
The assigned material can be written to material reports.

Material - Specifies the material type to assign to the member: Steel, Concrete,
Aluminum, Plastic, Timber, or Other.
Related Topics
Modify Material Grade, page 306
Modify Material, page 306
Modify Material Grade
The Modify Material Grade command changes the material grade assigned
to the member. Steel and concrete grades from Britain, Canada, Eurocodes 2
and 3, and U.S.A. are delivered. If you plan on using plastic, aluminum, timber, or
custom materials, you need to add the grade information to the
..\fwplus\data\grade.dat file yourself. This is a standard ASCII file. Be sure to make a
backup copy of the grade.dat file before you make your edits. You also need to keep
a backup of the file you edit in case you have to reload FrameWorks Plus.
Caution
Use only spaces between entries in the grade.dat file. Tabs or other hidden
spacing characters can cause problems for FrameWorks Plus when reading
the grade.dat file. In addition, do not use spaces in the grade name.
FrameWorks Plus tracks the unit of each grade in the grade.dat file. If you use an
English unit grade in a metric model or a metric unit grade in an English model,
FrameWorks Plus automatically converts the density values to the correct units for
the model to ensure correct MTO reports.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 307
English grades are defined in ksi for f`
c
, F
y
, and F
u
and lbs/ft
3
for density. Metric
grades are defined in N/mm
2
for f`
c
, F
y
, and F
u
and kg/m
3
for density. You must
define custom grades in these units for FrameWorks Plus to properly convert grade
values when needed.

Material Grade - Displays the active grade name. This is the grade assigned to the
member.
Select - Activates the Material Grade selection box, used to select an active grade.
The grades listed for selection are read directly from the grade.dat file.

Related Topics
Modify Material Grade, page 306
Modify Material, page 306
Tools
308 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Class
The Modify Class command modifies the class value assigned to a member.
The class attribute is used to group members when creating material reports, analysis
input files, or performing other operations. The Select Filter Settings command (see
Select Filter Settings, page 151) includes a class attribute criterion, which can be used
to include or exclude members of a specified class or range of classes. The class
attribute is also reportable on material take-offs.
The specific meaning or significance of each class value is up to you. For instance,
class can be used to distinguish primary load-bearing members (class 0) from
secondary members (class 1). This allows generation of an analysis input file that
contains only the primary members. Many other practical uses can be made of the
class attribute.

Class - Specifies the class value to assign to the member.
Related Topics
Modify Class, page 308
Named Groups
The Named Groups command creates, assigns, and removes named groups from
model members. Named groups are useful for grouping members by a logical
association, for example floor level, status, design parameters, stairway, and
so forth.
Members can belong to one or more named groups but are not required to belong to
any named group. If a member belongs to more than one group, FrameWorks Plus
asks you to specify a controlling named group. The controlling named group is used
when named groups have conflicting settings. For example, a column belongs to two
named groups, East Wall and First Floor with First Floor being the controlling group.
You set the East Wall named group symbology to display in green and the First Floor
group to display in blue. Because these are conflicting settings, FrameWorks Plus
uses the controlling named group, First Floor, and displays the column in blue. The
controlling named group always highlights in red in the named groups list. All other
named groups highlight in black.
Note
If a new controlling named group is assigned to a member, all previously
defined named group symbology in all views is replaced with the new
controlling named group's symbology for that view. If the controlling
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 309
named group does not have symbology defined for a view, FrameWorks
Plus display the view's default symbology as described in the previous
paragraph.
Named Groups are tracked on a project level so any named group you create in one
model is available in all the other models in that project. You can have a maximum of
1,024 named groups in a project. We recommend that you include the model name or
model ID number in the named group name when you create a named group that is
used only in one model. Similarly, use the word "common" or some other identifier to
distinguish project wide named groups from those named group used in a single
model.
Warning
We recommend that you remove members from named groups before
copying or moving models. Failure to remove members from named
groups before copying or moving the model can cause unpredictable
results including members being assigned to groups with the same name in
the other project.
If you copy models using the Copy Model command in FrameWorks Manager, the
named groups are automatically removed from the model members.
Deleting a named group from one model can cause problems with members that
belong to that named group in other models. If you do not want to use a named group
anymore, remove the members from the named group and use the Edit command to
rename the named group for another purpose.

Named Groups - Lists all named groups that have been defined across the project.
Tools
310 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Add - Creates a new named group. The named group name is limited to 35
characters.
Edit - Renames a named group.
Apply - Assigns selected members to the named group. You can assign members
either individually or by using a selection set.
Control By - Specifies which named grouped is the controlling named group. Use
this command when you want to change which named group is the controlling named
group after you have placed the member.
Remove - Removes selected members from a named group.
Select - Copies named groups from one member to another member.
You can also use this option to display which named groups, if any, are assigned to a
member. The controlling named group is highlighted in red. All other assigned named
groups highlight in black.
Show All - Highlights all members in a selected named group. You can select two or
more named groups from the list to display only those members that belong to all
selected groups.
Sort by - Controls how named groups are displayed in the list. Select Index to
display the named groups in the order that they were created. Select Alphabet to
display the named groups in alphabetical order.
Related Topics
Create Named Groups Symbology, page 216
Defaults Linear Members - Named Groups, page 167
Drop Named Groups Symbology, page 222
Modify Named Groups Symbology, page 219
Named Groups, page 308
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 311
Modify Additional Attributes
The Modify Additional Attributes command defines, modifies, and removes
attributes on a selected member after the member has been placed in the
model. You can define default attributes that are automatically assigned to members
as they are created by using Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes, page 167 or
Defaults Solid Members, page 170.
You can customize the selectable values for attributes by editing the attributes.dat
file, which is delivered in the ..\FWPlus\Data folder. In addition, you can use the
FW_DATA environment variable to specify the location of the attributes.dat file that
you want to use. For more information on environment variable, see Environment
Variables, page 512.
Caution
If you plan to write a Steel Detailing Neutral File (SDNF) from a project,
you must take administrative action to safe guard the attributes.dat file
from unauthorized editing. FrameWorks Plus writes the code listed value
(1, 2, 3, and so forth) of the attribute value to the SDNF, not the text
string. For example, if you assign a coating of Painted to a member,
FrameWorks Plus writes the code listed value of 4, not Painted, to the
SDNF. Because the code listed values are written to the SDNF, you must
send the attributes.dat file with the SDNF so that the receiving party can
correctly interpret the SDNF. After the SDNF has been written, you
cannot edit existing values in the attributes.dat file. For example, you
cannot change the number 4 code list entry for Coatings to be None
because the SDNF was written with number 4 being Painted. Changing 4
to None would cause a miscommunication between you and the party you
sent the SDNF to. The only edits to the attributes.dat file that would be
okay would be to add values to a list. For example, you could add several
more available coating to your list as long as you did not change existing
coating entries.
Tools
312 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Member Subtype - Specifies the member subtype. Linear members and solid
members have different definable subtypes.
Design Status - Specifies the design status of the member.
Coatings - Specifies any coating applied to the member.
End1 Connections - Specifies the end 1 connection. Not available for solid members.
End2 Connections - Specifies the end 2 connection. Not available for solid members.
Fabricator Name - Specifies the fabricator name.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 313
Fabricator Note - Specifies a fabricator note.
Fabricator Member ID - Indicates the fabricator's member ID for this member.
Piece Mark - Indicates the fabricator's piece mark for this member.
Fabricator Prebuy Mark - Indicates the fabricator's pre-buy mark for this member.
Flooded - Specifies the percentage that the member is flooded. Type a value from 0
to 100. A value of 0 means the member is not flooded, while a value of 100 means the
member is totally flooded.
Assembly 1 to 3 - Specifies any assemblies that the member belongs to.
User Attributes 1 to 5 - User defined attributes that you can use.
Related Topics
Defaults Linear Members - More Attributes, page 167
Member Attributes, page 154
Modify Additional Attributes, page 311
Tools
314 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Manipulate
These commands copy, move, rotate, mirror, delete, and
otherwise manipulate members. You can manipulate members
in the active model only. You cannot manipulate members in
attached model partitions because they are read-only.
Like the Modify commands, most of the Manipulate
commands use the MicroStation selection sets for group
operations. If no selection set is present when the command is
selected, the command prompts for a single member to
manipulate. If a selection set that contains valid FrameWorks
Plus members is active when you select the command, the
selected members are manipulated as a group. Extend Member,
Modify Member End, and Modify Work Point Offset commands require selection
of a specific member end and therefore operate in single member mode only.
If a selection set is active, all selection set members that meet the Selection Set Filter
criteria highlight and an Alert Box displays requesting you to confirm the group. If
you click OK in the Alert Box, FrameWorks Plus manipulates each member in the
selection set. If you click Cancel, the manipulate command reverts to single member
mode and prompts for a member to manipulate.
Note
A member is not included in a selection set if only part of the member is
visible in the view. For example, if in a plan view a column intersects the
view but extends above or below the view's display depth, then that
column is not included in a selection set.
Model Associativity
Three Manipulation commands, Move Member, Extend Member, and Modify
Member End, use an associativity feature. FrameWorks Plus uses associativity to
preserve the connectivity of the structure (members that are disconnected from other
members during a move operation are automatically reconnected). There are three
associativity modes:
Non-associative (None): Members are moved without regard to original
connectivity.
Local: Members that were in direct contact to the moved members are
adjusted to reconnect to the moved members.
Global: Members are processed as described for the local mode above, but
FrameWorks Plus also processes the move's secondary effects. This
involves additional adjustments to members that have been affected by the
reconnecting of members.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 315
Associativity is best described with a picture.

Sometimes a local move and a global move are identical (no secondary effects).
When you use the local or global mode, FrameWorks Plus has to determine the
structural topology, which may take a few moments in larger models. Therefore, if
you know you do not need associativity, such as when the members you are moving
are not connected to any other members, use the non-associative mode.
Note
Associativity ignores an arc member's connectivity regardless of the
setting. Arc members are never affected by associative manipulations.
You should also take a minute to read Member Connectivity, page 265.
Topics

Copy Member copies members. For more information, see Copy Member,
page 317.

Move Member moves or shifts a single member or a group of members. For
more information, see Move Member, page 319.

Extend Member lengthens or shortens a member by extending one member
end along its axis. For more information, see Extend Member, page 320.

Modify Member End moves the end location of one member end. For more
information, see Modify Member End, page 321.

Rotate Member rotates members. For more information, see Rotate Member,
page 322.

Mirror Member mirrors a selected member. For more information, see Mirror
Member, page 324.
Tools
316 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Modify Work Point Offset makes minor adjustments to the placement
location of one member end. For more information, see Modify Work Point
Offset, page 326.

Modify Offset makes minor adjustments to the placement location of a
member. For more information, see Modify Offset, page 330.

Match TOS/BOS modifies the delta top-of-steel value of a member so that the
top or bottom of the member section aligns with a specified elevation. For
more information, see Match TOS/BOS, page 331.

Join Members joins two co-linear members to create a single member. For
more information, see Join Members, page 332.

Split Member divides a single member into two separate members. For more
information, see Split Member, page 332.

Modify Arc changes the radius of arc members. For more information, see
Modify Arc, page 334.

Extend Member to Intersection extends a single member end until it
intersects another member. For more information, see Extend Member to
Intersection, page 335.

Extend Members to Intersection extends two members to their common
intersection. For more information, see Extend Members to Intersection, page
337.

Delete Member removes members from the model. For more information, see
Delete Member, page 338.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 317
Copy Member
The Copy Member command creates new members by duplicating existing
members. All attributes on the original members are copied to the new
members.
The members are copied at a distance and direction specified by two points. The first
point defines the copy origin. As you move the cursor to the destination point,
FrameWorks Plus dynamically moves the member lines. The second point places the
copy members at the destination. If you are making more than one copy, the second
copy is placed the same distance and direction from the first copy as the first copy
was placed from the original.
Precision key-ins are useful when the copy distance is known in terms of global or
view coordinates. For example, to copy a beam 10 feet along the Z-axis, key in
dl=0,0,10.
The original member's planar cutbacks and end offsets, if specified, are copied to the
new member. These cutbacks and end offsets may not be correct for the copied
member's final position. Be sure to verify the copied member's cutbacks and offsets
and re-create them if needed. SmartCuts are never copied to the new member.
When copying members into the active model from an attached model, the
AutoName settings for the active model are used to name the newly created members.
Use the Settings > AutoName command to define the naming convention to use
before you copy the members. As an alternative, you can use the Modify Name
command after copying the members to rename them.

Number of Copies - Key in the number of copies to make.
Copy all loads - Copies all the loads on the source member to the new member.
Copy all releases - Copies the release on the source member to the new member. If
you do not select this option, FrameWorks Plus uses the releases, if any, defined in
the default settings for the new member. For example, in the member defaults, you
release X and Y. On the member that you are copying, you have released X and Z. If
this option is on, the new member has X and Z released. If this option is off, the new
Tools
318 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
member has X and Y released. For more information on member defaults, see
Defaults Linear Members, page 159.
Copy all supports - Copies the supports on the source member to the new member.
Copy all holes - Copies the holes in a source solid element to the new solid element.
Copy code/design parameters - Copies the code and design parameters on the
source member to the new member.
Copy Additional Attributes - Copies member attributes on the source member to the
new member. If you do not select this option, FrameWorks Plus uses the attributes, if
any, defined in the default settings for the new member. For example, in the member
defaults, you specified ABC as the fabricator name. On the member that you are
copying, you specified XYZ as the fabricator name. If this option is on, the new
member has XYZ for the fabricator. If this option is off, the new member has ABC
for the fabricator. To review these attributes, see Modify Additional Attributes.
Copy with member name - Copies the member name of the original member to the
new member.
Important
If the member ID attribute is part of the member name, the original
member's member ID is used for the new member name, even though the
new member has a different member ID.
Note
When copying members individually, you can use the Edit Last Placed
command to modify any copied member's attribute.
Related Topics
Copy Member, page 317
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 319
Move Member
The Move Member command moves or shifts a single member, or a group of
members. The members being moved retain their original length and
direction; that is, they are rigidly translated to a new position. All moves are
tentatively displayed, allowing you to see the move result and reject it if necessary.
The member's cutbacks and end offsets, if applied, may not be correct for the
member's new position. Be sure to verify the moved member's cutbacks and offsets
and re-create them if needed.
Note
Moving members with loads may affect the loads. See Place Load for
more information on how loads are affected.

Associativity - Define the model associativity as none, local, or global.
If set to None, members are moved without regard to the original
connectivity.
If set to Local, members that are directly connected to the moved
members stretch to maintain connection to the member being moved.
If set to Global, the members that are directly connected stretch along
with the members connected to those members.
For more information on associativity, see Manipulate, page 314.
Note
Associativity ignores an arc member's connectivity regardless of the
setting. Arc members are never affected by associative manipulations.
Related Topics
Move Member, page 319
Tools
320 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Extend Member
The Extend Member command lengthens or shortens a member by extending
a selected member's end along its axis. If you use this command on an arc
member, the arc's sweep angle is changed. This command only operates in single
member mode, any active selection set is ignored.
After you have selected the member to extend, you can define the new linear member
end either graphically, or by keying in the distance you want like to lengthen (or
shorten) the member end (in Master Units). For arc members, you must define the
new sweep angle graphically.
This command, like the Move Member and Modify Member End commands, use
member associativity, which is described in detail in the main Manipulate command
section.
Note
Extending members with loads may affect the loads. For more information
on how loads are affected, see Place Load, page 346.

Associativity - Define the model associativity as none, local, or global.
If set to None, the member is extended without regard to the original
connectivity.
If set to Local, members that are directly connected to the extended
members stretch to maintain connection to the member being extended.
If set to Global, the members that are directly connected stretch along
with the members connected to those members.
Note
Associativity ignores an arc member's connectivity regardless of the
setting. Arc members are never affected by associative manipulations.
Related Topics
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Member, page 320
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 321
Modify Member End
The Modify Member End command modifies the location of one member
end. This command operates only in single member mode, any active
selection set is ignored.
This command, like the Move Member and Extend Member commands, uses model
associativity. This feature is described in detail in the Manipulate command
description.
Note
Modifying members with loads may affect the loads. For more
information on how loads are affected, see Place Load, page 346.
If you move a member that has a work point offset defined, FrameWorks
Plus deletes the work point offset from the member.

Associativity - Define the model associativity as none, local, or global.
If set to None, the member end is moved without regard to the original
connectivity.
If set to Local, members that are directly connected to the member whose
end is being moved, stretch to maintain connection to the member being
extended.
If set to Global, the members that are directly connected stretch along
with the members connected to those members.
Note
Associativity ignores an arc member's connectivity regardless of the
setting. Arc members are never affected by associative manipulations.
Tools
322 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Rotate Member
The Rotate Member command rotates selected FrameWorks Plus members
about an axis you define. You can rotate original members or create copies of
original members and rotate the copies.
Note
Loads applied to original members are not copied to copied-rotated
members. However, if the Make Copy option is off and you are rotating
the original members, loads placed using the Local Load Frame are rotated
with the member. Loads placed using the Global and Global Projected
Load Frames are not rotated because they are placed in reference to the
model's coordinate system. The Global and Global Projected loads
maintain their original placement direction after the member is rotated.


Rotation Angle - Specifies the rotation angle. Positive angles rotate the members
counter-clockwise. Negative angles rotate the members clockwise.
Rotation Axis - Specifies the axis about which you want to rotate members. You can
select the X, Y, or Z-axis.
Rotation Point By - Specifies the rotation axis's location.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 323
Key-in -- The rotation axis location is defined using the X, Y, and Z key-
in fields.
Point -- A data point you place defines the rotation axis location.
Make Copy - If off, the members selected for rotation are themselves rotated. If on,
copies of the members selected are made and then the copied members are rotated.
Note
Loads and multi-plane cutbacks applied to original members are not
copied to copied-rotated members. However, if the Make Copy option is
off and you are rotating the original members, loads will rotate with the
original members. Multi-plane cutbacks are always deleted from original
members that are rotated.
Preview - Select to preview what the model will look like after the rotation operation
is complete.
Related Topics
Mirror Member, page 324
Rotate Member, page 322
Tools
324 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Mirror Member
The Mirror Member command mirrors a group of members. You have the
choice of mirroring the original selected members or mirroring a copy of the
originally selected members.

Note
Walls must remain vertical after being mirrored. You cannot mirror a wall
is such a way as to make it tilted or horizontal when the mirror process is
complete.
Loads applied to original members are not copied to copied-mirrored members.
However, if the Make Copy option is off and you are mirroring the original
members, loads placed using the Local Load Frame are mirrored with the member.
Loads placed using the Global and Global Projected Load Frames are not mirrored
because they are placed in reference to the model's coordinate system. The Global and
Global Projected loads maintain their original placement direction after the member is
mirrored.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 325
Mirror Point By - Specifies how you are going to define the Mirror Point. The
Mirror Point itself defines half the distance between the member's original location
and the member's mirrored location.
Keyin -- Specify the mirror point by keying in the X, Y, and Z coordinates
of the point in the corresponding dialog box fields.
Point -- Specify the mirror point by placing a data point in the model.
Mirror Plane By - Specifies how you are going to define the Mirror Plane. The
Mirror Plane is the actual "mirror" used to mirror the members. The Mirror Plane can
be the user defined or can be one of the planes defined by the global coordinate
system.
XY -- The X and Y-axes define the plane.
YZ -- The Y and Z-axes define the plane.
XZ -- The X and Z-axes define the plane.

XY, XZ, and YZ Mirror Planes
Keyin -- You specify the plane using the X, Y, and Z key-in fields. Use
the field to define three points on the plane.
Points -- You specify the mirror plane by placing three data points in the
model.
Make Copy - If off, the members selected are themselves mirrored. If on, copies of
the members selected are made and then the copied members are mirrored.
Note
Loads and multi-plane cutbacks applied to original members are not
copied to copied-mirrored members. However, if the Make Copy option
is off and you are mirroring the original members, loads will mirror with
the original members. Multi-plane cutbacks are always removed from
original members that are mirrored.
Mirror Orientation Vector - If on, FrameWorks Plus modifies the orientation
vector, rotation, and reflection attributes in such a way that the orientation of the
member is also mirrored appropriately.
Tools
326 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Preview - Select to preview what the model will look like after the mirror operation
is complete.
Related Topics
Mirror Member, page 324
Rotate Member, page 322
Modify Work Point Offset
The Modify Work Point Offset command makes minor adjustments to the
physical location of one member end while still maintaining the original
location's connectivity for analytical considerations. This is often necessary
to facilitate the welding and bolting of gusset plates.

Guidelines when using Work Point Offsets
You need to re-create the cutbacks for any members you modify using this
command.
For members in attached models to be considered when placing a work
point offset using the Rule option, the attached models must use the same
length unit (for example feet or meter) and must use the same section table
(for example AISC or EURO).
You can remove a work point offset rule you have applied to member by
reapplying a work point offset using the Key In option and entering
x=0.0, y=0.0, and z=0.0.
To offset an entire member, not just one end, use Modify Offset, page 330.
Modifying members with loads may affect the loads. For more
information on how loads are affected, see Place Load, page 346.
Point Option
The Point option graphically defines the new work point offset. You should use this
option when you can clearly define the offset point using the mouse.
Note
If you have used previous versions of FrameWorks Plus, the Point option
is how the Work Point Offset command traditionally worked.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 327
Key In Option
The Key In option defines the new work point offset using a user-defined x, y, z
coordinate offset. Use this option when you know the exact distance you need to
move the member end. For example, you need to move an end of a vertical brace 10
centimeters down and 15 centimeters to the side.

Rule Option
The Rule option defines the new work point offset based on a rule applicable to the
selected member type and connection. FrameWorks Plus supports rules for three
types of connections: beam-column-vertical brace; beam-vertical chevron brace; and
beam-horizontal chevron brace. Use this option when you do not know the exact
value of the offset nor have good way to graphically define the offset. When you use
this option, FrameWorks Plus automatically updates the work point offset whenever
any member associated with the joint is modified, such as rotation, a new cardinal
point, or a new section size.
Notes
FrameWorks Plus does not update the work point offset when a member in
an attached model is changed. For example, if you change the section size
of a beam in an attached model, the brace in the active model remains in
the original location. You must reapply the work point offset manually to
update the brace location.
You can apply work point offsets using the Rule option only to vertical
and horizontal braces.
Beam/Column from Attached Models - Select this option when the beam or column
that the brace frames into is an attached model. Do not select this option when the
beam, column, and brace are all in active model. Selecting this option adversely
affects software performance because all the attached models must be scanned.
Beam-Column-Vertical Brace Connection
A beam-column-vertical brace connection is when a vertical brace end terminates at a
beam-column junction. For this connection, FrameWorks Plus displays six locations
from which you can select the work point offset location you want to use.
Tools
328 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Select Point
Point 1 - The point where the column center line (half the depth of the column size)
and the top of beam line intersect.
Point 2 - The point where the column center line (half the depth
of the column size) and the beam center line (the half depth of the
beam size) intersect.
Point 3 - The point where the column center line (half the depth
of the column size) and the beam bottom line intersect.
Point 4 - The point where the line along the inner column flange (on the beam and
brace side of the column) and the top of the beam line intersect.
Point 5 - The point where the line along the inner column flange (on the beam and
brace side of the column) and the beam center line (the half depth of the beam size)
intersect.
Point 6 - The point where the line along the inner column flange (on the beam and
brace side of the column) and the beam bottom line intersect.
Guidelines for Beam-Column-Vertical Braces Connections
The six points are fixed irrespective of the beam and column cardinal
points.
Only the first three points are available if the beam connects to the
column's web instead of the column's flange.
You cannot apply a Rule to a brace when the beam's web is not vertical.
You cannot apply a Rule to a brace when the beam and brace do not frame
into the column's web or flange. This can happen when the column is
rotated 45 degrees, for example.
You cannot apply a Rule to a brace when the column is an arbitrary
section, angle, double-angle, solid round, pipe, tapered member, T section,
or a single channel with the web facing the beam.
You cannot apply a Rule to a brace when the beam is an arbitrary section,
pipe, solid round, or tapered member.
Beam-Vertical Chevron Brace Connection
When you select one of the vertical braces in a vertical
chevron brace, FrameWorks Plus displays three
locations from which you can select the work point
offset location you want to use. In addition, you can
specify an offset along the beam length that
FrameWorks Plus will also apply to the vertical brace
end.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 329
Select Point
Point 1 - The beam's top-of-steel (TOS). The vertical brace end is moved normal to
the beam line until it matches the TOS elevation.
Point 2 - Half of the beam's depth. The vertical brace end is moved normal to the
beam line until it matches this elevation.
Point 3 - The beam's bottom flange elevation. The vertical brace end is moved normal
to the beam line unit it matches this elevation.
Work Point Offset
Specify the distance both vertical brace ends should be moved apart parallel to the
beam line. Any positive value is valid.
Guidelines for Beam-Vertical Chevron Braces Connections
The three points are fixed irrespective of the beam's cardinal point.
You cannot apply a Rule to the braces when the beam's web is not vertical.
You cannot apply a Rule to the braces when the beam is an arbitrary
section, pipe, solid round, or tapered member.
Beam-Horizontal Chevron Brace Connection
When you select a horizontal chevron brace, you can
specify an offset to move both horizontal braces apart
along the beam line.
Work Point Offset
Specify the distance both horizontal brace ends should be
moved apart parallel to the beam line. Any positive value is valid.
Guidelines for Beam-Horizontal Chevron Braces Connections
You cannot apply a Rule to the braces when the beam's web is not vertical.
You cannot apply a Rule to the braces when the beam is an arbitrary
section, pipe, solid round, or tapered member.
Related Topics
Modify Work Point Offset, page 326
Tools
330 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Offset
The Modify Offset command makes minor adjustments to the member's
placement location; that is, to offset the member from its nominal placement
position. A common type of member offset is to apply a vertical offset to framing
beams (also known as a Delta Top-of-Steel).

FrameWorks Plus has built-in model associativity which allows efficient
manipulation of the structural geometry. The offsets applied with this command do
not disrupt the member associativity, even though a member can be physically
disconnected from the member lines of its support members.
To offset only one member end, use the Modify Work Point Offset command.
Note
You need to re-create the cutbacks for any members you modify using this
command.

Offset X, Y, Z - Specifies the offset to be applied to the member. The values should
be specified in Master Units.
Related Topics
Match TOS/BOS, page 331
Modify Offset, page 330
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 331
Match TOS/BOS
The Match TOS/BOS command adjusts a horizontal member's placement
location so that the top or bottom of the member section matches a specified
elevation. FrameWorks Plus uses the top-most and bottom-most point on the member
section shape when calculating the new delta top-of-steel value for the member. The
member's cardinal point location is not considered in the calculation. All section
types, including arbitrary sections, are supported.
FrameWorks Plus has built-in model associativity which allows efficient
manipulation of the structural geometry. The offsets applied with this command do
not disrupt the member associativity, even though a member can be physically
disconnected from the member lines of its support members.
To offset only one member end, use the Modify Work Point Offset command. See
Modify Work Point Offset, page 326 for more information.
Note
You need to re-create the cutbacks for any members you modify using this
command.

TOS/BOS toggle - Select TOS to match the top of the member section to the
specified elevation. Select BOS to match the bottom of the member section to the
specified elevation.
Level to match - Displays the elevation to which the top or bottom of the section is
matched. You can type the new elevation is this field or you can use the Select
Reference Member or Select Z elevation options to set this elevation.
Select Reference Member - Select this option, and then select an existing member in
the model whose elevation you want to match. The software automatically enters the
member's elevation in the Level to match field. The reference member that you select
must be horizontal.
Select Z elevation - Select this option, and then place a data point in the model
whose elevation you want to match. The software automatically enters the point's
elevation in the Level to match field.
Key in Elevation - Select this option, and then type the elevation that you want to
match in the Level to match field.
Related Topics
Modify Offset, page 330
Tools
332 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Join Members
This command joins two members that are connected and co-linear. Member
properties from the first selected member (such as name, ID, section size,
material, and so forth) are used for the newly formed member.

FrameWorks Plus uses the member end properties (cutbacks, releases, supports) from
the first member's start end and the last member's end end for the newly joined
member's ends.
Loads placed on all joined members are placed on the new member. Absolute and
relative locations are recalculated for the new member.
Related Topics
Join Members, page 332
Split Member, page 332
Split Member
The Split Member command splits a single member into two different
members. The point where you identify the member is the point where the
member is split.

Notes
You cannot split a member when one or both resulting members would be
less than 1 SU in length.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 333
You cannot split can members.
Things to know about the Split Member Command
Physical member properties (section size, grade, material, and so forth) of
the original member are copied to the two new members.
Member end releases of the original member are copied to the two new
members.
Design parameters, code parameters, and member constraints of the
original member are copied to the two new members.
Member offsets of the original member are copied to the two new
members.
Member supports remain on the ends for which they were defined. For
example, if end 1 of the original member was fully supported (X, Y, Z,
RX, RY, RZ) and end 2 was supported only in RX, and RZ. Then end 1 of
new member 1 gets fully supported and end 2 of new member 2 gets the
RX and RZ support. The new interior ends (end 2 for member 1 and end 1
for member 2) do not have any supports defined.
Cutbacks (like Supports) remain on the ends for which they were defined.
For example, if the original member was cutback 7 7/16" on both ends,
then end 1 of new member 1 gets cutback 7 7/16" and end 2 of new
member 2 gets cutback 7 7/16". The new interior ends (end 2 for member
1 and end 1 for member 2) do not have any cutbacks defined.
Concentrated loads stay where they were placed (the physical location
along the original members length). The absolute or relative placement
value is recalculated based on the new member length.
Distributed loads are split into two distributed loads with the same
magnitude (one distributed load for each new member).
Partially distributed loads do one of two things based on the split location.
If the split location is between the partially distributed load's end points,
the load is split into two partially distributed loads one on each new
member on either side of the split location.
If the split location is outside of the partially distributed load's end points, the load
is unaffected other than having the end points' absolute or relative placement
values recalculated based on the new member length.
Related Topics
Join Members, page 332
Split Member, page 332
Tools
334 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Arc
The Modify Arc command modifies an arc member's radius. This command
is useful for creating concentric arc members.

Distance - Specifies the length to add to or remove from the arc radius. Key in a
distance in MU:SU:PU. Use the cursor to specify if the distance is added to or
removed from the radius.
Make Copy - If off, the selected arc is modified. If on, a copy of the arc is made and
the copy is modified.
Related Topics
Modify Arc, page 334
Place Arc, page 274
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 335
Extend Member to Intersection
The Extend Member to Intersection command extends or clips a single
member to another specified member. The first member that you select is the
only member that is modified.


Tools
336 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
When clipping a member, select the side of the member that you want to keep.


Note
Extending members with loads may affect the loads. For more information
on how loads are affected, see Place Load, page 346.
Related Topics
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Member, page 320
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 337
Extend Members to Intersection
The Extend Members to Intersection command extends or clips two
identified members to their mutual intersection. Unlike the Extend Member
to Intersection command, both members you select are modified.


Note
Extending members with loads may affect the loads. For more information
on how loads are affected, see Place Load, page 346.
Related Topics
Extend Member to Intersection, page 335
Extend Member, page 320
Extend Members to Intersection, page 337
Tools
338 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Delete Member
The Delete Member command removes members from the model. Individual
members can be deleted (single mode), or groups of members can be deleted
by using a selection set.
All loads on a member and all holes in a solid are also deleted.
Related Topics
Delete Member, page 338
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 339
Analytical
The Analytical Attributes commands place loads, member releases, and member
supports. There are commands for labeling loads, releases, and supports and for
editing and deleting loads.

Topics

Create Load Case defines and edits load case tables. For more information,
see Create Load Case, page 340.

Create Load Combination defines and edits load combination tables. For
more information, see Create Load Combination, page 344.

Place Load places physical member loads on members. For more information,
see Place Load, page 346.

Edit Load reviews and edits loads on members. For more information, see Edit
Load, page 350.

Delete Load deletes loads. For more information, see Delete Load, page 354

Label Load labels loads. For more information, see Label Load, page 355.

Modify End Releases modifies member releases. For more information, see
Modify End Releases, page 355.

Label End Releases labels member releases. For more information, see Label
End Releases, page 356.

Modify Supports modifies member supports. For more information, see
Modify Supports, page 357.

Label Supports labels member supports. For more information, see Label
Supports, page 358.

Create Intermediate Nodes creates additional nodes on a member. For more
information, see Create Intermediate Node, page 358.

Create Member Specification defines the member type for the input deck. For
more information, see Create Member Specification, page 360.

Tools
340 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Create Load Case
The Create Load Case command creates, edits, and deletes load cases.
Warning
If you delete a load case, all loads placed using that load case are deleted
from the model's members.
If you delete a load case that is used in a load combination, the load
combination is automatically edited to remove the delete load case. If the
delete load case is the only load case in the load combination, the load
combination is deleted.

File - Loads and saves load cases to an ASCII file. For more information, see File
(Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341.
Load Case Name - Specifies the load case name or ID. The name can be 32
characters long and must start with an alphabetic character (a, b, c, d, ...), not a
number. In addition, the name cannot contain a single quote character. You can
display currently defined Load Cases names by selecting the button at the field end.
Load Case Type - Describes the load type. Options are: Dead Load, Live Load,
Wind Load, Earthquake Load, Thermal Load, Pipe Load, Test Load, and Self Weight.
All load types are written as static linear loads.
For GTSTRUDL and STAAD, the load case name and the load case type entries are
used as descriptions for the loading (load case) in the output file.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 341
If you select Self Weight, Direction and Factor options appear. Direction defines the
direction of the self-weight load in the model coordinate system. Factor specifies the
multiplication factor for the self-weight.
You cannot place self-weight loads in the model. Instead, FrameWorks Plus adds the
correct "self weight" syntax to the GTSTRUDL or STAAD analytical input decks.
Load Case Active - Determines whether or not the load case is written to the input
file.
Color - Specifies the load graphic color when placing loads using this load case. To
define a color, either key in a color number or select the color from the color pallet.
Weight - Specifies the line weight (0-15) for the load graphic.
Level - Key in a level (1-63) for loads to be placed on when using this load case.
Style - Specifies the line style (0-7) for the load graphic.
Save - Saves the current load case definition.
Delete - Deletes the current load case. An alert box displays asking you to confirm
the deletion.
Cancel - Dismisses the load case dialog box.
Related Topics
Create Load Case, page 340
Create Load Combination, page 344
Delete Load, page 354
Edit Load, page 350
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341
Label Load, page 355
Load Symbology, page 178
Place Load, page 346
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box)
The File commands on the Load Cases and Load Combinations dialog boxes read
and write load case and load combination data to an ASCII file. You are often
required to define the same load cases and load combinations in several models in the
same project. By defining the definitions once in one model and then writing the
definitions to an ASCII file, you can quickly read the ASCII file in the other models
to create the load case and load combination tables. You can even write your load
case and load combination definitions in a text file in a specified format for use in the
models.
Tools
342 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Caution
If a load case or combination that already exists in your model has the
same name as a load case or combination being read in from the ASCII
file, the model load case or combination is overwritten by the ASCII file
load case or combination. If this happens, FrameWorks Plus writes the
name of the overwritten load case or load combination to the log file.
While not required, we recommend you save load case and load combination ASCII
files in the ..\data folder of the project. FrameWorks Plus save the ASCII files with an
.ldt extension. If you choose to write your own ASCII files, save them with an .ldt
extension too.
The File > Load and File > Save As commands on the Load Cases dialog box read
and write only load case definitions. However, the File > Load and File > Save As
commands on the Load Combinations dialog box read and write both load case and
load combination data. Be careful when saving load case definitions from the load
case dialog box to an existing ldt file, as any load combinations in the ldt file will be
lost.
File Format
The ldt file is a formatted ASCII file. When writing an ldt file, keep these guidelines
in mind:
The file can contain only load cases or both load cases and load
combinations. You cannot have a file that contains only load
combinations.
Comment lines should start with an exclamation point (!).
There is a maximum of 132 characters per line. You can use the
continuation character (-) at the end of a line as long as it does not break a
keyword.
Load case definitions should end with the word LCFINISH.
Load combination definitions should end with the word LCMFINISH.
The last line of the file should contain the word FINISH.
Load Case Keywords
LCname - Name of the load case.
LCtype - Type of load case. Valid values are: DEADLOAD, LIVELOAD,
WINDLOAD, EARTHQUAKELOAD, THERMALLOAD, PIPELOAD, or
TESTLOAD.
LCactive - Indicates if the load case is active or not. Enter 1 for active, 0 for inactive.
LCcolor - Specify the color for the load graphics. Valid values are 0 to 254.
LCwt - Specify the line weight for the load graphics. Valid values are 0 to 15.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 343
LCstyle - Specify the line style for the load graphics. Valid values are 0 to 7.
LClevel - Specify the level for the load graphics. Valid levels are 1 to 63.
Load Combination Keywords
LCMname - Name of the load combination.
LCMtype - Type of load combination. Valid values are: ALGB, SRSS, or BOTH
LCMmult - Specify the load combination global multiplier factor.
LCMactive - Indicates if the load combination is active or not. Enter 1 for active, 0
for inactive.
LCMdesc1 - Specify the load combination definition. If LCMtype is BOTH, this line
describes the algebraic type.
LCMdesc2 - Specifies the SRSS type when LCMtype is BOTH. If LCMtype is either
ALGB or SRSS, this keyword is not required.
Sample File
!Load Case Data
LCname DEAD LCtype DEADLOAD LCactive 1 LCcolor 3 LCwt 0 LCstyle 0
LClevel 1
LCname LIVE LCtype LIVELOAD LCactive 1 LCcolor 2 LCwt 0 LCstyle 0 LClevel
1
LCname EARTHQUAKE LCtype EARTHQUAKELOAD LCactive 1 LCcolor 7
LCwt 0 LCstyle 0 LClevel 1
LCname WIND LCtype WINDLOAD LCactive 1 LCcolor 5 LCwt 0 LCstyle 0
LClevel 1
LCname TEST LCtype TESTLOAD LCactive 1 LCcolor 38 LCwt 0 LCstyle 0
LClevel 1
LCname THERMAL LCtype THERMALLOAD LCactive 1 LCcolor 27 LCwt 0
LCstyle 0 LClevel 1
LCname PIPE LCtype PIPELOAD LCactive 1 LCcolor 114 LCwt 0 LCstyle 0
LClevel 1
LCFINISH
!Load Combination Data
LCMname COMB1 LCMtype ALGEBRAIC LCMmult 1.000000 LCMactive 1
LCMDesc1 'DEAD'+'LIVE'
LCMname COMB2 LCMtype SRSS LCMmult 1.000000 LCMactive 1
LCMDesc1 'DEAD'+'LIVE'+'-
EARTHQUAKE'
LCMname COMB3 LCMtype BOTH LCMmult 1.000000 LCMactive 1
LCMDesc1 'DEAD'+'LIVE'+'-
EARTHQUAKE' LCMDesc2 'DEAD'+'LIVE'+2.0*'WIND'
Tools
344 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
LCMFINISH
FINISH
Related Topics
Create Load Case, page 340
Create Load Combination, page 344
Delete Load, page 354
Edit Load, page 350
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341
Label Load, page 355
Load Symbology, page 178
Place Load, page 346
Create Load Combination
The Create Load Combination command creates, edits, and deletes load
combinations. You must have at least one load case defined before you can
define load combinations. For more information on creating load cases, see Create
Load Case, page 340.

File - Loads and saves load cases and load combinations to an ASCII file. For more
information, see File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 345
Load Combination Name - Specifies the load combination name. The name can be
up to 32 characters long and must start with an alphabetic character (a, b, c, d, and so
forth) not a number. You can select an existing load combination name from the pull
down list.
Load Combination Type - Defines the load combination type as Algebraic, SRSS,
or Both.
Algebraic -- specifies that loads should be combined using the algebraic
sum of the component loadings after each loading is first multiplied by its
contribution factor.
SRSS (Square Root Sum of Squares) -- specifies that loads should be
combined using the root mean square of the component loadings after
each loading is first multiplied by its contribution factor. This method is
also referred to as RMS (Root Mean Square). This load combination type
is only valid for STAAD.
Both -- specifies that loads should be combined using both the algebraic
and the SRSS methods. This load combination type is only valid for
STAAD.
Global Multiplier - Type a multiplier for the entire load combination.
Load Combination Active - Specifies whether or not the load combination is written
to the analysis input deck.
Load Combination - This key-in field is used to define a single load combination.
Syntax for specification is as follows:
[ < n1>*]<lc1> [+[<n2>*]<lc2>[ +...+ [<n12>*]<lc2>]]...]
where n is a multiplier, and lc is a load case name or number. The multipliers are
optional. The '+' sign can be substituted with a '-' sign, for example:
2 * lcase1 + 3.00*lcase2 - lcase3
If the load combination cannot fit on one line, the second through seventh lines are
provided for continuation.
Keypad and Load Case list - You can then use the list of Load Cases and the keypad
to create a load combination in the Load Combination field interactively as opposed
to keying it in.
Save - Saves the currently displayed load combination.
Note
You must click Save to save the currently defined load combination. If
you enter another load combination name or exit the dialog box before
clicking Save, the load combination is not saved.
Tools
346 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Delete - Deletes the current load combination.
Cancel - Closes the Load Combination Table dialog box.
Related Topics
Create Load Case, page 340
Create Load Combination, page 344
Delete Load, page 354
Edit Load, page 350
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341
Label Load, page 355
Load Symbology, page 178
Place Load, page 346
Place Load
The Place Load command activates the Physical
Member Loads dialog box, which is used to
place loads on members.
Physical member loads are generally not affected when
the member they are placed on is modified. However, if
any operation changes the member's length or location,
the loads are affected as follows:
If a member is moved or copied and the member
length remains the same, the loads attached are not
modified.
If a member is deleted, the loads attached are also deleted.
Distributed loads are not affected by modifications to the physical
member.
All relative concentrated and partial distributed loads locations are
changed relative to the change in member length. Magnitudes are not
changed.
Absolute concentrated loads remain in the same location unless they are
beyond the end of the member, in which case they are deleted.
FrameWorks Plus asks you to verify that you want to continue with the
member modification and delete the load. If the member has a work point
offset applied, this check is done using the analytical member length, not
the physical member length.
Absolute partial distributed loads remain in the same location unless a
portion of the load goes beyond the end of the member, in which case the
load is deleted. FrameWorks Plus asks you to verify that you want to
continue with the member modification and delete the load. If the member
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 347
has a work point offset applied, this check is done using the analytical
member length, not the physical member length.
When rotating members with loads, loads placed using the Local Load
Frame are rotated with the member. Loads placed using the Global and
Global Projected Load Frames are not rotated because they are placed in
reference to the model's coordinate system. The Global and Global
Projected loads maintain their original placement direction after the
member is rotated.
For members with a work point offset applied, load graphics are displayed
at the analytical location of the member, not the physical location.
Note
You cannot place loads on arc, slab, wall, or solid members. For more
information on arc members, see Place Arc, page 274.

Display Load Labels - Displays load labels when the load is placed. The load label
attributes are defined using the Load Symbology command.
Permanent Load Labels - Display the load labels permanently in the model. The
permanent label can be deleted using the MicroStation Delete command. Toggle off
to make the load labels temporary graphics. Temporary graphics are removed the next
time the view is updated.
Load Case - Specifies the load case name to use. The name can be 32 characters long
and must start with an alphabetic character (a, b, c, d, and so forth), not a number. If
the load case specified does not exist, it is created. You can also select a load case
that already exists from the display list.
Tools
348 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Note
You cannot place loads in the model using a Self Weight load case.
FrameWorks Plus add the correct "self weight" syntax to the GTSTRUDL
or STAAD analytical input deck when you write it.
Load Type- Specify the load type in this field, or select the load type from the
display list. The loads are defined as follows:
Distributed -- is a uniformly distributed load applied along the member
length.
Concentrated -- is a concentrated load that can be applied at any user-
defined location along the member's length.
Partially Distributed -- is a partially distributed load at user-specified start
and end points anywhere along the member's length.
Load Frame - Specifies the load frame.
Local uses the member's local coordinate system to define the load direction.
A Global load is applied to the member in the direction of the global coordinate axis
specified.
A Global Projected load is applied to the projection of the member on the plane
perpendicular to the global direction specified and acting in the direction specified.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 349
You can distinguish the load's load frame by the number of x's on the load graphic. If
there is no x, the load frame is local; one x is global; and two x's is global projected.

Direction - Specifies the load direction. Loads can be placed in the X, Y, Z, RX, RY,
or RZ direction.
Loads placed in X, Y, and Z directions have a single arrowhead indicating the load
direction. Moment loads, placed in the RX, RY, and RZ directions, have a double
arrowhead indicating the load direction.

Magnitude - Specifies the load magnitude.
Place Load By - Specifies how you want to define the load's location on the member.
You can select Key in or Point. This option is only available when placing
Concentrated or Partial Distributed loads.
The Key in option specifies the load's location based on the Location values you key
in.
The Point option allows you to graphically define the location of the load in the
model.
Location - Specifies the load location for concentrated and partial distributed loads.
All location points are calculated from the start of the member. The location can be
defined as relative or absolute.
Tools
350 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
A relative location can be thought of as a distance percentage along the member. For
example, a load placed at a relative distance of 0.333 is located at one-third the
member length measured from the member start. A load placed at a relative distance
of 0.5 is located at the middle of the member.
An absolute distance is the actual distance from the start of the member. FrameWorks
Plus verifies that the absolute distance is between the member endpoints.
Related Topics
Create Load Case, page 340
Create Load Combination, page 344
Delete Load, page 354
Edit Load, page 350
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341
Label Load, page 355
Load Symbology, page 178
Place Load, page 346
Edit Load
The Edit Load command reviews and edits loads in the model. The load to
edit can be identified individually or by member.
The by member method displays a dialog box that lists all loads and their location on
the member. You can then select one, some, or all loads on that member for editing. If
you use a selection set to identify the members whose loads you want to edit, the
Next button jumps to the next member in the selection set.

Loads from attached models can be seen using this command, but are review only.
You cannot actually edit the load.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 351

Toggle boxes- The toggle boxes on the left side of the dialog box activate that load
attribute you want to edit. Only those attributes that are on are edited.
Load Case - Displays the current load case name to which the load is assigned. Select
an existing load case from the pulldown list if you want. If you key in a new load case
name, that load case is created using the default attributes and saved when you choose
Apply.
Load Type - Display the type of load. This attribute cannot be changed or edited. If
you want to change the load type, you need to delete and replace the load using the
new load type.
Load Frame - Displays the current load frame. Select another load frame if you
want.
Local uses the member's local coordinate system to define the load direction.
A Global load is applied to the member in the direction of the global coordinate axis
specified.
A Global Projected load is applied to the projection of the member on the plane
perpendicular to the global direction specified and acting in the direction specified.
Tools
352 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

You can distinguish the load's load frame by the number of x's on the load graphic.
No x, the load frame is local; one x is global; and two x's is global projected.

Direction - Displays the current load direction. Select another direction if you want.
Magnitude - Displays the magnitude of the concentrated or distributed load.
Starting Magnitude - Displays the starting magnitude of the partially distributed
load. Key in a new magnitude if you want. This field is only active when the load
type is partial distributed.
Ending Magnitude - Displays the ending magnitude of the partially distributed load.
Key in a new magnitude if you want. This field is only active when the load type is
partial distributed.
Distances - Displays how the load distance is defined, either relative or absolute.
Distance from end i - Displays the distance from the member starting end to the
concentrated load. This field is only active when the load type is concentrated.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 353
Starting Distance - Displays the distance from the start of the member from which
the partially distributed load starts. This field is only active when the load type is
partial distributed.
Ending Distance - Displays the distance from the start of the member from which the
partially distributed load ends. This field is only active when the load type is partial
distributed.
Apply - Edits the selected load as defined.
Next - Selects the next load on the member to edit. This option is only active if you
are editing loads on a member basis and there is more than one load on that member
selected for editing.
Cancel - Dismisses the dialog box.
Related Topics
Create Load Case, page 340
Create Load Combination, page 344
Delete Load, page 354
Edit Load, page 350
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341
Label Load, page 355
Load Symbology, page 178
Place Load, page 346
Tools
354 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Delete Load
The Delete Load command removes loads from the model. You can remove
loads by two methods: individually or by member.
To use the individual method, select the command, and then select the load graphic.
To use the by member method, select the command, and then select the member that
has the load you want to delete. You can then select which loads you want to delete
from the member.

Related Topics
Create Load Case, page 340
Create Load Combination, page 344
Delete Load, page 354
Edit Load, page 350
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341
Label Load, page 355
Load Symbology, page 178
Place Load, page 346
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 355
Label Load
The Label Load command displays the selected load's case, type, direction,
and magnitude. For more information on load label parameters, see Load
Symbology, page 178.

Permanent Load Labels - Displays the load labels permanently in the model. The
permanent label can be deleted using the MicroStation Delete command. Toggle off
to make the load labels temporary graphics. Temporary graphics are removed the next
time the view is updated.
Related Topics
Create Load Case, page 340
Create Load Combination, page 344
Delete Load, page 354
Edit Load, page 350
File (Load Case/Load Combination Dialog Box), page 341
Label Load, page 355
Load Symbology, page 178
Place Load, page 346
Modify End Releases
The Modify End Releases command modifies physical member end releases.
The releases are specified in the local element coordinate system. You can
also define releases for a member at placement.
Note
You cannot define releases on arc members.
Display Release Graphics - Displays the release symbols
in the model. For more information on the release
symbology, see Label End Releases, page 356.
Permanent Release Graphics - Toggle on to place the
release symbol in the design file. You can remove the
symbol with the MicroStation Delete command. If this
toggle is off, the symbol disappears the next time the view
is updated.
Tools
356 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Start of Member - Select the directions (marked with an X) that you want to release
at the start of the member.
End of Member - Select the directions (marked with an X) that you want to release
at the end of the member.
Related Topics
Defaults Linear Members - End Releases, page 164
Label End Releases, page 356
Modify End Releases, page 355
Label End Releases
The Label End Releases command displays the defined member releases.
Each box in the symbol, starting at the one o'clock position and moving
clockwise, represents the release degree-of-freedoms X, Y, Z, RX, RY, and RZ. If the
degree-of-freedom box displays, then the member end is released in that degree-of-
freedom.
Because the release label is placed at the same
orientation as the member, the label may display tilted.
Therefore, remember that the X degree-of-freedom box points to the symbol's cutout
corner, and the Y box is perpendicular to the symbol's cutout corner side.
The release symbols are placed at one-tenth the member length from each member
end. The size of the label release symbol is
hard-coded to 1 foot in imperial models, 33
centimeters in metric model with meters as
the master units, and 3 centimeters in
metric models with millimeters as the
master units.
Permanent Release Graphics - Toggle on
to place the release symbol in the design
file. You can remove the symbol with the
MicroStation Delete command. If this toggle is off, the symbol disappears the next
time the view is updated.
Related Topics
Defaults Linear Members - End Releases, page 164
Label End Releases, page 356
Modify End Releases, page 355
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 357
Modify Supports
The Modify Supports command modifies support conditions at the start and
end of the member. The supports are specified in the global coordinate
system.
Note
You cannot define supports on arc members.

Display Support Graphics - Displays the support symbol after you have modified
the member.
Permanent Release Graphics - Places the support symbol in the design file
permanently. You can remove the symbol with the MicroStation Delete command. If
this toggle is off, the symbol disappears the next time the view is updated.
Start of Member - Select the directions (marked with an X) that you want to support
at the member's start end.
End of Member - Select the directions (marked with an X) that you want to support
at the member's end end.
Related Topics
Label Supports, page 358
Modify Supports, page 357
Tools
358 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Label Supports
The Label Supports command displays the defined support
conditions for a selected member.
Supports are identified by a pie-shaped icon at
the supported member end. Starting at the one
o'clock position and moving clockwise, each pie
wedge represents X, Y, Z, RX, RY, and RZ
supports. If the wedge appears, the member end
is fixed (supported) in that degree-of-freedom.
The support symbols are placed at the member
ends. The size of the support symbol is hard-coded to 1 foot in
imperial models, 33 centimeters in metric model with meters as the
master units, and 3 centimeters in metric models with millimeters as the master units.
Permanent Support Graphics - Places the support symbol in the design file
permanently. You can remove the symbol with the MicroStation Delete command. If
this toggle is off, the symbol disappears the next time the view is updated.
Related Topics
Label Supports, page 358
Modify Supports, page 357
Create Intermediate Node
The Create Intermediate Nodes command specifies additional intermediate
nodes along a physical member in addition to the nodes FrameWorks Plus
creates at both member ends and where other members intersect the member. These
nodes create more finite elements when the member is written to an analytical input
deck.
Caution
FrameWorks Plus automatically deletes intermediate nodes from a
member if you modify or manipulate the member using any of the
following commands:
Extend Member
Modify Member End
Join Members
Split Member
Extend Member to Intersection
Extend Members to Intersection
Mirror Member with the copy option on.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 359
Rotate Member with the copy option on.
Move Member

Number of intermediate nodes - Type the number of intermediate nodes you want
to place on the member. You can place up to 10 intermediate nodes on a member.
Type 0 if you want to remove the intermediate nodes from the selected member.
Define Nodes As - Specify how you want to define the location of the node along the
member.
Select Equal Segments if you want FrameWorks Plus to place the nodes along the
member with equal spacing. For example, if you place 5 nodes on a 30-foot member,
FrameWorks Plus will place the intermediate nodes at 5, 10, 15, 20, and 25 feet from
the start of the member.
Select By Distance if you want to specify the location of the nodes yourself.
Node Number - Select the node for which you want to define a position. This option
is only available when Define Nodes As is set to By Distance.
Define Node Position By - Specify how you want to define the nodes position. You
can either key in the distance from the start of the member or select the position
graphically.
Select Key In to key-in the position of the node along the member from the start end
in the Distance from Start of Member field.
Select Point to graphically define the position of the node on the member. If the
member you are placing nodes on has a work point offset applied, the node dot that
dynamically displays during placement will follow the analytical location of the
member, not the physical location.
Distance from Start of Member - Type the distance where you want the node placed
from the start end of the member.
Tools
360 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
List Box - Displays the defined location for each intermediate node. This list box is
read-only.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Write STAAD Input, page 121
Create Member Specification
The Create Member Specification command defines a member
specification to write to the analysis input deck. This command is available
only when 3rd Party Software is set to STAAD or GTSTRUDL.

Note
You cannot create member specifications for solid or arc members.
Select the member specification you want to assign to the selected member. If you
select Cable for the member specification, enter the tension in model force units. If
you are using GTSTRUDL as your analysis software, only Framing Member and
Truss Member are available.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 361
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Write STAAD Input, page 121
Tools
362 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Design Attributes
The Design Attributes commands add code parameter, design
parameter, and member constraint information to your
FrameWorks Plus steel members. FrameWorks Plus assigns
design parameters to the physical member.
Topics

Code Parameters defines design code parameters for steel linear members.
For more information, see Code Parameters, page 362.

Design Parameters defines design parameters for steel linear members. For
more information, see Design Parameters, page 391.

Member Constraints defines member constraint information. For more
information, see Member Constraints, page 393

Code Parameters
The Code Parameters command assigns code parameters to steel linear
members in the model. Because FrameWorks Plus supports a variety of codes,
there are several dialog boxes described in this section. Be sure to refer to the dialog
box that matches your selected code.
In addition to the delivered code parameter dialog boxes, you can create your own
custom dialog box with only those code parameters you want to define. For more
information, see Custom Code Parameters, page 184.
Code parameters are different from design parameters only by the fact that code
parameters are unique to the specific design code you are using.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 363
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Write STAAD Input, page 121
AISC-ASD (STAAD)
You can define the following AISC-ASD design parameters in FrameWorks Plus.
These parameters are written to the input deck created by FrameWorks Plus for
STAAD.
Note
Code parameter descriptions for the AISC-ASD and AISC-LRFD are
taken directly from the STAAD Reference Manual, used with permission.
Intergraph assumes no responsibility for errors in the STAAD
documentation that have been copied here or for any modification that
may have occurred to these design parameters since the publication of this
document. Please refer to your STAAD documentation for the most up-to-
date information.

KY - Specifies the K value in the local Y-axis. This is usually the minor axis.
Tools
364 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
KZ - Specifies the K value in the local Z-axis. This is usually the major axis.
LY - Specifies the member length in the local Y-axis used to calculate the slenderness
ratio. You can specify the length explicitly or use the physical member length (FWP
Length).
LZ - Specifies the member length in the local Z-axis used to calculate the slenderness
ratio. You can specify the length explicitly or use the physical member length (FWP
Length).
NSF - Specifies the net section factor for tension members.
UNL (UNF) - Specifies the unsupported member length for calculating allowable
bending stress. You can specify the length explicitly, use the physical member length
(FWP Length), or you can specify a fractional value (Specify Fractional) and have it
written to the deck as UNF.
CB - Specifies the Cb value as used in Section 1.5 of AISC. A 0.0 value causes
STAAD to calculate Cb. A non-zero value will be used in the design calculations.
SSY - Specifies if there is sidesway in the local Y-axis. 0.0 indicates sidesway in the
local Y-axis. 1.0 means there is no sidesway.
SSZ - Specifies if there is sidesway in the local Z-axis. 0.0 indicates sidesway in the
local Z-axis. 1.0 means there is no sidesway.
CMY - Specifies the Cm value in the local Y-axis. If there is no sidesway, the Cm
value is calculated using the formula in AISC code Section 1.6.1.
CMZ - Specifies the Cm value in the local Z-axis. If there is no sidesway, the Cm
value is calculated using the formula in AISC code Section 1.6.1.
MAIN - Specifies whether or not to check for slenderness. 0.0 indicates to check for
slenderness. 1.0 suppresses the slenderness check.
STIFF - Specifies the spacing of stiffeners for plate girder design so that the correct
allowable shear stress can be calculated. You can specify the spacing explicitly or use
the physical member length (FWP Length).
PUNCH - Specifies that tubular members should be checked for punching shear
according to the American Petroleum Institute (API) specifications. This parameter
also specifies the joint type and geometry. Refer to the API code (Section 2.5.5) for
more information on joint type and geometry.
Joint Type and Geometry PUNCH Parameter Value
K (overlap) 1.0
K (gap) 2.0
T & Y 3.0
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 365
CROSS (with diaphragms) 4.0
CROSS (without diaphragms) 5.0

TRACK - Specifies if critical member stresses should be printed or suppressed. 0.0
means to suppress critical member stresses.
1.0 means to print critical member stresses including: allowable bending stresses in
compression (FCY and FCZ) and tension (FTY and FTZ), allowable axial stress in
compression (FA), allowable shear stress (FV), area, section moduli, member length,
CB, and governing KL/r ratio.
2.0 means to print critical member stresses in expanded output.
DMAX - Specifies the section's maximum allowable depth.
DMIN - Specifies the section's minimum allowable depth.
RATIO - Specifies the actual to allowable stresses ratio.
WELD - Specifies the weld type. 1 means the member is welded on only one side,
except for wide-flange or tee sections where the web is always assumed to be welded
on both sides. 2 means the member is welded on both sides. However, for closed
sections such as pipes or tubes, the welding is on one side only.
BEAM - Specifies what moments you want to use for design. 0.0 means to design for
end moments only or for locations specified by the SECTION command. 1.0 means
to calculate twelve moments along the beam's length and use the maximum Mz
location for design.
WMIN - Specifies the minimum welding thickness.
WSTR - Specifies the allowable welding stress. You can either specify the stress
explicitly or use 0.4 times the yield strength of steel.
DFF - Specifies the Deflection Length / maximum allowable local deflection.
DJ1 - Specifies the starting point joint number for calculating the Deflection Length.
DJ2 - Specifies the ending point joint number for calculating the Deflection Length.
CHECK CODE - Checks the specified members against the AISC-ASD code. The
check code results are tabulated for each member. If you use this parameter, the
SELECT parameter is disabled.
SELECT - Selects specified members based on parameter value restrictions and the
AISC-ASD code. The member selection uses the last analysis results and tries
different sections until the least weight size is found. If you use this parameter, the
CHECK CODE parameter is disabled.
Tools
366 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
PROFILE - Instructs the program to assign a suitable steel section to a frame
member based on profile specifications. You can enter profile specifications in the
key-in field.
Add Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, then the selected parameters
are added to the member when you click Apply. This option does not delete any code
parameters that may already be assigned to the member.
Remove Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, then the selected
parameters are removed from the member when you click Apply.
Replace All Parameters - If this option is selected, then the parameters already
assigned to the member are deleted and the checked parameters are assigned to the
member when you click Apply.
Apply - Click this button to assign the parameters to a member. Be sure you
understand the differences between Add Checked Parameter(s), Remove Checked
Parameter(s), and Replace All Parameters before you click Apply.
Select - Loads the parameter settings from a selected member to the dialog box. Use
this button when you want to assign the same parameters as the selected member to
another member (or members).
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
AISC-ASD (STAAD), page 363
AISC-LRFD (STAAD), page 367
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Write STAAD Input, page 121
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 367
AISC-LRFD (STAAD)
The following design parameters can be defined for the AISC-LRFD code:
Note
Code parameter descriptions for the AISC-ASD and AISC-LRFD are
taken directly from the STAAD Reference Manual, used with permission.
Intergraph assumes no responsibility for errors in the STAAD
documentation that have been copied here or for any modification that
may have occurred to these design parameters since the publication of this
document. Please refer to your STAAD documentation for the most up-to-
date information.

KY - Specifies the K value in the local Y-axis. This is usually the minor axis.
KZ - Specifies the K value in the local Z-axis. This is usually the major axis.
LY - Specifies the member length in the local Y-axis used to calculate the slenderness
ratio. You can specify the length explicitly or use the physical member length (FWP
Length).
Tools
368 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
LZ - Specifies the member length in the local Z-axis used to calculate the slenderness
ratio. You can specify the length explicitly or use the physical member length (FWP
Length).
NSF - Specifies the net section factor for tension members.
UNL (UNF) - Specifies the unsupported member length for calculating flexural
design strength. You can specify the length explicitly, use the physical member length
(FWP Length), or you can specify a fractional value (Specify Fractional) and write it
to the input deck using UNF.
CB - Specifies the coefficient Cb according to Chapter F of the Load Resistance
Factor Design code book, first edition. 0.0 means Cb will be calculated by STAAD.
Any other value is used directly in the design.
TRACK - Specifies if design strengths should be printed or suppressed. 0.0 means
design strengths are suppressed. 1.0 means to print all design strengths. 2.0 means to
print expanded design output.
MAX - Specifies the section's maximum allowable depth.
MIN - Specifies the section's minimum allowable depth.
RATIO - Specifies the actual load effect and design strength ratio.
BEAM - Specifies what moments you want to use for design. 0.0 means to design for
end moments only or for locations specified by the SECTION command. 1.0 means
to calculate twelve moments along the beam's length and use the maximum Mz
location for design.
DFF - Specifies the Deflection Length / maximum allowable local deflection.
DJ1 - Specifies the starting point joint number for calculating the Deflection Length.
DJ2 - Specifies the ending point joint number for calculating the Deflection Length.
CHECK CODE - Checks the specified members against the AISC-LRFD code. The
check code results are tabulated for each member. If you use this parameter, the
SELECT parameter is disabled.
SELECT - Selects specified members based on parameter value restrictions and the
AISC-LRFD code. The member selection uses the last analysis results and tries
different sections until the least weight size is found. If you use this parameter, the
CHECK CODE parameter is disabled.
PROFILE - Instructs the program to assign a suitable steel section to a frame
member based on profile specifications. You can enter profile specifications in the
key-in field.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 369
Add Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, then the selected parameters
are added to the member when you click Apply. This option does not delete any code
parameters that may already be assigned to the member.
Remove Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, then the selected
parameters are removed from the member when you click Apply.
Replace All Parameters - If this option is selected, then the parameters already
assigned to the member are deleted and the checked parameters are assigned to the
member when you click Apply.
Apply - Click this button to assign the parameters to a member. Be sure you
understand the differences between Add Checked Parameter(s), Remove Checked
Parameter(s), and Replace All Parameters before you click Apply.
Select - Loads the parameter settings from a selected member to the dialog box. Use
this button when you want to assign the same parameters as the selected member to
another member (or members).
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
AISC-ASD (STAAD), page 363
AISC-LRFD (STAAD), page 367
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Write STAAD Input, page 121
Tools
370 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
ASD9 (GTSTRUDL)
The following design parameters can be defined for the ASD9 code:
Note
Code parameter descriptions for the ASD9, BS5950, LRFD1, NF83, and
Tower2 codes are taken directly from GTSTRUDL User's Guide, Revision
N, used with permission. Intergraph assumes no responsibility for errors in
the GTSTRUDL documentation that have been copied here or for any
modification that may have occurred to these design parameters since the
publication of this document. Please refer to your GTSTRUDL
documentation for the most up-to-date information.

A/H - Ratio of clear span between transverse stiffeners to clear distance between
flanges. Used in computing allowable shear stress. Default approximates infinity.
FYLD & FTS - Writes FYLD and FTS to the input deck using the F
y
and F
u
values
defined in FrameWorks Plus' grade.dat file for the member's defined material grade.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 371
REDFYLD - Reduction factor for computed FYLD. This factor multiplied by FYLD
gives the FY value used by the code. Used to account for property changes at high
temperatures.
REDFTS - Reduction factor for computed FTS. Similar to REDFYLD.
REDE - Reduction factor for E, the modulus of elasticity. Similar to REDFYLD.
SLENCOMP - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for member subjected
to axial compression. When no value is specified for this parameter, the value of 200
is used for the maximum slenderness ratio.
SLENTEN - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (L/r) for member subjected to
axial tension. When no value is specified for this parameter, the value of 300 is used
for the maximum slenderness ratio.
COMPK - Parameter to request the computation of the effective length factors KY
and KZ.
Yes -- Compute KY and KZ factors.
KY -- Compute KY only.
KZ -- Compute KZ only.
NO -- Use default or specified values for KY and KZ.
KY - Effective length factor for buckling about the local Y-axis of the profile.
KZ - Effective length factor for buckling about the local Z-axis of the profile.
SDSWAYY - Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Y-axis.
Yes -- Sidesway permitted.
No -- Sidesway prevented.
SDSWAYZ - Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Z-axis.
Yes -- Sidesway permitted.
No -- Sidesway prevented.
GAY - G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAY is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KY.
GAZ - G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAZ is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KZ.
GBY - G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBY is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KY.
GBZ - G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBZ is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KZ.
Tools
372 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
KX - Effective length factor for torsional buckling about the local X-axis of the
profile. This parameter is used in flexural-torsional buckling stress, Fe computations.
LX (FRLX) - Unbraced length for torsional buckling about the local X-axis of the
profile. Computed as length of member. This parameter is used in flexural-torsional
buckling stress, Fe computations.
You can specify LX explicitly, specify a fractional form of LX (Specify Fractional)
allowing unbraced length to be specified as fractions of the total length, or you can
use the physical member length (FWP Length) for LX.
CB - Coefficient used in computing allowable compressive bending stress.
FSB - Safety factor applied to the equation 6.23 of the Guide to Stability Design
Criteria for Metal Structures in the computation of allowable compressive bending
stress for the stem of a tee.
UNLCFTF - Unbraced length of the compression flange for the top flange. You can
either key in a length or use the physical member (FWP Length) length.
UNLCFBF - Unbraced length of the compression flange for the bottom flange. You
can either key in a length or use the physical member (FWP Length) length.
AXEFF - Axial stress reduction factor indicating the amount of the axial stress that is
to be deducted from corresponding bending stress acting in the opposite direction.
CMY - Coefficient that modifies Y-axis bending stress in interaction equation (AISC
ASD Ninth Ed. Section H1).
CMZ - Coefficient that modifies Z-axis bending stress in interaction equation (AISC
ASD Ninth Ed. Section H1).
FXMIN - Minimum axial force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
FYMIN - Minimum Y-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
FZMIN - Minimum Z-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
MYMIN - Minimum Y-bending moment to be considered by the code; anything less
in magnitude is taken as zero.
MZMIN - Minimum Z-bending moment to be considered by the code; anything less
in magnitude is taken as zero.
Add Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters are
added to the member when you click Apply. This option does not delete any code
parameters that may already be assigned to the member.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 373
Remove Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters
are removed from the member when you click Apply.
Replace All Parameters - If this option is selected, the parameters already assigned
to the member are deleted and the checked parameters are assigned to the member
when you click Apply.
Apply - Click this button to assign the parameters to a member. Be sure you
understand the differences between Add Checked Parameter(s), Remove Checked
Parameter(s), and Replace All Parameters before you click Apply.
Select - Loads the parameter settings from a selected member to the dialog box. Use
this button when you want to assign the same parameters as the selected member to
another member (or members).
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
ASD9 (GTSTRUDL), page 370
BS5950 (GTSTRUDL), page 374
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
LRFD1 (GTSTRUDL), page 379
Member Constraints, page 393
NF83 (GTSTRUDL), page 383
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Tower2 (GTSTRUDL), page 387
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Tools
374 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
BS5950 (GTSTRUDL)
The following code parameters can be defined for the BS5950 design code:
Note
Code parameter descriptions for the ASD9, BS5950, LRFD1, NF83, and
Tower2 codes are taken directly from GTSTRUDL User's Guide, Revision
N, used with permission. Intergraph assumes no responsibility for errors in
the GTSTRUDL documentation that have been copied here or for any
modification that may have occurred to these design parameters since the
publication of this document. Please refer to your GTSTRUDL
documentation for the most up-to-date information.

Py - Yield stress (design strength p
y
of member).
REDPy - Reduction factor for parameter P
y
. This factor multiplied by the parameter
Py gives the design strength (P
y
) value used by the code. Used to account for property
changes at high temperatures.
REDE - Reduction factor for E, the modulus of elasticity. Similar to REDPy.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 375
SLENCOMP - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for a member
subjected to axial tension. Only a user-specified value will initiate the slenderness
ratio check for a tension member.
SLENTEN - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (L/r) for a member subjected to
axial tension. Only a user-specified value will initiate the slenderness ratio check for a
tension member.
COMPK - Parameter to request the computation of the effective length factors KY
and KZ.
Yes -- Compute KY and KZ factors.
KY -- Compute KY only.
KZ -- Compute KZ only.
NO -- Use default or specified values for KY and KZ.
KY - Effective length factor for buckling about the local Y-axis of the profile.
KZ - Effective length factor for buckling about the local Z-axis of the profile.
SDSWAYY - Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Y-axis.
This parameter is used for K-factor computation only.
Yes -- sidesway permitted.
No -- sidesway prevented.
SDSWAYZ - Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Z-axis.
This parameter is used for K-factor computation only.
Yes -- sidesway permitted.
No -- sidesway prevented.
GAY - G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAY is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KY.
GAZ - G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAZ is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KZ.
GBY - G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBY is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KY.
GBZ - G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBZ is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KZ.
APPROACH - Identifies the design approach. This parameter indicates the type of
approach that should be used for the combined stresses.
Tools
376 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
BOTH -- Use simplified and the more exact approach. See Sections
4.8.3.3.1 and 4.8.3.3.2 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.
EXACT -- Use the more exact approach. See Section 4.8.3.3.2 of BS 5950
: Part 1 : 1990.
SIMPLIFY -- Use simplified approach. See Section 4.8.3.3.1 of BS 5950 :
Part 1 : 1990.
COLUMNS - Identifies the type of construction. This parameter is used to indicate
the columns in simple construction.
NORMAL -- Equivalent slenderness,
LT
, is computed based on the
Appendix B.2.5 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.
Simple -- Columns in simple construction. Equivalent slenderness,
LT
, is
computed based on the Section 4.7.7 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990.
SHRAREAF - Shear Area Factor is used for the computation of the shear area. When
an alternate value other than COMPUTE or TABLE is specified, shear area is
computed as the SHRAREAF multiplied by the cross-sectional area (A
v
= AY = AZ
= SHRAREAF AX).
FRLEY - Fraction value used for the computation of nominal effective length, L
EY
=
FRLEY X LY. Nominal effective length, L
EY
, is used in the computation of
maximum slenderness ratio about the local Y axis of the profile. See Section 4.7.2,
Table 24 of BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 for the FRLEY values.
FRLEZ - Fraction value used for the computation of nominal effective length, L
EZ
=
FRLEZ LZ. Nominal effective length, L
EZ
, is used in the computation of maximum
slenderness ratio about the local Z-axis of the profile. See Section 4.7.2, Table 24 of
BS 5950 : Part 1 : 1990 for the FRLEY values.
AXEFF - Axial stress reduction factor indicating the amount of the axial stress that is
to be deducted from corresponding bending stress acting in the opposite direction.
LATTORBU - Indicates the consideration of Lateral Torsional Buckling check.
n - Slenderness correction factor, n. This parameter is used for the computation of
equivalent slenderness,
LT
= nuvUNITS - Indicates that the TRACE 4 output from
the SELECT or CHECK command and the output from SUMMARIZE command
may be displayed in ACTIVE units or CODEUNITS.
FXMIN - Minimum axial force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero. Units are in Newtons (N).
FYMIN - Minimum Y-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
FZMIN - Minimum Z-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 377
MYMIN - Minimum Y-bending force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
MZMIN - Minimum Z-bending moment to be considered by the code; anything less
in magnitude is taken as zero.
LE - Effective length of a member when lateral torsional buckling is considered.
Default value is equal to the unbraced length for buckling about the local Y axis, LY.
my - Equivalent uniform moment factor (m) that modifies Y-axis bending stress in
combined axial and bending stress equation. You can key in a value or use the
physical member length (FWP Length).
mz - Equivalent uniform moment factor (m) that modifies Z-axis bending stress in
combined axial and bending stress equation. You can key in a value or use the
physical member length (FWP Length).
DESTLDY - Indicates the presence or absence of a destabilizing load that causes
movement in the member local Y-axis direction (and possibly rotation about the
member local Y axis). Destabilizing load conditions exist when a load is applied to
the local Z-axis of a member and both the load and the member are free to deflect
laterally (and possibly rotationally also) relative to the centroid of the member.
DESTLDZ - Indicates the presence or absence of a destabilizing load that causes
movement in the member local Z-axis direction (and possibly rotation about the
member local Z-axis). Destabilizing load conditions exist when a load is applied to
the top flange (local Y axis load) of a member, and both the load and the flange are
free to deflect laterally (and possibly rotationally also) relative to the centroid of the
member.
Add Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters are
added to the member when you click Apply. This option does not delete any code
parameters that may already be assigned to the member.
Remove Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters
are removed from the member when you click Apply.
Replace All Parameters - If this option is selected, the parameters already assigned
to the member are deleted and the checked parameters are assigned to the member
when you click Apply.
Apply - Click this button to assign the parameters to a member. Be sure you
understand the differences between Add Checked Parameter(s), Remove Checked
Parameter(s), and Replace All Parameters before you click Apply.
Select - Loads the parameter settings from a selected member to the dialog box. Use
this button when you want to assign the same parameters as the selected member to
another member (or members).
Tools
378 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
ASD9 (GTSTRUDL), page 370
BS5950 (GTSTRUDL), page 374
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
LRFD1 (GTSTRUDL), page 379
Member Constraints, page 393
NF83 (GTSTRUDL), page 383
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Tower2 (GTSTRUDL), page 387
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 379
LRFD1 (GTSTRUDL)
The following code parameters can be defined for the LRFD1 code:
Note
Code parameter descriptions for the ASD9, BS5950, LRFD1, NF83, and
Tower2 codes are taken directly from the GTSTRUDL User's Guide,
Revision N, used with permission. Intergraph assumes no responsibility for
errors in the GTSTRUDL documentation that have been copied here or for
any modification that may have occurred to these design parameters since
the publication of this document. Please refer to your GTSTRUDL
documentation for the most up-to-date information.

A/H - Ratio of clear span between transverse stiffeners to clear distance between
flanges. Used in computing allowable shear stress. Default approximates infinity.
FYLD & FTS - Writes FYLD and FTS to the input deck using the F
y
and F
u
values
defined in FrameWorks Plus' grade.dat file for the member's defined material grade.
Tools
380 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
REDFYLD - Reduction factor for FYLD. This factor times FYLD gives the FY
value used by the code. Used to account for property changes at high temperatures.
REDFTS - Reduction factor for FTS. Similar to REDFYLD.
REDE - Reduction factor for E, the modulus of elasticity. Similar to REDFYLD.
SLENCOMP - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for member subjected
to axial compression. When no value is specified for this parameter, the value of 200
is used for the maximum slenderness ratio.
SLENTEN - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (L/r) for member subjected to
axial tension. When no value is specified for this parameter, the value of 300 is used
for the maximum slenderness ratio.
COMPK - Parameter to request the computation of the effective length factors KY
and KZ.
YES -- Compute KY and KZ factors.
KY -- Compute KY only.
KZ -- Compute KZ only.
NO -- Use default or specified values for KY and KZ.
KY - Effective length factor for buckling about the local Y-axis of the profile.
KZ - Effective length factor for buckling about the local Z-axis of the profile.
SDSWAYY - Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Y-axis.
YES -- sidesway permitted.
NO -- sidesway prevented.
SDSWAYZ - Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Z-axis.
YES -- sidesway permitted.
NO -- sidesway prevented.
GAY - G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAY is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KY.
GAZ - G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAZ is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KZ.
GBY - G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBY is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KY.
GBZ - G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBZ is used in the calculation of
effective length factor KZ.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 381
KX - Effective length factor for torsional buckling about the local X-axis of the
profile. This parameter is used in flexural-torsional buckling stress, F
e
computations.
LX (FRLX) - Unbraced length for torsional buckling about the local X-axis of the
profile. Computed as length of member. This parameter is used in flexural-torsional
buckling stress, F
e
computations.
You can specify a value, key in a fractional form of LX (Specify Fractional) allowing
unbraced length to be specified as fractions of the total length, or use the physical
member length (FWP Length).
CB - Coefficient used in computing allowable compressive bending stress.
UNLCFTF - Unbraced length of the compression flange for the top flange. You can
key in a length or use the physical member length (FWP Length).
UNLCFBF - Unbraced length of the compression flange for the bottom flange. You
can key in a length or use the physical member length (FWP Length).
CMY - Coefficient that modifies Y-axis bending stress in interaction equation (AISC
LRFD First Ed. Section H1).
CMZ - Coefficient that modifies Z-axis bending stress in interaction equation (AISC
LRFD First Ed. Section H1).
UNITS - Indicates that the TRACE 4 output from the SELECT or CHECK command
and the output from SUMMARIZE command may be displayed in ACTIVE units or
CODEUNITS.
FXMIN - Minimum axial force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
FYMIN - Minimum Y-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
FZMIN - Minimum Z-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
MYMIN - Minimum Y-bending force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
MZMIN - Minimum Z-bending force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
Add Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, then the selected parameters
are added to the member when you click Apply. This option does not delete any code
parameters that may already be assigned to the member.
Remove Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, then the selected
parameters are removed from the member when you click Apply.
Tools
382 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Replace All Parameters - If this option is selected, then the parameters already
assigned to the member are deleted and the checked parameters are assigned to the
member when you click Apply.
Apply - Click this button to assign the parameters to a member. Be sure you
understand the differences between Add Checked Parameter(s), Remove Checked
Parameter(s), and Replace All Parameters before you click Apply.
Select - Loads the parameter settings from a selected member to the dialog box. Use
this button when you want to assign the same parameters as the selected member to
another member (or members).
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
ASD9 (GTSTRUDL), page 370
BS5950 (GTSTRUDL), page 374
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
LRFD1 (GTSTRUDL), page 379
Member Constraints, page 393
NF83 (GTSTRUDL), page 383
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Tower2 (GTSTRUDL), page 387
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 383
NF83 (GTSTRUDL)
The following code parameters can be defined for the NF83 code:
Note
Code parameter descriptions for the ASD9, BS5950, LRFD1, NF83, and
Tower2 codes are taken directly from the GTSTRUDL User's Guide,
Revision N, used with permission. Intergraph assumes no responsibility for
errors in the GTSTRUDL documentation that have been copied here or for
any modification that may have occurred to these design parameters since
the publication of this document. Please refer to your GTSTRUDL
documentation for the most up-to-date information.

SFNORMAL - Safety factor for allowable normal stress, where allowable =
(SFNORMAL)(Stress increase factor)(Yield strength)
SFSHEAR - Safety factor for allowable shear stress, where allowable =
(SFSHEAR)(SY)(SF)
SY - Yield strength of steel at service temperature.
Tools
384 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
SU - Minimum tensile strength of steel at service temperature.
REDE - Reduction factor for E, the modulus of elasticity. Similar to REDFYLD.
SLEND - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) that differs from the
limitations of the ASME specification.
SECNDARY - Indicates if a member is main (NO) or secondary (YES) member.
COMPK - Parameter to request the computation of the effective length factors KY
and KZ.
Yes -- Compute KY and KZ factors.
KY -- Compute KY only.
KZ -- Compute KZ only.
NO -- Use default or specified values for KY and KZ.
KY - Effective length factor for buckling about the local Y-axis of the profile.
KZ - Effective length factor for buckling about the local Z-axis of the profile.
SDSWAYY - Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Y-axis.
Yes -- sidesway permitted.
No -- sidesway prevented.
SDSWAYZ - Indicates the presence or absence of sidesway about the local Z-axis.
Yes -- sidesway permitted.
No -- sidesway prevented.
GAY - G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAY is used in the calculation of the
effective length factor KY.
GAZ - G-factor at the start joint of the member. GAZ is used in the calculation of the
effective length factor KZ.
GBY - G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBY is used in the calculation of the
effective length factor KY.
GBZ - G-factor at the end joint of the member. GBZ is used in the calculation of the
effective length factor KZ.
WARP-END - Describes the boundary condition of a member with respect to
warping restraint.
LWARP - Distance between end restraints as described in the WARP-END
parameter.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 385
CB - Coefficient used in computing allowable compressive bending stress.
UNLCF - Unbraced length of the compression flange. Computed as length of
member.
You can specify the length directly, use a fractional form (Specify Fractional) of
UNLCF that allows unbraced length to be specified as fractions of the total length, or
use the physical member length (FWP Length).
AXEFF - Axial stress reduction factor indicating the amount of the axial stress that is
to be deducted from corresponding bending stress acting in the opposite direction.
CMY - Coefficient that modifies Y-axis bending stress in interaction equation.
CMZ - Coefficient that modifies Z-axis bending stress in interaction equation.
FXMIN - Minimum axial force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
FYMIN - Minimum Y-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
FZMIN - Minimum Z-shear force to be considered by the code; anything less in
magnitude is taken as zero.
MXMIN - Minimum torsional moment to be considered by the code.
MYMIN - Minimum Y-bending moment to be considered by the code; anything less
in magnitude is taken as zero.
MZMIN - Minimum Z-bending moment to be considered by the code; anything less
in magnitude is taken as zero.
Add Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters are
added to the member when you click Apply. This option does not delete any code
parameters that may already be assigned to the member.
Remove Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters
are removed from the member when you click Apply.
Replace All Parameters - If this option is selected, the parameters already assigned
to the member are deleted and the checked parameters are assigned to the member
when you click Apply.
Apply - Click this button to assign the parameters to a member. Be sure you
understand the differences between Add Checked Parameter(s), Remove Checked
Parameter(s), and Replace All Parameters before you click Apply.
Tools
386 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Select - Loads the parameter settings from a selected member to the dialog box. Use
this button when you want to assign the same parameters as the selected member to
another member (or members).
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
ASD9 (GTSTRUDL), page 370
BS5950 (GTSTRUDL), page 374
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
LRFD1 (GTSTRUDL), page 379
Member Constraints, page 393
NF83 (GTSTRUDL), page 383
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Tower2 (GTSTRUDL), page 387
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 387
Tower2 (GTSTRUDL)
The following code parameters can be defined for the Tower2 code:
Note
Code parameter descriptions for the ASD9, BS5950, LRFD1, NF83, and
Tower2 codes are taken directly from the GTSTRUDL User's Guide,
Revision N, used with permission. Intergraph assumes no responsibility for
errors in the GTSTRUDL documentation that have been copied here or for
any modification that may have occurred to these design parameters since
the publication of this document. Please refer to your GTSTRUDL
documentation for the most up-to-date information.

FYLD & FTS - Writes FYLD and FTS to the input deck using the F
y
and F
u
values
defined in FrameWorks Plus' grade.dat file for the member's defined material grade.
TYPE - Describes the structural function of a member. Choices are: other, leg,
dblangle, and tencomp.
Tools
388 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
SLENCOMP - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (KL/r) for member subjected
to axial compression. The default value is determined from the TYPE parameter.
SLENTEN - Maximum permissible slenderness ratio (L/r) for member subjected to
axial tension. When no value is specified for this parameter, the value of 500 is used
for the maximum slenderness ratio.
CONCNLD - Indicates if ends of member are concentrically loaded.
RESTRAIN - Indicates if ends of member are adequately restrained against rotation.
KL/R - Controlling KL/r used to compute allowable axial compressive stress. You
can either specify the value or use the physical member length (FWP Length).
W/TMAX - Maximum permissible value of W/T ratio (flange width-to-thickness
ratio, table property B/T).
LEGBOLTD - Indicates leg of angle to be bolted.
HOLESOUT - Number of holesout in any one cross-section of member. A value of
ALWSCOMP means that the SELECT and CHECK commands will always compute
the number of holesout. If a number of holesout is specified, it will not be changed by
GTSTRUDL.
HOLE/ROW - Maximum number of bolts per row. This number is used in
computing the number of holesout.
NUMBOLTS - Number of bolts to be used in a member. A value of ALWSCOMP
means that the SELECT and CHECK commands will always compute the number of
bolts. If a number of bolts is specified, it will not be changed by GTSTRUDL.
GAGE - The transverse spacing of adjacent holes in the direction of the load.
PITCH - The longitudinal spacing of adjacent holes parallel to the direction of the
load.
LX (FRLX) - Unbraced length for buckling about the local Y-axis of the profile.
Computed as length of member.
You can specify the length directly, use a fractional form (Specify Fractional) of LX
that allows unbraced length to be specified as fractions of the total length, or you can
use the physical member length.
MAXNMBLT - Maximum number of bolts allowed to be placed in a member.
ANETFACT - Factors multiplied by the net area for tension stress computation.
DIABOLT - Diameter of bolts used in connection at end of member.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 389
PUNCHHOL - The difference between the diameter of the punched hole and the
diameter of the bolt.
TENFACT - Factor multiplied by the FYLD to compute allowable tensile stress.
Computed from LEGBOLTD if not specified. You can specify the value directly or
use the physical member length (FWP Length).
BOLTTYPE - ASTM specification for type of bolt to be used.
BOLTSHR - Yield strength of bolts subject to single shear. Computed from
BOLTTYPE if not specified. You can specify the value directly or use the physical
member length (FWP Length).
UNITS - Indicates the summarize output units. Choices are:
CODEUNIT - Output summarize data in code units.
ACTIVE - Output summarize data in active units.
BOLTTENS - Tensile strength of bolts. Computed from BOLTTYPE if not
specified. You can specify the value directly or use the physical member length (FWP
Length).
TYPSHEAR - Specified if bolts at the member end connections are in SINGLE or
DOUBLE shear. Default is based on the TYPE parameter.
BEARNGF - Multiplied times the value of FYLD to get the allowable bearing
strength of the member.
BERSURF - Surface area factor in the computations of total bearing. You can
specify a value directly or use the physical member length (FWP Length).
Add Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters are
added to the member when you click Apply. This option does not delete any code
parameters that may already be assigned to the member.
Remove Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters
are removed from the member when you click Apply.
Replace All Parameters - If this option is selected, the parameters already assigned
to the member are deleted and the checked parameters are assigned to the member
when you click Apply.
Apply - Click this button to assign the parameters to a member. Be sure you
understand the differences between Add Checked Parameter(s), Remove Checked
Parameter(s), and Replace All Parameters before you click Apply.
Select... - Loads the parameter settings from a selected member to the dialog box. Use
this button when you want to assign the same parameters as the selected member to
another member (or members).
Tools
390 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
ASD9 (GTSTRUDL), page 370
BS5950 (GTSTRUDL), page 374
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
LRFD1 (GTSTRUDL), page 379
Member Constraints, page 393
NF83 (GTSTRUDL), page 383
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Tower2 (GTSTRUDL), page 387
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 391
Design Parameters
The Design Parameters command applies design parameters to steel linear
members in the model. The Design Parameters are similar to Code Parameters
except that Design Parameters are common to all the supported GTSTRUDL codes.
Note
Design Parameters are only available to GTSTRUDL users. If you have
3rd Party Software set to STAAD, you do not need to define Design
Parameters. All STAAD design parameters are defined in the Code
Parameters dialog box.

TBLNAM - Identifies the profile table to be used during selection. All of the listed
profile tables are valid for the ASD9 code. However, some of the tables are not valid
in all of the other supported GTSTRUDL codes. Check the GTSTRUDL document to
ensure correct table use for the other codes.
CODETOL - Percent variance from 1.0 for compliance with the provisions of a
code. The ratio of Actual/Allowable must be less than or equal to [1.0 +
CODETOL/100].
PF - Area reduction factor for holesout in members subject to axial tension.
LY or FRLY - Unbraced length for buckling about the local Y-axis of the profile.
Computed as length of member. You can specify the actual value, specify a fractional
value (Specify Fractional), or use the physical member length (FWP Length).
Tools
392 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
LZ or FRLZ - Unbraced length for buckling about the local Z-axis of the profile.
Computed as length of member. You can specify the actual value, specify a fractional
value (Specify Fractional), or use the physical member length (FWP Length).
CHECK - Performs a code check. See the CHECK MEMBERS command in the
GTSTRUDL document for more information.
FrameWorks Plus columns, horizontal braces, and vertical braces are considered
columns. FrameWorks Plus beams are considered beams.
SELECT - See the SELECT MEMBERS command in the GTSTRUDL document
for more information.
FrameWorks Plus columns, horizontal braces, and vertical braces are considered
columns. FrameWorks Plus beams are considered beams.
TAKE - Takes the largest section property and assigns it to the entire member. You
can select the largest section by the cross-sectional area (AX), the moment of inertia
about the local Y-axis (IY), or the moment of inertia about the local Z-axis (IZ).
An example of the syntax written to the file is: TAKE MEMBER GROUP '01-00001'
AS LARGEST AX.
Add Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters are
added to the member when you click Apply. This option does not delete any design
parameters that may already be assigned to the member.
Remove Checked Parameter(s) - If this option is selected, the selected parameters
are removed from the member when you click Apply.
Replace All Parameters - If this option is selected, the parameters already assigned
to the member are deleted and the checked parameters are assigned to the member
when you click Apply.
Apply - Click this button to assign the parameters to a member. Be sure you
understand the differences between Add Checked Parameter(s), Remove Checked
Parameter(s), and Replace All Parameters before you click Apply.
Select - Loads the parameter settings from a selected member to the dialog box. Use
this button when you want to assign the same parameters as the selected member to
another member (or members).
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 393
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Member Constraints
The Member Constraints command places limits on a steel member's
physical properties. These limits can be absolute limits, limits relative to
another property of the same member, or limits relative to a property of a group of
members. There is no limit to the number of constraints you can assign a member.
However, no check is made to detect mutually exclusive constraints. It is your
responsibility to ensure that such constraints, that would make member design
impossible, do not exist. (This paragraph was paraphrased from the GTSTRUDL
User's Manual, Revision N, page 2.4 - 1. Please refer to that document for more
information.)
Member constraints are saved on a product level, not a project level, in one file
named ..\fwplus\data\constrnt.dat. This makes member constraints you define in one
project available in all other projects. The constrnt.dat file is an ASCII file that you
can manually edit using Notepad or any other standard ASCII editor.
Note
Member constraints are only available to GTSTRUDL users. If you have
3rd Party Software set to STAAD, you will not be able to define member
constraints.
Constraints - Displays all the
member constraints currently defined.
Add - Creates a new constraint. For
more information on creating member
constraints, see New or Edit Member
Constraints, page 395.
Delete - Deletes the selected
constraint. Select a member
constraint from the list of constraints
before clicking Delete.
Caution
Tools
394 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
If you delete a member constraint that has already been assigned to
members, FrameWorks Plus does not remove the deleted constraint from
those members. You are responsible for manually removing deleted
member constraints from members. However, when you write the input
file for GTSTRUDL, FrameWorks Plus will report to the log file that the
member constraint definition is missing.
Edit - Edits an existing constraint. For more information on editing member
constraints, see New or Edit Member Constraints, page 395.
Apply - Assigns the selected member constraint to a member. FrameWorks Plus
allows only one member constraint on a member. Assigning a new member constraint
overwrites an existing constraint. Select the member constraint to assign before
clicking Apply.
Remove - Removes a member constraint from a member.
Select - Assigns (copies) members constraints assigned to a member to another
member.
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 395
New or Edit Member Constraints
Use this dialog box to define new constraints and edit existing constraints.

Constraint Name - Specifies the constraint name. The constraint name must be
unique and is limited to 24 characters.
Constraint Property - Specifies the constraint property to add to the constraint. The
following constrainable properties can be defined:
AX -- Cross sectional area
AY -- Y direction shear area
AZ -- Z direction shear area
BF/2TF -- One-half flange width over flange thickness
CW -- Warping constant
D/TW -- Depth of beam over web thickness
FLTK -- Flange thickness
GRPNUM -- Group number of profile
ID -- Inside diameter of the pipe
INTYD -- Clear depth of web (depth of member along Y axis minus twice
flange thickness)
IX -- Torsional moment of inertia
IY -- Moment of inertia about Y axis
IZ -- Moment of inertia about Z-axis
LEG1 -- Long leg of angle
Tools
396 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
LEG2 -- Short leg of angle
ND -- Nominal depth of the profile
OD -- Outside diameter of the pipe
RT -- Radius of gyration for flange and 1/6 of web about plane of web
RY -- Radius of gyration about Y axis
RZ -- Radius of gyration about Z-axis
SHAPE -- Indicates the profile shape.
SPACING -- Back-to-back spacing in double angles
SY -- Section modulus about Y axis
SZ -- Section modulus about Z-axis
THICK -- Thickness of angle
WBTK -- Web thickness
WEIGHT -- Weight per unit length
YC -- Distance from centroid to extreme fiber along Y axis
YD -- Depth of member along Y axis
YD/AFL -- Depth in Y direction over area of one flange
ZC -- Distance from centroid to extreme fiber along Z-axis
ZD -- Depth of member along Z-axis
ZY -- Plastic modulus about Y axis
ZZ -- Plastic modulus about Z-axis
Logical Operator - Defines the logical operator to use to compare the constraint
property to the limiting value.
EQ -- equal to
LT -- less than
LE -- less than or equal to
GT -- greater than
GE -- greater than or equal to
NE -- not equal
Limiting Value - Specifies the limiting value for the constraint property.
Add - Adds the constraint property to the constraint.
Delete - Removes the constraint property from the constraint.
Close - Exits the dialog box.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 397
Offshore
The Offshore commands place cans and rule-based joints in the model.

Topics

Create Rule Based Joint places, modifies, and deletes offsets on members to
provide clearance for welding or simply as a work point adjustment. For more
information, see Create Rule Based Joint, page 397.

Create Can places a reinforcing connection piece on a member or member
end. For more information, see Create Can, page 401.

Modify Can Connection List edits the transverse member list for a can. For
more information, see Modify Can Connection List, page 406.

Place Jacket places an offshore jacket using parameters that you specify. For
more information, see Place Jacket, page 407.

Create Rule Based Joint
The Create Rule Based Joint command places, modifies, evaluates, and
deletes offsets between members to provide clearance for welding or simply
as a work point adjustment. FrameWorks Plus can calculate the offset either axially
along or radially around the support member. The offsets, when applied, do not break
the member associativity even though the member may no longer be physically
connected.
Note
FrameWorks Plus places rule based joints only on pipe section members
with a cardinal point of 5. If you need to place offset on members with
other section types or cardinal points, consider using Modify Work Point
Offset, page 326.
All members defining the rule based joint must in the active model.
When applying rule-based joints you are asked to select three members:
The Target Member is the member always to move and is selected first.
FrameWorks Plus does not allow you to select as a target member a
member that was selected as a support or secondary member in another
RBJ.
Tools
398 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
The Support Member is the member that the target member moves along
(axially) or around (radially). You are prompted to select this member
after identifying the target member.
The Secondary Member is the third member in the joint, and the offset is
measured relative to this member. FrameWorks Plus does not require the
secondary member to be in the same plane as the target member. For
example, you could select either beam in this situation to be the secondary
member for the brace. You are prompted to select this member after
identifying the support member.


RBJ Type - Select which type that you want to place. You can select:
RBJ Type-1 - Moves the target member measuring the clearance from the
secondary member. Movement can be along the support member or
around the support member. For example, use this type if you want to
relocate the connection point of a vertical brace in a vertical K-type
connection.
RBJ Type-2 - Moves both the target member and the secondary member
with the clearance being measure between the target and secondary
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 399
members. The resulting offset is centered about the original joint location.
For example, use this type if you want to place a clearance between two
horizontal braces that frame into a beam forming a horizontal K-type
connection.
Clearance Mode - Select the clearance mode that you want to use.
Centerline (Axial) - Select this mode when you want to define the offset
as the distance between the center lines of the target and secondary
members. This distance is measured parallel to the support member
centerline.
Hull (Axial) - Select this mode when you want to define the offset as the
distance between the closest points of the target member hull and the
secondary member hull. This distance is measured parallel to the support
member centerline along the hull of the supporting member.

Hull (Radial) - Select this mode when you want to define the offset as the
distance between the closest points on the hull of the target and secondary
members. This distance is measured around the hull of the support
member.

Set To - Enter the hull gap, centerline gap, or overlap gap that you want to define.
Tools
400 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Actual - Displays the current hull gap, centerline gap, and overlap gap between the
target and secondary members. You cannot edit these values. These fields only
display when you are editing a rule-based joint.
Hull Gap - Type the gap that you want between the two closest points of the target
member hull and the secondary member hull. This option is not available if
Clearance Mode is set to Centerline (Axial).
CL Gap - Type the gap that you want between the center line of the target member
and the center line of the secondary member. This option is not available if
Clearance Mode is set to Hull (Axial) or Hull (Radial).
Overlap Gap - Type the distance between the lowest point
of the target and secondary member saddle on the support
member to the point where the target and secondary
member intersect. This option is not available if Clearance
Mode is set to Centerline (Axial).
Round CL - Select to round the centerline gap value up to the nearest inch or
millimeter using the precision that you specify. The Hull Gap and Overlap Gap
fields are recalculated using the new, rounded CL Gap value.
Place/Apply - Places or updates the rule-based joint using the parameters you
defined.
Remove - Deletes the rule-based joint from the member and reset member's the work
point offset to zero.
Picture - Displays a graphic depicting what happens to the target and secondary
members for the RBJ type that you have selected.
Draw Profile - Places the saddle profiles for the target and secondary members as
they will appear if the RBJ is placed. The graphics are generic MicroStation lines
drawn using the active MicroStation symbology and placed on level 60. You can
delete a profile using the standard MicroStation Delete Element command.
Draw Gap - Places a generic MicroStation line between the closest points of the
saddle profiles using the active MicroStation symbology and placed on level 60. You
can delete a gap using the standard MicroStation Delete Element command.
Message Area - Displays the centerline gap calculation and the hull tolerance
calculation. The D value of the centerline calculation is the diameter of the support
member. The denominator of the centerline calculation is defined in the config.dat
file. The default value is 0.25, which specifies that the support member diameter be
divided by 4.
The hull tolerance percentage is also defined in the config.dat file.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 401
Related Topics
Create Can, page 401
Create Rule Based Joint, page 397
Modify Can Connection List, page 406
Offshore, page 397
Create Can
The Create Can command places a reinforcing connection
piece on a member to increase the surface area available for
connections or to provide increased wall thickness or both. You can
place cans anywhere along a linear member including the end of a
member or between two co-linear members.
Because cans are placed using pipe sections, you need to define the
pipe sections that you want to use for cans in either a user section
library or a standard section library. For more information on creating
pipe sections, see Create User Section, page 488 or Interactive Section
Tables (IST), page 57.
Note
FrameWorks Plus only places cans on linear members with a pipe section
and a cardinal point of 5.
All members used to define the can must be in the active model. Members
cannot be in an attached model.
Tools
402 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Support Details
Section 1 - Displays the pipe section name of the first support member. You cannot
change this value.
Section 2 - Displays the pipe section name of the second support member if there is
one. If not, this box also displays the section of the first support member. You cannot
change this value.
ID - Displays the inside diameter dimension of the pipe section. This value is read
from the section table. You cannot change this value.
OD - Displays the outside diameter of the pipe section. This value is read from the
section table. You cannot change this value.
Wall Thickness - Displays the wall thickness of the pipe section. This value is read
from the section table. You cannot change this value.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 403
Available Sections
Section Library - Select whether you want to pick available pipe sections for the can
from the standard section library or from the active user section library. The name of
the selected library displays to the right of the selection control. The software displays
pipe sections from the selected library in the list box. For more information on
making a user section library active, see Section Library, page 55.
Section Filter - Filters the pipe sections that appear in the list box by the criteria you
specify. You can select criteria to match, be greater than, or be less than the support
member's inside or outside diameter. You can also have all pipe sections in the library
appear. This filter is helpful when you want to do things like placing a can with the
same outside diameter, but an increased wall thickness, in which case you would
select ODs = OD1 & Wthk > Wthk1.
Section List Box - Displays all pipe sections in the selected section library that match
the section filter. The inside and outside diameters and the wall thickness are read
directly from the section library. Select the section that you want to use for the can
from this list.
Can Details
Can Section - Displays the name of the pipe section that you selected from the list.
You also can type a section name if needed.
Can Name - Type a name for the can that you are placing. This is the FrameWorks
Plus member name for the can.
Lmin. By - Specifies how you want FrameWorks Plus to measure the L2 and L3
minimum distances. If you select Hull, FrameWorks Plus measures L2 and L3 from
the corresponding end of the can to the point on the transverse member hull closest to
the end of the can. If you select Centerline, FrameWorks Plus measures L2 and L3
from the corresponding end of the can to the point where the centerline of the
transverse member intersects the hull of the can.

L2 and L3 Lengths when using the Lmin By Hull option
Tools
404 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

L2 and L3 Lengths when using the Lmin By Centerline option
L2 Factor - Specifies how you want FrameWorks Plus to calculate the L2 minimum
distance. If you select *Diameter, L2 is calculated as the outside diameter of the can
section times the value you enter in the field. The default value is 0.5.
If you select Absolute, L2 is the distance that you enter in the field.
L2 Length - Displays the calculated L2 length. You can enter a new length if needed.
If L2 Factor is set to *Diameter, you cannot enter a length shorter than the
calculated value.
Special End Can - Activates the L3 Factor and L3 Length options. Normally, when
placing an end can the L3 Factor and L3 Length options are not needed. However,
there may be special situations where you want to specify an L3 Length and thus
extend the length of the original support member (like at the bottom of a column).
L3 Factor - Specifies how you want FrameWorks Plus to calculate the L3 minimum
distance. If you select *Diameter, L3 is calculated as the outside diameter of the can
section times the value you enter in the field. The default value is 0.5. If you are
placing an end can, this option is disabled unless you select the Special End Can
option.
L3 Length - Displays the calculated L3 length. You can enter a new length if needed.
If L3 Factor is set to *Diameter, you cannot enter a length shorter than the
calculated value. If you are placing an end can, this option is disabled unless you
select the Special End Can option.
Can Length - Displays the calculated can length. You can enter a new can length if
needed. Any additional length is added evenly to both L2 and L3 lengths. You cannot
enter a can length that would cause either L2 or L3 to be shorter than the calculated
length.
Cone Details
End 1 Sections - Displays the start and end pipe sections of each transition. A
transition is a tapered FrameWorks Plus member.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 405
End 2 Sections - Displays the start and end pipe sections of each transition. A
transition is a tapered FrameWorks Plus member.
Cones At - Indicates whether or not the can has transition sections and at which end
of the can the transitions are located. FrameWorks Plus automatically sets this option
based on the support and can section sizes and the location of the can. However, you
can override this automatic selection if needed.
Cones By - Specifies how you want to define the length of the transitions. If you
select Angle, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
section, support member section, and the angle specified. If you select Distance, the
length of the transition is defined explicitly in the L1 and L2 boxes.
Angle 1 - Specifies the angle of the start transition. This box is disabled if Cones By
is set to Distance.
L1 - Specifies the length of the start transition from the end of the support member
section to the start of the can section. This box is disabled if Cones By is set to
Angle.
L4 - Specifies the length of the end transition from the end of the can section to the
start of the support member section. This box is disabled if Cones By is set to Angle
or if the can is an end can.
Angle 4 - Specifies the angle of the end transition. This box is disabled if Cones By is
set to Distance or if the can is an end can.
Common Details
Can Nodes - Specifies how nodes represent the can analytically. Select Multiple to
place nodes at both ends of the transitions and the can.
Select Grade - Activates the Material Grade dialog box from which you can select a
new material grade for the can and transitions. To define new material grades or for
more information about material grades, see Modify Material Grade.
Related Topics
Create Can, page 401
Create Rule Based Joint, page 397
Modify Can Connection List, page 406
Offshore, page 397
Tools
406 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Modify Can Connection List
The Modify Can Connection List command displays, adds, or removes
transverse members on a can member. FrameWorks Plus uses the transverse
member list to calculate the L2 and L3 dimensions of the can. You must use this
command to add or remove members from the transverse member list to guarantee
the correct calculation of the can size.
Caution
You must use the Create Can command to have FrameWorks Plus resize
the can after adding or removing a member from the transverse member
list. FrameWorks Plus does not automatically resize the can after you edit
the transverse member list.
All members must be in the active model.

Add to connection list - Select this option to add members to the connection list.
Remove from connection list - Select the option to remove members from the
connection list.
Show - Highlights all members currently in the connection list for the selected can.
Related Topics
Create Can, page 401
Create Rule Based Joint, page 397
Modify Can Connection List, page 406
Offshore, page 397
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 407
Place Jacket
The Place Jacket command creates a jacket in the model using the parameters
that you specify. The command can create several different types of jackets,
including 3, 4, 6, and 8 piles. You control the section sizes, bracing elevations, slope,
and origin of the jacket. The command also provides options for
automatically creating views and grids based on the bracing
elevations and the number of piles. You also can have the
software automatically apply SmartCuts to the members. For
more information about SmartCuts, see SmartCut, page 419.
Because jackets are placed using pipe sections, you need to define
the pipe sections that you want to use for the jacket in either a
user section library or a standard section library. For more
information on creating pipe sections, see Create User Section,
page 488 or Interactive Section Tables (IST), page 57.

Tools
408 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
General Parameters
Auto/Specify - Specifies if the jacket member names are generated automatically or
manually. If set to Auto, FrameWorks Plus uses the setting specified in the
AutoName command (see AutoName, page 172) to create the jacket member names.
If set to Specify, then all jacket members are named using the name specified.
Type - Select the type of jacket to place. You can select 3, 4, 6, and 8 piles.
Pile Section - Specify the section size to use for the corner piles. You can only use
pipe sections for the piles. Piles are placed using the column member type. If the
default section for columns is a pipe section, then that is the default section.
Otherwise, the first pipe section in the standard section library is the default section.
Class - Specify the class for the members that are placed in the jacket. The class
attribute is used to group members when creating material reports, analysis input
files, or performing other operations. The Select Filter Settings command (see Select
Filter Settings, page 151) includes a class attribute criterion, which can be used to
include or exclude members of a specified class or range of classes. The class
attribute is also reportable on material take-offs. The specific meaning or significance
of each class value is up to you.
Grade - Displays the active grade name that is assigned to the members in the jacket.
Click the arrow to activate the Material Grade selection box, used to select an active
grade. The grades listed for selection are read directly from the grade.dat file. For
more information on the grade.dat file, see Modify Material Grade, page 306.

Central Pile Spacing - Enter the spacing between the two central piles. Click the
View Iso option to see where the two central piles are located. This option is
available only when the Type option is set to 8 Piles.
Central Pile Section - Specify the section size to use for the central piles. You can
only use pipe sections for the piles. This option is available only when the Type
option is set to 6 Piles or 8 Piles. If the default section for columns is a pipe section,
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 409
then that is the default section. Otherwise, the first pipe section in the standard section
library is the default section.
Jacket Elevation / Mean Sea Level
Water Depth - Enter the depth of the water. This is the distance between the sea
bottom and the mean sea level. Enter the depth using master units. Click View Elev
to see a helpful diagram.
Top of Leg - Enter the top of leg elevation. This is the distance between the mean sea
level and the top of the piles. Enter the distance using master units. Click View Elev
to see a helpful diagram.
Working Point - Enter the working point elevation. This is the distance from the
mean sea level at which you want the slope of the piles to stop. Enter the distance
using master units. Click View Elev to see a helpful diagram.
Stabbing Point - Enter the stabbing point elevation. This is the distance between the
mean sea level and the elevation at which the piles contact the deck. Enter the
distance using master units. Click View Elev to see a helpful diagram.
Bracing Elevations
Add - Adds the defined bracing elevation. The software places bracing between the
piles for each elevation that you define. You can define a maximum of 20 different
elevations.
Edit - Edits the selected bracing elevation.
Del - Deletes the selected bracing elevation.
Depth - Enter the distance between the mean sea level and the elevation that you are
defining. Enter a positive value if the elevation is above the mean sea level. Enter a
negative value if the elevation is below the mean sea level.
Section - Select a section size for the bracing that is placed at that elevation. You can
only use pipe sections for the bracing. Bracing is placed using the beam member type.
If the default beam section is a pipe section, then that section is used as the default.
Otherwise, the first pipe section in the standard section library is used as the default.
Width and Depth
West-East - Enter the distance between the west and east piles at the working point
elevation. Enter the distance using master units. If the Type option is set to 3 Piles,
then this option defines the distance between the 3 piles.
Tools
410 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
North-South - Enter the distance between the north and south piles at the working
point elevation. Enter the distance using master units. This option is not available if
the Type option is set to 3 Piles.
Slopes
West - Enter the slope for the west side of the jacket. The larger the value, the steeper
the slope. Enter zero for no slope or vertical.
East - Enter the slope for the east side of the jacket. The larger the value, the steeper
the slope. Enter zero for no slope or vertical.
North - Enter the slope for the north side of the jacket. The larger the value, the
steeper the slope. Enter zero for no slope or vertical.
South - Enter the slope for the south side of the jacket. The larger the value, the
steeper the slope. Enter zero for no slope or vertical.
Origin
X - Enter the X-coordinate of the origin. This value defines the center of the jacket
along the X-axis.
Y - Enter the Y-coordinate of the origin. This value defines the center of the jacket
along the Y-axis.
Z - Enter the Z-coordinate of the origin.
Rotation - Enter the rotation, in degrees, of the jacket. The axis of the rotation is
located at the defined origin and is always parallel to the global Z-axis.
Options
SmartCut Members - Select to automatically run SmartCuts on the members in the
jacket. Selecting this option increases the amount of time required to place the jacket.
For more information about SmartCuts, see SmartCut, page 419.
Create Views - Select to automatically create model views in the model. The Place
Jacket command creates a plan view for each bracing elevation that you defined, an
elevation view for each side of the jacket, and a single isometric view.
Create Grids - Select to automatically create grids in the views. Grid lines are placed
for each pile line.
Place - Click to place the jacket using the parameters that you defined.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 411
View Elev - Click to display a graphic displaying the different parameters as they
relate to one another.
View Iso - Click to display a graphic of the jacket that will be placed base on the
Type option.
Cancel - Click to exit the command without placing the jacket.
Related Topics
Create Can, page 401
Create Rule Based Joint, page 397
Offshore, page 397
Place Jacket, page 407
SmartCut, page 419
Tools
412 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Cutbacks
The Cutbacks commands are the basis for accurate material
takeoffs and double-line drawings. FrameWorks Plus provides
several useful cutback features, including planar, multi-plane,
and mitered.
The FrameWorks Plus cutback commands, like MicroStation
modification commands, have two operating modes: single and selection set. If no
selection set is active when the command is activated, the command prompts for a
member to be modified (single mode). If a selection set containing valid FrameWorks
Plus members is active when you select the command, the selected members are
modified as a group.
If a selection set is present when you select a cutback command, all the members in
the selection set that meet the Selection Set Filter criteria highlight (if Select Filter
Settings is on) and an Alert Box displays requesting you to confirm the group (if the
Confirm Selection Set command is on). If you click OK in the Alert Box,
FrameWorks Plus modifies each member in the selection set to the new specified
value. If you click Cancel, the modify command reverts to single member mode and
prompts for a member to be modified.
Note
A member is not included in a selection set if only part of the member is
visible in the view. For example, if in a plan view a column intersects the
view but extends above or below the view's display depth, then that
column is not included in a selection set.
Topics

Member Priority changes the cutback priority value of a member. For more
information, see Member Priority, page 413.

Compute Cutbacks performs member cutbacks based on their assigned
priority. For more information, see Compute Cutbacks, page 413.

User Cutbacks performs user defined member cutbacks. For more
information, see User Cutbacks, page 416.

Mitered Cutbacks performs mitered cutbacks on members. For more
information, see Mitered Cutbacks, page 418.

SmartCut creates automatically updating multi-plane cutbacks for linear
members. For more information, see SmartCut, page 419.

Uncut Member removes the cutbacks from the member. For more
information, see Uncut Member, page 422.

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 413
Member Priority
The Member Priority command changes the default cutback priority settings
for either or both member ends. The default priorities, assigned when the
members are placed, are defined in the Defaults Linear Members command, see
Defaults Linear Members, page 159. The default cutback priorities are: columns = 3,
beams = 8, vertical braces = 13, and horizontal braces = 13.
Priorities range from 0 to 15, where 0 is the highest priority and 15 is the lowest
priority. For a given member intersection, any member is cut back to another member
with a higher priority. Therefore, beams (priority of 8) are cut back to columns
(priority of 3).

End 1 Priority - Specifies the new priority for the member's start end.
End 2 Priority - Specifies the new priority for the member's end end.
Related Topics
Compute Cutbacks, page 413
Cutbacks, page 412
Member Priority, page 413
Mitered Cutbacks, page 418
SmartCut, page 419
Uncut Member, page 422
User Cutbacks, page 416
Compute Cutbacks
The Compute Cutbacks command performs the planar cutback calculations
on a select member or defined group. Cutbacks are computed based on the
parameters defined and the cutback priorities of the members involved.

When a member intersects two or more members with higher priority, FrameWorks
Plus performs cutbacks to all intersecting members and selects the cutback producing
the longest cutback length.
Tools
414 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Notes
To see the cutbacks graphically, you must use either the Surface or
Double Line view representation. If you use Double Line, make sure
Double Line Length is set to 100, and the Double Line Percent Length
toggle is on. For more information, see Create View, page 191 and Modify
View, page 211.
FrameWorks Plus does not compute cutbacks for arc members or
members that frame into an arbitrary section member. However, you can
define orthogonal User Cutbacks on arc members and ordinary members
that frame into an arbitrary section member.

Priority Override - Specifies that same-type members and members with the same
priority should be cut back to one another. For example, framing members and their
supporting beams have the same priority of 8. If this toggle is on, the framing
members are cut back to the supporting beams. FrameWorks will not cut back two
members with the same priority whose ends meet, such as at a corner, because either
member could be cut back.
User Cutback Locking - Specifies that you do not want to overwrite user cutbacks or
SmartCut cutbacks that you have already placed on a member. If a member has a user
cutback only on one end, that user cutback is not overwritten but the member's uncut
end has a planar cutback calculated for it. If this option is not selected, SmartCut
cutbacks on both member ends are removed and planar cutbacks calculated.
Scan Tolerance - Specifies the distance, or range, for FrameWorks Plus to use to
determine if two members should be cutback to one another. For example, suppose
you have a beam placed at top-of-steel equals 15 feet. A horizontal brace frames into
the middle of the beam, but has a vertical offset of -6 inches from the top-of-steel
height. If Scan Tolerance is set to 0:0:0, then the horizontal brace is not cutback to
the beam because FrameWorks Plus does not consider them to be intersecting
members. However, if you set the Scan Tolerance to 0:6:0, then the horizontal brace
is cutback to the beam because FrameWorks Plus has scanned 6 inches from the
horizontal brace's end to find any other members. Because the beam is within the 6-
inch scan tolerance, the brace is cutback to the beam.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 415
Notes
FrameWorks Plus measures the scan tolerance from member line to
member line. If two members' double line or surface displays are within
the scan tolerance because of cardinal point settings but the actual member
lines are outside the scan tolerance, the members are not cutback.
Similarly, if the end of a member line crosses the supporting member line
by a preset tolerance, FrameWorks Plus does not consider the member for
cutbacks.
Model Units Tolerance
Feet 0.1
Inches 1
Meters 0.0254
Millimeters 25.4

Clearance Type - Select which member type you want to specify a clearance value
for. Each member type; beams, columns, horizontal braces, and vertical braces; can
have different clearance values defined.
Value - Specifies an additional distance you want the displayed Clearance Type to
be cut back. This is in addition to any cutback distances that were automatically
computed. The units are the model's length units.
Related Topics
Compute Cutbacks, page 413
Cutbacks, page 412
Member Priority, page 413
Mitered Cutbacks, page 418
SmartCut, page 419
Uncut Member, page 422
User Cutbacks, page 416
Tools
416 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
User Cutbacks
The User Cutbacks command calculates a planar cutback for a member end
by defining the cutback plane and the distance. The cutback plane is defined
by specifying a vector that is normal (perpendicular) to the cutting plane. You can
define the vector by keying in the points, specifying the points graphically, using a
global axis for the vector, or orthogonally (which uses the member start and end
points for the vector). The cutback distance, measured from the target member end
toward the member center, is defined graphically using a data point.

Note
This command overrides any priority settings that are defined for the
members at the intersection.
To see the cutbacks graphically, you must use either the Surface or Double Line
view representation. If you use Double Line, make sure Double Line Length is set
to 100, and the Double Line Percent Length toggle is on. For more information, see
Create View, page 191 and Modify View, page 211.
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 417

Define Vector - Specifies the method you want to use to define the vector normal to
the cutting plane.
By Points -- defines the vector using two points you graphically identify.
By Axis -- defines the vector to be one of the global axes.
By Keyin -- defines the vector using the three key-in fields.
Orthogonal -- defines the vector to be the member start and end points.
Note
You must use the Orthogonal setting if you want to apply User Cutbacks
to arc members. For arcs, Orthogonal defines the vector as tangent to the
arc at the cutback location.
Axis - Specifies which axis to use as the vector. This option is only active when
Define Vector is set to By Axis.
X, Y, Z - These key-in fields are used to define the vector when Define Vector is set
to By Keyin.
Clearance Type - Select which member type you want to specify a clearance value
for.
Value - Specifies an additional distance you want the displayed Clearance Type to
be cut back. The units are the model's length units.
Related Topics
Compute Cutbacks, page 413
Cutbacks, page 412
Member Priority, page 413
Mitered Cutbacks, page 418
SmartCut, page 419
Uncut Member, page 422
User Cutbacks, page 416
Tools
418 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Mitered Cutbacks
The Mitered Cutbacks command creates mitered cutbacks using the angle
between the two members being cut as the cutting plane. Clearance values are
measured perpendicular to the cutting plane, not along the member.

Note
To see the cutbacks graphically, you must use either the Surface or
Double Line view representation. If you use Double Line, make sure
Double Line Length is set to 100, and the Double Line Percent Length
toggle is on. For more information, see Create View, page 191 or Modify
View, page 211.

User Cutback Locking - Specifies that you do not want to overwrite user cutbacks or
multi-plane cutbacks that you have already placed on a member. If a member has a
user cutback only on one end, that user cutback is not overwritten but the member's
uncut end has a mitered cutback calculated for it. If this option is not selected, multi-
plane cutbacks on both member ends are removed and mitered cutbacks calculated.
Clearance Type - Select which member type you want to specify a clearance value
for.
Value - Specifies an additional distance you want the displayed Clearance Type to
be cut back. The units are the model's length units.
Related Topics
Compute Cutbacks, page 413
Cutbacks, page 412
Member Priority, page 413
Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 419
Mitered Cutbacks, page 418
SmartCut, page 419
Uncut Member, page 422
User Cutbacks, page 416
SmartCut
The SmartCut command cuts and copes a single target member to one or
more support members. Each target member can have up to twenty support
members. Use this command instead of the Compute Cutbacks command when you
have multiple members connecting at one location and cutbacks are needed across
numerous edges. You can create multi-plane cutbacks for any linear member with
standard or arbitrary sections. This command does not support arc or solid members.
You can select target members individually or by using a selection set.
Note
To see the multi-plane cutbacks in a view, you must use the Surface
representation. For more information, see Create View, page 191 and
Modify View, page 211.


User Cutback Locking - Specifies that
you do not want to overwrite user cutbacks
that you have already placed on a member.
If a member has a user cutback only on one
end, that user cutback is not overwritten
but the member's uncut end will have a
SmartCut calculated for it. If this option is
not selected, user cutbacks on both member
ends are removed and SmartCuts calculated.
Automatically select support members - Select this option if you want FrameWorks
Plus to automatically select the support members based on the member cutback
Tools
420 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
priority and the geometric proximity to the target member. FrameWorks Plus selects a
maximum of twenty support members per target member. SmartCuts are applied to
both ends of the target member.
Priority Override - Specifies that same-type members and members with the same
priority should be cut back to one another. For example, framing members and their
supporting beams have the same priority of 8. If this toggle is on, the framing
members are cut back to the supporting beams.
Note
Modifying the member cutback priority of a support or target member
does not cause FrameWorks Plus to recalculate the SmartCut. You need to
delete and replace the SmartCut for FrameWorks Plus to consider the new
member priority.
Recognize FWP Solids as Support Members - Select this option to cutback the
target member to any FrameWorks Plus solids that the target member intersects.
Clear this option to ignore FrameWorks Plus solids when automatically selecting
support members.
Scan Tolerance - Specifies the distance, or range, for FrameWorks Plus to use to
determine if a member should be considered as a support member. For example,
suppose you have a beam placed at top-of-steel equals 15 feet. A horizontal brace
frames into the middle of the beam, but has a vertical offset of -6 inches from the top-
of-steel height. If Scan Tolerance is set to 0:0:0, then the horizontal brace is not
cutback to the beam because FrameWorks Plus does not consider them to be
intersecting members. However, if you set the Scan Tolerance to 0:6:0, then the
horizontal brace is cutback to the beam because FrameWorks Plus has scanned 6
inches from the horizontal brace's end to find any other members. Because the beam
is within the 6-inch scan tolerance, the brace is cutback to the beam.
Notes
FrameWorks Plus measures the scan tolerance from member line to
member line. If two members' double line or surface displays are within
the scan tolerance because of cardinal point settings but the actual member
lines are outside the scan tolerance, the members are not cutback.
Similarly, if the end of a member line crosses the supporting member line
by a preset tolerance, FrameWorks Plus does not consider the member for
cutbacks.
Model Units Tolerance
Feet 0.1
Inches 1
Meters 0.0254
Millimeters 25.4

Tools
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 421
FrameWorks Plus automatically re-calculates multi-plane cutbacks when you modify
the target or a support member using one of these commands: Modify Section,
Modify CP, Modify Rotation, Modify Reflect, Modify Orientation Vector,
Extend Member, Extend Member to Intersection, Extend Members to
Intersection, Modify Work Point Offset, Modify Offset, Split Member, Join
Members, Create Rule Based Joint, or Create Can.
FrameWorks Plus automatically deletes multi-plane cutbacks when you modify the
target or a support member using one of these commands: Copy Member, Move
Member, Modify Member End, Rotate Member, or Mirror Member.
You can use the Uncut Member command to delete multi-plane cutbacks from a
member or a selection set of members.
Note
Because FrameWorks Plus automatically re-calculates SmartCuts, the
target member and all the support members must be in the active model.
You cannot select members in an attached model to be support members.
Caution
A member cannot have planar cutbacks (mitered, user, or computed) and
multi-plane cutbacks applied at the same time. If you apply multi-plane
cutbacks to a member that has planer cutbacks applied to one or both ends,
the existing planar cutback is deleted and the multi-plane cutback is
applied. If you try to apply a mitered or computed planar cutback to a
member that has an existing multi-plane cutback, FrameWorks Plus check
the User Cutback Locking option before proceeding. If the User
Cutback Locking option is selected, the multi-plane cutback is not
deleted and the planar cutback is not placed. However, if the User
Cutback Locking option is not selected, the multi-plane cutback is
deleted and the planar cutback is placed.
Related Topics
Compute Cutbacks, page 413
Cutbacks, page 412
Member Priority, page 413
Mitered Cutbacks, page 418
SmartCut, page 419
Uncut Member, page 422
User Cutbacks, page 416
Tools
422 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Uncut Member
The Uncut Member command removes all cutback definitions from a
member. This command removes cutbacks defined by Compute Cutbacks,
User Cutbacks, SmartCut, and Mitered Cutbacks commands. Members are reset
to their original placement lengths with this command.
Related Topics
Compute Cutbacks, page 413
Cutbacks, page 412
Member Priority, page 413
Mitered Cutbacks, page 418
SmartCut, page 419
Uncut Member, page 422
User Cutbacks, page 416
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 423
Utilities
The Utilities commands generate reports (both material take-offs, analytical, and
center of gravity), review database attributes of members, and review and create
sections in a section library.

Utilities Commands
Linear Material Reports, page 424
3D Solids Material Reports, page 445
Analytic Reports, page 458
Center of Gravity Reports, page 466
Review Element, page 477
Locate Element By Attributes, page 481
Review Log File, page 485
Review Section Library, page 486
Create User Section, page 488
Steel Detailing, page 492
Create Mapping File, page 499
Reference PDS Model, page 501
Review PDS Clash, page 503
Review PDS Attributes, page 505
Window to Named PDS Item, page 506
Area Volume Graphics, page 508
Utilities
424 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Linear Material Reports
The Utilities > Reports > Material > Linear command creates material reports in
virtually any format. An essential part of the construction documentation for a project
is the material reports, which list quantities, sizes, lengths, and other attributes of the
members used in a structural design.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not track or calculate the weight of fireproofing
material (the same member with and without fireproofing will weigh the
same). Therefore, the total weight of a model does not include the weight
of fireproofing material.
Creating a report requires read-only access to the model database, so you can report
on members in attached model partitions as well as members in the local (active)
model database. A report can be generated for a selected portion of a model, the
whole model, or an entire project (by attaching all project models to the local model).
You control the contents, width, pagination, and format of the report using the report
format dialog boxes. These format dialog boxes include a WYSIWYG informational
area that displays a portion of an actual report as it is currently formatted. This feature
provides instant and exact verification of how changes made to the format parameters
affect the resulting report.
This command uses the User Preference mechanism for storing and retrieving user-
defined sets of command parameters (preference sets). This allows you to define
standard report formats once and save these as a named preference set for use on all
reports for the project. For more information, see Appendix A: Customizing
FrameWorks Plus, page 511.
When all parameters for the report output options, content, and format have been
fully defined, click OK to create the report. FrameWorks Plus builds an ASCII (text)
file that contains the specified information and writes it to the project report directory
(\rpt) using the file name designated. When the report is completed, an Alert Box
displays asking if you want to review the report. Click OK to display the report in a
dialog box. The Cancel button exits the command.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 425

Report Width - >Defines the output width of report. Available options are 132
columns, 80 columns, and Specify. The Specify option allows you to define any
number of columns, up to 132.
Width - Specifies the width of the report (number of columns). This field is only
active if the Report Width option is set to Specify.
Items per page - Specifies the number of items (rows) on each page, if the Paginate
toggle is on.
Page Header - If on, the report lists a page header at the top of each page of the
report.
Paginate - If on, the report is divided into separate pages, each containing the number
of items defined in Items per page.
Condense Like Items - If on, members with the same section size and equal member
lengths are combined to a single output item. The quantity field specifies the number
of identical pieces. If off, all members are listed individually in the report.
Utilities
426 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Use Cut Lengths - If on, FrameWorks Plus reports the out-to-out length for members
with cutbacks. If off, the member line length is reported, regardless of cutbacks on the
member.

Totals - If on, FrameWorks Plus computes and outputs information on total length,
weight, and number of pieces at the end of the report.
Use Weight Class - If on, you can create reports on individual member weight
classes. You can specify the range for each weight class.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not allow gaps or overlaps in the weight class
ranges. For example, if Light To and Medium From are both set to
24.0000, FrameWorks Plus automatically interprets the Light To value to
be less than or equal to 24.0000. FrameWorks Plus interprets Medium
From value as greater than 24.0000.
Report File - Defines the name of the report file. This file is placed in the \rpt
directory of the active project. The name is limited to ten characters with a three-
character extension.
Light To - Specifies a Light Weight Class member's maximum weight. You cannot
specify a value greater than the Medium From value.
Medium From / To - Specifies a Medium Weight Class member's range. You cannot
specify a Medium From value smaller than the Light To value or a Medium To value
greater than the Heavy From value.
Heavy From / To - Specifies a Heavy Weight Class member's range. You cannot
specify a Heavy From value smaller than the Medium To value or a Heavy To value
greater than the Extra Heavy From value.
Extra Heavy From - Specifies an Extra Heavy Class member's minimum weight.
You cannot specify a value smaller than the Heavy To value.
Units - Displays the units for defining the weight class range.
Report on - Specifies whether the entire model should be reported or a selected
portion. The options are All Members and Selection Set.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 427
Use Selection Filter - Specifies whether the FrameWorks Plus Selection Filter should
be used to filter out members to be reported on. If on, all members are filtered,
regardless of the value of the Report on parameter. (Both All Members and Selection
Set members are filtered.)
Included Attached Models - If on and other model partitions are attached to the
active model, these members can be included in the material report. This item is
disabled if no partitions are attached.
Report Format - The format of the report is broken down into three sections:
Header, Data, and Totals.
The format of each section is controlled using a separate dialog box. These dialog
boxes are accessed by the Format pulldown menu on the Create Material Report
dialog box. Each format dialog box provides an interactive visual feedback
(WYSIWYG) area to show you the report format as it is currently defined.
Format Specifiers
In the dialog boxes that define the format, there are Format fields for each reported
attribute. These key-in fields are used to define a format specifier that is used to
generate the output characters for the specific attribute in the report.
These format specifiers use "C" language syntax for formatting the output. There is a
minimum required syntax for each specifier, which depends on the type of data being
formatted. In general, the default specifier (from the default preference set) includes
the required syntax, or a variation thereof. You can experiment with the formats by
trying various specifiers and watching the results in the sample report output at the
bottom of the format dialog box.
If the attribute data is numeric and integer, as it is for the Item Number, Quantity, ID,
Fireproofing, and Class attributes, your specifier must include the characters %d,
which creates an integer number for each item number. In addition, you can prefix or
suffix this required portion with any alphanumeric characters. For example, if the
complete format specifier for the Item Number attribute is item %d, the report would
list item 4 for the fourth item in the report.
If the attribute data is textual (a character string), as for the Name, Type, Section, and
Material attributes, the required format specifier is %s, which simply reports the
character string information from the model database. This specifier can also have
prefixes or suffixes if you want.
For floating point (decimal) numeric data, such as Unit Weight, Weight, and Surface
Area, your format specifier must include some form of the %f specifier. This creates
character output from a real number. The accuracy or precision of the resulting output
can be controlled by inserting a precision qualifier in this format. For example, %0.3f
creates character representation of the real number with accuracy to three places to
the right of the decimal point, for example: 65.123. Similarly, a format specifier of
%0.1f would result in output of 65.1. As with the other specifiers, you can add an
Utilities
428 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
alphanumeric prefix or suffix to the floating point specifiers. As a final example, if
the format specifier for the weight attribute is %.2f (lbs), FrameWorks Plus would list
the weight of a 200-pound member as 200.00 (lbs) in the report.
Tapered Pipe Members
For more accurate volume calculations, FrameWorks Plus places tapered pipe
members using the section thickness stored in the section library for the actual wall
thickness. For example, you place a cone shaped member using two pipe sections that
have a section thickness of 200mm. FrameWorks Plus places the cone using 200mm
for the wall thickness of the cone. The width of the section footprint is geometrically
calculated using the wall thickness and the slope angle. This method most accurately
represents how the real-life cone is manufactured, and thus, provides the most
accurate volume calculation.

Important
FrameWorks Plus only calculates correct volumes for tapered pipe
sections with cardinal point 5. The FrameWorks Plus volume calculation
for tapered pipe-section members with cardinal points other than 5 are not
correct.
Related Topics
3D Solids Material Reports, page 445
Analytic Reports, page 458
Linear Material Reports, page 424
Linear Report Data Format, page 431
Linear Report Header Format, page 429
Linear Reports Totals Format, page 442
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 429
Linear Report Header Format
The Formats > Header command on the Linear Material Report dialog box is used
to review or modify report header format. The header section is the information
printed at the top of each page, if pagination is on, or else it is printed once at the
beginning of the report. The report header can include up to 4 lines (rows) of
information and has 6 possible report fields that can be positioned anywhere on the 4
lines.
If the Report Width is large (greater than 85 columns) only part of the report is visible
in the list box at the bottom of the Report Header Format dialog box. To see the
remainder of the sample report output, select the < Left or Right> buttons at the
bottom to shift the display to the left or right.
When the header format has been defined as you want, click OK to accept the format
and return to the Material Report dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel to ignore the
format changes and use the original values.

Title - Turns on or off the title field in the report header. If the title option is off, the
three items to the right on the dialog box, which control the title string and its
position, are disabled.
If the title option is on, the key-in field to the right is used to specify the title to be
used for the report. Any alphanumeric string up to 80 characters in length can be
specified.
Line Number - Specifies which line (row) of text in the report header section should
include the title. Possible line numbers are 1 through 4.
Starting Column - Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the title. If
this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the title may be truncated or omitted altogether.
Utilities
430 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Project Name - Turns on or off the output of the Project Name field, which is a user-
specified name for the project or model being reported on.
If this option is on, the key-in field to the right is used to enter the project name or
description of up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Date - Turns on or off the Date field in the report header.
Format - Specifies the format of the date string placed in the report. Five format
styles are available.
Time - Turns on or off the Time field in the report header.
Format - Specifies the format to use for displaying the time. Either standard (AM or
PM) or military formats are available.
Page Number - Turns on or off the Page Number field in the report header. If on, the
key-in field is used to specify the string used to prefix the numeric page counter.
Cut Lengths Used - Specifies whether or not to display if member cut lengths were
used when generating the report.
Line Number - Specifies which line (row) of text in the report header section the
item is displayed. Possible line numbers are 1 through 4.
Starting Column - Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the item.
Related Topics
Linear Material Reports, page 424
Linear Report Data Format, page 431
Linear Report Header Format, page 429
Linear Reports Totals Format, page 442
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 431
Linear Report Data Format
The Formats > Data command on the Linear Material Reports dialog box is used to
review or modify the format of the report data. The report data section is the actual
member information. Each member attribute can be independently formatted and
positioned on the report line. The report data can be sorted by one or more sort keys
in ascending (increasing) or descending (decreasing) order.
In addition to the actual data output, this dialog box defines the Column Heading for
each attribute. The column heading is displayed at the top of each page and can be
one or two lines in length. Two line headings are specified by using a backslash
character (\) between the text for the first and second lines. For example, Item\ No
displays as:
Item
No
By default, the text items of both lines begin on the same column, defined by the Col
field. In this example, there is a space between the backslash and "No". Therefore, the
"No" string is shifted one character to the right of the specified starting column.
For more information on the Format fields syntax, see Linear Material Reports, page
424.
If the Report Width is greater than 85 columns, the entire report is not visible at the
bottom of dialog box. Use the < Left or Right > buttons to shift the display.
When the report data format has been defined, click OK to accept the format and
return to the Material Report dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel to ignore the
format changes and use the original values.
Utilities
432 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Item Number - Turns on or off the item number field. This field sequentially
numbers each line of output information in the report. If this option is off, the three
items to the right on the dialog box which control the item number field and its
position are disabled.
Format -- Defines the format of the item number in the report. The
minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the item number attribute. Use a
\ to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the item
number. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the
top of the page) and the actual item number value output for each member.
If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on
the main Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated
or omitted altogether.
Quantity - Lists the number of identical members in the model with the attributes
listed on the current line. This field is always equal to one unless you turn on the
Condense Like Items option on the main Material Report dialog box.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 433
Format -- Defines the format of the quantity field. The minimum required
is %d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the quantity attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the quantity
attribute. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the
top of the page) and the actual value output for each member. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Name - Turns on or off the display of the member name in the report.
Sort -- The Name field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on
or off the sort on the name attribute and to specify whether the names
should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format of the name field. The minimum required is
%s, which creates a character string that contains the member name.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the name attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the name.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual name value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
ID - Turns on or off the display of the unique member ID attribute in the report. The
member ID is assigned at the time of member creation and may not be of particular
use on a material report. Also, because this field is, by definition, unique, if this
option is on, the Condense Like Items option has no effect (every member is
reported differently, and thus on separate lines).
Sort -- The ID field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on or
off the sort feature for the ID attribute. If on, sort specifies whether the
names should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Utilities
434 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Format -- Defines the format for the ID field. The minimum required is
%d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the ID attribute. Use a \ to break
the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the ID. This
starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual ID value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Type - Turns on or off the output of the member type attribute in the report.
Sort -- The Type field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on
or off the sort feature for the type attribute. If on, sort specifies whether
the types should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format of the type field. The minimum required is
%s, which creates a character string that contains the member type (for
example, Beam, Column, and so forth).
Heading -- Defines the column header for the type attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the type
number. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the
top of the page) and the actual type value output for each member. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Section - Turns on or off the output of the section size attribute in the report.
Sort -- The Section field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on
or off the sort feature for the section attribute. If on, sort specifies whether
the section names should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the section field. The minimum
required is %s, which creates a character string that contains the section
size (for example, W16X67).
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 435
Heading -- Defines the column header for the section attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the section.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual section value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Material - Turns on or off the output of the material type attribute in the report.
Sort -- The Material field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn
on or off the sort feature for the material attribute. If on, specifies whether
the material types should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the material field. The minimum
required is %s, which creates a character string that contains the material
type (for example, steel or concrete).
Heading -- Defines the column header for the material attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the material
name. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top
of the page) and the actual material value output for each member. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the material could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Grade - Turns on or off the output of the material grade attribute in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the grade field. The minimum
required is %s, which creates a character string that contains the grade (for
example, A36 or Fc_4).
Heading -- Defines the column header for the grade attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the grade
name. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top
of the page) and the actual grade value output for each member. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the grade could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Fireproofing Label - Turns on or off the output of the member's fireproofing label.
Utilities
436 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the fireproofing label. The
minimum required is %s, which creates a character string that contains the
fireproofing label.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the fireproofing label. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the
fireproofing label. This starting column is used for both the column
heading (at the top of the page) and the actual fireproofing label. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the label could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Fireproofing Unit Length - Turns on or off the output of the member's fireproofing
unit length.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the fireproofing unit length. The
minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the fireproofing unit length. Use
a \ to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the
fireproofing unit length. This starting column is used for both the column
heading (at the top of the page) and the actual fireproofing unit length. If
this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the
main Material Report dialog box, the unit length could be truncated or
omitted altogether.
Fireproofing Unit Volume - Turns on or off the output of the member's fireproofing
unit volume.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the fireproofing unit volume.
The minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the fireproofing unit volume.
Use a \ to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the
fireproofing value. This starting column is used for both the column
heading (at the top of the page) and the actual fireproofing unit volume. If
this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the
main Material Report dialog box, the unit volume could be truncated or
omitted altogether.
Fireproofing Length - Turns on or off the output of the member's fireproofing
length.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the fireproofing length. The
minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 437
Heading -- Defines the column header for the fireproofing length. Use a \
to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the
fireproofing value. This starting column is used for both the column
heading (at the top of the page) and the actual fireproofing length. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the length could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Fireproofing Volume - Turns on or off the output of the member's fireproofing
volume.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the fireproofing volume. The
minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the fireproofing volume. Use a \
to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the
fireproofing value. This starting column is used for both the column
heading (at the top of the page) and the actual fireproofing volume. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the volume could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Unit Length - Turns on or off the output of the member length in the report. For
members with cutbacks, FrameWorks Plus reports the out-to-out length of the
member. For members without cutbacks, arc members, and members with circular
cross sections, FrameWorks Plus reports the member line length.

Sort -- The Unit Length field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you
turn on or off the sort feature for the unit length field. If on, specifies
whether the lengths should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the unit length field. This
attribute is a special case that has two modes of reporting. You can report
Utilities
438 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
the length as in character string format (10'-5 1/2") or in floating point
format (10.458). Metric equivalents to these two format examples are 4
125 (character) or 4.126 (floating). To use the character representation,
include the %s string in the specifier; for floating representation, use %f.
The precision of the floating representation is controlled using the "C"
language accuracy syntax as described in Format Specifiers, see Linear
Material Reports, page 424.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the unit length attribute. Use a \
to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the unit
length. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the
top of the page) and the actual unit length value output for each member.
If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on
the main Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated
or omitted altogether.
Length - Specifies the overall length of the members reported on this line. This value
is determined from the quantity and unit length values. If the quantity is one, the
length value is equal to the unit length value. This is always the case when the
Condense Like Items option is off.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the length field. This attribute is
also a special case that has two modes of reporting. See the description of
the Format field for the Unit Length attribute above.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the length attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the length.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual length value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Unit Weight - Specifies the weight of each member reported on this line. Weight is
reported in pounds (imperial units) or kilograms (metric units).
For members with cutbacks, FrameWorks Plus finds the out-to-out length of the
member. FrameWorks Plus then calculates the weight of the member as the out-to-out
length times the graphic representation cross-section area times the density of the
material. The cross-section graphic representation does not include the fillets. The
material density is read from the grade.dat file.
For members without cutbacks, arc members, and members with circular cross
sections, FrameWorks Plus calculates the member weight as the member line length
times the cross-section area from the section table times the density of the material.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 439
The cross-section area from the section table includes the fillets. The material density
is read from the grade.dat file.

Note
FrameWorks Plus does not track or calculate the weight of fireproofing
material (the same member with and without fireproofing weighs the
same).
Sort -- The Unit Weight field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you
turn on or off the sort feature for the unit weight field. If on, specifies
whether the weights should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the unit weight field. The
minimum required is %f, which creates a floating point representation of
the member weight.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the unit weight attribute. Use a \
to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the unit
weight. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the
top of the page) and the actual unit weight value output for each member.
If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on
the main Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated
or omitted altogether.
Weight - Specifies the overall weight of the members reported on this line. This
value is determined from the quantity and unit weight values.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not track or calculate the weight of fireproofing
material (the same member with and without fireproofing weighs the
same). Therefore, the total weight does not include the weight of
fireproofing material.
Utilities
440 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the weight field. The minimum
required is %f, which creates a floating point representation of the overall
member weight.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the weight attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the weight.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual weight value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Surface Area - Specifies the surface area of each member reported on this line. It
represents an approximate coverage area required for application of various surface
treatments, such as paint, insulation, and so forth. Surface area is reported in units of
master units squared, (square feet or square meters).
For members with cutbacks, the surface area is the out-to-out length of the member
times the perimeter of the graphic representation cross section.
For members without cutbacks, arc members, and member with circular cross
sections, the surface area is the member line length of the member times the perimeter
of the cross-section read from the section table.

Sort -- The Surface Area is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn
on or off the sort feature for the surface area field. If on, specifies whether
the surface area should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the surface area field. The
minimum required is %f, which creates a floating point representation of
the surface area.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the surface area attribute. Use a
\ to break the header to a second line.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 441
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the surface
area. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top
of the page) and the actual surface area value output for each member. If
this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the
main Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or
omitted altogether.
Class - Turns on or off the output of the Class attribute in the report.
Sort -- The Class field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on
or off the sort feature for the class attribute. If on, specifies whether the
classes should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format for the class field in the report. The
minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number for the class
value.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the class attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the class.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual class value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Separation Line - Unlike the other toggle fields on this dialog box, this option does
not control a specific attribute of the members. Instead, it specifies whether or not a
line that separates the column heading from the report data should be displayed.
Line Character - If the Separation Line option is on, this key-in field is used to
specify which text character should be used to form the separation line under the
column heading. Any ASCII character is valid.
Related Topics
Linear Material Reports, page 424
Linear Report Data Format, page 431
Linear Report Header Format, page 429
Linear Reports Totals Format, page 442
Utilities
442 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Linear Reports Totals Format
The Formats > Totals command on the Linear Material Reports dialog box is used to
define the format of the totals information of the report. The totals are output at the
end of the report, and can optionally list the different weight classes, total number of
pieces (members), and their total length and weight.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not track or calculate the weight of fireproofing
material (the same member with and without fireproofing will weigh the
same). Therefore, the total weight of a model does not include the weight
of fireproofing material.
If the Report Width is greater than 85 columns, only part of the report is visible at the
bottom of the dialog box. Use the < Left and Right > buttons to shift the display.
When the totals format has been defined, click OK to accept the format and return to
the Material Report dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel to ignore the format changes
and use the original values.

Total Light Weight - Turns on or off the total weight display of Light Weight Class
members.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total weight value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total weight
as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total light weight field will begin.
Total Medium Weight - Turns on or off the total weight display of Medium Weight
Class members.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 443
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total weight value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total weight
as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total medium weight field will begin.
Total Heavy Weight - Turns on or off the total weight display of Heavy Weight
Class members.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total weight value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total weight
as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total heavy weight field will begin.
Total Extra Heavy Weight - Turns on or off the total weight display of Extra Heavy
Weight Class members.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total weight value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total weight
as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total extra heavy weight field will begin.
Piece Count - Turns on or off the output of the total number of pieces, or members,
included in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the piece count total. The
required format specifier is %d, which outputs the number of pieces as an
integer. You can also define a prefix or suffix to this specifier if you want.
Starting Column -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in
the piece count. If this column number is near or exceeds the Report
Width specified on the main Material Report dialog box, the piece count
may be truncated or omitted altogether.
Total Length - Turns on or off the output of the total length value for the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total length value. This
specific attribute is a special case, which can use either a %s or a %f type
specifier. See the discussion of this special case under the Format field
description for the Unit Length attribute in Linear Report Data Format,
page 431.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total length field will begin.
Total Weight - Turns on or off the output of the total weight of all members in the
report.
Utilities
444 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not track or calculate the weight of fireproofing material (the
same member with and without fireproofing weighs the same). Therefore, the total
weight of a model does not include the weight of fireproofing material.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total weight value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total weight
as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total weight field will begin.
Total Surface Area - Turns on or off the output of the total surface area of all
members in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total surface area value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total surface
area as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total surface area field will begin.
Related Topics
Linear Material Reports, page 424
Linear Report Data Format, page 431
Linear Report Header Format, page 429
Linear Reports Totals Format, page 442
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 445
3D Solids Material Reports
The Utilities > Reports > Material > 3D Solid command creates material reports for
solid members in virtually any format. An essential part of the construction
documentation for a project is the material reports, which list volumes, weight,
surface area, and other attributes of the members used in a structural design.
Creating a report requires read-only access to the model database, so you can report
on members in attached model partitions as well as members in the local (active)
model database. A report can be generated for a selected portion of a model, the
whole model, or an entire project (by attaching all project models to the local model).
You control the contents, width, pagination, and format of the report using the report
format dialog boxes. These format dialog boxes include a WYSIWYG informational
area that displays a portion of an actual report as it is currently formatted. This feature
provides instant and exact verification of how changes made to the format parameters
affect the resulting report.
This command uses the User Preference mechanism for storing and retrieving user-
defined sets of command parameters (preference sets). This allows you to define
standard report formats once, and save these as a named preference set for use on all
reports for the project. For more information, see Appendix A: Customizing
FrameWorks Plus, page 511.
When all parameters for the report output options, content, and format have been
fully defined, click OK to create the report. FrameWorks Plus builds an ASCII (text)
file containing the specified information and writes it to the project report directory
(\rpt) using the file name designated. When the report is completed, an Alert Box
displays asking if you want to review the
report. Click OK to display the report in
a dialog box. The Cancel button exits the
command.
Report Width - Defines the output width
of the report. Available options are 132
columns, 80 columns, and Specify. The
Specify option allows you to define any
number of columns, up to 132.
Width - Specifies the width of the report
(number of columns). This field is only
active if the Report Width option is set to
Specify.
Utilities
446 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Items per page - Specifies the number of items (rows) on each page if the Paginate
toggle is on.
Page Header - If on, the report lists a page header at the top of each page of the
report.
Paginate - If on, the report is divided into separate pages, each containing the number
of items defined in Items per page.
Totals - If on, FrameWorks Plus computes and outputs information on total volume,
weight, and number of pieces at the end of the report.
Report File - Defines the name of the report file. This file is placed in the \rpt
directory of the active project. The name is limited to ten characters with a three-
character extension.
Report on - Specifies whether the solids in the entire model should be reported or a
selected portion. The options are All Solids and Selection Set.
Use Selection Filter - Specifies whether the FrameWorks Plus Selection Filter should
be used to filter out members to be reported on. If on, all members are filtered,
regardless of the value of the Report on parameter. (Both All Solids and Selection Set
members are filtered.)
Included Attached Models - If on and other model partitions are attached to the
active model, these members can be included in the material report. This item is
disabled if no partitions are attached.
Report Format
The format of the report is broken down into three sections, Header, Data, and Totals.
The format of each section is controlled using a separate dialog box. These dialog
boxes are accessed by the Format pulldown menu on the 3D Solids Material Report
dialog box. Each format dialog box provides an interactive visual feedback
(WYSIWYG) area to show you the report format as it is currently defined.
Format Specifiers
In the dialog boxes that define the format, there are Format fields for each reported
attribute. These key-in fields are used to define a format specifier that is used to
generate the output characters for the specific attribute in the report.
These format specifiers use "C" language syntax for formatting the output. There is a
minimum required syntax for each specifier, which depends on the type of data being
formatted. In general, the default specifier (from the default preference set) is to
include the required syntax, or a variation thereof. You can experiment with the
formats by trying various specifiers and watching the results in the sample report
output at the bottom of the format dialog box.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 447
If the attribute data is numeric and integer, as it is for the Item Number, Quantity, ID,
and Class attributes, your specifier must include the characters %d, which creates an
integer number for each item number. In addition, you can prefix or suffix this
required portion with any alphanumeric characters. For example, if the complete
format specifier for the Item Number attribute is item %d, the report would list item 4
for the fourth item in the report.
If the attribute data is textual (a character string), as for the Name, Type, Material,
and Volume attributes, the required format specifier is %s, which simply reports the
character string information from the model database. This specifier can also have
prefixes or suffixes if you want.
For floating point (decimal) numeric data, such as Weight and Surface Area, your
format specifier must include some form of the %f specifier. This creates character
output from a real number. Inserting a precision qualifier in this format can control
the accuracy or precision of the resulting output. For example, %0.3f creates
character representation of the real number with accuracy to three places to the right
of the decimal point, for example: 65.123. Similarly, a format specifier of %0.1f
would result in output of: 65.1. Like the other specifiers, you can add an
alphanumeric prefix or suffix to the floating point specifiers. As a final example, if
the format specifier for the weight attribute is %.2f (lbs), FrameWorks Plus would list
the weight of a 200-pound member as 200.00 (lbs) in the report.
Related Topics
3D Solid Report Data Format, page 450
3D Solid Report Header Format, page 448
3D Solid Report Totals Format, page 456
3D Solids Material Reports, page 445
Analytic Reports, page 458
Linear Material Reports, page 424
Utilities
448 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
3D Solid Report Header Format
The Formats > Header command on the 3D Solid Material Reports dialog box is
used to review or modify report header format. The header section is the information
printed at the top of each page if pagination is on, or else it is printed once at the
beginning of the report. The report header can include up to 4 lines (rows) of
information, and has 6 possible report fields, which can be positioned anywhere on
the 4 lines.
If the Report Width is large (greater than 85 columns) only part of the report is visible
in the list box at the bottom of the 3D Solid Report Header Format dialog box. To see
the remainder of the sample report output, select the < Left or Right> buttons at the
bottom to shift the display.
When the header format has been defined as you want, click OK to accept the format
and return to the Material Report dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel to ignore the
format changes and use the original values.

Title - Turns on or off the title field in the report header. If the title option is off, the
three items to the right on the dialog box that control the title string and its position
are disabled.
If the title option is on, the key-in field to the right is used to specify the title to be
used for the report. Any alphanumeric string up to 80 characters in length can be
specified.
Line Number - Specifies which line (row) of text in the report header section should
include the title. Possible line numbers are 1 through 4.
Starting Column - Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the title. If
this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main 3D
Solids Material Report dialog box, the title may be truncated or omitted altogether.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 449
Project Name - Turns on or off the output of the Project Name field, which is a user-
specified name for the project or model being reported on.
If this option is on, the key-in field to the right is used to enter the project name or
description of up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Date - Turns on or off the Date field in the report header.
Format -- Specifies the format of the date string placed in the report. Five
format styles are available.
Time - Turns on or off the Time field in the report header.
Format -- Specifies the format to use for displaying the time. Either
standard (AM or PM) or military formats are available.
Page Number - Turns on or off the Page Number field in the report header. If on, the
key-in field is used to specify the string used to prefix the numeric page counter.
Line Number - Specifies which line (row) of text in the report header section the
item is displayed. Possible line numbers are 1 through 4.
Starting Column - Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the item.
Related Topics
3D Solid Report Data Format, page 450
3D Solid Report Header Format, page 448
3D Solid Report Totals Format, page 456
3D Solids Material Reports, page 445
Utilities
450 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
3D Solid Report Data Format
The Formats > Data command on the 3D Solids Material Reports dialog box is used
to review or modify the format of the report data. The report data section is the actual
member information. Each member attribute can be independently formatted and
positioned on the report line. The report data can be sorted by one or more sort keys
in ascending (increasing) or descending (decreasing) order.
In addition to the actual data output, this dialog box defines the Column Heading for
each attribute. The column heading is displayed at the top of each page and can be
one or two lines in length. Two line headings are specified by using a backslash
character (\) between the text for the first and second lines. For example, Item\ No
displays as:
Item
No
By default, the text items of both lines begin on the same column, defined by the Col
field. In this example, there is a space between the backslash and "No". Therefore, the
"No" string is shifted one character to the right of the specified starting column.
For more information on the Format fields syntax, see 3D Solids Material Reports,
page 445.
If the Report Width is greater than 85 columns, the entire report is not visible at the
bottom of dialog box. Use the < Left or Right> buttons to shift the display.
When the report data format has been defined, click OK to accept the format and
return to the 3D Solids Material Report dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel to ignore
the format changes and use the original values.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 451

Item Number - Turns on or off the item number field. This field sequentially
numbers each line of output information in the report. If this option is off, the three
items to the right on the dialog box that control the item number field and its position
are disabled.
Format -- Defines the format of the item number in the report. The
minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the item number attribute. Use a
\ to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the item
number. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the
top of the page) and the actual item number value output for each member.
If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on
the main Material Report dialog box, the item number could be truncated
or omitted altogether.
Name - Turns on or off the display of the member name in the report.
Sort -- The Name field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on
or off the sort on the name attribute, and to specify whether the names
should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
Utilities
452 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format of the name field. The minimum required is
%s, which creates a character string that contains the member name.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the name attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the name.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual name value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the name could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
ID - Turns on or off the display of the unique member ID attribute in the report. The
member ID is assigned at the time of member creation and may not be of particular
use on a material report. Also, because this field is, by definition, unique, if this
option is on, the Condense Like Items option has no effect (every member is reported
differently, and thus on separate lines).
Sort -- The ID field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on or
off the sort feature for the ID attribute. If on, specifies whether the names
should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format for the ID field. The minimum required is
%d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the ID attribute. Use a \ to break
the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the ID. This
starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual ID value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the ID could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Type - Turns on or off the output of the member type attribute in the report.
Sort -- The Type field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on
or off the sort feature for the type attribute. If on, specifies whether the
types should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 453
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format of the type field. The minimum required is
%s, which creates a character string that contains the member type (for
example, Beam, Column, ...).
Heading -- Defines the column header for the type attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the type
number. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the
top of the page) and the actual type value output for each member. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the type could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Material - Turns on or off the output of the material type attribute in the report.
Sort -- The Material field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn
on or off the sort feature for the material attribute. If on, specifies whether
the material types should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the material field. The minimum
required is %s, which creates a character string that contains the material
type (for example, steel or concrete).
Heading -- Defines the column header for the material attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the material
name. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top
of the page) and the actual material value output for each member. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the material could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Grade - Turns on or off the output of the material grade attribute in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the grade field. The minimum
required is %s, which creates a character string that contains the grade (for
example, A36 or Fc_4).
Heading -- Defines the column header for the grade attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the material
name. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top
Utilities
454 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
of the page) and the actual material value output for each member. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the grade could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Thickness - Turns on or off the output of the thickness attribute in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the thickness field. The
minimum required is %f, which creates a floating point representation of
the solid's thickness.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the thickness attribute. Use a \
to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first digit in the thickness.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual thickness value output for each member. If this
column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the thickness could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Volume - Turns on or off the solid member's net volume in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the volume field. The minimum
required is %f, which creates a floating point representation of the net
member volume.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the volume attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the volume.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual volume value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the volume could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Weight - Specifies the overall weight of the members reported on this line. This
value is determined from the quantity and unit weight values.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the weight field. The minimum
required is %f, which creates a floating point representation of the overall
member weight.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the weight attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the weight.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual weight value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 455
Material Report dialog box, the weight could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Surface Area - Specifies the surface area of each member reported on this line. The
surface area is computed from the geometry of the section and the length of the
member. It represents an approximate coverage area required for application of
various surface treatments, such as paint, insulation, and so forth. Surface area is
reported in units of master units squared, (square feet or square meters).
Sort -- The Surface Area is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn
on or off the sort feature for the surface area field. If on, specifies whether
the surface area should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the surface area field. The
minimum required is %f, which creates a floating point representation of
the surface area.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the surface area attribute. Use a
\ to break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the surface
area. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top
of the page) and the actual surface area value output for each member. If
this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the
main Material Report dialog box, the surface area could be truncated or
omitted altogether.
Class - Turns on or off the output of the Class attribute in the report.
Sort -- The Class field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on
or off the sort feature for the class attribute. If on, specifies whether the
classes should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format for the class field in the report. The
minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number for the class
value.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the class attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the class.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual class value output for each member. If this column
Utilities
456 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Material Report dialog box, the class could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Separation Line - Unlike the other toggle fields on this dialog box, this option does
not control a specific attribute of the members. Instead, it specifies whether or not a
line that separates the column heading from the report data should be displayed.
Line Character - If the Separation Line option is on, this key-in field is used to
specify which text character should be used to form the separation line under the
column heading. Any ASCII character is valid.
Related Topics
3D Solid Report Data Format, page 450
3D Solid Report Header Format, page 448
3D Solid Report Totals Format, page 456
3D Solids Material Reports, page 445
3D Solid Report Totals Format
The Formats > Totals command on the 3D Solids Material Reports dialog box is
used to define the format of the totals information of the report. The totals are output
as a single line at the end of the report, and can optionally list the total number of
pieces (members), and their total length and weight.
If the Report Width is greater than 85 columns, the entire report is not visible at the
bottom of the dialog box. Use the < Left and Right> buttons to shift the display.
When the totals format has been defined, choose the OK button to accept the format
and return to the 3D Solids Material Report dialog box. Otherwise, choose Cancel to
ignore the format changes and use the original values.

Piece Count - Turns on or off the output of the total number of pieces, or members,
included in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the piece count total. (See 3D
Solids Material Reports, page 445.) The minimum required format
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 457
specifier is %d, which outputs the number of pieces as an integer number.
You can also define a prefix or suffix to this specifier if you want.
Starting Column -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in
the piece count. If this column number is near or exceeds the Report
Width specified on the main Material Report dialog box, the piece count
could be truncated or omitted altogether.
Total Volume - Turns on or off the output of the total volume value for the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total volume value. This
specific attribute is a special case, which can use either a %s or %f type
specifier. See the discussion of this special case under the Format field
description for the Unit Length attribute in 3D Solid Report Data Format,
page 450.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total volume field will begin.
Total Weight - Turns on or off the output of the total weight of all members in the
report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total weight value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total weight
as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total weight field will begin.
Total Surface Area - Turns on or off the output of the total surface area of all
members in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total surface area value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total surface
area as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total surface area field will begin.
Related Topics
3D Solid Report Data Format, page 450
3D Solid Report Header Format, page 448
3D Solid Report Totals Format, page 456
3D Solids Material Reports, page 445
Utilities
458 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Analytic Reports
The Utilities > Reports > Analytic command creates reports on loads, supports, and
releases defined in the model. The report output is an ASCII file and is placed in the
\rpt subdirectory of the active project.
Because creating a report requires read-only access to the model database, you can
report on members in attached model partitions as well as members in the local
(active) model database. A report can be generated for a selected portion of a model,
the whole model, or an entire project (by attaching all project models to the local
model).
You control the contents, width, pagination, and format of the report using the report
format dialog boxes. These format dialog boxes include a WYSIWYG informational
area that displays a portion of an actual report as it is currently formatted. This feature
provides instant and exact verification of how changes made to the format parameters
affect the resulting report.
This command uses the User Preference mechanism for storing and retrieving user-
defined sets of command parameters (preference sets). This allows you to define
standard report formats once and save
these as a named preference set for use
on all reports for the project. For more
information, see Appendix A:
Customizing FrameWorks Plus, page
511.
Report Width - Defines the report
width. Available options are 132
columns, 80 columns, and Specify.
Width - Specifies the width of the report
up to 132 columns wide. This field is
only active if Report Width is set to
Specify.
Items per page - Specifies the number of
items (rows) on each page if the
Paginate toggle is on.
Page Header - If on, the report displays
a page header at the top of each report
page.
Paginate - If on, the report is divided
into separate pages, each containing the
number of items defined in the Items per
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 459
page field.
Load Reports - Toggle on to report on loads.
Release Reports - Toggle on to report on releases.
Support Reports - Toggle on to report on supports.
Report file - Specifies the name for the report file. The name is limited to ten
characters with a three-character extension.
Sort By - Defines how you want the items ordered in the report. If set to Members,
loads, releases, and supports are sorted based on member IDs.
If set to Load Case, Releases, and/or Supports, then items are ordered as follows:
For load cases, all members that have a load belonging to load case 1 are
listed, then all members that have a load belonging to load case 2 are
listed, and so forth.
For Supports, all members that are supported in the X direction are listed,
then all the members that are supported in the Y direction are listed, and
so forth.
For Releases, all members released in the X direction are listed, then all
members that are released in the Y direction are listed, and so forth.
Select Set - Toggle on to report on loads, releases, or supports whose members
belong to a selection set.
Use Selection Filter - Specifies whether the FrameWorks Plus Selection Filter should
be used to filter out members on which loads, supports, or releases are reported on. If
on, all members are filtered, regardless of how the Sort by parameter is set.
Include Attached Models - If on and other model partitions are attached to the active
model, then any loads, releases, or supports in the attached models are included in the
report. This option is disabled if no partitions are attached.
Report Format - The analytic report format is defined using the four dialog boxes
under the Formats pulldown. Each format dialog box provides an interactive visual
feedback (WYSIWYG) area to show you the report format as it is currently defined.
Related Topics
3D Solids Material Reports, page 445
Analytic Reports Header Format, page 460
Analytic Reports, page 458
Linear Material Reports, page 424
Loads Report Data Format, page 462
Releases Report Data Format, page 463
Supports Report Data Format, page 464
Utilities
460 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Analytic Reports Header Format
The Formats > Header command is used to review or modify report header format.
The header section is the information printed at the top of each page, if pagination is
on, or else it is printed once at the beginning of the report. The report header can
include up to 4 lines (rows) of information, and has 6 possible report fields, which
can be positioned anywhere on the 4 lines.
If the Report Width is large (greater than 85 columns) only part of the report is visible
in the list box at the bottom of the Report Header Format dialog box. To see the
remainder of the sample report output, select the < Left or Right> buttons at the
bottom to shift the display.
When the header format has been defined as you want, select the OK button to accept
the format and return to the Analytic Report dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel to
ignore the format changes and use the original values.

Title - Turns on or off the title field in the report header. If the title option is off, the
three items to the right on the dialog box that control the title string and its position
are disabled.
If the title option is on, the key-in field to the right is used to specify the title to be
used for the report. Any alphanumeric string up to 80 characters in length can be
specified.
Line Number -- Specifies which line (row) of text in the report header
section should include the title. Possible line numbers are 1 through 4.
Starting Column -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in
the title. If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width
specified on the main Analytic Report dialog box, the title could be
truncated or omitted altogether.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 461
Project Name - Turns on or off the output of the Project Name field, which is a user-
specified name for the project or model being reported on.
If this option is on, the key-in field to the right is used to enter the project name or
description of up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Date - Turns on or off the Date field in the report header.
Format -- Specifies the format of the date string placed in the report. Five
different format styles are available.
Time - Turns on or off the Time field in the report header.
Format -- Specifies the format to use for displaying the time. Either
standard (AM or PM) or military formats are available.
Page Number - Turns on or off the Page Number field in the report header. If on, the
key-in field is used to specify the string used to prefix the numeric page counter.
Line Number -- Specifies in which line (row) of text in the report header
section the item is displayed. Possible line numbers are 1 through 4.
Starting Column -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in
the item.
Related Topics
Analytic Reports Header Format, page 460
Analytic Reports, page 458
Loads Report Data Format, page 462
Releases Report Data Format, page 463
Supports Report Data Format, page 464
Utilities
462 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Loads Report Data Format
The Format > Loads command activates the Load Report Data Format dialog box,
which is used to define the load data and the format of that data in the analytic report.

Model ID - Toggle on to display the ID number of the model in which the load is
placed.
Member ID - Toggle on to display the member name on which the load is placed.
Load Case Name - Toggle on to display the name of the load case.
Load Case ID - Toggle on to display the load case ID number.
Load Type - Toggle on to display the type of load: distributed, concentrated, or
partial distributed.
Load Direction - Toggle on to display the load frame and direction.
Load Magnitude - Toggle on to display the load magnitude.
Load Location - Toggle on to display the load's location on the member.
Format - Defines the format of the characters for the attribute. For more information
on these fields, see Analytic Reports, page 458.
Heading - Defines the column header for the attribute. Use a \ to break the header to
a second line.
Col - Specifies the position (column) of the first character for that report attribute.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the page) and
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 463
the actual attribute value output for each load. If this column number is near or
exceeds the Report Width specified on the main Analytic Report dialog box, the
heading and attribute could be truncated or omitted altogether.
Separation line - Toggle on to place a line of characters between the page header
information and the items in the report.
Line Character - Defines the character to use for the separation line described above.
Any ASCII character is valid.
Related Topics
Analytic Reports Header Format, page 460
Analytic Reports, page 458
Loads Report Data Format, page 462
Releases Report Data Format, page 463
Supports Report Data Format, page 464
Releases Report Data Format
The Format > Releases command activates the Releases Report Data Format dialog
box, which is used to define the data and the format of that data you want to see in the
analytic report for releases.

Member Name - Toggle on to display the member name on which the releases are
defined.
Member ID - Toggle on to display the member ID on which the releases are defined.
Start Spec - Toggle on to display the releases defined at the member start.
End Spec - Toggle on to display the releases defined at the member end.
Format - Defines the format of the characters for the release attribute. For more
information on these fields, see Analytic Reports, page 458
Utilities
464 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Heading - Defines the column header for the release attribute. Use a \ to break the
header to a second line.
Col - Specifies the position (column) of the first character for that release attribute.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the page) and
the actual attribute value output for each release. If this column number is near or
exceeds the Report Width specified on the main Analytic Report dialog box, the
heading and attribute could be truncated or omitted altogether.
Separation line - Toggle on to place a line of characters between the page header
information and the items in the report.
Line Character - Defines the character to use for the separation line described above.
Any ASCII character is valid.
Related Topics
Analytic Reports Header Format, page 460
Analytic Reports, page 458
Loads Report Data Format, page 462
Releases Report Data Format, page 463
Supports Report Data Format, page 464
Supports Report Data Format
The Format > Supports command activates the Support Report Data Format dialog
box, which is used to define the data and the format of that data you want to see in the
analytic report for supports.

Member Name - Toggle on to display the member name on which the supports are
defined.
Member ID - Toggle on to display the member ID on which the supports are defined.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 465
Start Spec - Toggle on to display the supports defined at the member start.
End Spec - Toggle on to display the supports defined at the member end.
Format - Defines the format of the characters for the support attribute. For more
information on these fields, see Analytic Reports, page 458.
Heading - Defines the column header for the support attribute. Use a \ to break the
header to a second line.
Col - Specifies the position (column) of the first character for that support attribute.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the page) and
the actual attribute value output for each support. If this column number is near or
exceeds the Report Width specified on the main Analytic Report dialog box, the
heading and attribute could be truncated or omitted altogether.
Separation line - Toggle on to place a line of characters between the page header
information and the items in the report.
Line Character - Defines the character to use for the separation line described above.
Any ASCII character is valid.
Related Topics
Analytic Reports Header Format, page 460
Analytic Reports, page 458
Loads Report Data Format, page 462
Releases Report Data Format, page 463
Supports Report Data Format, page 464
Utilities
466 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Center of Gravity Reports
The Utilities > Reports > COG command creates a center of gravity report for your
structure.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not track or calculate the weight of fireproofing
material (the same member with and without fireproofing weighs the
same). FrameWorks Plus does not include the weight of fireproofing
material when calculating a model's center-of-gravity.
For members with cutbacks, FrameWorks Plus finds the out-to-out length of the
member. FrameWorks Plus then calculates the weight of the member as the out-to-out
length times the graphic representation cross-section area times the density of the
material. The cross-section graphic representation does not include the fillets. The
material density is read from the grade.dat file.
For members without cutbacks, arc members, and members with circular cross
sections, FrameWorks Plus calculates the member weight as the member line length
times the cross-section area from the section table times the density of the material.
The cross-section area from the section table includes the fillets. The material density
is read from the grade.dat file.

Creating a report requires read-only access to the model database, so you can report
on members in attached model partitions as well as members in the local (active)
model database. A report can be generated for a selected portion of a model, the
whole model, or an entire project (by attaching all project models to the local model).
You control the contents, width, pagination, and format of the report using the report
format dialog boxes. These format dialog boxes include a WYSIWYG area that
displays a portion of an actual report as it is currently formatted. This feature provides
instant and exact verification of how changes made to the format parameters affect
the final report.
This command uses the User Preference feature for storing and retrieving user-
defined sets of command parameters (preference sets). This allows you to define
standard report formats once and save these as a named preference set for use on all
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 467
reports for the project. For more information, see Appendix A: Customizing
FrameWorks Plus, page 511.
When all parameters for the report output options, content, and format have been
fully defined, click OK to create the report. FrameWorks Plus builds an ASCII (text)
file that contains the specified information and writes it to the project report directory
(\rpt) using the file name designated. When the report is completed, an Alert Box
displays asking if you want to review the report. Click OK to display the report in a
dialog box. The Cancel button exits the command.

Report Width - Defines the output width of report. Available options are 132
columns, 80 columns, and Specify. The Specify option allows you to define any
number of columns, up to 132.
Width - Specifies the report width (number of columns). This field is only active if
the Report Width option is set to Specify.
Items per page - Specifies the number of items (rows) on each page if the Paginate
toggle is on.
Page Header - If on, the report lists a page header at the top of each report page.
Paginate - If on, the report is divided into separate pages, each containing the number
of items defined in Items per page.
Totals - If on, FrameWorks Plus computes and outputs information on total weight,
number of pieces, and the structure's center of gravity at the end of the report.
Utilities
468 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Report File - Defines the name of the report file. This file is placed in the \rpt
directory of the active project. The name is limited to ten characters with a three-
character extension.
Report on - Specifies whether the entire model or a selected portion of the model
should be reported on. The options are All Members and Selection Set.
Use Selection Filter - Specifies whether the FrameWorks Plus Selection Filter should
be used to filter out members to be reported on. If on, all members are filtered,
regardless of the value of the Report on parameter. (Both All Members and Selection
Set members are filtered.)
Include Attached Models - If on and other model partitions are attached to the active
model, these members can be included in the center of gravity report. This item is
disabled if no other models are attached.
Report Format
The format of the report is divided into three sections: Header, Data, and Totals.
The format of each section is controlled using a separate dialog box. These dialog
boxes are accessed by the Format pulldown menu on the Center of Gravity Report
dialog box. Each format dialog box provides an interactive visual feedback
(WYSIWYG) area to show you the report format as it is currently defined.
Format Specifiers
In the dialog boxes that define the format, there are Format fields for each reported
attribute. These key-in fields are used to define a format specifier that is used to
generate the output characters for the specific attribute in the report.
These format specifiers use "C" language syntax for formatting the output. There is a
minimum required syntax for each specifier, which depends on the type of data being
formatted. In general, the default specifier (from the default preference set) is to
include the required syntax, or a variation thereof. You can experiment with the
formats by trying various specifiers and watching the results in the sample report
output at the bottom of the format dialog box.
If the attribute data is numeric and integer, your specifier must include the characters
%d. %d creates an integer number. In addition, you can prefix or suffix this required
portion with any alphanumeric characters. For example, if the complete format
specifier for the Item Number attribute is item %d, the report would list item 4 for the
fourth item in the report.
If the attribute data is textual (a character string), the required format specifier is %s,
which simply reports the character string information from the model database. This
specifier can also have prefixes or suffixes if you want.
For floating point (decimal) numeric data, your format specifier must include some
form of the %f specifier. This creates character output from a real number. The
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 469
accuracy or precision of the output can be controlled by inserting a precision qualifier
in this format. For example, %0.3f creates a real number with accuracy to three places
to the right of the decimal point, for example: 65.123. Similarly, a format specifier of
%0.1f would result in output of: 65.1. Like the other specifiers, you can add an
alphanumeric prefix or suffix to the floating point specifiers. As a final example, if
the format specifier for a weight attribute is %.2f (lbs), FrameWorks Plus would list
the weight of a 200-pound member as 200.00 (lbs) in the report.
Related Topics
3D Solids Material Reports, page 445
Analytic Reports, page 458
Center of Gravity Report Data Format, page 470
Center of Gravity Report Header Format, page 469
Center of Gravity Report Totals Format, page 475
Center of Gravity Reports, page 466
Linear Material Reports, page 424
Center of Gravity Report Header Format
The Formats > Header command is used to review or modify the report's header
format. The header section is the information printed at the top of each page, if
pagination is on, or else printed once at the beginning of the report. The report header
can include up to 4 lines (rows) of information.
If the Report Width is large (wider than 85 columns) only part of the report is visible
at the bottom of the dialog box. To see the remainder of the sample report output,
click < Left or Right> to shift the display.
When the header format has been defined as you want, click OK to accept the format
and return to the Center of Gravity Report dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel to
ignore the format changes and use the original values.

Utilities
470 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Title - Turns on or off the title field in the report header. If the title option is off, the
three items to the right that control the title string and its position are disabled.
If the title option is on, the key-in field to the right is used to specify the report title.
Any alphanumeric string up to 80 characters in length can be specified.
Project Name - Turns on or off the output of the Project Name field, which is a user-
specified name for the project or model being reported on.
If this option is on, the key-in field to the right is used to enter the project name or
description of up to 80 alphanumeric characters.
Date - Turns on or off the Date field in the report header.
Format -- Specifies the format of the date string placed in the report. Five
format styles are available.
Time - Turns on or off the Time field in the report header.
Format -- Specifies the format to use for displaying the time. Either
standard (AM or PM) or military formats are available.
Page Number - Turns on or off the Page Number field in the report header. If on, the
key-in field is used to specify the string used to prefix the numeric page counter.
Line Number - Specifies which line (row) of text in the report header section the
item is displayed. Possible line numbers are 1 through 4.
Starting Column - Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the item.
If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main
Center of Gravity Reports dialog box, the item could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Related Topics
Center of Gravity Report Data Format, page 470
Center of Gravity Report Header Format, page 469
Center of Gravity Report Totals Format, page 475
Center of Gravity Reports, page 466
Center of Gravity Report Data Format
The Formats> Data command is used to review or modify the format of the report
data. The report data section is the actual member information. Each member attribute
can be independently formatted and positioned on the report line. The report data can
be sorted by one or more sort keys in ascending (increasing) or descending
(decreasing) order.
In addition to the actual data output, this dialog box defines the Column Heading for
each attribute. The column heading is displayed at the top of each page and can be
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 471
one or two lines in length. Two-line headings are specified by using a backslash
character (\) between the text for the first and second lines. For example, Item\ No
displays as:
Item
No
By default, the text items of both lines begin on the same column, defined by the Col
field. In this example, there is a space between the backslash and "No". Therefore, the
"No" string is shifted one character to the right of the specified starting column.
For more information on the Format fields syntax, see Center of Gravity Reports,
page 466.
If the Report Width is greater than 85 columns, only part of the report is visible at
the bottom of dialog box. Use the < Left or Right > buttons to shift the display.
When the report data format has been defined, click OK to accept the format and
return to the Center of Gravity Report dialog box. Otherwise, click Cancel to ignore
the format changes and use the original values.

Item Number - Turns on or off the item number field. This field sequentially
numbers each line of output information in the report. If this option is off, the three
items to the right that control the item number field and its position are disabled.
Format -- Defines the format of the item number in the report. The
minimum required is %d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the item number attribute. Use a
\ to break the header to a second line.
Utilities
472 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the item
number. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the
top of the page) and the actual item number value output for each member.
If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on
the main Center of Gravity Reports dialog box, the item number could be
truncated or omitted altogether.
Name - Turns on or off the display of the member name in the report.
Sort -- The Name field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on
or off the sort on the name attribute, and to specify whether the names
should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format of the name field. The minimum required is
%s, which creates a character string that contains the member name.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the name attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the name.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual name value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main Center
of Gravity Reports dialog box, the name could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
ID - Turns on or off the display of the unique member ID attribute in the report. The
member ID is assigned at the time of member creation and may not be of particular
use on a center of gravity report.
Sort -- The ID field is a sortable attribute. This option lets you turn on or
off the sort feature for the ID attribute. If on, specifies whether the names
should be sorted in increasing or decreasing order.
Key -- If the Sort option is on, this field indicates the order of precedence
that the field takes during the sort procedure. A sort key value of 1
indicates that this field is sorted first. The sort key values for all fields to
be sorted must be sequential (1, 2, 3, and so forth) and unique.
Format -- Defines the format for the ID field. The minimum required is
%d, which creates an integer number.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the ID attribute. Use a \ to break
the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the ID. This
starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual ID value output for each member. If this column
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 473
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main Center
of Gravity Report dialog box, the ID could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
X Axis COG - Turns on or off the display of the center of gravity's X-axis coordinate
for a member.
Format -- Defines the format for the X-axis coordinate. The minimum
required is %s, which creates an character string of the X coordinate.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the X-axis coordinate. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character of the X-axis
coordinate. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at
the top of the page) and the actual X-axis coordinate output for each
member. If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width
specified on the main Center of Gravity Report dialog box, the X-axis
coordinate could be truncated or omitted altogether.
Y Axis COG - Turns on or off the display of the center of gravity's Y-axis coordinate
for a member.
Format -- Defines the format for the Y-axis coordinate. The minimum
required is %s, which creates an character string of the Y coordinate.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the Y-axis coordinate. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character of the Y-axis
coordinate. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at
the top of the page) and the actual Y-axis coordinate output for each
member. If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width
specified on the main Center of Gravity Report dialog box, the Y-axis
coordinate could be truncated or omitted altogether.
Z Axis COG - Turns on or off the display of the center of gravity's Z-axis coordinate
for a member.
Format -- Defines the format for the Z-axis coordinate. The minimum
required is %s, which creates an character string of the Z coordinate.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the Z-axis coordinate. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character of the Z-axis
coordinate. This starting column is used for both the column heading (at
the top of the page) and the actual Z-axis coordinate output for each
member. If this column number is near or exceeds the Report Width
specified on the main Center of Gravity Report dialog box, the Z-axis
coordinate could be truncated or omitted altogether.
Utilities
474 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Weight - Turns on or off the display of the member's weight. For members with
cutbacks, FrameWorks Plus finds the out-to-out length of the member. FrameWorks
Plus then calculates the weight of the member as the out-to-out length times the
graphic representation cross-section area times the density of the material. The cross-
section graphic representation does not include the fillets. The material density is read
from the grade.dat file.
For members without cutbacks, arc members, and members with circular cross
sections, FrameWorks Plus calculates the member weight as the member line length
times the cross-section area from the section table times the density of the material.
The cross-section area from the section table includes the fillets. The material density
is read from the grade.dat file.

Format -- Defines the format specifier for the weight field. The minimum
required is %f, which creates a floating point representation of the member
weight.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the weight attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the weight.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual weight value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main Center
of Gravity Report dialog box, the weight could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Length - Turns on or off the display of the member's length. For members with
cutbacks, FrameWorks Plus reports the out-to-out length of the member. For
members without cutbacks, arc members, and members with circular cross sections,
FrameWorks Plus reports the member line length.

Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 475
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the length field. The minimum
required is %s, which creates character string of the member length.
Heading -- Defines the column header for the length attribute. Use a \ to
break the header to a second line.
Col -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in the length.
This starting column is used for both the column heading (at the top of the
page) and the actual length value output for each member. If this column
number is near or exceeds the Report Width specified on the main Center
of Gravity Report dialog box, the length could be truncated or omitted
altogether.
Separation Line - Unlike the other toggle fields on this dialog box, this option does
not control a specific attribute of the members. Instead, it specifies whether or not a
line that separates the column heading from the report data should be displayed.
Line Character - If the Separation Line option is on, this key-in field is used to
specify which text character should be used to form the separation line under the
column heading. Any ASCII character is valid.
Related Topics
Center of Gravity Report Data Format, page 470
Center of Gravity Report Header Format, page 469
Center of Gravity Report Totals Format, page 475
Center of Gravity Reports, page 466
Center of Gravity Report Totals Format
The Formats > Totals command is used to define the total's format. Totals are output
as a single line at the end of the report and can optionally list the total number of
pieces (members), the overall structure's center of gravity, and the total structure
weight.
If the Report Width is greater than 85 columns, the entire report is not visible at the
bottom of the dialog box. Use the < Left and Right > buttons to shift the display.
When the totals format has been defined, choose the OK button to accept the format
and return to the Center of Gravity Reports dialog box. Otherwise, choose Cancel to
ignore the format changes and use the original values.
Utilities
476 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Piece Count - Turns on or off the output of the total number of pieces, or members,
included in the report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the piece count total, for more
information, see Center of Gravity Reports, page 466. The minimum
required format specifier is %d, which outputs the number of pieces as an
integer number. You can also define a prefix or suffix to this specifier if
you want.
Starting Column -- Specifies the position (column) of the first character in
the piece count. If this column number is near or exceeds the Report
Width specified on the main Center of Gravity Reports dialog box, the
piece count could be truncated or omitted altogether.
Center of Gravity - Turns on or off the output of the structure's center of gravity.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the center of gravity value. The
minimum required is %s,%s,%s that creates a character string that
contains the center of gravity coordinate location.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the center of gravity field begins.
Total Weight - Turns on or off the output of the total weight of all members in the
report.
Format -- Defines the format specifier for the total weight value. The
required component of the specifier is %f, which outputs the total weight
as a floating point value.
Starting Column -- Defines the position (column number) in the report
output line where the total weight field begins.
Related Topics
Center of Gravity Report Data Format, page 470
Center of Gravity Report Header Format, page 469
Center of Gravity Report Totals Format, page 475
Center of Gravity Reports, page 466
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 477
Review Element
The Utilities > Review Element command displays an existing member's database
and geometric attributes (or a group of members' attributes using a selection set). You
can review members from the local model as well as members in attached model
partitions.
You can save the information displayed in the Review Element dialog to an ASCII
file using the File> Save As command at the top of the dialog box.
Depending on the member type you select, linear or solid, the Review Member dialog
box displays different parameters. Refer to the corresponding parameters list (below)
for the member type you have selected.
Linear Member's Review Element Parameters
ID - Displays the member's unique member ID. This number is assigned
automatically by FrameWorks Plus at placement and is unique for this model. If the
label is enclosed in asterisks (for example, * ID: 12 *) this indicates that the member
is from an attached model partition, not the local model.
Model ID - Displays the member's model ID number. The Model ID is assigned
when a model is created and should be unique for each model in a project.
Type - Displays the member type: beam, column, vertical brace, or horizontal brace.
Name - Displays the member's name.
Start Section - Displays the section name assigned to the member's End 1. This field
displays Section Undefined if the member is an undefined member and has no
assigned section property.
End Section - Displays the section name assigned to the member's End 2. If this
section does not match the Start Section section, the member is tapered. This field
displays Section Undefined if the member is an undefined member and has no
assigned section property.
Section library - Displays the section library name that the section was extracted
from. This can be a standard section library or a user section library (for user-defined
sections). This field displays the word Inactive if the section is from a user section
library that is not attached to the model.
Material - Displays the member's material assignment (Steel, Concrete, Timber,
Plastic, Aluminum, or "Other").
FP - Displays the fireproofing type applied to the member.
Utilities
478 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Grade - Displays the material grade assigned to the member.
FP Thickness - Displays the fireproofing's thickness on the member.
Class - Displays the member's class value.
FP Length - Displays the length of the fireproofing assigned to the member.
Created - Displays the date and time that the member was created.
Modified - Displays the date and time the member was last modified.
Named Groups - Displays all the named groups that the member belongs to.
End Point 1 - Displays both the coordinates of the member's first end as well as the
member offset at this end (if any). The end point coordinates are enclosed within
parenthesis () and the offset within brackets [ ]. The offset is measured from the
current member's location to the member's original location.
End Point 2 - Displays both the coordinates of the member's second end as well as
the member offset at this end (if any). The end point coordinates are enclosed within
parenthesis () and the offset within brackets [ ]. The offset is measured from the
current member's location to the member's original location.
OV - Displays the Orientation Vector (OV) as a normalized vector triad.
CP - Lists the member's Cardinal Point value.
Reflect - Displays the member section's reflect status.
Rotation - Displays the rotation angle of the section relative to the Orientation
Vector.
Radius - Displays the arc member's radius.
Center - Displays the arc member's center point location.
Cutbacks - Displays the member's cutback information, including the member's
cutback priority, defined planar cutback, and defined copes.
Releases/Support - Displays the member's releases and supports. Releases are
displayed on top and supports on bottom.
Member Specification - Displays the member specification assign to the member.
The member specification is written to the STAAD and GTSTRUDL input decks.
Design - Displays the member's design parameters.
Code - Displays the member's code parameters.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 479
Constraint name - Displays the name of the GTSTRUDL member constraint
assigned to the member. If you are using STAAD, this field is not applicable to you.
Solid Member's Review Element Parameters
ID - Displays the solid's unique member ID. This number is assigned automatically
by FrameWorks Plus at placement and is unique for this model. If the label is
enclosed in asterisks (for example, * ID: 12 *) this indicates that the member is from
an attached partition, not the local model.
Model ID - Displays the member's model ID number. The Model ID is assigned
when a model is created and should be unique for each model in a project.
3D Type - Displays the solid's member type: Slab, Wall, or Solid.
Name - Displays the solid's member name.
Material - Displays the material assigned to the solid (Steel, Concrete, Timber,
Plastic, Aluminum, or "Other").
Grade - Displays the solid's material grade.
Class - Displays the solid's class value.
Created - Displays the date and time that the solid was created.
Modified - Displays the date and time the solid was last modified.
Named Groups - Displays all the named groups that the solid belongs to.
Thickness - Displays the solid member's thickness. The top and bottom of the solid
must be parallel, otherwise the thickness will not display.
Volume - Displays the solid member's total volume.
Net Volume - Displays the solid member's net volume. Net volume is the solid's total
volume minus the volumes of any holes in the solid member.
Surface Area - Displays the solid member's total surface area.
Note
This field does not display if you are reviewing a hole.
Net Surface Area - Displays the solid member's net surface area. Net surface area is
the solid member's total surface area minus the surface areas of any holes in the solid
member.
Utilities
480 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Note
This field does not display if you are reviewing a hole.
Centroid - Displays the solid member's centroid coordinates.
Number of Holes - Displays the number of holes in the solid.
Related Topics
Locate Element By Attributes, page 481
Locate Element By Design/Code Parameters, page 484
Review Element, page 477
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 481
Locate Element By Attributes
The Utilities > Locate Element > By Attributes command finds FrameWorks Plus
members in the active and attached models by specifying member attributes to look
for. You can search for members based on: material, member type, class, cutback,
RBJ assigned, material grade, section, element ID, name, percent flooded, assembly,
coating, end connection, fabricator name, fabricator note, member subtype, design
status, piece mark, or user attributes. In addition to these attributes, you can
optionally filter the members by creation or modification date and time.
After the members are found, you can optionally add them to a selection set for
processing with another command, add them to a named group, highlight them, or
zoom in on them in a view. This command is especially useful for finding elements
by member ID after receiving an error message listing the member ID that caused the
problem.
Material Type - Select the material type to search for. You can select from: steel,
concrete, aluminum, plastic, timber, or other.
Member Type - Select the member type to search for. You can select from: beams,
columns, vertical braces, horizontal braces, slabs, walls, or solids.
Class - Select the member class (0 through 9) to search for.
Cutback - Select the cutback type to search for: Planar, SmartCut, or Any
Cutback. For more information on cutback types, see Compute Cutbacks, page 413
and SmartCut, page 419.
RBJ - Select the rule-based joint type to search for. For more information on rule-
based joints, see Create Rule Based Joint, page 397.
Element ID - Select to search for members with the specified element ID.
Name - Select to search for members with the specified name.
Nodes - Select to search for member with additional nodes. For more information on
placing additional nodes on members, see Create Intermediate Node.
Grade - Select to search for members with a specified grade. You must key in the
grade name using the correct case. For example, if you enter a36 when looking for
members with grade A36, FrameWorks Plus will not find the members. You must key
in A36. For more information on material grades, see Modify Material Grade.
Section - Select to search for members with a specific section size. You must key in
the section name using the correct case. For example, if you enter w10x30 when
looking for members with section W10X30, FrameWorks Plus will not find the
members. You must key in W10X30.
Utilities
482 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
More - Select to activate a second dialog box on which you can define more member
attributes to search for. For more information about these attributes, see Modify
Additional Attributes, page 311.
Filter Elements By Date - Select to additionally filter members by creation or
modification date. You can select:
On or Before - Members created or modified on or before the date and
time that you specify.
On or After - Members created or modified on or after the date and time
that you specify.
Between - Members created or modified between two dates and times that
you specify.
Dates must be entered using month/day/year as the format. Times must be entered
using military time and using hour:minutes:seconds as the format.
Highlight all items found - Toggle on to highlight all the members in the model that
match the search criteria.
Zoom to item - Toggle on to zoom in on members that match the search criteria. You
need to select the view that you want to use to zoom in on the member. Use the Prev
and Next buttons to step through a group of members zooming in on each member of
the group.
Make selection set with results - Toggle on to create a selection set that includes all
members that match the search criteria.
Add to Named Group - Select to add all members that match the search criteria to a
named group. For more information on named groups, see Named Groups, page 308.
Locate from Attached Models - Toggle on to search all the attached models in
addition to the local model.
Results - Displays how many members match the search criteria. If you use the Prev
and Next buttons to step through the group, the Results area displays which member
of the group you are on.
Prev - Displays the previous member of the found group. This option is useful if you
want to highlight or zoom in on individual members of the group.
Next - Displays the next member of the found group. This option is useful if you
want to highlight or zoom in on individual members of the group.
OK - Starts the locate process using the attributes and options defined.
Related Topics
Locate Element By Attributes, page 481
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 483
Locate Element By Design/Code Parameters, page 484
Review Element, page 477
Utilities
484 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Locate Element By Design/Code Parameters
The Utilities > Locate Element > By Design/Code Parameters command finds
FrameWorks Plus members in the model that have corrupted code or design
parameters.
Members with corrupted
Code Parameters - Select to
locate members with
corrupted code parameters.
Replace with default
parameters - Select Yes to
replace corrupted code
parameters with default code
parameters.
Members with corrupted
Design Parameters - Select
to locate members with
corrupted design parameters.
This option is only available if
GTSTRUDL is selected as the
3rd party software.
Replace with default parameters - Select Yes to replace corrupted design
parameters with default design parameters.
Members with default Code Parameters - Select to locate members with default
code parameters.
Members with default Design Parameters - Select to locate members with default
design parameters. This option is only available if GTSTRUDL is selected as the 3rd
party software.
Create log file - Select to create a log file. The log file location is displayed below
this option.
Related Topics
Locate Element By Attributes, page 481
Locate Element By Design/Code Parameters, page 484
Review Element, page 477
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 485
Review Log File
The Utilities > Review Log File command opens any log file created by
FrameWorks Plus so you can review the results. You can view log files from Batch
Cutouts, Verify Model, and other processes.
File - Open Log File - Specifies which cutout log file you want to open and review.
Log file display area - Displays the selected log file.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
Command Prompt Commands, page 29
Compress Models Key-in, page 35
Create Drawing File Key-in, page 32
Create Envelope File Key-in, page 34
Create Model Key-in, page 30
Create Project Key-in, page 30
Create SmartPlant Review File Key-in, page 34
Create User Section Library Key-in, page 33
Review Log File, page 485
SDNF Import Key-in, page 35
Solid Cutouts, page 286
Update Clash Envelope Builder Files Key-in, page 38
Upgrade Project Key-in, page 38
Verify Model Key-in, page 37
Verify Model, page 142
Utilities
486 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Review Section Library
The Utilities > Section > Review command reviews section names in the section
libraries and reviews section properties. This same dialog box is used for the Select
Section function, which is activated by Select buttons found on several different
dialog boxes throughout FrameWorks Plus. The Select function is often used instead
of keying in a section name or browsing the section library for a specific section
name.
You can review the standard section library and/or the user section library if one is
active. The Section Library command is used to attach or detach a user section
library.
The large section list box on the lower half of the dialog box is where section names
and properties are displayed. All sections that match the section type and search string
criteria in the active section library are listed. An informational field at the top of the
list box displays the number and type found, for example, 200 Channels Found. If
there are no sections in the active library of the specified type or none matching the
search string, the message No Sections Found displays.
To review a specific section's properties, select the section name from the list box,
and then click Properties to review the geometric and engineering properties.
If you are reviewing arbitrary section properties, you can edit the arbitrary section's
torsional constant (J) and/or it's shear center by double-clicking on that property. Key
in the new torsional constant or shear center in the field that displays, and then click
Accept.
Choose the Continue button to return to the section table review mode, where all
section names are displayed in the list box.
When you are using the Select Section function (clicking Select on a dialog box), you
can review section names and properties as described above. You can also select a
specific section to become the active section. To do this, select the section name from
the list, and then click Select.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 487

Library - Specifies which library, standard or user, from which to review or select
sections.
Note
This option is disabled when no user section library is active (standard
library only).
Name - Displays the library being reviewed.
Section Type - Specifies the section type to be reviewed or selected.
Search String - Defines a search string, which is used as a filter for displaying
sections that contains a certain set of characters. For example, when reviewing I
sections from the AISC library, if you specify a search string of W14, FrameWorks
Plus displays only those sections whose names start with the string "W14". If this
field is blank, all sections of the specified type are displayed.
Related Topics
Change Cell File, page 56
Create User Section Table, page 23
Create User Section, page 488
Interactive Section Tables (IST), page 57
Review Section Library, page 486
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Utilities
488 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Create User Section
The Utilities > Sections > Create command allows you to build your own
nonstandard sections and store them in the project's user section library. After being
created, these sections can be retrieved and used in any model in your project.
Before using this command, make certain that you have a user section library
attached. Otherwise, a warning message displays when the command is selected.
You can create sections of any of the available parametric section types. These
section types include both standard steel sections (I-sections, channels, and so forth)
as well as typical concrete section types (joist, inverted tee, half-joist, and so forth). In
addition, you can create your own arbitrary sections from generic MicroStation
graphics and have FrameWorks Plus calculate the section's engineering properties.
Important
Because mills use a different fillet radii, sections are created using square
corners. No fillets are considered when calculating properties. You need to
edit the section properties after creating the section to get correct weight
calculations.
FrameWorks Plus cannot calculate the torsional constant for some
complex arbitrary sections. You can manually edit the arbitrary section's
torsional constant and the shear center using the Review Section Library
command.
If you are planning on creating arbitrary sections with curved edges, keep in mind
that FrameWorks Plus only supports circular arcs (one radius ellipses) for creating
arbitrary sections. You cannot create arbitrary sections using ellipses (two radius
ellipses) graphics.
Graphics used to create the arbitrary section must be in a plan (top) view and be either
a MicroStation shape or complex shape.
You can also use an existing section from either the standard or user section libraries
as a template, or seed section, to retrieve the geometric properties from a section
already in the library, making modifications as necessary, and store the new section
by another name.
Material properties (f`
c
, F
y
, F
u
, and Density) for all user sections are read from the
grade.dat file.
The name assigned to any user section must be unique to both the user and standard
section libraries, unless you are redefining an existing user section.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 489

Section Types - Specifies the section type you are creating: Steel or Concrete. The
value of this setting changes the section shapes available on the Shape option list.
Shape - Lists all available shapes for the section type selected with the Section Types
item.

Use Seed Section - Defines if a seed section is used. Key in the seed section's name
in the key-in field. The seed section can be from either the standard or user section
library. When a section name is entered, the properties from the selected section
display in the Section Parameters area.
Utilities
490 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Name - Specifies a name for the section being created. The specified name should be
unique with no more than 24 characters and no spaces. If a section of the same name
exists in the standard section library, an error message displays. If another section of
the same name already exists in the user section library, you are asked if you want to
overwrite the existing section. FrameWorks Plus converts section names to all upper
case letters.
If you are creating an arbitrary section, the first six characters of the name must be
unique to any other arbitrary section name. Arbitrary section shapes are stored in a
MicroStation cell library using the first six characters for the cell name. If the first six
characters in the name are not unique, unpredictable results can occur when
displaying arbitrary section shapes. In addition, you cannot use spaces in an arbitrary
section name.
Note
Depending on the section shape you have selected, not all of the following
properties will display.
Depth - Specify the section's depth.
Width - Specify the section's width.
Diameter - Specify the section's diameter.
Thickness - Specify the section's thickness.
Flange Width - Specify the section's flange width.
Flange Thickness - Specify the section's flange thickness.
Web Thickness - Specify the section's web thickness.
Vertical Leg - Specify the section's vertical leg.
Horizontal Leg - Specify the section's horizontal leg.
BtoB Spacing - Specify the section's back-to-back spacing.
Bottom Width - Specify the section's bottom width.
Lower Web Thickness - Specify the section's lower web thickness.
Clear - Clears values from the section parameters fields.
Create - Creates the section. FrameWorks Plus uses the user-specified geometry to
compute all related section properties and write the new section to the attached user
section library. The new section is immediately available for use in the model.
If you are creating an arbitrary section and haven't placed a MicroStation fence
around the arbitrary section's foot print, clicking Create will prompt you to place a
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 491
fence. Once the fence is placed, you will need to click Create again to create the
section.
Cancel - Exits the command.
Related Topics
Change Cell File, page 56
Create User Section Table, page 23
Create User Section, page 488
Interactive Section Tables (IST), page 57
Review Section Library, page 486
Save FWP Settings, page 147
Section Library, page 55
Utilities
492 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Steel Detailing
The Utilities > Sections > Detailing command activates the
Steel Detailing tool box. The Steel Detailing commands place generic MicroStation
graphics that look like FrameWorks Plus cross sections, section elevations, and
section plans. However, because these are generic MicroStation graphics, they are not
associated with the FrameWorks Plus model in any way. In fact, you need to use
MicroStation commands to move, copy, and delete graphics placed with these
commands.
To access the Steel Detailing commands while in generic MicroStation, key in mdl
load dtail in the MicroStation command key-in field.
Topics

Place Cross Section places a cross-section graphic of the selected section.

Place Section Elevation places a section as it would look in an elevation view.

Place Section Plan places a section as it would look in a plan view.

Drawing Trim Line edits frozen view graphics when the automatic process
end treatments option is inadequate for special connections.

Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 493
Place Cross Section
The Place Cross Section command places a cross-section graphic in the
design file.
To access the Steel Detailing commands while in generic MicroStation, key in mdl
load dtail in the MicroStation command key-in field.

Active Section Library - Displays the active section library. You can place cross-
sections from either the standard section library or the user section library.
Section - Displays the active cross-section to place. You can key in a new cross-
section size or click Select to browse the section library for a section.
Select - Displays the Select Section dialog box that you can use to select another
cross section type and/or size.
CP - Defines the cardinal point to place the cross-section by. The standard ten
FrameWorks Plus cardinal points are available.

Rotation - Specifies the cross-section's placement angle. You can select the four
main angles (0, 90, 180, and 270) from the option list or key in the rotation angle.
Reflect - Reflects the section about a horizontal and/or vertical axis.
Utilities
494 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Crosshatch - Displays crosshatches on the cross-section.
Symbology - Activates the Graphic Symbology dialog box. For more information,
see Graphic Symbology, page 497.
Related Topics
Drawing Trim Line, page 496
Graphic Symbology, page 497
Place Cross Section, page 493
Place Section Elevation, page 494
Place Section Plan, page 495
Place Section Elevation
The Place Section Elevation command places a section graphic in the design
file as it would appear in an elevation view.
To access the Steel Detailing commands while in generic MicroStation, key in mdl
load dtail in the MicroStation command key-in field.

Active Section Library - Displays the active section library. You can place sections
from either the standard section library or the user section library.
Section - Displays the active section to place. You can key in a new section size or
click Select to browse the section library for a section.
Select - Displays the Select Section dialog box that you can use to select another
section type and/or size.
CP - Defines the cardinal point to place the section by. The standard ten FrameWorks
Plus cardinal points are available.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 495

Reflect - Reflects the section about the horizontal and/or vertical axis.
Symbology - Activates the Graphic Symbology dialog box. For more information,
see Graphic Symbology, page 497.
Related Topics
Drawing Trim Line, page 496
Graphic Symbology, page 497
Place Cross Section, page 493
Place Section Elevation, page 494
Place Section Plan, page 495
Place Section Plan
The Place Section Plan command places a section graphic in the design file
as it would appear in a plan view.
To access the Steel Detailing commands while in generic MicroStation, key in mdl
load dtail in the MicroStation command key-in field.

Active Section Library - Displays the active section library. You can place sections
from either the standard section library or the user section library.
Utilities
496 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Section - Displays the active section to place. You can key in a new section size or
click Select to browse the section library for a section.
Select - Displays the Select Section dialog box, which you can use to select another
section type and/or size.
CP - Define the cardinal point to place the section by. The standard ten FrameWorks
Plus cardinal points are available.

Reflect - Reflects the section about the horizontal and/or vertical axis.
Symbology - Activates the Graphic Symbology dialog box. For more information,
see Graphic Symbology, page 497.
Related Topics
Drawing Trim Line, page 496
Graphic Symbology, page 497
Place Cross Section, page 493
Place Section Elevation, page 494
Place Section Plan, page 495
Drawing Trim Line
The Drawing Trim Line command edits frozen view graphics when the
automatic process end treatments option is inadequate for special connections.
No automatic updates of the Model are made when using this command. This
command edits only the Frozen View graphics, not the graphics placed using other
Steel Detailing commands.
Note
This command is not available in the FrameWorks Plus modeling
environment.
1. Open the frozen view file in generic MicroStation.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 497
2. Type mdl load dtail to activate the Steel Detailing commands.
3. Place a trim line. The trim line can be a MicroStation's linestring or complex
linestring, shape or complex shape, or circle or ellipse. An element in a reference
file can also be selected.
4. Select the Drawing Trim Line command.
5. Select the member to cut (in the frozen view).
6. Select the trim line.
Related Topics
Drawing Trim Line, page 496
Graphic Symbology, page 497
Place Cross Section, page 493
Place Section Elevation, page 494
Place Section Plan, page 495
Graphic Symbology
The Symbology button defines the graphic display parameters for the members,
hidden lines, and crosshatches created using the Steel Detailing commands.

Level - Defines the level (1-63) on which the graphic is placed.
Color - Defines the color (0-254) of the graphic. You can key in the color number, or
select a color from the color palette.
Style - Defines the line style (0-7) of the graphic. You can key in a line style number,
or select the line style from the pulldown list.
Weight - Defines the line weight (0-15) of the graphic. You can key in a line weight
number, or select the line weight from the pulldown list.
Hatch Angle - Specifies the crosshatch line angle.
Spacing Factor - Specifies the spacing between the crosshatch lines (in sub-units).
Utilities
498 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Related Topics
Drawing Trim Line, page 496
Graphic Symbology, page 497
Place Cross Section, page 493
Place Section Elevation, page 494
Place Section Plan, page 495
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 499
Create Mapping File
The Utilities > Create Mapping File command creates an ASCII mapping file for
the model's active section table and 3rd party application. Many times, FrameWorks
Plus and 3rd party applications use different names for the exact same section. The
mapping file solves the naming conflicts by mapping section names in FrameWorks
Plus to section names in the other applications.
This command creates a mapping file for the model's active section table and 3rd
party software. The mapping file is named after the active 3rd Party Software and the
active section table and is created in the project\int directory with a .fmf extension.
For example, aisc_GTSTRUDL.fmf is the map file for the AISC table to GTSTRUDL
section names. You need to create a mapping file for each section table/application
combination you plan to use.
Warning
The mapping file created by this command is a template. FrameWorks
Plus does write known-to-be-different section names to the mapping file.
However, you are responsible for verifying, editing, updating, and
maintaining the 3rd party application section names in the file.
Mapping File Format
The mapping file is an ASCII formatted file with six columns of information. Each
column must be separated by at least one space or tab character Comment lines
should start with an exclamation point (!). Lines are limited to 132 characters in
length. The last line in the file must contain the word FINISH in the first column.
Column 1 -- Indicates the section type (channel, angle, and so forth) or
contains an exclamation point if it is a comment line. The section
indicators are: 1 - I-section; 2 - Channels; 3 - Angles; 4 - Tees; 5 - Double
Angles; 6 - Double Channels; 7 - Rectangular Tubes; 8 - Rectangular
Solids; 9 - Pipes; 10 - Solid Rounds; 11 - NOT USED; 12 - Trapezoidal;
13 - Inverted Tees; 14 - Inverted Angles; 15 - Joist; 16 - Half Joists; and
17 - Arbitrary Sections.
Column 2 -- Should always contain the letters FWP.
Column 3 -- Contains the name of the section as it is called in
FrameWorks Plus.
Column 4 -- Should always contain the letters ANL.
Column 5 -- Contains the name of the section table in the 3rd party
application. If the 3rd party application does not require the section table
name, the word DUMMY should be used.
Utilities
500 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Column 6 -- Contains the name of the section as it is called in the 3rd
party application. It is your responsibility to edit the section name in this
column to match the section name in the 3rd party software.
Here is an example of a mapping file. Because mapping files can be quite long, only a
few lines are shown.
1 FWP W44X285 ANL WSHAPES9 W44X285
1 FWP W44X248 ANL WSHAPES9 W44X248
1 FWP W44X224 ANL WSHAPES9 W44X224
1 FWP W44X198 ANL WSHAPES9 W44X198
!
FINISH
Related Topics
3rd Party Software, page 183
Add Groups to Input Deck, page 117
Analysis, page 112
Code Parameters, page 362
Create Intermediate Node, page 358
Create Mapping File, page 499
Create Member Specification, page 360
Custom Code Parameters, page 184
Design Parameters, page 391
Import Analytical Deck, page 129
Member Constraints, page 393
Read GTSTRUDL Results, page 119
Read STAAD Results, page 125
Write GTSTRUDL Input, page 112
Write STAAD Input, page 121
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 501
Reference PDS Model
The Reference PDS Model command attaches and detaches models from the PDS
project to the model as reference files. The model to attach can be from any discipline
and design area in the project.
Note
You must use the FrameWorks Plus Attach Model command to attach
another Frameworks Plus model if you want to see the intelligence of that
model. If you attach a FrameWorks Plus model to another FrameWorks
Plus model using this command, it will appear to be a generic
MicroStation reference file.

Disciplines - Lists all disciplines. Select the discipline that contains the model you
want to attach; then, click Attach.
Areas - Lists all design areas defined in the active project. Select the design area that
contains the model you want to attach; then, click Attach.
Area/Model - Specifies whether to attach all models in a design area or an individual
model.
Attach by Area -- Attaches all models in the selected design area.
Attach by Model -- Displays all models in the design area so you can
select which model you want to attach.
Propagated/Sparse - Specify whether you want to attach the sparse model or the
corresponding propagated model. This option only displays if you are attaching a
structural model.
Attach - Attaches a reference model. You must select a Discipline and a Design Area
before you can select a reference model to attach.
Utilities
502 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Detach - Detaches the selected reference model. You must click Show Attachments
and select the reference model you want to detach before clicking Detach.
Show Attachments - Displays all reference models attached to the active model.
Exit - Exits the Reference Model command.
Related Topics
Area Volume Graphics, page 508
Reference PDS Model, page 501
Review PDS Attributes, page 505
Review PDS Clash, page 503
Window to Named PDS Item, page 506
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 503
Review PDS Clash
The Review PDS Clash command edits and reviews existing clashes and approves
existing clashes.
Note
In order to review clashes involving structural models, the structural
models must be propagated.

Project Name - Displays the active project name.
Design Area - Displays the active design area name.
Clash Type - Displays the clash type.
Date - Displays the date and time the clashes were detected.
Unapprove Clash - Changes the status of the clash from approved to unapproved.
Approve Real Clash - Approves the clash as a real clash in the Project Control
Database.
Utilities
504 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Approve False Clash - Approves the clash as a false clash in the Project Control
Database.
Review Unapproved Clash / Review Approved Clash - Specifies if you want to
review approved or unapproved clashes.
Clash Marker - Displays the number of the current clash. Select a marker number
with the left and right arrows, or select the field and key in a marker number.
Item A - Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one
item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the
model name and design area.
Item B - Displays the model name and the corresponding design area that has the one
item of the clash. The descriptions of the clashing component display below the
model name and design area.
Comments - Displays existing comments about the active clash. You can also select
the field and type in any additional information.
Highlight Clash - Highlights the clash in the selected view.
Select View - Zooms in and updates the selected view. Click Select View then select
the view you want to update.
Related Topics
Area Volume Graphics, page 508
Reference PDS Model, page 501
Review PDS Attributes, page 505
Review PDS Clash, page 503
Window to Named PDS Item, page 506
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 505
Review PDS Attributes
The Review PDS Attributes command displays the database attributes of a selected
component. Items being reviewed can be in the active model or in an attached PDS
reference file.
Note
To view pipe centerlines (to review line segments), you need to display
construction type elements. Use the MicroStation Settings> View
Attributes> Turn On Construction command.

Attribute Name - Lists the item's attributes.
Value - Displays the item's attribute value that is defined in the database.
Close - Exits the Review PDS Attributes dialog box.
Related Topics
Area Volume Graphics, page 508
Reference PDS Model, page 501
Review PDS Attributes, page 505
Review PDS Clash, page 503
Window to Named PDS Item, page 506
Utilities
506 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Window to Named PDS Item
The Window to Named PDS Item command zooms in on an item whose attribute
you identify. You can search for items in the active model or in attached PDS
reference files.

Active Model / Reference Files - Specifies whether to look for the item in the active
model or in the attached reference files.
Discipline - Specifies the discipline of the item you are looking for. You can select:
Piping, Equipment, PE HVAC, or Raceway. Depending on which discipline you
select, the item attributes you can search for changes.
Piping Attributes -- Line Number Label, Line ID, Inspection Iso ID,
Piping Component Number, Pipe Tag, Instrument Component Number, or
Pipe Support Number
Equipment Attributes -- Equipment Number or Equipment and Nozzle
Number
PE HVAC Attributes -- System ID or Item ID
Raceway Attributes -- RCP Tag, One Line Tag, Drop Point Tag, or
Equipment ID
Item Name - Specify the attribute value to search for.
Restore View of Model - Restores the view setting.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 507
Related Topics
Area Volume Graphics, page 508
Reference PDS Model, page 501
Review PDS Attributes, page 505
Review PDS Clash, page 503
Window to Named PDS Item, page 506
Utilities
508 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Area Volume Graphics
The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design
areas in the model so that you can see their location.
Before you can see the volumes in FrameWorks Plus, you must turn on the
Constructions view attribute. You can activate the View Attributes dialog box by
pressing CTRL+B. In addition, the following system environment variables must be
defined to control the symbology and level of the volumes:
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE
AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL

Place Diagonal Lines - Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for easier
identification in the model.
Add/Revise - Select the area to add to the model.
Remove - Removes the selected area from the model.
Hilite - Highlights the area in the model.
Update - Updates areas that are already displayed in the model. Use this command if
the boundaries of the area are changed.
Show - Adds the selected area to the model.
Exit - Closes the dialog box and exits the command.
Utilities
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 509
Related Topics
Area Volume Graphics, page 508
Reference PDS Model, page 501
Review PDS Attributes, page 505
Review PDS Clash, page 503
Window to Named PDS Item, page 506
Utilities
510 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 511
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus is designed to provide maximum flexibility, both in modeling as
well as creating drawings and reports. To be flexible, FrameWorks Plus uses many of
the tools available in MicroStation, as well as some that are specific to FrameWorks
Plus. To provide a high degree of customization but still keep things as simple as
possible, all parameters and configurations are default driven. That is, FrameWorks
Plus provides a reasonable default value for each parameter, which you can override
as needed.
Related Topics
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus, page 511
Environment Variables, page 512
FrameWorks Plus Settings, page 518
Seed Files, page 519
User Preference Sets, page 516
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
512 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Environment Variables
There are several environment variables in the ..\fwplus\data\config.dat file that you
can set to customize FrameWorks Plus.
When you create a project (or open a model in a project created prior to version 3.2),
FrameWorks Plus copies the config.dat file in the ..\fwplus\data folder to the project's
\data folder. The project config.dat file is the one FrameWorks Plus reads when
opening a model in that project. FrameWorks Plus does not read the config.dat file in
the ..\fwplus\data directory.
Because the config.dat file is kept on a project basis, you can edit the individual
project config.dat files to have different setting for different projects. This is
especially useful if you access imperial and metric projects from the same computer.
Note
You can set environment variables in Start > Settings > Control Panel >
System > Advanced > Environment Variables, however we do not
recommend it. FrameWorks Plus reads the config.dat file last when
starting, and therefore, overwrites any duplicate environment variables
that were defined in your control panel. Having environment variables
defined in both the control panel and the config.dat file can cause
confusion when trying to change variable settings.
You can use UNC (Universal Naming Convention) paths for directory locations. For
example, instead of mounting a server that contains your section tables, you can
define the directory using the syntax: FW_ESL_DIR= \\servername\sharename\esl\
FWBIN -- Sets the location of FrameWorks Plus bin directory.
FW_AUTO_COMPRESS -- Specifies if the model database should be
compressed automatically when you exit the model. Set to 0 (zero) to not
compress the model. Set to 1 to compress the model. Please note that
compressing a very large model can cause a pause during model exiting
while the model database is being compressed.
FW_BDR_DIR -- Sets the location of drawing border files.
FW_DATA -- Sets the location of the FrameWorks Plus data directory.
This is useful when you want to use different grade.dat and attributes.dat
files for different projects.
FW_ESL_DIR -- Sets the location of standard section libraries, (aisc, cisc,
and so forth).
FW_USER_ESL -- Sets the location of user section libraries. You must
put corresponding cell libraries for arbitrary sections in this same location.
We recommend that you define this environment variable after creating a
new project.
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 513
FW_NMDGRPS - Defines the location of the .ngp file (the named groups
file) to use. If not defined here, the project .ngp file is used by default.
FW_OTHER_MATERIAL -- Sets the name for the user-definable
material. The material name is limited to 16 characters including
embedded spaces. If you do not set this variable, the user-definable
material is labeled Other by default.
FW_PRODUCT -- Sets the location of the main FrameWorks Plus
directory. This variable must be set to start FrameWorks Plus using the
mdl load fwp MicroStation key-in and to create models using the
command-line key-in command cremod.
FW_PREFERENCE -- Sets the full directory path and file name for the
default preference file. Use this environment variable to use a preference
file other than the default fw.rsc or fwm.rsc file. You can also set the
default preference editor by using the File> Central Preference Editor
command.
FW_PROJDIR -- Location of the directory that contains the project.
FW_RSC_DIR -- Directory path to FrameWorks Plus resource (or
preference) files.
FW_SEEDDIR -- Location of seed files used to create new models inside
PD_Shell.
FW_SOLID_STROKE -- Specifies the stroking tolerance factors for the
maximum distance between a solid's actual curve and the approximating
vectors. The greater the number, the less processing time that is required
to display the solid or calculated the solid's volume/surface. However, the
curve representation (and any volume calculations) will not be as precise.
For example, a setting of 0.1 will cause faster processing but the results
will be less precise than a setting of 0.001.
We recommend that you use a higher stroking tolerance setting until you are
ready to produce your final deliverables. You need to use a lower stroking
tolerance setting for these operations.
FW_VOLUME_TOL -- Specifies the tolerance for calculating the volume
of solid elements (slabs, wall, and generic solids). The lower the tolerance,
the longer the volume calculation will take, but it will be more accurate.
Set this tolerance with care. For example, volume calculations on a slab
with a circular hole can take several hours if the tolerance is set to 0.0001.
However, with the tolerance set to 0.01, the calculation would take 5
seconds.
FWSUPFONTNUM -- Specifies the font for the FrameWorks Plus
member support labels (pie shaped labels used to identify supports applied
to a member). Do not edit this environment variable unless you plan to
create your own support labels. The default font is 34.
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
514 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
FWRELFONTNUM -- Specifies the font for the FrameWorks Plus
member release labels (box shaped labels used to identify releases applied
to a member). Do not edit this environment variable unless you plan to
create your own release labels. The default font is 35.
PML_CEL -- Sets the location of the cell file that contains PML tutorials.
FW_STAAD_VER -- Specifies the version of STAAD that you are using.
Must be set to version 14.2 or later.
Sg -- Defines the gravity of seawater. This value is multiplied by the water
density to compute the density of seawater and is used by FrameWorks
Plus in MDP buoyancy calculations.
WaterDensity_e -- Defines the density of water in imperial units.
WaterDensity_m -- Defines the density of water in metric units.
HullGap_e -- Specify the default value that appears in Create Rule Based
Joint, page 397 for Set to to define the required gap between the target
and secondary member measured along the supporting member. Used in
imperial models.
HullGap_m -- Specify the default value that appears in Create Rule Based
Joint for Set to to define the required gap between the target and
secondary member measured along the supporting member. Used in
metric models.
CLGapFactor_e -- Specify the factor to use to calculate the maximum
centerline gap between the target member and the secondary member for a
rule-based joint. The factor specified here is multiplied by the diameter of
the supporting member. The result is compared with the actual centerline
gap. If the gap is greater than the result, eccentricity is introduced into the
joint and a message appears. Used in imperial models.
CLGapFactor_m -- Specify the factor to use to calculate the maximum
centerline gap between the target member and the secondary member for a
rule-based joint. The factor specified here is multiplied by the diameter of
the supporting member. The result is compared with the actual centerline
gap. If the gap is greater than the result, eccentricity is introduced into the
joint and a message appears. Used in metric models.
RBJTolerance_e -- Specify the percentage tolerance that you will accept
between the actual gap and the required gap. FrameWorks Plus computes
the tolerance using the following equation: [(Actual gap - Required gap) /
Required gap] X 100% = tolerance percentage. The calculated tolerance is
compared with the tolerance specified here. Used in imperial models.
RBJTolerance_m -- Specify the percentage tolerance that you will accept
between the actual gap and the required gap. FrameWorks Plus computes
the tolerance using the following equation: [(Actual gap - Required gap) /
Required gap] X 100% = tolerance percentage. The calculated tolerance is
compared with the tolerance specified here. Used in metric models.
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 515
LminTolerance_e -- Not used in FrameWorks Plus version 7.2 or earlier.
LminTolerance_m -- Not used in FrameWorks Plus version 7.2 or earlier.
DiameterToRoll_e -- Pipe sections less than or equal to this dimension are
hot rolled. Diameters greater than this value are rolled plate. This flag is
indicated in the MDP table 533, column 11. Used in imperial models.
DiameterToRoll_m -- Pipe sections less than or equal to this dimension
are hot rolled. Diameters greater than this value are rolled plate. This flag
is indicated in the MDP table 533, column 11. Used in metric models.
The fw.cfg and ist.cfg Files
When you install FrameWorks Plus, the fw.cfg and ist.cfg files are delivered to the
MicroStation folder $Microstation\config\appl and to the FrameWorks Plus folder
(c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus by default). When FrameWorks Plus starts, either
standalone or through PD_Shell, the ist.cfg and fw.cfg files in the MicroStation folder
are used. If FrameWorks Plus cannot find the two files in that folder, then the files in
the FrameWorks Plus folder are used.
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
516 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
User Preference Sets
FrameWorks Plus provides maximum versatility by allowing you to define virtually
all parameters that affect command operation: graphical symbology, levels, spacing,
and so forth. The set of parameters for a specific command is called a preference set.
A preference set contains command parameter values and a user-specified name. All
commands are delivered with a default preference set, which defines the set of
command parameters loaded when you first execute a command. You can redefine, or
overwrite, the delivered default preference set to establish new default values, and
you can create new preference sets with unique names. These preference sets are
stored in the FrameWorks Plus resource file, or preference file.
All commands that use preference sets also use a dialog box for data entry. At the top
of the dialog box is a menu bar with a File pulldown menu. This pulldown menu
provides access to three commands: Load, Save, and Save As.

The interface for loading or saving preference sets is identical for all FrameWorks
Plus commands. To load an existing preference set, which loads the stored command
parameters into the current dialog box, select the Load command. This activates a
second-level dialog box that lists all available preference sets for the active command.
Simply select a preference set name with the pointer. You can review the stored
parameters by turning on the Review Preferences toggle. When this is on, the values
for each preference set are displayed in the command dialog box. Click OK to accept
the selected preference set. To exit without changing the existing command
parameters (abort the Load operation), click OK without selecting a preference set
name.
To redefine the values of an existing preference set, set the parameters in the
command dialog box, and then select the Save command from the File pulldown.
This overwrites the values of the currently loaded preference set in the preference file.
To create new preference sets, modify the current command parameters, and then
select the Save As command. A dialog box displays in which you can specify the new
name for the preference set. If you attempt to save a new preference set with the same
name as an existing set, FrameWorks Plus asks you to confirm that it should
overwrite the existing set.
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 517
You can also create and modify preferences using the File> Preference Editor
command. This command provides a central location for defining all preferences
across FrameWorks Plus.
FrameWorks Plus is delivered with two preference files in the ..\fwplus\data
directory. These two files, fw.rsc and fwm.rsc, contain the default preference sets for
models using English and metric units, respectively. These files are shared by all
FrameWorks Plus users on the computer on which FrameWorks Plus is installed (they
are not project-specific).
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
518 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
FrameWorks Plus Settings
In addition to preference sets that define the parameters for individual commands,
there are a number of operating parameters that control the overall operation of
FrameWorks Plus and certain groups of commands. These settings are defined using
a number of commands and dialog boxes accessible from the Settings pulldown
menu on the FrameWorks Plus command menu.
Typical of settings that govern the overall operation of FrameWorks Plus are the Bell
and Confirm Selection Set commands. These commands turn on or off features that
alert you to certain conditions that occur during the operation of FrameWorks Plus.
Other settings commands are used to define default parameters for member placement
and for the automatic member-naming feature (see AutoName, page 172). Two other
commands enable or disable the member placement dynamics (see Dynamics, page
181), and the automatic grid snap (AutoSnap) feature (see AutoSnap, page 182).
These settings are all part of the operating parameters for a FrameWorks Plus model
and are stored in the FrameWorks Plus model database. To save or store the current
settings, the Save FWP Settings command (see Save FWP Settings, page 147) is
used. This operation is analogous to the MicroStation Save Settings command.
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 519
Seed Files
The database for a FrameWorks Plus model consists of several files that include a 3D
design file in which the graphical data is stored. FrameWorks Plus creates the model's
design file by copying the existing seed design file of the specified units (for
example, feet) from the seed directory (..\fwplus\seed). There is a separate seed file
for each available unit of length.
You can edit any of these seed files (using MicroStation) if you want to modify the
delivered set of Working Units (model precision) or to set up other standard
MicroStation parameters. Do not modify the seed file names or the actual Master Unit
value in a specific file as FrameWorks Plus identifies a seed file by its name. (For
example, the file seedf.dgn is the seed file for models created with Master Units of
feet.)
In addition, a separate set of seed files exists for drawing file creation. These files are
used for drawing composition and plotting and are named dseedf.dgn (feet),
dseedm.dgn (meters), and so forth. These can also be modified if needed, but you
should not modify the name or master unit value.
Seed Models
For settings that you cannot set in the MicroStation seed file, you can create a "seed
model". You can then use the Copy Model command to create new models based on
your seed model.
Inside the PDS environment, you can select a seed model to use during model
creation.
Appendix A: Customizing FrameWorks Plus
520 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 521
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
This appendix explains how to incorporate FrameWorks Plus into the PDS
environment.
Related Topics
FrameWorks Environment, page 535
FrameWorks Plus and Material Data Publisher, page 549
FrameWorks Plus and PD_Clash, page 547
FrameWorks Plus and SmartPlant Review, page 545
Setup Information, page 522
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
522 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Setup Information
You need to set up a project, a structural discipline design area, and create a
FrameWorks Plus model before you can use FrameWorks Plus in the PDS
environment.
Note
Always press ENTER when entering values in PD_Shell.
Related Topics
Creating a Model by ASCII File, page 530
Creating a Model in PD_Shell, page 526
Creating a Structural Discipline Design Area, page 525
Creating or Inserting a FrameWorks Plus Project, page 522
FrameWorks Plus Categories, page 533
Intergraph SmartPlant License Manager, page 522
Shifting the FrameWorks Plus Global Origin to Match PDS Design
Volume, page 533
Intergraph SmartPlant License Manager
If you installed FrameWorks Plus using a PDS serial number, FrameWorks Plus uses
one PDS 3D seat whenever you access FrameWorks Plus whether through PD_Shell,
through the FrameWorks Plus icon, or by using the mdl load fwp key-in. FrameWorks
Plus also uses one PDS 3D seat if you launch a batch process to create a SmartPlant
Review file, an envelope file, or batch cutouts.
Starting with version 7.2, FrameWorks Plus installed with a FrameWorks Plus serial
number (as opposed to a PDS serial number) also requires Intergraph SmartPlant
License Manager. FrameWorks Plus uses one FrameWorks Plus seat whenever you
open FrameWorks Plus. FrameWorks Plus also takes one FrameWorks Plus seat
when you use one of the command line utilities. For more information about the
command line utilities, see Command Prompt Commands, page 29.
Because FrameWorks Plus uses a PDS seat or a FrameWorks Plus seat, you need to
have Intergraph SmartPlant License Manager software on the same computer as
FrameWorks Plus. See the SmartPlant Licensing Manager Installation and User's
Guide for more information.
Creating or Inserting a FrameWorks Plus Project
The first step in using FrameWorks Plus with PDS is to integrate existing
FrameWorks Plus projects into a PDS project or to create a FrameWorks Plus project
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 523
in the PDS project. If the FrameWorks Plus project already exists, only database
entries are created in the "pd_project-database" in pdtable_116.
Note
The total path length to the FrameWorks Plus project including the drive
letter and the required \'s is limited to 36 characters.

FrameWorks Project Number - Specifies the FrameWorks Plus project name (the
top-level project directory that appears in the Windows NT Explorer). This string can
contain letters and/or numbers but no other special characters except the underscore
(_) character. Names are limited to 14 characters.
FrameWorks Project Name - Type a description for the project.
FrameWorks File Directory - Type the full path to the directory where you want to
store the project. Make sure you do not duplicate the project name in this path.
For example:
FrameWorks Plus Project Number: fwstr
---AND---
FrameWorks Plus File Directory: c:\pds_proj_dir\project
Will give you:
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
524 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\data
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\drw
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\esl
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\frz
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\int
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\mod
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\rpt
Entering an extra \fwstr on the end of the FrameWorks Plus File Directory name
could complicate the directory structure. If you key in c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr
for the directory name and fwstr for the Number, you will get
c:\pds_proj_dir\project\fwstr\fwstr for the final FrameWorks Plus Subproject
directory name.
FrameWorks Network Address - Specifies the computer on which the FrameWorks
Plus project is located. Enter the computer's name.
Force Units - Specifies the force units to use by default for the member loads placed
in this project. The force units are stored in the Standard Note Library List 1640.
Standard Section Table - Specifies the standard section table to use by default for
models created in this project. There are several standard section tables delivered with
FrameWorks Plus. The standard section table location is read from the
..\fwplus\data\config.dat file.
User Section Table - Specifies the user section table to use by default for models
created in this project.
List of Existing FrameWorks Projects - Lists all existing FrameWorks projects.
Create or Insert FrameWorks Plus Projects
1. Click Start > Programs > PD_Shell > PD_Shell.
2. Select a PDS project.
3. Click Project Administrator.
4. Click Project Setup Manager.
5. Click Insert FrameWorks Project.
6. Type the FrameWorks Project Number.
7. Type a FrameWorks Project Name.
8. Type a FrameWorks File Directory.
9. Type the FrameWorks Network Address.
10. Select the Force Units for the project.
11. Select the Standard Section Table for the project.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 525
12. Select Accept.
Creating a Structural Discipline Design Area
The design area is used to define virtual areas within the overall pds project. You
need to associate a FrameWorks Plus project to a PDS design area. The design area is
stored in pdtable_112. The association between the design area and the FrameWorks
Plus project is stored in pdtable_117.
Note
To delete a FrameWorks Plus subproject, you must delete the entries in
pdtable_116 and pdtable_117.

Design Area Name - Type a name for the structural discipline design area.
Note
Use the same name for the Design Area as the FrameWorks Plus
subproject for easier tracking.
Description - Type a description for the design area.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
526 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Structural Sub Project - Select the FrameWorks Plus project you want to associate
with this design area. Click the field to see the available structural projects.
No Interference Management Design Area / Interference Management Design
Area - Specifies if you want to define an Interference Management Design Area for
this design area. We recommend that you select "No Interference Management
Design Area."
If you select Interference Management Design Area, a design_area_name.3 clash
marker file is created in the pds project directory. (The 3 extension indicates the
structural discipline number from pdtable_111).
Create a Structural Discipline Design Area
1. Click Start > Programs > PD_Shell > PD_Shell.
2. Select a PDS project.
3. Click Project Administrator.
4. Click Project Environment Manager.
5. Click Create.
6. Click Create Design Area Data
7. Select Structural Discipline.
8. Click Accept.
9. Type a Design Area Name.
10. Type a description for the Design Area.
11. Select the FrameWorks Plus project as the Structural Subproject by placing a data
point in the field and selecting the subproject from the list of FrameWorks Plus
subprojects.
12. Make sure No Interference Management Design Area is selected.
13. Click Accept.
Creating a Model in PD_Shell
After the FrameWorks Plus project is added to the PDS project and the Design Area
has been assigned, you can create FrameWorks Plus models.
Model creation creates two entries in pdtable_113. The first entry stores the
information about the model.dgn file. The second entry stores information about the
model.prp file.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 527

Model Number - Type a name for the model. Model names are limited to 10
characters.
Seed Model - Select the seed model to use to create the model. The seed directory is
defined in the project\data\config.dat file. If no seed model is selected, PDS creates a
standard model based on the selected units.
Frozen Model Name - Displays the name of the propagated model file. This is the
Model Number name with a .prp extension.
Model Description - Type a description for the model.
Model Directory - Displays the directory the propagated model is created in. This
directory is set when you create the FrameWorks Plus subproject and cannot be
changed.
Workstation/Server Name - Displays the name of the computer on which the model
is saved. This is computer is set when you created the project and cannot be changed.
Application Type - Displays the structural application type. Do not change this
value.
Model Status - Select a model status from the entries for code list set 1605. Model
status is used for clash to exclude models for clash detection. The model status can be
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
528 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
used to eliminate certain models, such as those considered to be preliminary or
temporary, from clash checking or from SmartPlant Review.
Force Units - Select the force units for loads placed in this model. We recommend
that all models in the same project use the same force units. This option is not
available if you are using a seed model.
Caution
You cannot change force units after the model is created.
Standard Section Table - Select the standard section table you want to use for the
model. This option is not available if you are using a seed model.
Caution
You cannot change the standard section table after the model is created.
User Section Table - Select the user section table you want to use for the model. You
can change the user section table after the model is created. The user section library
must have been created using FrameWorks Plus Manager or from the command line.
This option is not available if you are using a seed model.
Third Party Software - Select the analysis software you plan to use on this model.
You can select another application after the model is created. This option is not
available if you are using a seed model.
Design Code - Select the design code you plan to use on this model. You can select
another design code after the model is created. This option is not available if you are
using a seed model.
Propagated and Sparse / Propagated Only - Select whether to create either a
propagated and sparse model, or just a propagated model.
Propagate and Sparse / Propagate Only toggle defines the process for Batch
Propagation inside PDS with the Frozen Model Name model.
Propagate Only copies the project related seed file into the project\frz directory and
renames it, and propagates into the file.
Propagate and Sparse copies the model.dgn file from the project\mod directory to the
project\frz directory and propagates into the file.
The batch propagation process uses the symbology from the first 3D isometric view
defined in the FrameWorks Plus model.
The model.prp file is used for Attach PDS Reference Model command, creating
Isometric ASCII reference file, and SmartPlant Review sessions and labels. To
generate Isometric ASCII file and to identify structural members for Pipe Support
placement, you must use Propagate and Sparse option.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 529
We recommend that you regularly compress your .prp files. An easy way to compress
is to use the Compress Directory command in MicroStation Manager.
Sparse Model Name - Displays the name of the sparse model. This is the Model
Number name with a .dgn extension.
Sparse Model Directory - Displays the directory the sparse model is created in. This
directory is set when you create the FrameWorks Plus subproject and cannot be
changed.
Sparse Workstation/Server Name - Displays the name of the computer on which
the model is saved. This is computer is set when you created the project and cannot
be changed.
Create a Model
1. Click Start> Programs> PD_Shell> PD_Shell.
2. Select a PDS project.
3. Click Project Administrator.
4. Click Project Environment Manager.
5. Click Create.
6. Click Create Model.
7. Click Structural from the list of Disciplines.
8. Click Accept.
9. Select the design area that is specific to the FrameWorks Plus Sub Project.
If you did not let PDS know about the FrameWorks Plus project by using the
Insert FrameWorks Data option before creating the design area, a message stating
This is not a ModelDraft Model displays.
This message displays for any model that is not part of a FrameWorks Plus
subproject. This message implies that any model created in this way is considered
dumb graphics. It will be available as a reference file, but it will be ignored for
such operations as the SmartPlant Review intelligent tag creation and envelope
file generation.
You can easily integrate existing models you created with FrameWorks Manager
by using the Create Model command in PD_Shell. The Create Model command
detects the existing model and prompts you to confirm the model name. If you
accept, PD_Shell creates entries in pdtable_113 for the existing model.
10. Type a Model Number. This is the model name.
11. Select a seed model.
12. Type a Frozen Model Name.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
530 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
13. Type a description for the model.
14. Select a Model Status.
15. Select Force Units for the loads in the model.
16. Select a Standard Section Table.
17. Select a User Section Table.
18. Select a Third Party Software. This is the software you plan to use for analytical
design.
19. Select a Design Code.
20. Select Propagated and Sparse or Propagated Only.
21. Select Accept.
Creating a Model by ASCII File
After the FrameWorks Plus project is added to the PDS project and the Design Area
has been assigned, you can create FrameWorks Plus models using ASCII input files.
Note
The command can be used to create model definitions for existing
ModelDraft or FrameWorks Plus models without writing over the existing
design files.
Model creation creates two entries in pdtable_113. The first entry stores the
information about the model.dgn file. The second entry stores information about the
model.prp file.
The ASCII files used to create a model must be in order by the keywords listed
below. The software will not function if the keyword order is incorrect.
The Force Units, Standard Section Table, and User Section Table come from the
FrameWorks Plus project information that is stored in the project database. The Third
Party software defaults to STAAD and the design code defaults to AISC-ASD. These
defaults are the same defaults if you were creating model interactively. A detailed log
file is created in c:\temp\caxxx.
After an area is created using the keyword Area_Desc title is not accepted, neither is
the Sub_Proj_Number title accepted. When the structural area is created, it is
associated with a FW subproject specified. This subproject information is retrieved
from the area when you create a model.
Keywords
Discipline: The discipline name exactly as it appears in the PD_Shell environment
(example: Discipline: Structural) is required information.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 531
Area_Name: A required 20-character design area name; it must be unique across
disciplines (example: Area_Name:Struct_A).
Area_Desc: An optional 40-character description for the design area being created
(example: Area_Desc:Struct_A).
Note
This option is required when creating a new area. If the area already
exists, use Area_Name only.
Area_Marker_File: An option to indicate that you want an interference marker file
for the area (example: Area_Marker_File:Yes).
Note
This option is only for use in combination with Area_Description.
Area_Volume_Low/High: An option that indicates if the design area will have a
predefined volume for interference checking purposes. This is required if
Area_Marker_File is Yes; the low volume and high volume represent the limits of the
volume processed by the interference checker (example: Area_Volume_Low:-100,-
250,-50 Area_Volume_High:150,30,120).
Note
This option is only for use in combination with Area_Marker_file.
Sub_Proj_Number: Required information for structural models. It defines the
structural subproject.
Note
This option is required when creating a new area in combination with
Keyword Area_Desc
Model_Number: A required up to 10-character Structural model number of the
model to be created (example: Model_Number:Model_A).
Model_Desc: Optional up to 40-character description of the model to be created
(example: Model_Desc:Model A Description).
File_Spec: An optional 14-character file specification of the model to be created. If a
value is not specified or the keyword is missing, the file specification defaults to the
model number with the extension .dgn (example: Model_A.dgn).
Note
Not supported for structural since defined in the subproject.
Path_Name: An optional 35-character directory path where the model file is to be
created (example: d:\proj\models\). If this value is not specified or the keyword is
missing, the default values as defined with the Model Setup option are used.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
532 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Note
Not supported for structural since defined in the subproject
Network_Address: An optional 26-character node name of the system on which the
model file is to be stored This value is not specified or the keyword is missing, the
default values as defined with the Model Setup option, are used.
Note
Not supported for structural since defined in the subproject
Application_Type: An optional value indicating the discipline association for
interference checking purposes. It associates the design model with a different
discipline for reporting clashes. The default is the discipline where the design model
is created (example: Application_type:Structural).
Model_type: For structural models only, the type of structural model to be created.
Its value is set as follows: both or propagate settings will NOT create a physical file.
These settings ONLY create an entry in the project schema's pdtable_113.
both: defines a model_type =2 in pdtable_113. It defines that while
running batch propagation the prp file will contain the sparse model
(which is a single line model) and a 3D model (which is the so-called
propagated model.
propagated: creates a model_type =0 entry in pdtable_113. Running
batch propagation on a model with this status will result in a propagated
only model.
sparse: The only Model_Type setting that actually creates physical files.
This setting will cause the software, if the model does not already exist, to
execute the FW+ cremod utility that will create all 14 files in the FW+
project\mod directory... Also a corresponding entry in pdtable_113 will be
created.
Model_Status: An optional value. Should be followed by a number value from the
standard note code list 1605 and can be used for excluding models from being
processed by PD_Clash.
sample for new area creation and model creation:
Discipline:Structural
Area_Name:ascii
Area_Desc:ascii
Area_Marker_File:Yes
Area_Volume_Low:-100,-250,-50
Area_Volume_High:150,30,120
Sub_Proj_Number:ascii
Model_Number:mod1
Model_Desc: first ascii
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 533
Model_Type:sparse
Application_Type:Structural
Model_Number:mod1
Model_Desc:2nd ascii prp
Model_Type:propagated
Application_Type:Structural
Model_Number:mod2
Model_Desc: 2ndascii
Model_Type:sparse
Application_Type:Structural
Model_Number:mod2
Model_Desc:2nd ascii prp
Model_Type:propagated
Application_Type:Structural
Sample to create a sparse and propagated model in existing Design area:
Discipline:Structural
Area_Name:ascii1
Model_Number:mod3
Model_Desc:3rd ascii
Model_Type:sparse
Application_Type:Structural
Model_Number:mod3
Model_Desc:3rd ascii prp
Model_Type:both
Application_Type:Structural
Shifting the FrameWorks Plus Global Origin to Match PDS
Design Volume
FrameWorks Plus does not support auxiliary coordinate systems. Because a design
volume in PDS is analogous to an auxiliary coordinate system, shifting the
FrameWorks Plus model's global origin to match the design volume's origin is not
supported in FrameWorks Plus.
FrameWorks Plus Categories
FrameWorks Plus categories are defined in the ..\pdshell\categ\framewks.txt file
delivered with PD_Shell. This file maps FrameWorks Plus model levels to the
categories used in several applications such as SmartPlant Review, PD_Draw, and
VHL. If you change the default level scheme for 3D views in FrameWorks Plus, you
need to change the framewks.txt file accordingly. Failure to edit the framewks.txt file
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
534 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
will result in the wrong categories being turned off or on. For example, you want to
turn off grids, but the beams disappear instead.
We recommend that you keep a separate framewks.txt file for each project you have
and save the file in the project directory.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 535
FrameWorks Environment
This form provides access to the FrameWorks Plus environment from within PD
Shell.
Modeling - Used to select a design area and a model to enter.
Drawing Environment - Used to create, delete, and enter drawings.
Propagation - Used to create propagated models and binary files for
SmartPlant Review labels.
Generate ASCII File - Used to create an ASCII file that provides the
location of all structural components and grid lines in the project. This
information is used to reference a single structural column or a pair of grid
lines on an isometric drawing.
Update/Regenerate Frozen View - Used to update or regenerate frozen
views in your FrameWorks Plus models in batch mode.
Batch Cutout --- Used to create or update solid cutouts in batch mode.

Related Topics
Batch Cutout (PD_Shell), page 540
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
536 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Drawing Environment, page 536
Generate ASCII File, page 538
Modeling, page 536
Propagation, page 537
Update/Regenerate Frozen View, page 539
Modeling
The command is used to enter the FrameWorks Plus modeling environment. Selecting
a Design Area displays all the models in that Design Area. Selecting a model opens
the FrameWorks Plus model in MicroStation.
Drawing Environment
The command is used to enter the FrameWorks Plus drawing composition
environment. After selecting a project, you can create drawings, delete drawings, or
go into the drawing composition environment.
There are no entries in the PDS database for the drawings. The drawings are generic
MicroStation design files.
Create --- Used to create new drawings in the selected project.
Delete --- Used to delete drawings from the selected project.
Composition --- Used to enter a drawing in the selected project.
Create
This form is used to create a drawing in the active project. PD_Shell copies the
dseedm.dgn or dseedf.dgn seed files (depending on the project units) from the
..\fwplus\seed directory to the project \drw subdirectory.
Drawing Name - Type a name for the drawing you want to create. The drawing name
is limited to 8 characters.
Delete
This form is used to delete a drawing from the active project. Select the drawing to
delete from the list, and then click Accept.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 537
Composition
This form is used to enter the FrameWorks Plus drawing composition environment.
Select the drawing you want to open, and then click Accept.
Propagation
This form is used to create propagated models based on the option defined during
model creation. The output will be a propagated or propagated and sparse model.
Note
If you create your propagated model using this command, you should use
this command to keep the propagated model up to date. Do not use the
update or regenerate commands or any of the related commands inside of
FrameWorks Plus to update a propagated model.
Propagate Only copies the project related seed file into the project\frz directory and
renames it, and propagates into the file.
Propagate and Sparse copies the model.dgn file from the project\mod directory to
the project\frz directory and propagates into the file.
The batch propagation process uses the symbology from the first 3D isometric view
defined in the FrameWorks Plus model. If no 3D isometric view exists in the model,
the software creates a temporary view using the default isometric settings.
The model.prp file is used for Attach PDS Reference Model command, creating
Isometric ASCII reference file, and SmartPlant Review sessions and labels. To
generate Isometric ASCII file and to identify structural members for Pipe Support
placement, you must use Propagate and Sparse option.
We recommend that you regularly compress your .prp files. An easy way to compress
is to use the Compress Directory command in MicroStation Manager.
Make sure the user section libraries are attached and accessible in the FrameWorks
Plus model.
All Models - Click this button to propagate all the models.
Selected Areas - Click this button to select an area(s) in which you want all models
propagated.
Selected Models - Click this button to select the model(s) to propagate.
Submit Batch Immediately / Delayed Batch Submit Time - Choose whether to
propagate the selected models now, or propagate them at a later time.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
538 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Schedule Propagation - Select to schedule a reoccurring propagation job.
Generate ASCII File
The Generate ASCII File command creates an ASCII file used by PDS ISOGEN
Intergraph option 71 to place reference dimensions in the isometric drawing. The
ASCII file contains the names and locations of all structural columns and grids in the
PDS project. The created ASCII file is saved to the PDS main project directory and
named fw_projname.dat.
A single structural data file (ASCII file) is created for the entire project. No structural
models can be excluded from being referenced. However, you can edit the file and
split out the information into separate files or you can move the prp files you do not
want to process to a different location. You can then add a variable to the pds.cmd file
to select which ASCII file to reference when generating isometric drawings.
Note
To generate Isometric ASCII file and to identify structural members for
Pipe Support placement, you must use Propagate and Sparse option and
the files have to be propagated using the PDS batch propagation
command.
Using unique column and grid label names makes it easier to locate the element in the
model.
To use this variable, add the following line to the pds.cmd file:
$ENV{'ISOUSRREFDUM'} = 'path\file.dat';
where path is the path to the project directory and file.dat is the name of the ASCII
file you want to use.
Editing the ASCII File
If you have generated the ASCII file and want to use the variable to control which
structural columns and grid lines are referenced, you need to edit the file and save the
individual structural models (or groups of models) into separate files.
The default grid line reference data file is in the project directory and is named
fw_projname.dat. Open this file using any ASCII editor.
The first column of each line describes the type of data that line contains:
0 - The line contains the name of the structural model and its UORs
extents.
1 - The line contains structural column information with the column name
and the beginning and end column points in UORs.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 539
2 - The line contains East/West gridline information with the gridline label
and beginning and end points in UORs.
3 - The line contains North/South gridline information with the gridline
label and beginning and end points in UORs.
When splitting the generated file into smaller files, be sure to keep all model
information together (that is, cut from one "0" line to the line before the next "0"
line).
Update/Regenerate Frozen View
The Update/Regenerate Frozen View command updates or regenerates frozen view
graphics in batch mode.
Note
Do not use this command to update a propagated model.

List Area - Displays the models or selected area that you want to update or
regenerate.
Update/Regenerate - Select whether you want to update all models, models in
selected areas, or only selected models.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
540 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Update or Regenerate option - Select whether you want to Update the frozen views
or Regenerate the frozen views.
Update automatically updates the permanent, Frozen View graphics to reflect any
structural model changes. The Update Frozen command compares the status of the
member graphics in the Frozen View to the current model status and adds or removes
members from the Frozen View accordingly.
Regenerate recreates all Frozen View graphics from the current model using the
current Model View's display style and settings. All existing graphics in the selected
Frozen View are deleted and replaced with the new graphics.
Include Attached FWPlus Models - Select to include attached FrameWorks Plus
models when the frozen views are updated or regenerated.
Update User Graphics - If this option is on, generic MicroStation elements in the
Model View are also updated or regenerated along with the FrameWorks Plus
members. Generic MicroStation elements that you have added directly to the frozen
file (not the model file) using MicroStation are not affected by this command.
Batch Cutout (PD_Shell)
The Batch Cutouts command automatically places cutouts in slab and solid members
where they intersect with other members. The intersecting member can be a
FrameWorks Plus linear member, a FrameWorks Plus solid member, or generic
MicroStation elements (including MicroStation solids but not wedges, spheres, or
torus). Cutouts, unlike holes, automatically update when the intersecting member is
moved, re-sized, or deleted.
Caution
Using Batch Cutout may cause unpredictable results in the project and
models. For example, when running batch cutouts, you have no way of
knowing which models are attached or detached to other models. You may
lose cutouts if someone else unknowingly detaches a piping model for
example. In addition, you may have set different clearance options in
different models. The batch cutouts process can potentially overwrite
those clearance settings. Be especially diligent when using batch cutouts.
Note
Cutouts are not available for walls.
Guidelines for Solid Cutouts
FrameWorks Plus does not include the thickness of PDS equipment
insulation (if any) when calculating the cutout size.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 541
The element that intersects the solids must go all the way through the solid
for a cutout to be created. Elements that do not go all the way through the
solid will not create a cutout.
Cutouts that are invalid holes are not placed.
If you manually move or copy a cutout (hole) using the Move Member or
Copy Member commands, you will break the link between the cutout and
the object that created the cutout. After the link is broken, the cutout (hole)
will not update the next time you run cutouts.
FrameWorks Plus does not place cutouts for intersecting elements that
would cause a curvilinear cutout (such as a pipe bend or an arc member).

List of Models - Display the model on which the batch cutout process will run.
Clearance - Specifies the distance between the inside of the cutout and the outside of
the item being cut around. This distance is added evenly to all sides of the item. If
you are placing a sleeve around a pipe, the distance between the inside of the sleeve
and the outside of the pipe is the Clearance value. The Clearance value you type in
must be in inches for imperial projects and millimeters for metric projects.
Be careful when defining the Clearance value when cutouts will be created around
closed shapes such as I-section or channels. The Clearance is added evenly to all
sides of the shape. If you define a Clearance that is greater than half the distance
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
542 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
between sides of a closed shape, FrameWorks Plus will not place the cutout. For
example, the distance between an I-section's flanges is 8.5 inches. If you define a
Clearance greater than 4.25 inches, the cutout will not be placed.
Increment - Specifies the value by which to increment the cutout diameter around a
circular penetration (such as a pipe). For example, if you set the Increment to 2"
(inches), the cutout diameter is always divisible by 2 (2", 4", 6", 8", ... 22", 24", 26",
and so forth). Similarly, if you set the Increment to 3", the cutout diameter is always
divisible by 3 (3", 6", 9", 12", and so forth). Setting the Increment value to 0 causes
the cutout diameter to be the outside diameter of the penetrating object plus the
Clearance value, if any.
The Increment value you type in must be in inches for imperial projects and
millimeters for metric projects.
You can use the Increment Factor setting to control the rounding up or rounding
down of the cutout diameter to the next allowed size.
Increment Factor - Specifies if the cutout is rounded up or rounded down to the next
Increment size. For example, you place a 10.875 inch pipe with 3 inch clearance and
a 2 inch Increment. You can use this Increment Factor to control whether a cutout
with a 16" diameter or a cutout with a 18" diameter is placed.
If the Increment Factor is set to 0, the cutout is always rounded up to the next
increment divisible size. If the Increment Factor is set to 1, the cutout is always
rounded down to the next increment divisible size. Typically, you would want to set
the Increment Factor to 0.5.
If the Increment Factor is between 0.01 and 0.99, FrameWorks Plus calculates
whether to round up or down based on the following algorithm.
1. Compute the cutout diameter by adding the outside diameter of the pipe with two
times the Clearance value. For example, if the pipe diameter is 10.875" and the
Clearance is set to 3", the cutout diameter would be 16.875" (10.875 + 2 x 3 =
16.875).
2. FrameWorks Plus reads the remainder (non-integer) part of the cutout diameter.
In this case, 0.875 inches.
3. Multiply the Increment and the Increment Factor then compare the results to the
remainder read in step 2. If the remainder is less than the calculation, round down.
If the remainder is greater than the calculation, round up. For this example, say
the Increment is set to 2". The following table shows the results of different
Increment Factors.
Remainder from
step 2
Increment X
Increment Factor
Resulting Action
0.875 2 x 0 = 0 0.875 greater than 0 so round cutout
diameter up to 18 inches
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 543
0.875 2 x 0.25 = 0.5 0.875 greater than 0.5 so round cutout
diameter up to 18 inches
0.875 2 x 0.5 = 1 0.875 less than 1 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches
0.875 2 x 0.75 = 1.5 0.875 less than 1.5 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches
0.875 2 x 1 = 2 0.875 less than 2 so round cutout
diameter down to 16 inches

Override Original Settings - Toggle on to override the clearance value of an
existing cutout with a new clearance value. This will override all clearance settings in
the individual models.
Include Member Fireproofing - The software should consider member fireproofing
when calculating the cutout size.
Include Piping Insulation Thickness - The software should consider piping
insulation thickness when calculating the cutout size. The piping insulation does not
need to be graphically displayed in order to be used in the calculation.
Report Action - Defines the action to perform when members intersect solids.
Place Holes & Report -- Places a hole in the solid for the intersecting
member to pass through. The shape of the intersecting member is used as a
pattern for the solid's hole. The size of the hole will be the exact size of the
intersecting member unless you specify a Clearance value.
Place Holes, Sleeves, & Report -- Places a hole in the solid for the
intersecting member to pass through. If the intersecting member is round,
a pipe sleeve is also placed.
Note
Pipe sleeves are placed only if the intersecting member is perpendicular to the
slab or solid. Members that intersect at an angle will not have pipe sleeves placed.
No Action - Report in Logfile -- Writes the number of members that
intersect solids to the logfile.
Sleeve Type - Specifies the member type you want to use for the sleeve. FrameWorks
Plus uses the default section of the selected member type for the pipe sleeve section.
We recommend you place sleeves using cardinal point 1. This option is only available
if the Place Sleeve option is selected.
FWP Linear Members - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should place cutouts for
FrameWorks Plus linear members that intersect a solid.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
544 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Note
The section shape of the linear member must intersect both faces of the
solid for FrameWorks Plus to place a cutout.
FWP Solid Members - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should place cutouts for
FrameWorks Plus solids members that intersect a solid.
MSTN Solids, Surfaces & Cones - Specifies that FrameWorks Plus should place
cutouts for MicroStation solid elements that intersect a solid.
Note
FrameWorks Plus will not create cutout for wedge, sphere, or torus
MicroStation shapes.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 545
FrameWorks Plus and SmartPlant Review
When batch propagating a model from PD_Shell or freezing a view with the Generate
Propagated Model option on from within FrameWorks Plus, a modelname.drv file is
created in the project's frz directory. This file contains the hard coded SmartPlant
Review labels. To use a customized label, you need to create the label file using
DesignReview Label Builder.
To customize the labels for DesignReview Label Builder, you need to go to
Reference Data Manager> Label Description Library Manager> Revise Label Data>
Display Attribute Labels. Then select the label you want to edit.
Labels 325 to 330 are reserved for FrameWorks Plus:
325 - Labels for beams.
326 - Labels for columns.
327 - Labels for braces.
328 - Labels for area elements.
329 - Labels for arcs.
330 - Labels for volume elements.
You cannot use a different number for any FrameWorks Plus labels. When editing
labels, you cannot add attributes to the available attribute list.
After editing labels, you need to click Unapproved --> Approved to move your edits
to the Approved Library.
Note
FrameWorks Plus member names in SmartPlant Review labels are limited
to 16 characters. However, FrameWorks Plus supports member names up
to 24 characters. To view all 24 characters in SmartPlant Review, you
need to delete the entry for the element name and insert the ASCII USER
ATTRIBUTES 24 character attribute instead.
Refer to the DesignReview Integrator (PD_Review) Reference Guide for more
information on how to create a SmartPlant Review session and labels in
DesignReview integrator.
If you change the default level scheme in FrameWorks Plus, you need to edit the
framewks.txt file in the main PDS project/core directory. This file defines the
category levels in PD_Draw and SmartPlant Review. If you change the FrameWorks
Plus level scheme but do not edit this file, the wrong items will disappear when you
turn off categories in SmartPlant Review.
In order to generate labels containing new attributes and named group information for
SmartPlant Review, the data needs to be published using SmartPlant Review
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
546 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Publisher. Please refer to the SmartPlant Review Publisher documentation about the
generation of extended structural labels files for SmartPlant Review.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 547
FrameWorks Plus and PD_Clash
The PD_Clash Envelope Builder uses the same executables as those delivered with
FrameWorks Plus. If you install a newer version of FrameWorks Plus, more than
likely there have been fixes made to the envelope builder executables. Before creating
any envelope files, you need to update executables in the PD_Clash bin directory with
the files delivered with FrameWorks Plus. This will ensure that you get the same
results when creating envelope files from within FrameWorks Plus as from within
PD_Shell. From a command line, type:
<prod_dir>\bin\clashupd.bat <path_to_clash_bin>
where prod_dir is where you installed FrameWorks Plus and path_to_clash_bin is
where you installed PD_Clash.
For example
c:\ingr\fwplus\bin\clashupd.bat c:\ingr\clash\bin
Creating Envelope Files
There are three ways to create an envelope file for a model:
Inside PD_Shell using PD_Clash. Start PD_Shell and select a project.
Select Interference Manager. Select Envelope Builder and select Envelope
Builder again.
You can create envelope files for interference checking using a command
line key-in. The command syntax is:
<prod_dir>\bin\fwenvel <proj_dir>\mod\modelfile.dgn <proj_dir>\frz\envfile.env
where prod_dir is the directory where FrameWorks Plus is loaded. For example:
c:\win32app\ingr\fwplus. proj_dir is the directory that contains the FrameWorks
Plus project. For example: c:\struct\project.
If the envfile.env file exists, FrameWorks Plus overwrites the existing file with
the newly created file.
Inside FrameWorks Plus using the File > Interference Checking
command.
Note
If you create envelope files inside FrameWorks Plus, the Envelope
Verification command in PD_Shell always indicates that the envelope
files are not up to date because the model file (.dgn file) is always saved
and closed after the envelope file was created.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
548 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
If you want to view your envelope file (it is a binary file), you need to run Envelope
Diagnostics which creates a MicroStation file called "modelname.til" in the
FrameWorks Plus project's ..\frz sub-directory. The software will open that file in
MicroStation and attach your model.prp file as a reference file (if available). You can
then compare the envelope graphics to the model graphics. In addition, a model.evd
(an ASCII file) gets created in your temporary directory. Check the .evd file for errors
and warnings.
If there are errors, the envelope file is invalid. You will need to go back into
FrameWorks Plus and run the File> Verify Model command to check for overlapping
members and members with invalid sections.
Note
Cutbacks are not written to the envelope file. However, PD_Clash can
determine if there is a clash between FWP members (even if cutbacks
were applied) or not.
Because the FrameWorks Plus member names appear in the report, all FrameWorks
Plus member names should be unique. Using unique member names makes locating
the member in graphics easier.
To review and approve clashes, use PD_Clash Interference Approval Manager or the
PDS integrated commands inside FrameWorks Plus.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 549
FrameWorks Plus and Material Data Publisher
You can now export FrameWorks Plus member data using the PDS Material Data
Publisher Utility. The Material Data Publisher utility (MDP) allows users to generate
relational database tables containing all the material data associated with a PDS
model and publish these tables to a new database schema (MTO_PROJNAME).
These tables make the model data available for easier reporting outside of
PD_Report.
The Material Data Publisher uses selection set files to determine what data to publish.
The MDP interface allows you to select specific disciplines, model areas, and models
within the project to publish, and to save different sets of models in separate selection
set files.
When the data is published, it can be accessed through ORACLE, INFORMIX, SQL,
ODBC clients such as Microsoft Access, and other database utilities for reporting,
tracking, and ordering.
Please refer to the PDS Material Data Publisher help for more information about
MDP.
For the list of tables and attributes that are exported from FrameWorks Plus, from
within FrameWorks Plus click Help > Printable Guides. Then select FrameWorks
Plus Material Data Publisher Chart from the list of documents.
Notes
If a member is partially flooded, the software considers it fully flooded
when calculating the center of buoyancy.
FrameWorks Plus does not calculate center of buoyancy or the buoyancy
force for members with arbitrary sections.
Appendix B: PDS and FrameWorks Plus
550 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 551
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus
Projects to SmartPlant 3D
This appendix explains how to export FrameWorks Plus projects and models to
SmartPlant 3D.
The FrameWorks Plus export to SmartPlant 3D requires the separate lease of
"SmartPlant 3D PDS Project Translators" (SEBY801AA), which provides a CIS/2
(CIMsteel Integration Standard) translator that you can use to export FrameWorks
Plus models to a CIS/2 file. The CIS/2 file can then be imported by the Structural task
in SmartPlant 3D.
You must have PD_Shell installed before you can install SmartPlant 3D PDS Project
Translators.
Related Topics
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus, page 553
Import Structure Command, page 557
Translator Setup, page 552
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
552 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Translator Setup
The CIS/2 translator for FrameWorks Plus requires the lease of "SmartPlant 3D PDS
Project Translators" (SEBY801AA), which is a separate lease from FrameWorks
Plus, PDS, and SmartPlant 3D. Contact Intergraph for software availability. These
setup instructions cover translating FrameWorks Plus data to SmartPlant 3D only. For
instructions on translating PDS Piping, Equipment, or HVAC data to SmartPlant 3D,
see Exporting Data from PDS: An Overview.
Note
You must have FrameWorks Plus and PD_Shell installed on the computer
where you install the translator.
1. On the computer where you have FrameWorks and PD_Shell installed, insert the
SmartPlant 3D CD-ROM.
2. Close the SmartPlant 3D installation menu.
3. Using Windows Explorer, browse to the PDS Export to SP3D folder on the CD.
4. Open the sub-folder that corresponds to your PDS version. For example, if you
are using PDS Version 8.0, open the PDSExport_PDS8.0 folder.
5. Double-click setup.exe
6. Click Continue.
7. Click I Agree on the License Agreement.
8. Enter your name, company name, and the SmartPlant 3D PDS Project Translators
serial number.
9. Click Continue to verify the information.
Related Topics
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D,
page 551
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 553
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus
The CIS/2 translator for FrameWorks Plus is part of a product called SmartPlant 3D
PDS Project Translators (SEBY801AA), which is leased separately from
FrameWorks Plus, PDS, and SmartPlant 3D. Contact Intergraph for software
availability. To use this command, open the model that you want to export to
SmartPlant 3D. Be sure to attach all reference models that are needed. Then, type mdl
load SPExport in the MicroStation key-in field.
Note
FrameWorks Plus does not write tapered member, arc members, or generic
solid members to the CIS/2 file.

Criteria - Activate a dialog box used to select what members to write to the CIS/2
file. For more information, see Member Criteria, page 103.
Description - Enter a description for the CIS/2 file.
Author - Enter your name.
Organization - Enter your organization name.
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
554 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
File - Enter a name and location for the CIS/2 file.
Log file - Enter a name and location for the log file.
Units - Specify the units for the CIS/2 file.
OK - Writes the CIS/2 file and closes the dialog box. You cannot review the log file
using the View Log command if you click OK. Use Apply if you want to review the
log file at the end of the process.
Cancel - Exits the dialog box without writing the CIS/2 file.
Apply - Writes the CIS/2 file without closing the dialog box. Use this command if
you want to review the log file at the end of the process.
View Log - Opens the log file for review.
Status - Displays the CIS/2 writing progress.
Based-on CIS/2 Statement for Export
Application Name: SmartPlant 3D PDS Project Translators
Application Version: 2007 SP2 Date: June 2007
Translator Version: 2007 SP2 Date: June 2007
Software Vendor: Intergraph Process, Power & Marine
300 Intergraph Way
Madison, Alabama 35758 U.S.A.

The translators for this application have been implemented in accordance with the
second release of the CIMsteel Integration Standards (CIS/2.0) for the following
(combination of) Conformance Classes:
CC312, CC110, CC118, CC255, CC331, CC100, CC308
Type of CIS Translator: Basic | DMC | IDI | PMR-enabled
Data exchange capabilities: Import | Export | Import &amp; Export
Level of implementation: File Exchange | In memory | DBMS | KBS
Flavors supported: EU | US | UK
Unit Systems supported: SI | US Imperial

The vendor places the following riders on the operation of the translators:
managed_data_deleted, managed_data_creation, and
managed_data_transaction are not exported.
Date of Statement: June 2007
Statement made by: Intergraph Process, Power & Marine
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 555

If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph
support. You can find support information on our web site
http://support.intergraph.com.
Related Topics
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D,
page 551
Exporting Models from FrameWorks Plus, page 556
Member Criteria, page 103
Member Criteria
The Criteria > Member Criteria command is used to define which members you
want to write to the CIS/2 file. Because you define the criteria for what members to
write to the file here, the settings in the Select Filter Settings command are ignored.

Type - Toggle on the member design types you want to write to the file.
Class - Toggle on the member classes you want to write to the file.
Include Reference Model - Defines whether to write members from attached models
to the file in addition to the members in the active model. You can attach models
using the File > Attach Models command. You can detach models using the File >
Detach Models command.
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
556 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Criteria - Defines whether to write members from a selection set or to write all the
members in the model to the file.
All On - Toggles on all Design Type and Member Class settings. The default is that
all settings are selected.
All Off - Toggles off all Design Type and Member Class settings.
OK - Saves any changes you have made and exits the dialog box.
Cancel - Ignores any changes you have made and exits the dialog box.
Related Topics
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus, page 553
Translator Setup, page 552
Exporting Models from FrameWorks Plus
1. Start FrameWorks Plus.
2. Open the model that you want to export to SmartPlant 3D.
3. Attach all reference models that are needed.
4. Type mdl load SPExport in the MicroStation key-in field.
5. Define the Criteria for member selection.
6. Type a description for the file.
7. Type your name and your organization's name.
8. In the File box, enter a name and location for the CIS/2 step file.
9. In the Log file box, enter a log file name.
10. Select whether to write the SI units or Imperial Units to the file.
11. Click Apply.
12. Click View Log.
13. Carefully review the log file for errors.
Related Topics
Exporting from FrameWorks Plus, page 553
Translator Setup, page 552
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 557
Import Structure Command
The File > Import > Structure command in SmartPlant 3D imports a CIS/2 file into
the model. This command recognizes Global User Identities (GUIDs) to uniquely
identify objects and manage the electronic exchange with the other software package.
Note
Members imported using this command are standard SmartPlant 3D
members. However, there are no frame connections or relationships
defined for any of the members on import. Assembly connections are
created if that information is provided in the CIS/2 import file.
If you have any questions about using this translator, please contact Intergraph
Support. You can find support information on our web site:
http://support.intergraph.com.

System - Select the system to which to assign the objects being read. You can define
new systems in the Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all
systems defined in the workspace or the model.
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
558 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Coordinate System - Select the coordinate system to which to assign the objects
being read. If needed, you can create a new coordinate system in the Grids task.
New - Loads any object in the CIS/2 file that is not in the model. Use the All On or
All Off commands to select or clear all checkboxes.
Modified - Loads any object that exists in both the CIS/2 file and the model that has
changed in the CIS/2 file. Use the All On or All Off commands to select or clear all
checkboxes.
Members - Select to read into the model the linear members defined in the CIS/2 file.
Openings on members are not imported.
Slabs/Plates - Select to read into the model the slabs and plates defined in the CIS/2
file.
Walls - Select to read into the model the walls defined in the CIS/2 file. All walls are
imported as slabs.
Openings - Select to read into the model the openings (holes) defined in the CIS/2
file for slabs, walls, grating, and checker plates.
Connections - Select to read into the model the gusset plates, clip angles, and other
plates and standard sections used to connect members. The detailing software marks
these objects as connection parts in the CIS/2 schema during export.
Assemblies - Select to read into the model the assemblies defined in the CIS/2 file.
All On - Click to activate all New and Modified check boxes.
All Off - Click to clear all New and Modified check boxes.
Defaults - Activates a dialog box where you define properties to use when the object
being imported does not have a recognized property.
Type Category - Select the type category to use when a member being
imported does not have a recognized type category. You can define a
custom member type category on the Structural Member Type sheet in
the AllCodeLists.xls workbook.
Type - Select the type to use when a member being imported does not
have a recognized type. The properties change depending on the member
type that you select. You can define a custom member type on the
Structural Member Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook.
Section Name - Select the cross-section to use when a member being
imported does not have a recognized section. Sections are defined in the
reference data.
Material Name - Select the material to use when a member being
imported does not have a recognized material.
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 559
Material Grade - Select the material grade to use when a member being
imported does not have a recognized material grade.
Type - Select the slab type to use when a slab being imported does not
have a recognized slab type.
Composition - Select the slab composition to use when a slab being
imported does not have a recognized slab composition.
CIS file - Define the file name and folder path of the CIMsteel Integration Standard
file to read.
Include mapping file - Select this option to use a section name mapping file when
importing the members from the CIS file. A mapping file swaps the third-party
software name for a section (for example, L3.5X2.5X1/4) with the SmartPlant 3D
name for a section (for example, L3-1/2X2-1/2X1/4). You must create the mapping
file using the File > New Mapping File Command before you can use the mapping
file in this command. Sample mapping files for the FrameWorks Plus AISC table are
delivered with the software in [Product
Directory]\3D\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps. For more
information, see New Mapping File Command.
Mapping file - Specify the mapping file to use if the Include mapping file option is
selected.
Log file - Specify a log file name. You can view the log file by clicking View Log.
Action - Select whether to import or preview the contents of the CIS/2 file. Select
Import to import objects from the CIS/2 into the model. Select Preview to identify
problems with the CIS/2 file before the actual import is attempted. Objects in the
CIS/2 file that have not been imported cannot be previewed.
Filter - Specifies how you want to preview the CIS/2 file. This option is only
available when Action is set to Preview.
Objects in CIS file with unknown sections, material, or type - Select
this option to help identify potential problems with the CIS/2 file before
you attempt the import. After using option, you can add unknown sections,
materials, and types to the mapping file.
Objects in DB that exist in CIS File - Select this option to identify
objects that are in both the model and the CIS/2 file.
Objects in DB that are modified in CIS File - Select this option to
identify objects that are in both the model and the CIS/2 but that have
different attributes (such as section size) in the CIS/2 file. This option is
useful when "round tripping" between SmartPlant 3D and other software
package.
Option - Specifies how you want to import objects from the CIS/2 file. This option is
only available when Action is set to Import.
Appendix C: Exporting FrameWorks Plus Projects to SmartPlant 3D
560 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Use no defaults - Select this option to import only those objects with
known to SmartPlant 3D (known either in the software or in the specified
mapping file) sections. Objects with unknown sections are not imported
into the model but are noted in the log file.
Use defaults if needed - Select this option to import all objects in the
CIS/2 to the model. Objects with sections not found in the software or in
the mapping file will be given the sections defined in the Defaults dialog
box. Objects imported with default sections are noted in the log file.
Related Topics
Import Structure Model, page 560
Import Structure Model
1. Click Tasks > Structure.
2. Click File > Import > Structure.
3. Select the system in which to place the imported objects. You can create new
systems in the Systems and Specifications task.
4. Select the coordinate system to which to associate the imported objects. You can
create new coordinate systems in the Grids tasks.
5. Specify which objects to import by selecting the New box or to update by
selecting the Modified box.
6. Click Defaults and define the default properties for imported objects that do not
have recognized properties.
7. Specify the file name and folder for the CIS file.
8. Define a mapping file, if needed.
9. Define a log file name and folder.
10. In the Action box, select Import.
11. In the Option box, select whether the software should use default properties.
12. Click Apply to import the CIS file.
13. Click View Log to review the log file.
Note
You must create a mapping file using the File > New Mapping File
Command before you can use that mapping file when importing a
structural model.
Related Topics
Import Structure Command, page 557
Appendix D: Troubleshooting FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 561
Appendix D: Troubleshooting FrameWorks
Plus
Before calling support, you may want to troubleshoot a problem on your own.
Section Libraries
Section Library not found
Problem: Section library not found error displays during model initialization.
Possible Solutions:
Use the File > Section Library and File> Cell Library commands to
reattach the user section library and corresponding cell library. Then use
the File > Save FWP Settings command to have FrameWorks Plus
automatically attach the section library and cell library when the model is
opened.
You may have to drop and reset views for the sections to appear.
Use the File > Verify Model command to check for invalid member
sections.
If different section libraries were used to place sections, you will need to
merge those libraries into a single library or recreate the missing sections.
You can use the File> Interactive Section Tables utility to merge section
libraries. FrameWorks Plus can only use one user section library and one
standard section library at a time.
Appendix D: Troubleshooting FrameWorks Plus
562 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Solids
Solids do not display
Problem: The solid elements in your model do not display.
Possible Solutions:
Use the View> Modify command to verify that solids are to be displayed
in the view.
Drop and reset the isometric view.
Use the Utilities > Review Element command to review the solid element.
If the Review Element command has errors, run the solid solver.ma
located in the ..\fwplus\bin folder. Read the solver.txt file before running
solver.ma.
If the solid has a hole, try deleting and replacing the hole.
Review Element cannot review solids
Problem: The Utilities > Review Element command cannot review solids. A "Invalid
hole" or "Invalid solid" message appears.
Possible Solutions:
Use the File> Compress Model command to compress the model database
files.
Run the solid solver.ma located in the ..\fwplus\bin folder. Read the
solver.txt file before running solver.ma.
Appendix D: Troubleshooting FrameWorks Plus
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 563
Models
Cannot open the model
Problem: FrameWorks Plus cannot open the model.
Possible Solution:
1. Open model's design file in MicroStation.
2. Close all views.
3. Click File > Save Settings.
4. Exit MicroStation and open the model using FrameWorks Plus.
If the model opens, the problem is with one of the views (such as an invalid
cutback or a corrupted member override). Go to step 5.
If the model does not open, skip to the Corrupt Model File topic.
5. Use the View > Set command to set each view in the model one at a time until the
abort occurs.
6. Create a new view that duplicates the view that caused the abort.
Corrupt model file
Problem: If the design file should become corrupt in some way, you can get
FrameWorks Plus to regenerate the design file.
Possible Solution:
1. Rename the corrupted design file.
2. Copy the appropriate seed design file to the model directory.
3. Edit the copied seed design file's properties to remove read-only access.
4. Rename the seed design file to the model name.
5. Open the model in FrameWorks Plus. The model database files automatically
repopulate the design file.
6. If there were generic MicroStation graphics in the original model file (gridlines
for example) that you want to save, attach the original model as a MicroStation
reference model and copy the graphics into the fixed model. However, if original
model file cannot be attached, you have to re-create the graphics and gridlines.
Appendix D: Troubleshooting FrameWorks Plus
564 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Error Messages
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 565
Error Messages
This section contains a listing of all the informational, error, and warning
messages you are likely to see while using FrameWorks Plus. Along with the
messages are probable reasons for the error or warning, and possible recovery steps.
There are some additional diagnostic messages that are not listed here and should not
display during normal use of FrameWorks Plus. However, if a diagnostic message
does occur and you cannot determine the cause or find a solution to the problem,
please contact your authorized dealer for assistance.
Arc members are not supported by this command!
Explanation: You tried to manipulate an arc member with one of the
following commands: Modify Work Point Offset, Modify Member End,
Join Members, or Split Member. These commands cannot be used on arc
members.
Recovery: None.
Analysis Results file Not Found
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus cannot locate the file containing the
analysis results information. For STAAD analysis jobs, this is a file with a
.dbs extension; GTSTRUDL uses a .dbx file. The results file must have
the same root name as the input file, and be located in the interface
directory (\int) for the current project.
Recovery: Run the analysis program before using the read results
command, and verify that the results file is in the interface directory.
Cannot attach Model to itself
Explanation: You attempted to attach the same model as the active model
with the Attach Model command.
Recovery: Attach a different model from the project.
Cannot copy grid to same FrameWorks Plus view
Explanation: You attempted to copy a grid set associated with a view to
the same view. This would result in duplicate, coincident grid sets, and
FrameWorks Plus prevents this from happening.
Recovery: Copy grids to any other parallel model view except the original
view in which the grid was created.
Cannot create IST table
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus cannot create the section library files.
Error Messages
566 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Recovery: Make sure the directory path exists and that you have
permission to write to that directory.
Cannot modify grids from attached partition
Explanation: You selected a grid line from an attached model partition
when running the Edit Grid Label command. The grid lines from an
attached partition are read-only access.
Recovery: Open the attached partition model. You can modify the labels
when the partition is the active model file.
Cannot overwrite standard section -- use different name
Explanation: You've tried to save a new section library using a name of an
existing section library.
Recovery: Select a new name for the new section library.
CSD File Name must be specified
Explanation: The name of the CSD file has not been specified.
Recovery: Use the CSD File Name key-in field to specify the name for
the CSD file before selecting the OK button.
Compressing members will result in member ID's being resequenced.
Explanation: When FrameWorks Plus compresses the Linear Member data
file, the internal database member IDs are resequenced. These IDs are
written to analytical input file. If you compress the Linear Member data
file, the IDs in the model and the IDs in the input file will no longer
match. This can also cause approved clashes to be lost because PD_Clash
tracks clashes on member IDs.
Recovery: None.
Cut plane parallel to member. Invalid cutback has been erased.
Explanation: After moving a member that had a cutback defined, the new
member direction is parallel to the plane used to define the cutback. This
causes the cutback to be invalid, so the cutback is deleted.
Recovery: Replace the cutback on the member that was moved.
Cutting plane parallel to member line.
Explanation: The cutting plane you defined is parallel to the member line.
Recovery: Redefine the cutting plane so it intersects the member line.
Database partition already attached
Explanation: When running the Attach Model command, you selected the
name of a model which is already attached to this active model.
Error Messages
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 567
Recovery: Select a model name that is not currently attached.
Design file not in project model directory \mod
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus cannot find the model .dgn file in the
project's \mod directory.
Recovery: Create a new MicroStation .dgn file in the model directory
using the model's name for the name of the new design file. The new
design file should be empty. FrameWorks Plus automatically re-creates
the design file information using the new design file the next time you
enter the model.
Detected more than 50 connect points - member ID XXX not processed
Explanation: When creating a clash envelope file, the software discovered
a member with more than fifty connected members. PD_Clash can only
handle a maximum of fifty connect points for a member. The software did
not write the member to the envelope file to prevent problems with
PD_Clash.
Recovery: Split the member into multiple members such that no one
member has more than fifty other members framing into it.
Error attaching Reference File
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus couldn't find the reference file or does not
have permission to read the reference file.
Recovery: Check the name, directory path, and permissions of the
reference file.
Geometry modification possible only for solids and slabs.
Explanation: You're trying to modify the geometry of a wall element. You
can only modify geometry for slab and solid elements.
Recovery: None.
Error opening database file
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus was unable to open a model database file,
probably due to exceeding the established maximum number of open files.
Recovery: Verify that the system configuration parameters have been
properly set.
Existing FW arc selected. Please use Modify Type command to change arc type.
Explanation: You've tried to: 1) Place an arc using an existing
FrameWorks Plus arc as the pattern; or 2) You've tried to use a
MicroStation arc that has user data associated with it (for example, custom
line styles).
Error Messages
568 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Recovery: Use a plain MicroStation arc with no user data as your pattern
arc.
Face of hole does not intersect with parent solid!
Explanation: You've placed a hole outside the parent solid's physical area.
Recovery: Use the Delete Member command to delete the invalid hole.
Then replace the hole inside the parent element.
Fence is not placed in FrameWorks Plus view
Explanation: You attempted to place columns by fence, but the fence is
not in an active FrameWorks Plus plan model view.
Recovery: Set the plan view in which columns are to be placed, if the view
is not already active, and place the fence in this view before selecting the
Place Column command.
File Seek Error
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus cannot find the specified file.
Recovery: Check the spelling of the file name and the directory path.
File Write Error
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus cannot write the file.
Recovery: Check to make sure you have enough disk space and
permission to write to the directory.
FrameWorks already initialized
Explanation: You've tried to start FrameWorks Plus after it was already
running.
Recovery: None.
Freeze file open error. Unable to delete, update, or regenerate frozen view.
Explanation: The frozen view you are trying to update, regenerate, or
delete is in a design file that FrameWorks Plus cannot access. Either the
design file does not exist anymore, is open by another program, or has
read-only access.
Recovery: Make sure that the design file containing the frozen view is not
open by another program. Also make sure that the design file access is not
set to read-only.
Grid label already exists! Duplicate?
Explanation: The grid label you are about to assign already exists on
another grid line. If you continue, you will have two grid lines with the
same label.
Error Messages
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 569
Recovery: Key in a different grid label.
Grid must be placed in FrameWorks Plus Elevation View
Explanation: A view other than an active elevation view was selected
when creating an elevation grid.
Recovery: Place a data point in an active elevation model view. Use the
Set View command to activate the view if necessary.
Grid must be placed in FrameWorks Plus Plan View
Explanation: A view other than a plan model view was selected when
creating a plan grid.
Recovery: Place a data point in an active plan model view. Use the Set
View command to activate the view if necessary.
Grid to be copied not fully defined
Explanation: You attempted to copy a grid set consisting of a single line.
Grid sets must have at least two lines to be copied as a group.
Recovery: Create a grid set with more than one line and then use the Copy
Grid command to copy the set. Alternatively, use the MicroStation Copy
Element command to copy the single grid line (and any labels).
Holes totally or partly outside the slab will be deleted.
Explanation: You're redefining a slab or solid's geometry (shape) and one
or more holes in the existing shape are outside of the new shape. If you
continue, the holes will be deleted.
Recovery: None.
Improper Database Version
Explanation: A mismatch has been detected between versions of the
FrameWorks Plus software and the model database.
Recovery: See the README file delivered with FrameWorks Plus for
database upgrade or compatibility information.
Improper Section Library Version
Explanation: You're trying to use an ESL section library (FrameWorks
versions 1.6 and earlier) with FrameWorks versions 2.0 or later.
Use the ESL to IST converter to convert the ESL section libraries to IST
libraries.
Input File Name must be specified
Explanation: The name of the analysis input file has not been specified.
Error Messages
570 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Recovery: Use the File Name key-in field to specify the name for the
input file before selecting the OK button.
Invalid Analysis Results file - mismatch with map file
Explanation: The selected map file does not correspond with the analysis
results file (.dbx or .dbs) of the same name. This normally indicates that
members have been manually added or deleted to the analysis input file.
Recovery: Make changes as needed to the FrameWorks Plus model and
re-create the analysis input file. Run the analysis again and then execute
the FrameWorks Plus read results command.
Invalid clearance value for hole
Explanation: The cutout Clearance is added evenly to all sides of the
shape. If you define a Clearance that is greater than half the distance
between sides of a closed shape, FrameWorks Plus will not place the
cutout. For example, the distance between an I-section's flanges is 8.5
inches. If you define a Clearance greater than 4.25 inches, the cutout will
not be placed and this error message displays.
Recovery: Define a smaller clearance value.
Invalid Freeze Level Range: Start> End
Explanation: An invalid freeze level range has been specified on the Set
FrameWorks Levels dialog box.
Recovery: Specify an End level number that is larger than the Start level.
Invalid grid line selected - not Plan Grid
Explanation: When creating an elevation grid, you selected a grid line that
is not from a plan grid set. The grid line selected should be from a plan
view and parallel to and lie within the depth of the elevation view in which
you are placing the elevation grid.
Recovery: Select the proper plan grid line. If the elevation view was
created By Grid Line, select the same plan grid line used to create the
view.
Invalid grid line selected - non-vertical
Explanation: You selected a vertical grid line from an elevation grid when
creating an elevation model view. A vertical line does not sufficiently
define the view orientation.
Recovery: Select any non-vertical grid line to define the view plane, such
as any line from a plan grid.
Invalid Hole for 3D solid ID #
Error Messages
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 571
Explanation: The hole you are trying to create is not valid. This happens
when: 1) the entire hole is defined outside the parent solid's physical area,
2) the hole is inside the parent element's physical area but does not
intersect any of parent solid's surface (hole is a cavity), 3) you are using
two MicroStation elements to define the hole and one of the elements is
outside the parent solid's physical area, or 4) the hole you are placing
intersects an existing hole (two holes cannot overlap).
Recovery: Verify the hole placement and try again. If you are using two
MicroStation elements to define the hole, make sure both elements are
inside the parent solid's physical area. You can use the Locate Element By
Attributes command to find the solid if you are not sure which solid is
causing the problem.
Invalid map file - wrong analysis program type
Explanation: The map file selected when running the Read STAAD-III
Results or Read GTSTRUDL Results command indicates that the input
file was not created for the same analysis program.
Recovery: When a STAAD input file is created, FrameWorks Plus creates
a corresponding map file. You must use the Read STAAD-III Results
command to update the model from the results from this analysis program.
Invalid map file - mismatch with model database
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus detected an inconsistency between the
active model and the selected map file when the Read STAAD-III Results
or Read GTSTRUDL Results command was executed. This usually
indicates that the input file corresponding to the selected map file was
generated from a different model in the project, or you have made
significant changes (probably member deletions) to the model.
Recovery: Verify that the proper map file for the active model is selected.
If the problem persists, re-create the input file (and thus the map file),
rerun the analysis program, and try the read results command again.
Invalid OV - parallel to Member
Explanation: You attempted to either place a member or modify the
Orientation Vector (OV) of a member, such that the OV is parallel to the
axis (centerline) of the member. This is an invalid member definition.
Recovery: Specify an OV that is not parallel to the member to be placed or
modified.
Invalid view for Elevation Grid
Explanation: A view other than an elevation model view was selected
when creating an elevation grid.
Error Messages
572 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Recovery: Place a data point in an active elevation model view. Use the
Set View command to activate the view.
Invalid view for Plan Grid
Explanation: A view other than a plan model view was selected when
creating a plan grid.
Recovery: Place a data point in an active plan model view. Use the Set
View command to activate the view.
Loads cannot be placed on arc or solid members.
Explanation: You are trying to place a load on an arc member or a solid
member. FrameWorks Plus does not support loads on these two types of
members.
Recovery: None.
Maximum number of intersections exceeded in slicing in design file
Explanation: During the element slicing routine of running clash detection,
the routine has come across a solid with more than one concave area.
Multiple concave areas in a single solid are not supported by PD_Clash.
Recovery: Replace the solids so there is only one concave area per solid.
Members from attached models may not be selected!
Explanation: You've selected a solid member in an attached model for
cutouts.
Recovery: Open the model that contains the solid member you selected
and run cutouts in that model.
Memory Allocation Error
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus attempted to dynamically allocate memory
during the processing of a command. The virtual memory manager uses
temporary files on the computer's hard disk when there is insufficient free
memory available. This message occurs when there is insufficient disk
space available for the memory manager to create the swap file on the
hard disk.
Recovery: Verify sufficient free space is available on your computer's
hard disk drive.
Model Database Not Found
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus was unable to locate or open the
FrameWorks Plus model database for the active design file. Either the
design file you are in does not have an associated FrameWorks Plus
database or you have exceeded the maximum number of open files for the
system.
Error Messages
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 573
Recovery: Use the cremod utility to create a FrameWorks Plus design file
and model database. If you have a valid model database, verify that the
system configuration parameters have been properly set.
Model to be detached must be selected first
Explanation: The Detach button on the Detach Model dialog box was
selected before the name of the attached model was selected.
Recovery: Use the cursor to select the name of the model to be detached
from the list box before selecting the Detach button.
New grid label must be defined
Explanation: No new label has been defined for the Edit Grid Label
command.
Recovery: Use the New Label key-in field on the Grid palette pop-down
menu to specify the new grid label.
No elements in specified set
Explanation: You attempted to create an analysis input file or a material
report using the Use Selection Set option, but no members are in the
selection set.
Recovery: Build the selection set of elements to be operated on before
running the command or turn off the Use Selection Set option to operate
on the entire model.
No fence defined
Explanation: The command you've chosen requires a fence be placed in
the view first.
Recovery: Place a fence in the view around the elements that you want to
use the command with, and then reselect the command.
No floors found within elevation grid range
Explanation: There are no plan views in the database with an elevation
(height) value within the specified elevation range. FrameWorks Plus uses
the plan view heights to determine floor levels (horizontal lines) in the
elevation grid.
Recovery: Verify that the Elevation Range on the Create Elevation Grid
dialog box is correct and/or create plan views with elevations at the
desired floor level.
No FrameWorks Plus Models Attached
Explanation: The Detach Model command was selected when no model
partitions are currently attached.
Error Messages
574 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Recovery: Use this command only when you need to detach an attached
partitions.
No FrameWorks Plus Views Active (Set)
Explanation: A command was selected that requires an active model view
to process when no views are currently set.
Recovery: Use the Set View command to set one or more model views
before running the grid or view command which produced the error
message.
No intersecting grid lines found
Explanation: When attempting to create an elevation grid, you selected a
plan grid line that does not intersect with any other grid lines.
FrameWorks Plus uses the grid intersection points to create the vertical
grid line in the elevation grid.
Recovery: Select another grid line (that has intersections) from a different
plan grid.
No Members in Edit List
Explanation: The Edit Last Placed command was selected but no members
are available to edit.
Recovery: Use this command to edit members immediately after they are
placed or copied.
No Model Views Defined
Explanation: You attempted to set or delete a model view before creating
any model views.
Recovery: Use the Create View command to create a model view.
Not a FrameWorks Plus view
Explanation: You selected a view during the freeze view operation which
is not an active model view.
Recovery: Set (activate) the model view before running the Freeze View
command.
No user Section library attached
Explanation: You selected the Create User Section command when no
user ESL library is attached to the active model. All user sections are
created in the user ESL library.
Recovery: Use the creesl utility to create a user ESL library if you do not
already have one for this project. Then use the Section Library command
to attach the library to your model.
Error Messages
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 575
No Views Frozen
Explanation: You attempted to update, regenerate, or delete a frozen view
but there are no views frozen in the current model.
Recovery: These commands cannot be used unless there are frozen views
in the active model. Use the Freeze View command to create frozen views.
One or more loads on member # are out of member range and will be deleted.
Continue with member modification?
Explanation: You are using a command to modify a member's length. This
modification will cause a load that was placed at an Absolute location to
be off (or partially off) the member's end. If you click OK, the member is
modified and the affected load deleted.
Recovery: If you have gone ahead and modified the member, you'll need
to replace the load. If you haven't modified the member (the load still
exists), you can edit the load to be placed using Relative distances. Loads
placed using Relative distances are automatically recalculated when the
member length is changed. If you are not sure which member with loads is
causing the problem, use the Locate Element By Attributes command to
locate the member using the member ID displayed in the message.
PDLICE Failed: [Registry Search] System cannot find file specified -
Software\Intergraph\PD_Lice
Explanation: You have loaded FrameWorks Plus but do not have
SmartPlant Licensing installed on your system. FrameWorks Plus requires
one PDS 3D seat if you load FrameWorks Plus using a PDS serial number
or one FrameWorks Plus seat if you load FrameWorks Plus using a stand-
alone serial number.
Recovery: Install SmartPlant Licensing on your system and request a key.
Refer to the SmartPlant Licensing Manager Installation and User's Guide
for more information.
Plan grid line not within Elevation view
Explanation: When creating an elevation grid, you selected a grid line that
is not parallel to, or within the display depth of the elevation view,
selected for the grid. The grid line selected should be from a plan view and
parallel to and lie within the depth of the elevation view in which you are
placing the elevation grid.
Recovery: Select the proper plan grid line. If the elevation view was
created By Grid Line, select the same plan grid line used to create the
view.
Section library not found
Error Messages
576 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus was unable to find or open the section
library.
Recovery: Make sure that the standard section library you specified when
you created the model database resides in the esl directory (.\fwplus\esl).
Also, if you are using a user section library, it must be in the project's \esl
directory.
Section not found
Explanation: You've requested a section that does not exist in active
section library or the active user section library.
Recovery: Make sure you've keyed in the correct section name. Also
check to make sure the proper section library is active.
Source Model View of Frozen View to be updated must be active (set)
Explanation: The Model View used to create the Frozen View must be
active before FrameWorks Plus can update the Frozen View.
Recovery: Use the Set View command to activate the Model View before
running the Update Frozen command.
Source Model View of Frozen View to be regenerated must be active (set)
Explanation: The Model View used to create the Frozen View must be
active before FrameWorks Plus can regenerate the Frozen View.
Recovery: Use the Set View command to activate the Model View before
running the Regenerate command.
Start section and end section don't have the same section type. Section type must
be the same for both sections.
Explanation: You're trying to define a tapered member using two different
section types (the start section as a channel and the end section as a
double-angle, for example).
Recovery: Use the same section type for both the start and end sections.
This command is only available when FrameWorks Plus is running as part of
the PDS environment.
Explanation: You've selected a command that is only available if
FrameWorks Plus is loaded using a PDS serial number and you've
accessed the FrameWorks Plus model through PD_Shell.
Recovery: Reload FrameWorks Plus using a PDS serial number and
access the model using PD_Shell.
This serial number: # is not valid on this platform.
Error Messages
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 577
Explanation: You're trying to install FrameWorks Plus on Windows 95
using a PDS serial number. Because the SmartPlant Licensing software
needed to run FrameWorks Plus when using a PDS serial number does not
run on Windows 95, FrameWorks Plus' setup prevents you from using the
PDS serial number.
Recovery: Use a FrameWorks Plus stand-alone serial number to install
FrameWorks Plus on Windows 95. Alternately, you can use the PDS serial
number to install FrameWorks Plus on a computer running Windows NT.
Top face is not a planar surface.
Explanation: You are trying to create a slab using by element method and
the elements are not planar with one another.
Recovery: Replace the MicroStation elements that you want to use to
create the slab making sure that all of the elements are co-planar.
Type Mismatch! The attached file's design code or analysis package does not
match the settings in this file.
Explanation: One or more attached models has a different 3rd Party
Software setting than the active model. This can be either different
analysis packages or the same analysis package but different design codes.
FrameWorks Plus will not write input decks if all models do not have the
same analysis package and design code selected.
Recovery: Either detach the models that have the different settings or open
each of the attached models and use the Settings > 3rd Party Software
command to set the same analysis package and design code.
Unable to modify hole! Specified thickness is greater than parent solid.
Explanation: The new thickness you've specified for the hole is thicker
than the parent solid. This would create a hole that sticks out of the parent
solid. FrameWorks Plus will not place holes outside the parent solid's
physical area.
Recovery: Key in a new thickness for the hole that is equal to or less than
the thickness of the parent solid. You can use the Review Element
command to find out the thickness of the parent solid if you are not sure.
Unable to process overrides for holes separately from parent solid.
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus does not allow different symbology for
holes and parent solids. Symbology overrides can only be applied to the
parent solid member.
Recovery: None.
Use Edit Text command to modify Horizontal Elevation grid labels
Error Messages
578 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
Explanation: You attempted to edit the label of a horizontal grid line in an
elevation grid set with the Edit Grid Label command. This command is to
be used only for grid lines with alphanumeric grid label/bubble pairs, such
as vertical grid lines in an elevation grid, and all plan grid lines.
Recovery: Use the MicroStation Edit Text command to modify the
horizontal grid line labels. This has no adverse effects on future
FrameWorks Plus operations on the grid line or labels.
View is not a FrameWorks Plus view
Explanation: You attempted to modify a view that is not an active
FrameWorks Plus model view.
Recovery: Set the view to be modified and make sure you identify the
proper model view immediately after you select the view modification
command.
View must be selected first
Explanation: You attempted to freeze a view before selecting the view to
be frozen.
Recovery: Select the model view to be frozen before selecting the Freeze
button.
View Name must be selected first
Explanation: While performing a view command, you selected the Apply
or OK button before selecting a view name from the list box.
Recovery: Select a view name with the cursor before picking a button to
process the command.
Views not parallel - Cannot Copy Grid
Explanation: You attempted to use the Copy Grid command to copy a grid
set to another view which is not parallel to the view associated with the
original grid. Plan grids can be copied to plan views; elevation grids can
be copied to parallel elevation views.
Recovery: Select a target view that is parallel to the originating grid's
view.
Wall can be placed only in a plan view
Explanation: You are trying to place a wall in an elevation or 3D view.
Recovery: Place the wall using a plan view.
Warning! Only 50 points allowed for walls.
Error Messages
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 579
Explanation: Walls are limited to 50 vertices (placement defining points).
This limitation applies for both interactive placement and using an existing
MicroStation element for placement.
Recovery: Instead of trying to place a single wall, place the wall as several
different walls.
Warning! Only 95 points allowed for slabs/solids.
Explanation: Slabs and solids are limited to 95 vertices (placement
defining points). This limitation applies for both interactive placement and
using an existing MicroStation element for placement.
Recovery: Instead of trying to place a single slab or solid, place the slab as
several different slabs.
Zero length member detected
Explanation: FrameWorks Plus has found a member with no defined
length.
Recovery: Modify the member length or delete the member.
Zero volume element not permitted.
Explanation: You're trying to place a solid or a hole in a solid that does not
have any volume (the solid or hole is 2D, not 3D). FrameWorks Plus does
not allow zero volume elements to be placed.
Recovery: Replace the solid or hole using 3 different dimensions.
Error Messages
580 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

Glossary
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 581
Glossary
A
active depth - The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and
perform manipulations.
AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) - An organization responsible for
defining American steel construction standards.
annotations - Dimensions, notes, symbols, or reports placed in a drawing to provide
information or comments.
ASCII - American Standard for Computer Information Interchange; the standard file
type used for communications among most computers.
associativity - The means by which the connectivity of a model is preserved
following model manipulations using an associative move command.
axis (plural: axes) - An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or
element. The design cube orientation is normally defined in terms of an X-, Y-, and
Z-axis. Some 3-D graphic elements have an associated axis used to define the center
or axis for rotations.
B
BCSA (British Constructional Steelwork Association) - An organization
responsible for defining British steel construction standards.
beam - A structural member type typically placed with the member axis in a nominal
horizontal orientation.
bill of materials - An indented and exploded list of parts in an assembly.
blue file - See Common Structural Database.
BOM - Bill of Materials
C
CISC (Canadian Institute of Steel Construction) - An organization responsible for
defining Canadian steel construction standards.
can - A reinforcing connection piece placed at member intersections.
camber - Slight upward curve given to trusses and girders to avoid the effect of sag
or self-weight.
cantilever - A beam, girder, or truss that overhangs one or both supports.
Glossary
582 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
cardinal point (CP) - A point on a physical member cross-section through which the
member centerline passes. Ten cardinal points are available.

channel - A structural shape referring to a three-sided member type with each of the
sides joined at a right angle.
chord - The principal member of a truss. Can be on either the top or bottom of the
truss.
class - A means of segregating certain groups of structural elements in a model,
typically for inclusion or exclusion from analysis and design procedures.
circular bar - A structural shape referring to a cylindrical solid.
circular tube - A structural shape referring to a hollow cylindrical member type or
pipe.
clip angle - A small angle-shaped piece of steel used for fastening members together.
column - A vertical structural member usually attached to a footing and extending to
the roof of a building.
Common Structural Database (CSD) - A neutral nongraphic interface file used to
transmit information between various application software products.
constraint - An analytical boundary condition applied to a node in the model.
Constraints can be applied in any valid degree of freedom in the model. Constraints
force zero movement at the node and degree of freedom of application.
cope - To cut out the top or bottom flanges and possibly the web so that one member
will frame into another.
CP - See cardinal point (CP)
cross section - The shape of a member when viewed along the member line.
CSD - See Common Structural Database (CSD)
Glossary
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 583
cutback - An axial offset that typically represents the distance from a member
centerline to its face. Cutbacks are used to account for the difference between how a
structure is modeled and constructed in terms of lengths of members and quantities of
materials.
D
degree of freedom - An allowable direction of movement, either translation or
rotation. For plates and linear members, there are six possible degrees of freedom
(DOFs): translation X, Y, and Z and rotation RX, RY, and RZ.
design file - A file containing graphics and text data. Also called a drawing file.
display depth - The command that sets limits on the amount of the design cube that
is visible. This command specifies the slice of the design cube with which you can
work in a specific view.
double line - A representation of a structural member which shows the true (or
scaled) width of a structural section on a member, including hidden lines, if any.
Double line representation is often used in plan and elevation model views.
drawing file - A design file that contains a finished drawing. The drawing file
contains a drawing border and has reference files of drawing views attached.
drawing view - A drawing view is created by freezing a FrameWorks Plus model
view to create permanent graphics in the model design file. These drawing views are
then used in the Drawing Composition process to create a construction drawing. Also
known as Frozen Views.
drift pin - A tapered steel pin used to align bolt or rivet holes when assembling steel.
E
elevation view - A viewing orientation normal to a vertical section through a
structure, such as a single bay, or along a grid line. Also known as a sectional view of
a structure.
end releases - Physical member attributes that define the connection between a
member and its nodes. End releases (degrees of freedom) are used to simulate pinned
members as well as other special modeling situations.
The member will not contribute stiffness to the node if the degree of freedom (end
release) is released. Similarly, the node will not transfer forces or moments to the
member through a release degree of freedom. End released can be defined in any
valid degree of freedom for the model.
engineering drawing - Basic layout drawing of a structure used for design and
engineering purposes.
Glossary
584 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
erection clearance - The amount of space left between members to ease assembly.
erection diagrams - Structural drawings prepared specifically for use in the field for
erecting a structure. Used in steel and precast concrete construction to show how the
structure fits together, and in what order each piece is to be erected. The drawing
includes the location of every part of the structure, number of pieces in members, and
the approximate weights of heavy members to assist in construction.
F
fabricate - To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the shop.
fabrication plans - Structural detailed drawing of individual structural members,
describing exactly how they are to be fabricated.
fasteners - Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members.
fences - A temporary means of locating and grouping elements for manipulation.
finite element - A simple geometric shape defined by a specific number of nodes in a
specific order. Elements are dependent on all the nodes defining their shape; if any
node is deleted, the element is also deleted. Elements are the building blocks of finite
element models. Elements can be one of three types: linear or one-dimensional, plate
or two-dimensional, or solid or three-dimensional.
flange - The projecting portion of a beam, channel, or column.
flexure - A term used for describing bending behavior.
footing - An enlargement at the base of a column, or at the bottom of a wall, to
distribute the load over a greater portion of ground and thereby prevent settling.
foot print - A graphical cross-section of a structural member. Foot prints are used to
represent members that intersect a model view plane at or near a perpendicular angle
of intersection.
foundation - The bottom most portion of a wall, or that part of a wall that rests on the
footing, upon which the rest of the wall is built.
foundation or masonry plans - Structural drawings that include detail drawings of
all foundations and walls that support the structure. The plans show the loads on the
foundations, the depth of footings, the proportions of concrete, the quality of
masonry, the allowable bearing on the soil, and all data necessary for accurately
locating and constructing the foundations.
framing plan - A structural drawing plan view, drawn to scale, providing an
overhead view of the structural components of a building. Columns, beams, and
girders, roof members, floor members, and wall members all require separate framing
plans.
Glossary
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 585
freeze level - The level on which the frozen (drawing view) graphics are placed in the
design file.
Fu - Ultimate strength
Fy - Yield strength
G
gap element - An analytical element used to simulate one-way compression-only
behavior. A gap element can resist compression only when the gap is closed. It resists
neither compression nor tension when it is open. Typical uses of gap elements in
modeling include beams on elastic foundation and the contact of two initially
unconnected regions.
general plans - Structural drawings that include a profile of the ground; location of
the structure; elevations of ruling points in the structure; clearances; grades; direction
of flow; and all other substructure and superstructure design data.
girder - A horizontal support member similar to a beam. Some people maintain that a
girders span from column to column, and beams span from girder to girder. Other
people maintain that beams span column to column and girders span from beam to
beam.
girt - A beam usually bolted to columns to support the side covering, or to serve as
window lintels.
grade - The material grade of the structural member.
grid set - A group of grid lines placed within a plane that is linked by user data. A
grid set can be manipulated as a single unit.
gusset plate - A plate used to connect various members, such as in a truss.
H
hook element - An analytical element or boundary condition used to simulate one-
way tension-only behavior. A hook element is a backwards gap with the ability to
resist tension only when the hook is closed. It resists neither tension nor compression
when it is open. Typical uses of hook elements in modeling include structural
bracing, cables, tension, bolts, and the separation of two connected regions.
hull - The outside surface or envelope of a member.
I
I-Section - A structural shape referring to any member type in the form of an "I".
interference checking - A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient
clearance between members in a model
Glossary
586 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
isometric - Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes at
right angles; a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn at an angle
to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from the base.
isotropic material
A material that behaves with the same material properties in all direction. An example
of an isotropic material is steel.
J
jacket - A three- or four-faced vertical or sloped tower.
joist - A horizontal structural members that support the floor or roof of a building.
K
kips - kilo pounds.
ksi - kips per square inch.
knee brace - A corner brace used to prevent angular movement.
L
lintel - A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening.
levels - Layer-like divisions of the design file. Elements can be organized in any
fashion on 63 levels, although no element can span two levels. Only one level can be
active at a time, but any combination can be displayed or blanked from the screen.
The active level must be displayed.
local model - The active FrameWorks design file and model database on which you
are working. You have complete read and write access to the local model data. In
contrast, an attached partition is a model database that is referenced in read-only
mode.
load - A force vector applied to a member.
M
material properties - Attributes of the material useful in the analysis process.
map file - This file, which has a .map extension, is created each time an analysis
input file is generated. It is used by FrameWorks Plus to associate the analytical and
physical members when the analysis results are read in to update the model.
member - A linear structural element, such as a beam, column, or brace.
Glossary
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 587
member line - Linear member; member line design element, the same as a
MicroStation line.
MicroStation - A computer-aided design software package from Bentley Systems,
Inc.
model file - A design/database file that defines the 3-D geometry and connectivity of
a structure.
model view - A special type of view created and used by FrameWorks Plus for the
layout and display of members in the structural model. Three types of model view can
be created: Plan, Elevation, and 3-D.
MTO (Material Take-Off) - A list of the structural members within a model or
portion of a model. Also referred to as a bill of materials.
MU:SU:PU - Distances in design files are sometimes expressed in the form of three
numbers separated by colons MU:SU:PU. (Distances are always keyed in this way.)
For example, 3:4:100 means three master units (MU), four sub-units (SU), and 100
positional units (PU).
For example, if the working units are meters, then MU is meters, SU is centimeters,
and PU is millimeters. Keying in a MU:SU:PU value of 3:20:4 would translate into 3
meters, 20 centimeters, and 4 millimeters.
O
orientation vector - A vector used to define a physical member's local y-x plane
when combined with the local x axis defined by the start and end nodes.
orthotropic material - A material that has two material directions that are orthogonal
to one another. An example of an orthotropic material is wood.
P
panel - The space between adjacent floor supports, or purlins, in a roof.
partition - A subset of a larger overall structural project, which has been divided into
one or more model partitions. You can access any partitions of the project in
FrameWorks Plus by attaching one or more model partitions to the local model file.
physical member - A concept that helps to eliminate modeling errors by providing a
straightforward method for defining structure geometry by placing members in a
model in much the same way that they would be framed in the field. During analysis
pre-processing, physical members are split into finite elements (segments) while still
maintaining the collective status of the physical member during model revisions. The
software assigns member releases at each end of the true physical member, while
preventing release assignments from being made to interior nodes of the finite
elements.
Glossary
588 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

pile - A double-battered vertical member placed at each corner of a jacket or at an
intermediate position.
preference file - A file that contains all of the preference sets of command
parameters used by FrameWorks Plus commands. Two preference files are delivered
with FrameWorks Plus: one for imperial units, and another for metric units.
Preference files are also referred to as resource files.
preference set - A set of parameter values associated with a particular command and
saved by a specified name in the preference file. Many FrameWorks Plus commands
use preference sets to store and retrieve default command parameters.
pitch - The ratio of rise to run for roofs. Pitch is also the center distance between
bolts or rivets, parallel to the axis of the member.
plate - A flat, rectangular steel shape.
post tensioning - A method of pre-stressing concrete, by stressing the steel strands
after the concrete has been poured and allowed to harden.
pre-stressed concrete - Concrete products that are stressed before they are erected in
a structure. This is accomplished by passing high-strength steel strands through the
form and applying stress to the strands either before or after the concrete is poured.
precast concrete - Concrete members that are poured in forms at a plant or factory
and allowed to harden. There are two types of precast products, pre-stressed products
and reinforced products.
pretensioning - Stressing the steel strands in a pre-stressed member before the
concrete is poured into the form.
Glossary
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 589
primary member - A main structural support member.
principle of Superposition - The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and
displacements due to different forces can be combined.
project - A directory file created in an application environment that contains design
files and subprojects.
purlin - Horizontal structural member extending between trusses, used as beams for
supporting the roof.
R
rafters - Beams or truss members that support the purlins.
rebar - A term for steel reinforcing bars that are used to reinforce concrete.
reference file - A design file attached to another design file for viewing reference; a
graphic representation, or model, attached to a drawing view of a design model.
reflect - A parameter that affects the placement orientation of member cross-sections.
At the user's option, the sections can be placed with their geometry reflected or
mirrored about the local section y-axis.
rectangular bar - A structural shape referring to a four-sided solid bar.
rectangular tube - A structural shape referring to a four-sided hollow member type.
reflect - A parameter that affects the placement orientation of member cross-sections.
At the user's option, the sections can be placed with their geometry reflected or
mirrored about the local section y-axis.
reinforced concrete plan - A framing plan that identifies all beams and slabs by
letter and number. The slab, beam, and bend schedules give all details for preparation
and placement (number, size, spacing, bending, and location) of the reinforcing steel.
retaining wall - A structural wall, either gravity or cantilever, used to hold back dirt
or other materials.
rule-based joint - A feature that enables you to offset the work point of two members
that intersect at a node. The rules vary depending on the structural type, member
orientation, and construction practices. Ruled joints are typically used when a
connection detail calls for the physical member ends to be noncoincident with an
intersection member's centerline.
S
Glossary
590 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
saddle - The multi-curved shape that appears when a pipe section is connected to
another pipe section.

sag ties - Tie rods between purlins in the plane of a roof, to carry the component of
the roof load parallel to the roof. Tie rods are used to support girts.
SAISC (South African Institute of Steel Construction) - An organization
responsible for defining South African steel construction standards.
secondary member - A member that is not a significant load-bearing member
section - A structural member whose parameters are defined in one of the InterSect
steel shape tables or in a user or project section table.
section icon - A graphic shape placed at the start of all physical members depicting
the scaled cross-section.
section name - An alphanumeric code used to refer to a specific member in a steel
table.
section orientation - The position of physical member cress section relative to the
physical member local coordinate system.
section table - A library of standard structural shapes that contains the necessary
parametric properties of each section size, such as depth, width, and inertias. Several
international tables are delivered with FrameWorks Plus.
selection set - A temporary means of grouping together many, graphical elements
when performing a specific operation in FrameWorks Plus or MicroStation. All
elements in the selection set can be manipulated as a unit.
shear stiffness - A physical member attribute that indicates whether to include shear
stiffness in the member's analytical element stiffness matrix.
shear walls - A wall designed to resist lateral loading from winds, underground
disturbances, or blasts.
shop drawings - Drawings prepared for shop personnel to fabricate structural
members. Usually includes fabrication details and a Bill of Materials.
Glossary
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 591
skewed member - A structural member that is not at right angles to its connecting
members.
slab - A flat concrete area usually reinforced with wire mesh and rebar.
slope - The degree of incline of a roof, expressed as a ratio of the vertical rise to the
horizontal run.
span - A group of contiguous physical members that are not intersected by brace- or
column-type physical member.
splice - To fasten together two physical members, usually columns end-to-end, to
form a single continuing length.
stiffener - An angle, plate, or channel fastened to a member to prevent buckling.
stress - Forces acting on structural members due to various types of loads. These
forces can be shear, tension, compression, or torsion.
stringer - A longitudinal member used to support loads directly.
strut - A compression member in a framework.
style - The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes, dash-dot, solid, and
so forth.
symbology - The display style of an element, including color, style, and weight.
suspended floor - A concrete floor system built above and off the ground.
T
tilt-up walls - A poured in place concrete walls that are poured in forms on the
ground and then tilted up into place by cranes or hoists.
tentative point - Tentative location of a data point, used mainly when snapping to
elements. Pressing the data button again accepts the tentative point location, while
placing another tentative point locates a different element.
Top-Of-Steel (TOS) - A means of placing structural members about an imaginary
line running along the physical top of a structural member (cardinal point 8).
transition - A cross-section type that results in a tapered length of member and
involves a gradual change in section size. See also Uniform.
truss - A rigid framed structure consisting of straight members; joined to form a
pattern of interconnecting triangles for carrying loads.
U
Glossary
592 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
uniform - A cross-section type that results in a uniform length of member and
involves an abrupt change in section size. See also transition.
units of resolution (UORs) - The distance between adjacent points in MicroStation's
design plane. The design plane consists of 4,294,967,296 discrete positions along
each coordinate axis. These positions, or UORs, are defined as real world coordinates
by master units and sub-units (collectively, working units). This process is similar to
setting up a piece of graph paper to represent data of a specific range.
W
web - The center section separating the flanges of an I-section, tee, or channel.
weight - The thickness of a displayed element; usually represented as the number of
strokes it would be plotted, plus the original stroke. For example, wt=5 means that the
weight or thickness of the element is six strokes.
X
x-section - Cross-section; a graphically-placed cross-section representing the member
section size.
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 593
Index

3D views, 191
3rd party software, 183
A/H
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
abbreviate section, 223
activating
views, 208
AISC-ASD
BEAM, 363
CB, 363
CHECK CODE, 363
CMY, 363
CMZ, 363
code parameters, 363
DFF, 363
DJ1, 363
DJ2, 363
DMAX, 363
DMIN, 363
KY, 363
KZ, 363
LY, 363
LZ, 363
MAIN, 363
NSF, 363
PROFILE, 363
PUNCH, 363
RATIO, 363
SELECT, 363
SSY, 363
SSZ, 363
STIFF, 363
TRACK, 363
UNL, 363
WELD, 363
WMIN, 363
AISC-LRFD
BEAM, 367
CB, 367
CHECK CODE, 367
code parameters, 367
DFF, 367
DJ1, 367
DJ2, 367
KY, 367
KZ, 367
LY, 367
LZ, 367
MAX, 367
MIN, 367
NSF, 367
PROFILE, 367
RATIO, 367
SELECT, 367
TRACK, 367
UNF, 367
UNL, 367
alert bell, 150
alert box, 150
algebraic, 344
aluminum, 306
analysis, 112
analysis software, 183
analytic
reports, 458
analytic reports
header format, 460
analytical, 339
delete load, 354
edit load, 350
import deck, 129
labeling, 356
labeling loads, 355
labeling supports, 358
load cases, 340
load combinations, 344
modifying releases, 355
modifying supports, 357
nodes, 358
placing load, 346
ANETFACT, 387
angle tolerance, 223
annotation
override location, 235
APPROACH, 374
arbitrary sections, 488
cell file, 56
editing shear center, 486
editing torsional constant, 486
arcs
concentric, 334
fireproofing, 303
modifying, 334
place member, 274
reviewing, 477
sweep angle, 320
area volume graphics, 508
ASCII, 538
save load case, 341
save load combination, 341
ASD9
Index
594 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
A/H, 370
AXEFF, 370
CB, 370
CMY, 370
CMZ, 370
code parameters, 370
COMPK, 370
FRLX, 370
FSB, 370
FTS, 370
FXMIN, 370
FYLD, 370
FYMIN, 370
FZMIN, 370
GAY, 370
GAZ, 370
GBY, 370
GBZ, 370
KX, 370
KY, 370
KZ, 370
LX, 370
MYMIN, 370
MZMIN, 370
REDE, 370
REDFTS, 370
REDFYLD, 370
SDSWAYY, 370
SDSWAYZ, 370
SLENCOMP, 370
SLENTEN, 370
UNLCFBF, 370
UNLCFTF, 370
assembly, 167, 311
associativity, 314
attaching a model, 44
attributes
members, 154, 167, 311
user, 167, 311
attributes.dat, 311
auto increment, 172
autoname, 172
autosnap, 182
AXEFF
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
NF83, 383
batch commands, 29
BEAM
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
beams
attributes, 154, 167
compute cutbacks, 413
copying, 317
cutback priority, 413
deleting, 338
extend to intersection, 335, 337
extending end, 320
fireproofing, 164
joining, 332
locate, 481
mirroring, 324
mitered cutbacks, 418
modify arc, 334
modify attributes, 311
modify cardinal point, 298
modify class, 308
modify material, 306
modify material grade, 306
modify member end, 321
modify name, 297
modify orientation vector, 301
modify reflect, 300
modify rotation, 299
modify section, 295
modify type, 301
modifying fireproofing, 303
move, 319
multi-plane cutbacks, 419
offsets, 330, 331
orientation, 156
parameters, 159, 164, 167
placing, 267
reviewing, 477
rotating, 322
splitting, 332
symbology, 177
tapered section, 295
uncut member, 422
user cutbacks, 416
BEARNGR, 387
bell, 150
BERSURF, 387
block
fully encased, 164
top flange exposed, 164
BOLTSHR, 387
BOLTTENS, 387
BOLTTYPE, 387
braces
attributes, 154, 167
chevron, 326
compute cutbacks, 413
copying, 317
cutback priority, 413
deleting, 338
extend to intersection, 335, 337
extending end, 320
fireproofing, 164
joining, 332
mirroring, 324
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 595
mitered cutbacks, 418
modify arc, 334
modify attributes, 311
modify cardinal point, 298
modify class, 308
modify material, 306
modify material grade, 306
modify member end, 321
modify name, 297
modify orientation vector, 301
modify reflect, 300
modify rotation, 299
modify section, 295
modify type, 301
modifying fireproofing, 303
move, 319
multi-plane cutbacks, 419
offsets, 330, 331
orientation, 156
parameters, 159, 164, 167
places, 270
placing vertical, 269
reviewing, 477
rotating, 322
splitting, 332
symbology, 177
tapered section, 295
uncut member, 422
user cutbacks, 416
BS5950
APPROACH, 374
AXEFF, 374
code parameters, 374
COLUMNS, 374
COMPK, 374
DESTLDY, 374
DESTLDZ, 374
FRLEY, 374
FRLEZ, 374
FXMIN, 374
FYMIN, 374
FZMIN, 374
GAY, 374
GAZ, 374
GBY, 374
GBZ, 374
KY, 374
KZ, 374
LATTORBU, 374
LE, 374
my, 374
MYMIN, 374
mz, 374
MZMIN, 374
n, 374
Py, 374
REDE, 374
REDPy, 374
SDSWAYZ, 374
SHRAREAF, 374
SLENCOMP, 374
SLENTEN, 374
UNITS, 374
buoyancy, 311
by setback (percent), 164
by setback (value), 164
cable, 360
cans
adding transverse members, 406
creating, 401
deleting, 338
removing transverse members, 406
cardinal point, 156
positions, 156
cardinal points, 159
modifying, 298
categories, 533
CB
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
cell library file, 56
center of gravity
reports, 466
reports data format, 470
reports header format, 469
totals format, 475
central preference editor, 47
change section library, 55
CHECK, 391
CHECK CODE
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
check plot, 112, 121
chevron braces, 326
CIMsteel, 553
member criteria, 555
Clash, 547
clash envelope file, 135
clash files
updating, 38
class, 159
modify, 308
solid members, 170
class filter, 151
clearance
solid cutouts, 286
verify model, 142
client identification, 58
closing
Index
596 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
section library, 55
CMY
AISC-ASD, 363
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
CMZ
AISC-ASD, 363
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
coatings, 167, 311
code parameters, 362
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
custom, 184
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
preferences, 50
Tower2, 387
CODETOL, 391
columns
attributes, 154, 167
compute cutbacks, 413
copying, 317
cutback priority, 413
deleting, 338
extend to intersection, 335, 337
extending end, 320
fireproofing, 164
joining, 332
labeling supports, 358
locate, 481
mirroring, 324
mitered cutbacks, 418
modify arc, 334
modify attributes, 311
modify cardinal point, 298
modify class, 308
modify material, 306
modify material grade, 306
modify member end, 321
modify name, 297
modify orientation vector, 301
modify reflect, 300
modify rotation, 299
modify section, 295
modify type, 301
modifying fireproofing, 303
move, 319
multi-plane cutbacks, 419
offsets, 330, 331
orientation, 156
parameters, 159, 164, 167
placing, 268
placing by two points, 269
reviewing, 477
rotating, 322
splitting, 332
symbology, 177
tapered section, 295
uncut member, 422
user cutbacks, 416
COLUMNS, 374
columns,supports, 357
combining
load cases, 344
command line
steel detailing neutral file, 35
verify model, 37
command prompt key-ins, 29
Common Structural Database, 108
reading file, 110
comparator, 151
COMPK
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
compressing
frozen views, 28
model databases, 35, 140, 512
compression member, 360
compute cutbacks, 413
concentric arcs, 334
CONCNLD
Tower2, 387
config.dat, 512
confirm select set, 150
connectivity of members, 265
constraints
edit, 395
member, 393
new, 395
contour
fully encased, 164
top flange exposed, 164
coordinate system, 112, 121
copying
grids, 261
member, 317
models, 25
solid, 317
CP, 156, 159
creating, 121
cans, 401
check plot, 112
check plots, 121
drawing file, 21
drawing view, 237
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 597
drawings, 32
envelope files, 34
jackets, 407
load cases, 340
load combinations, 344
models, 16, 30
named group symbology, 216
projects, 13, 30
propagated file, 237
SmartPlant Review file, 34, 237
user section library, 33
user section table, 23
user sections, 488
view symbology, 205
views, 191
views symbology linear members, 197
cross sections
steel detailing, 493
CSD, 108, 110
custom code parameters, 184
customizing FrameWorks Plus, 511
cutbacks, 159, 412
computing, 413
deleting, 422
mitered, 418
multi-plane, 419
priority end 1, 413
priority end 2, 413
user, 416
cutouts
batch, 540
type, 286
data format
linear reports, 431
solids reports, 450
databases
compressing, 35, 140
dblline
as % length, 223
length, 223
position, 223
deactivating
views, 210
default member, 272
defaults
attributes, 167
autoname, 172
fireproofing, 164
import analytical deck, 129
levels, 174
member symbology, 177
parameters, 516
solid members, 170
defining
active plane by, 191
top of steel by, 191
view, 191
deleting
cans, 338
frozen view, 248
grid lines, 263
grids, 263
load, 354
members, 338
model view, 247
models, 27
rule based joints, 397
solids, 338
delta TOS format, 223
design, 362
code, 183
code parameters, 362
design parameters, 391
edit member constraints, 395
new member constraints, 395
software, 183
status, 167, 311
design parameters
CHECK, 391
CODETOL, 391
custom, 184
FRLY, 391
FRLZ, 391
LY, 391
LZ, 391
PF, 391
preferences, 51
SELECT, 391
TAKE, 391
TBLNAM, 391
DESTLDY, 374
DESTLDZ, 374
detaching a model, 46
DFF
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
DIABOLT, 387
dimetric, 191
display
along member, 235
dynamics, 181
display depth, 191
displaying
frozen views, 246
DJ1
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
DJ2
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
DMAX, 363
DMIN, 363
Index
598 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
doors
in solids, 284
double line representation
override location, 236
draw
gap, 397
profile, 397
drawing environment, 536
composition, 536
create, 536
delete, 536
drawing file
creating, 21
drawing trim line, 496
drawing view, 237
drawings
creating, 32
dropping
named group symbology, 222
views, 210
dynamics, 181
echo input data, 112, 121
edit
class, 308
material, 306
material grade grade, 306
member priority, 413
name, 297
orientation vector, 301
reflect, 300
rotation, 299
section, 295
type, 301
editing
attributes, 311
cardinal point, 298
fireproofing, 303
grid labels, 262
last placed, 273
loads, 350
view, 211
view symbology, 215
view symbology linear members, 214
element
locate, 481, 484
elevation
grid, 258
view, 191
elevation grids
preferences, 51
end connections, 167, 311
end releases
default, 164
modifying, 355
end section, 154
engineering firm name, 58
envelope builder, 547
envelope files
creating, 34
envelopes for interference checking, 135
environment variables, 512
error
messages, 565
error bell, 150
exit, 148
extend
members, 320
single member to intersection, 335
two members to intersection, 337
F1, 178
F2, 178
fabrication neutral file, 58
fabricator
name, 167, 311
note, 167, 311
Fc, 306
file
create view, 196
menu, 39
seed, 519
files
analysis, 112
attach model, 44
change cell library, 56
compressing database, 35, 140
detach model, 46
exit, 148
FrameWorks Plus Manager, 43
GTSTRUDL results, 119
importing analytical deck, 129
importing ModelDraft file, 133
Interactive Section Tables (IST), 57
open model, 41
preference editor, 47
reading CSD file, 110
reading LARSA results, 127
reading RAM results, 127
reading STAAD results, 125
return to Pipe Support Modeler, 43
SAP2000, 128
save settings, 147
section library, 55
steel detailing neutral file, 58, 104
steel detailing neutral file command line, 35
verify model, 142
writing CSD file, 108
writing GTSTRUDL input, 112
writing LARSA input, 127
writing RAM input, 127
writing STAAD input, 121
filter, 151
fireproofing
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 599
cutouts, 286
defaults, 164
deleting, 303
labels, 164, 303
length, 164
modifying, 303
thickness, 164
fitted view border widths, 191
flooded, 311
force units, 112, 121
format
data center of gravity reports, 470
data linear reports, 431
data solids reports, 450
header center of gravity reports, 469
header material, 429
header solids, 448
load reports, 462
releases reports, 463
support reports, 464
totals, 442, 456
totals center of gravity reports, 475
FPLs
running, 139
framewks.txt, 533
FrameWorks Environment, 535
FrameWorks Manager, 11
FrameWorks Plus
customizing, 511
exporting data, 553, 556
licensing, 522
translator setup, 552
troubleshooting, 561
what's new, 6
framing member, 360
framing members
placing, 271
freeze
view, 237
FRLEY, 374
FRLEZ, 374
FRLX
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
Tower2, 387
FRLY, 391
FRLZ, 391
frozen views, 189
compressing, 28
deleting, 248
displaying, 246
levels, 174
regenerate, 244
regenerating, 539
revision tracking, 189
updating, 242, 539
FSB, 370
FTS
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
Tower2, 387
Fu, 306
full member length, 164
FXMIN
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
Fy, 306
FYLD
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
Tower2, 387
FYMIN
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
FZMIN
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
GAGE, 387
gap
at centerline, 397
at hull, 397
overlap, 397
GAY
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
GAZ
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
GBY
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
GBZ
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
generate interference envelope, 135
global multiplier, 344
global origin shift, 533
grade, 159
Index
600 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
grade.dat, 306
grids, 252
autosnap, 182
copying, 261
deleting, 263
deleting grid lines, 263
editing grid labels, 262
elevation grid preferences, 51
label symbology, 256
levels, 174
line symbology, 257
placing elevation grids, 258
placing plan, 253
plan grid preferences, 52
group physical members, 112, 121
groups
create named groups, 308
GTSTRUDL
adding groups to input deck, 117
ASD9 code parameters, 370
BS5950 code parameters, 374
code parameters, 362
custom code parameters, 184
design parameters, 391
import deck, 129
LRFD1 code parameters, 379
member constraints, 393
NF83 code parameters, 383
read results, 119
Tower2 code parameters, 387
writing input, 112
GTSTRULD
mapping file, 499
header
analytic reports, 460
material reports, 429
material solids, 448
highlight element, 481
HOLE/ROW, 387
holes
deleting, 338
placing, 284
solid cutouts, 286
HOLESOUT, 387
horizontal braces
attributes, 154, 167
compute cutbacks, 413
copying, 317
cutback priority, 413
deleting, 338
extend to intersection, 335, 337
extending end, 320
fireproofing, 164
joining, 332
locate, 481
mirroring, 324
mitered cutbacks, 418
modify arc, 334
modify attributes, 311
modify cardinal point, 298
modify class, 308
modify material, 306
modify member end, 321
modify name, 297
modify orientation vector, 301
modify reflect, 300
modify rotation, 299
modify section, 295
modify type, 301
modifying fireproofing, 303
move, 319
multi-plane cutbacks, 419
offsets, 330, 331
orientation, 156
parameters, 159, 164, 167
placing, 270
reviewing, 477
rotating, 322
splitting, 332
symbology, 177
uncut member, 422
user cutbacks, 416
IFC, 135
importing
analytical deck, 129
horizontal as, 129
ModelDraft file, 133
structure, 557, 560
index
autoname, 172
Interactive Section Tables, 57
interference checking, 135, 547
invalid section members, 142
issue code, 58
jackets
creating, 407
join members, 332
key-in commands, 29
KL/R, 387
KX
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
KY
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
KZ
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 601
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
L1, 178
L2, 178
labeling
fireproofing, 164
loads, 355
releases, 356
supports, 358
labels
autoname, 172
editing grid labels, 262
grid label symbology, 256
load symbology, 178
SmartPlant Review, 545
LARSA, 127
LATTORBU, 374
LE, 374
LEGBOLTD, 387
length units, 112, 121
levels
frozen views, 174
grids, 174
libraries
change cell, 56
creating user sections, 488
reviewing sections, 486
section, 55
library
creating, 33
licensing
FrameWorks Plus, 522
PDS, 522
list view, 209
load cases
creating, 340
loading from ASCII file, 341
saving to ASCII file, 341
load combinations
creating, 344
loading from ASCII file, 341
saving to ASCII file, 341
load frame, 346
load preference sets, 516
loads
creating load case, 340
deleting, 354
editing, 350
labeling, 355
load combination, 344
load frame, 346
load types, 346
magnitude, 346
placing, 346
report format, 462
reports, 458
symbology, 178
locate element
by attributes, 481
by design code parameters, 484
log file
reviewing, 485
logfile
verify model, 142
logfiles
import analytical deck, 129
LRFD1
A/H, 379
CB, 379
CMY, 379
CMZ, 379
code parameters, 379
COMPK, 379
FRLX, 379
FTS, 379
FXMIN, 379
FYLD, 379
FYMIN, 379
FZMIN, 379
GAY, 379
GAZ, 379
GBY, 379
GBZ, 379
KX, 379
KY, 379
KZ, 379
LX, 379
MYMIN, 379
MZMIN, 379
REDE, 379
REDFTS, 379
REDFYLD, 379
SDSWAYY, 379
SDSWAYZ, 379
SLENCOMP, 379
SLENTEN, 379
UNITS, 379
UNLCFBF, 379
UNLCFTF, 379
LWARP, 383
LX
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
Tower2, 387
LY, 391
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
LZ, 391
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
Index
602 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
magnitude, 346
main, 250
MAIN, 363
manipulate, 314
move member, 319
split member, 332
mapping file
create, 499
match BOS, 331
match TOS, 331
material, 159
grade grade, 306
modify, 306
reports, 424
solid members, 170
solid reports, 445
Material Data Publisher, 549
material reports
preferences, 52, 53
MAX, 367
MAXNMBLT, 387
member connectivity, 265
member criteria, 103
CIMsteel exporter, 555
members
arc shaped, 274
attributes, 154
code parameters, 362
constraints, 393
copying, 317
cutback priority, 413
default, 272
design parameters, 391
editing constraints, 395
editing last placed, 273
editing loads, 350
end releases default, 164
extending, 320
fireproofing default, 164
importing, 557, 560
labeling releases, 356
labeling supports, 358
modifying releases, 355
modifying supports, 357
move, 319
nodes, 358
orientation, 156
override annotation, 235
override double line widget location, 236
parameters solid members, 170
placing beams, 267
placing columns, 268
placing columns by two points, 269
placing framing members, 271
placing horizontal brace, 270
placing loads, 346
placing slabs, 277
placing solids, 283
placing vertical braces, 269
placing walls, 280
reviewing, 477
specifications, 360
symbology, 177
uncut, 422
view symbology overrides, 223
messages, 565
MIN, 367
mirror member, 324
mitered cutbacks, 418
model
associativity, 314
seed files, 519
ModelDraft, 133
PMLs, 137
models
attaching, 44
compressing database, 35, 140
copying, 25
creating, 16, 30
deleting, 27
deleting views, 247
detaching, 46
exit, 148
import ModelDraft, 133
importing, 560
missing, 46
opening, 41
reading CSD file, 110
save settings, 147
troubleshooting, 561
type, 112
upgrading, 11, 43
verify, 142
verify command line, 37
view, 189
views, 191
write GTSTRUDL input, 112
writing CSD file, 108
writing STAAD input, 121
modify, 293
class, 308
cutback priority, 413
geometry, 292
material, 306
material grade grade, 306
member end, 321
mitered cutbacks, 418
multi-plane cutbacks, 419
name, 297
named groups, 308
orientation vector, 301
reflect, 300
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 603
rotation, 299
section, 295
thickness, 291
type, 301
uncut member, 422
user cutbacks, 416
modifying
attributes, 311
cardinal point, 298
compute cutbacks, 413
fireproofing, 303
named group symbology, 219
releases, 355
rule based joints, 397
supports, 357
view, 211
view symbology, 215
view symbology linear members, 214
moment vector length, 178
move
member, 319
solid, 319
moving
annotation, 235
double line widgets, 236
multi-plane cutbacks
deleting, 422
placing, 419
MXMIN, 383
my, 374
MYMIN
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
mz, 374
MZMIN
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
n, 374
name
modify, 297
named groups
create symbology, 216
creating, 308
defaults, 167, 170
drop symbology, 222
filter, 151
modify symbology, 219
names
autoname, 172
filter, 151
neutral file
member criteria, 103
name, 58
reading steel detailing, 104
reading steel detailing command line, 35
writing steel detailing, 58
NF83
AXEFF, 383
CB, 383
CMY, 383
CMZ, 383
code parameters, 383
COMPK, 383
FXMIN, 383
FYMIN, 383
FZMIN, 383
GAY, 383
GAZ, 383
GBY, 383
GBZ, 383
KY, 383
KZ, 383
LWARP, 383
MXMIN, 383
MYMIN, 383
MZMIN, 383
REDE, 383
SDSWAYY, 383
SDSWAYZ, 383
SECNDARY, 383
SFNORMAL, 383
SFSHEAR, 383
SLEND, 383
SU, 383
SY, 383
UNLCF, 383
WARP-END, 383
nodes
deleting, 358
placing, 358
non-AISC sections, 112
notching
solids, 284
NSF
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
NUMBOLTS, 387
offset, 223
angle, 223
direction, 223
offsets, 330, 331
angle, 231
offshore, 397
creating jackets, 407
opening
models, 41
section library, 55
views, 208
Index
604 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
orientation
members, 156
vector, 156, 301
orientation vector
default, 159
origin
read CSD file, 110
origin X, 129
origin Y, 129
origin Z, 129
OV, 156
overlapped members, 142
overrides
annotation location, 235
double line widget location, 236
linear, 223
member, 223
solid member symbology, 231
packet 00, 61, 74
packet 10, 62, 75
packet 20, 82
packet 22, 88
packet 30, 66
packet 40, 94
packet 50, 68, 95
packet 60, 70, 96
parameters
saving, 147
parametric modeling language, 137
partitions
attach model, 44
detach model, 46
PD Draw categories, 533
PD_Clash, 547
PD_Shell
incorporating FrameWorks Plus projects, 522
PDS
area volume graphics, 508
categories, 533
design volume, 533
drawing environment, 536
FrameWorks Environment, 535
global origin shift, 533
intergration, 521
licensing, 522
modeling, 536
reference model from, 501
reviewing attributes, 505
reviewing clashes, 503
window to named PDS item, 506
PF, 391
piece mark, 311
pipe insulation
cutouts, 286
Pipe Support Modeler, 43
pipes
cutout around, 286
multi-plane cutbacks, 419
PITCH, 387
place, 264
placing
arc members, 274
autosnap, 182
beams, 267
columns, 268
columns by two points, 269
cross section steel detailing, 493
default member, 272
elevation grids, 258
framing members, 271
holes, 284
horizontal brace, 270
loads, 346
plan grids, 253
section elevation steel detailing, 494
section plan steel detailing, 495
slabs, 277
solid cutouts, 286
solids, 276, 283
vertical braces, 269
walls, 280
plan grids, 253
preferences, 52
plan view, 191
plant design
licensing, 522
plastic, 306
PMLs, 137
position as % length, 223
pre-buy mark, 311
preference sets, 516
load, 516
preferences
analytical reports, 49
center of gravity reports, 50
code parameters, 50
design parameters, 51
edit, 47
elevation grid, 51
material report, 52
plan grid, 52
solid material reports, 53
views, 54
write analysis input, 54
preview
autoname, 172
printing
joint coordinates, 112, 121
member information, 112, 121
priority end 1, 159
priority end 2, 159
problem type, 121
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 605
PROFILE
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
project id, 58
projects
creating, 13, 30
creating in PD_Shell, 522
inserting into PD_Shell, 522
upgrading, 11, 38, 43
propagated files
creating, 237
PUNCH, 363
PUNCHHOL, 387
Py, 374
quit, 148
RAM, 127
RATIO
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
reading, 110
CSD file, 110
GTSTRUDL results, 119
LARSA results, 127
RAM results, 127
SAP2000, 128
STAAD results, 125
steel detailing neutral file, 104
steel detailing neutral file command line, 35
REDE
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
REDFTS
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
REDFYLD
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
REDPy
BS5950, 374
reference PDS model, 501
reflect, 156, 159
modify, 300
regenerate frozen view, 244, 539
releases, 159, 164
labeling, 356
modifying, 355
report format, 463
reports, 458
removing
loads, 354
reports
analytic, 458
analytic header, 460
center of gravity, 466
center of gravity data format, 470
center of gravity header format, 469
center of gravity preferences, 50
data format, 431, 470
data format solids, 450
header format, 469
loads, 462
material, 424, 429
material preferences, 52, 53
material solids, 448
releases, 463
solid material, 445
supports, 464
totals format, 442, 456, 475
RESTRAIN, 387
return to Pipe Support Modeler, 43
reviewing
elements, 477
log files, 485
members, 477
PDS attributes, 505
PDS clash, 503
section libraries, 486
revision code, 58
revision tracking, 189
RMS, 344
rotate member, 322
rotation, 156, 159
modify, 299
rule based joints
deleting, 397
modifying, 397
type 1, 397
type 2, 397
SAP2000, 128
save
preference set, 516
save as
preference set, 516
saving
FrameWorks Plus settings, 147
scaling attributes
loads, 178
SDSWAYY
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
SDSWAYZ
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
NF83, 383
SECNDARY, 383
section filter, 151
section libraries
troubleshooting, 561
Index
606 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
section library
creating, 33
sections
arbitrary, 488
change cell file, 56
creating user, 488
creating user section table, 23
IST, 57
library, 55, 486
mapping file, 499
modify, 295
scale, 223
seed files, 519
select, 154
SELECT, 391
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
select filter, 151
selection set
confirm, 150
selection sets
filter settings, 151
set tolerance to one UOR, 142
set view, 208
setback
as % length, 223
setback as Percent of length, 164
setback value end 1, 164
setback value end 2, 164
sets
confirm, 150
settings, 149, 518
autoname, 172
autosnap, 182
bell, 150
confirm select set, 150
defaults for linear members, 159, 167
defaults solid members, 170
dynamics, 181
levels, 174
load symbology, 178
member attributes, 154
member orientation, 156
member symbology, 177
modify view, 214, 215
saving, 147
select filter settings, 151
SFNORMAL, 383
SFSHEAR, 383
shear center
editing arbitrary section, 486
SHRAREAF, 374
slabs
copying, 317
cutouts, 286
deleting, 338
holes in, 284
importing, 557
modify class, 308
modify geometry, 292
modify material, 306
modify material grade, 306
modify name, 297
modify thickness, 291
move, 319
parameters, 170
placing, 277
reviewing, 477
SLENCOMP
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
Tower2, 387
SLEND, 383
SLENTEN
ASD9, 370
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
Tower2, 387
SmartCut, 419
SmartPlant
licensing manager, 522
SmartPlant 3D
exporting FrameWorks Plus data, 553, 556
translation, 551
translator setup, 552
SmartPlant Review, 237
creating file for, 34
SmartPlant Review categories, 533
SmartPlant Review labels, 545
snap
autosnap, 182
cursor size, 182
cursor type, 182
software, 183
solids
copying, 317
cutouts, 286, 540
deleting, 338
holes in, 284
mirroring, 324
modify class, 308
modify geometry, 292
modify material, 306
modify material grade, 306
modify name, 297
modify thickness, 291
move, 319
placing, 276
placing generic, 283
reports, 445
review, 477
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 607
symbology overrides, 231
troubleshooting, 561
split member, 332
SRSS, 344
SSY, 363
SSZ, 363
STAAD
AISC-ASD code parameters, 363
AISC-LRFD code parameters, 367
code parameters, 362
custom code parameters, 184
import deck, 129
mapping file, 499
reading results, 125
write input, 121
start section, 154
steel detailing, 492
drawing trim line, 496
graphic symbology, 497
place cross section, 493
placing section elevation, 494
placing section plan, 495
steel detailing neutral file
arc member packet, 70, 96
configuration file, 107
connection details packet, 94
format, 59
grid packet, 68, 95
hole element packet, 88
linear member packet, 62, 75
member criteria, 103
member loads packet, 66
packet 00, 61, 74
packet 10, 62, 75
packet 20, 82
packet 22, 88
packet 30, 66
packet 40, 94
packet 50, 68, 95
packet 60, 70, 96
plate element packet, 82
reading, 104
reading command line, 35
title packet, 61, 74
writing, 58
STIFF, 363
structure
importing, 557, 560
structure name, 58
SU, 383
subtype of a member, 167, 311
suffix
autoname, 172
supports
labeling, 358
modifying, 357
report format, 464
reports, 458
SY, 383
symbology
create view, 197, 205
grid labels, 256
grid line, 257
loads, 178
member overrides, 223
members, 177
named groups, 216, 219, 222
override annotation, 235
override double line widget location, 236
solid member overrides, 231
steel detailing, 497
TAKE, 391
tapered members, 295
placing, 154
volume calculations, 424
TBLNAM, 391
TENFACT, 387
tension member, 360
text
height, 223, 231
location, 223
offset, 223
override location, 235
position, 223
position x, 231
position y, 231
width, 223, 231
thickness
fireproofing, 164
thickness exaggeration, 223
third party software, 183
timber, 306
title, 112, 121
tolerance
autosnap, 182
one UOR, 142
verify model, 142
tool box
placing solids, 276
tools
analytical, 339
area volume graphics, 508
creating user section, 488
cutbacks, 412
design, 362
grids, 252
locate element, 481, 484
main, 250
modify, 293
PDS model, 501
placement, 264
review PDS attributes, 505
Index
608 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide
review PDS clash, 503
verify model, 142
view, 251
window to named PDS item, 506
torsional constant
editing arbitrary section's, 486
TOS, 191
totals
format center of gravity, 475
totals format
linear, 442
solids, 456
Tower2
ANETFACT, 387
BEARNGF, 387
BERSURF, 387
BOLTSHR, 387
BOLTTENS, 387
BOLTTYPE, 387
code parameters, 387
CONCNLD, 387
DIABOLT, 387
FRLX, 387
FTS, 387
FYLD, 387
GAGE, 387
HOLE/ROW, 387
HOLESOUT, 387
KL/R, 387
LEGBOLTD, 387
LX, 387
MAXNMBLT, 387
NUMBOLTS, 387
PITCH, 387
PUNCHHOL, 387
RESTRAIN, 387
SLENCOMP, 387
SLENTEN, 387
TENFACT, 387
TYPE, 387
TYPSHEAR, 387
UNITS, 387
W/TMAX, 387
TRACK
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
transverse members
adding to cans, 406
removing from cans, 406
troubleshooting, 561
models, 561
section libraries, 561
solids, 561
truss member, 360
type, 154
modify, 301
TYPE, 387
type filter, 151
TYPSHEAR, 387
uncut member, 422
UNF, 367
UNITS
BS5950, 374
LRFD1, 379
Tower2, 387
UNL
AISC-ASD, 363
AISC-LRFD, 367
UNLCF, 383
UNLCFBF
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
UNLCFTF
ASD9, 370
LRFD1, 379
UOR, 142
update
clash files, 38
update frozen view, 242, 539
upgrade, 11, 43
project, 11, 38, 43
use
load case color, 178
load case weight, 178
use cutback distances, 164
user attributes, 167, 311
user cutbacks, 416
user preference sets, 516
user section library, 55
creating, 33
utilities, 423
analytic reports, 458
area volume graphics, 508
center of gravity, 466
creating user sections, 488
locate element, 481, 484
reference PDS model, 501
reports, 424
review element, 477
review PDS attributes, 505
review PDS clash, 503
reviewing section library, 486
steel detailing, 492
steel detailing graphic symbology, 497
window to named PDS item, 506
variables
environment, 512
verify model, 37, 142
clearance, 142
command line, 37
logfile, 142
vertical axis
Index
FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide 609
import analytical deck, 129
vertical braces, 322
attributes, 154, 167
compute cutbacks, 413
copying, 317
cutback priority, 413
deleting, 338
extend to intersection, 335, 337
extending end, 320
fireproofing, 164
joining, 332
locate, 481
mirroring, 324
mitered cutbacks, 418
modify arc, 334
modify attributes, 311
modify cardinal point, 298
modify class, 308
modify material, 306
modify member end, 321
modify name, 297
modify orientation vector, 301
modify reflect, 300
modify rotation, 299
modify section, 295
modify type, 301
modifying fireproofing, 303
move, 319
multi-plane cutbacks, 419
offsets, 330, 331
orientation, 156
parameters, 159, 164, 167
placing, 269
reviewing, 477
rotating, 322
splitting, 332
symbology, 177
uncut member, 422
user cutbacks, 416
VHL categories, 533
views, 251
3D, 191
create symbology, 205
creating, 191
creating symbology linear members, 197
deleting frozen view, 248
deleting model views, 247
description, 191
display frozen view, 246
drawing, 237
dropping, 210
elevation, 191
File menu, 196
freeze, 237
frozen, 189
listing, 209
member symbology, 223
model, 189, 191
modify symbology, 215
modify symbology linear members, 214
modifying, 211
name, 191
north, 191
orientation, 191
override annotation location, 235
override double line widget location, 236
plan, 191
preferences, 54
regenerate frozen view, 244
save settings, 147
setting, 208
solid symbology overrides, 231
type, 191
update frozen view, 242
volume calculations, 424
W/TMAX, 387
walls
copying, 317
deleting, 338
holes in, 284
modify class, 308
modify material, 306
modify material grade, 306
modify name, 297
modify thickness, 291
move, 319
parameters, 170
placing, 280
reviewing, 477
warning bell, 150
WARP-END, 383
WELD, 363
what's new, 6
window to named PDS item, 506
windows
in solids, 284
WMIN, 363
work point offset, 326
write
analytical information, 112
GTSTRUDL input, 112
writing
analytical information, 121
CSD file, 108
groups to GTSTRUDL input deck, 117
LARSA input, 127
RAM input, 127
SAP2000, 128
STAAD input, 121
WSTR
AISC-ASD, 363
zero length members, 142
Index
610 FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

You might also like